Assembly Language Processor (ALP) Assembler Reference

Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation

About this Reference

The following notations are used in this reference:

KEYWORD	Commands and language keywords.
KEYWORD	The default value for a command or language keyword when multiple values are possible but none are actually specified.
Phrase	Typically indicates a hypertext link to a separate panel containing a description for that phrase.
Parameter	Parameters whose actual names or values are to be supplied by the programmer.
Definition	A term being defined for the first time, or special emphasis.
Subscript	Subscripted text.
Superscript	Superscripted text (other than ý).
<Name>	A text value represented by "Name" is to be substituted in place of <Name> typically at assembler run-time.

Assembly Language Processor (ALP) Overview

The Assembly Language Processor (ALP) is an assembler that runs under OS/2 Warp. ALP is a functional replacement for the Microsoft Macro Assembler (MASM) and accepts:

• The full syntax of the Intel 80X86 architecture
• The full syntax of the MASM 5.10 high-level directive language
• A subset of the MASM 6.00 high-level directive language

ALP generates standard Object Module Format (OMF) files that can be linked to produce DOS or OS/2 executables. It can also generate symbolic debugging information compatible with the IBM family of source code debuggers. A MASM 5.10-compatible command line utility (MASM2ALP) is also provided to enable use of ALP with little or no change to existing build environments.

ALP also offers a rich set of command line options, as well as a comprehensive listing output cabability that is highly configurable, allowing a visual perspective not possible with other assemblers.

Installation

The following components are part of the ALP package:

ALP

The assembler itself. These are the basic files that must be installed before the assembler can be used.

MASM2ALP

The MASM 5.10 Command Line Driver. The ALP component must be installed before the MASM2ALP utility can be utilized.

Installing ALP

ALP consists of two files:

alp.exe
alp.msg

You can rename the root portions of the two file names if desired. In most cases, it does not matter whether the file names are in upper- or lowercase because the default OS/2 file systems disregard case. It is possible, however, that the use of an OS/2 Installable File System (IFS) might require that file names be referenced exactly as they are named with respect to upper- and lowercase. If this is true, then the root portion of the alp.exe and alp.msg file names (see BaseEXE) must be spelled identically and the .msg extension on the messages file name must be specified in lowercase or the assembler will not be able to find the messages file at run time.

To install ALP on OS/2:

1. Copy alp.exe into a directory of your choice. If the assembler will be invoked from the command line (rather than by absolute reference from a makefile or command file), then the selected directory should be among those referenced by the PATH environment variable.
2. For best performance, the alp.msg file should be copied into the same directory used in step 1 or in a directory referenced by the <BaseEXE>_PATH environment variable. It is not necessary to set any additional environment variables if the first method is used.

   Alternatively, a directory referenced by the DPATH environment variable may also be used, but performance may be degraded during initialization, since the assembler must search all of the listed directories for the alp.msg file. See The ALP Messages File for more information.

3. Optionally, default values for command line options may be established. See <BaseEXE>_OPTIONS for more information.

Installing MASM2ALP

The MASM2ALP utility consists of a single file:

masm2alp.exe

To install MASM2ALP on OS/2:

1. Copy masmalp.exe into a directory of your choice. If the utility will be invoked from the command line (rather than by absolute reference from a makefile or command file), then the selected directory should be among those referenced by the PATH environment variable.

   It is recommended that both masm2alp.exe and alp.exe be installed in the same directory, especially in build environments where reliance on environment variables is discouraged. If masm2alp.exe is invoked by absolute path name (rather than via a PATH search), it will use that same path when it first attempts to execute alp.exe. This technique allows execution of alp.exe without requiring it to be referenced in the PATH. If the search fails, the path name prefix will be removed and MASM2ALP will rely on the operating system to locate alp.exe.

2. If you also use the Microsoft Macro Assembler, you must decide if MASM2ALP will replace MASM or co-exist with it. This usually means renaming the MASM executable (masm.exe) to something else, then renaming masm2alp.exe to masm.exe. Alternatively, you may choose to leave the names unchanged, taking manual steps in your makefiles or build scripts to insure that the correct executables are referenced from your build environment.
3. Optionally, default values for command line options may be established by defining the MASM environment variable. MASM2ALP interprets the contents of this environment variable before processing the command line. Any values set in this manner are translated and passed to alp.exe via the command line. The <BaseEXE>_OPTIONS environment variable used by alp.exe is not queried or modified by MASM2ALP.
4. If it becomes necessary to analyze a problem with MASM2ALP (such as failure to invoke alp.exe, or other unexpected behavior), defining the ALP_ECHO environment variable to any non-empty value will cause MASM2ALP to echo the generated command line to the standard output device.

Understanding ALP

This chapter describes:

• The ALP message file
• ALP internal variables

Though you do not need to understand this information to be able to use ALP, you may need this information for troubleshooting purposes.

The ALP Messages File

Nearly every message displayed by ALP at run time is stored in a separate message file. The exception to this rule are messages that are displayed if the message file cannot be opened: ALP ends if one of these messages is displayed.

When ALP starts, it determines the name of the message file by creating a name of the form <BaseEXE>.msg (see #BaseEXE). Once ALP knows the name of the message file, ALP searches the following directories in the following order for the file:

1. Current directory
2. The directory contained in the BasePATH internal variable
3. Each of the directories specified in the BaseEXE internal variable
4. Each of the directories specified in the PATH environment variable
5. Each of the directories specified in the DPATH environment variable

Internal Variables

ALP maintains a set of internal variables that it uses for various purposes. These variables reflect the ALP environment; programmers do not use these variables. Their values may be indirectly affected by the user of ALP, for instance, through the use of various command line options.

BaseEXE

When ALP is invoked, if the full path name of the ALP executable was provided by the operating system, then the "base" portion is isolated and used to construct the value of the BaseEXE internal variable. For instance, if the user invoked ALP and the name of the executable was made available as "C:\TOOLS\ALP.EXE", then the BaseEXE internal variable would contain the value "ALP". The value of BaseEXE is used to differentiate ALP-specific components in the environment (such as data files or environment variables) from those that are globally accessible to all programs. Even multiple versions of ALP can coexist without environmental "collisions"; simply by copying and renaming the ALP executable and its associated message file.

If the file name of the ALP executable is not available at run time, then the value of BaseEXE defaults to "ALP".

BasePATH

When ALP is invoked, if the full path name of the ALP executable was provided by the operating system, then the "path" portion is isolated and used to construct the value of the BasePATH internal variable. For instance, if the user invoked ALP and the name of the executable was made available as "C:\TOOLS\ALP.EXE", then the BasePATH internal variable would contain the value "C:\TOOLS\". The value of BasePATH can be used to locate ALP-specific components in the environment (such as the ALP messages file) without the need to store this information in an alternate environment variable such as DPATH. Check your operating system documentation to see if it feasible to use the BasePATH method of locating ALP components.

If the file name of the ALP executable is not available at run time, then the value of BasePATH is NULL.

IncDIR

This variable contains the empty string unless explicitly initialized with the Fdi parameterized command line option; it contains the cumulative value of all the specified include paths.

IncEXT

This variable contains the default include file name extension that is conditionally appended to unadorned file names generated by the INCLUDE preprocessor directive. The default value for IncEXT is ".inc"; unless altered by use of the Fei parameterized command line option.

LstDIR

This variable contains the empty string unless explicitly initialized with the Fdl parameterized command line option; it is only used if the value specified by the Fl command line option did not contain any path information.

LstEXT

This variable contains the default listing file name extension that is conditionally appended to the concatenated values of "LstDIR" and "LstNAME"; the assembler treats the resulting string as the fully qualified listing file name. The default value for LstEXT is ".lst"; unless altered by use of the Fel parameterized command line option.

LstNAME

This variable contains the same value as the contents of "SrcNAME", unless initialized with the Fl parameterized command line option.

MsgDIR

This variable contains the empty string unless explicitly initialized with the Fdm parameterized command line option; it is only used if the value specified by the Fm command line option did not contain any path information.

MsgEXT

This variable contains the default messages file name extension that is conditionally appended to the concatenated values of MsgDIR and MsgNAME; the assembler treats the resulting string as the fully qualified messages file name. The default value for MsgEXT is ".msg"; unless altered by use of the Fem parameterized command line option.

MsgNAME

This variable contains the same value as the contents of SrcNAME, unless initialized with the Fm parameterized command line option.

ObjDIR

This variable contains the empty string unless explicitly initialized with the Fdo parameterized command line option; it is only used if the value specified by the Fo command line option did not contain any path information.

ObjEXT

This variable contains the default object file name extension that is conditionally appended to the concatenated values of ObjDIR and ObjNAME; the assembler treats the resulting string as the fully qualified object file name. The default value for ObjEXT is ".obj"; unless altered by use of the Feo parameterized command line option.

ObjNAME

This variable contains the same value as the contents of SrcNAME, unless initialized with the Fo parameterized command line option.

SourceNAME

This variable contains the name of the top-level source file currently being processed by the assembler; its contents appear exactly as the user typed it on the command line. Other internal variables derive their contents from this value.

SrcDIR

This variable is derived from SourceNAME and reflects any drive or path information contained therein. For instance, if the value of SourceNAME is "D:\Source\Dump\DumpMain.asm", then the value of SrcDIR would be "D:\Source \Dump\". If no drive or path information was specified in the file name, then SrcDIR will contain the empty string.

SrcEXT

This variable contains the default source file name extension that is conditionally appended to the concatenated values of SrcDIR and SrcNAME; the assembler treats the resulting string as the fully qualified input file name. The default value for SrcEXT is ".asm"; unless altered by use of the Fes parameterized command line option.

SrcNAME

This variable contains the "root file name" portion of the source file name , which is extracted from the contents of the SourceNAME variable. For instance, if the value of SourceNAME is "D:\Source\Dump\DumpMain.asm", then the value of SrcNAME would be "DumpMain". SrcNAME should never contain the empty string unless the input file name was incorrectly specified; in which case the assembler will generate an error when it tries to access the file.

Using ALP

This chapter tells you how to:

1. Invoke and use ALP
2. Use environment variables to pass information to ALP

Invoking ALP

To invoke ALP from the command line, type:

alp

You can also invoke ALP by absolute reference from a makefile or command file; to do this, the directory should be among those referenced by the PATH environment variable.

Using Environment Variables

This section describes the environment variables that you can set and that are used by ALP.

<BaseEXE>_INCLUDE

When ALP processes an INCLUDE directive, ALP translates the value of the BaseEXE internal variable to uppercase and uses this value to construct the name of an ALP-specific environment variable having the form:

<BaseEXE>_INCLUDE

For example, If the value of BaseEXE is alp, then ALP constructs an environment variable called ALP_INCLUDE and tries to locate it in the environment. If found, its contents would be expected to contain a list of directories in a format identical to that of the standard INCLUDE environment variable.

<BaseEXE>_OPTIONS

ALP translates the value of the BaseEXE internal variable to uppercase and uses this value to construct the name of an ALP-specific environment variable having the form:

<BaseEXE>_OPTIONS

For example, if the value of BaseEXE is alp, then ALP constructs an environment variable called ALP_OPTIONS and tries to locate it in the environment. If found, its contents are logically prepended to the assembler command line.

You can use this variable to set alternate default values for assembler command line options. For maximum flexibility, it is recommended that this variable contain a reference to a command line response file using an @Filename directive, which allows the default command line options to be stored in a file rather than in the environment variable itself.

<BaseEXE>_PATH

Whenever ALP needs to search for one of its own component files (such as the messages file), the value of the BaseEXE internal variable is translated to uppercase and is used to construct the name of an ALP specific environment variable having the form "<BaseEXE>_PATH" For example, if the value of BaseEXE is "alp", then an environment variable called ALP_PATH would be constructed and an attempt would be made to locate it in the environment. If found, its contents would be expected to contain a list of directories in a format identical to that of the standard PATH environment variable. ALP then searches this list of paths when attempting to locate the component file.

DPATH

The DPATH environment variable may be utilized for the same purposes as the <BaseEXE>_PATH internal variable if so desired.

INCLUDE

The INCLUDE environment variable may be utilized for the same purposes as the <BaseEXE>_INCLUDE internal variable if so desired.

PATH

The PATH environment variable may be utilized for the same purposes as the <BaseEXE>_PATH internal variable if so desired.

Using the Command Line

This section describes command line parameter types, syntax, and options.

Command Line Parameter Types

Command line parameters are individual "words", or patterns of characters separated by white space. Each individual parameter is recognized by the command line lexical analyzer as having a certain "pattern", and is thus assigned a parameter type, as described in the following sections. Parameters should be separated by one or more blanks, tabs, or (when reading from a response file) new line characters, and double quotation marks may be used on the command line to remove the special meaning from the operating system metacharacters. Although the host operating system may support the enclosing of command line parameters within double quotes (";") (known as "quoting"), the ALP command line parser also performs quote interpretation. This is necessary to properly interpret quoted parameters within @Filename response files, for which there is no built-in support provided by the default operating system command shell.

Parameter types are determined by looking at the first character of each individual "word". Options begin with a plus (+) or minus (-), and file names begin with any other legal file name character (as dictated by the operating system). A special case is a word beginning with the at sign (@) character, which signifies the beginning of the @Filename (read from a response file) directive.

Options

Options appear on the command line as mnemonic identifiers prefixed by either of the plus (+) or minus (-) characters, and must be separated from other command line parameters by at least one blank character. Case is not significant in option identifiers.

A single option may be specified more than once on the command line within a given scope; the last occurrence overrides all previous definitions within that scope unless the effect of the option is to collect information in a cumulative fashion. Options are not cumulative unless documented otherwise on an individual basis.

There are two forms of options:

• Switch Option
• Parameterized Option

Some options may actually combine both functions of the switched and parameterized variations; for instance, the +Fl switch option "turns on" the creation of a listing file, while a parameterized option of the same name (for example, +Fl:george.lst) has the same effect, but also treats the argument field as the name of the listing file to create.

Switch Option

Switch Options represent a Boolean value (on or off, yes or no, true or false) for the identifier specified in the option. The plus (+) or minus (-) character introducing the option specifies the value of the switch; "+" is equivalent to on, yes, or true; and "-" is equivalent to off, no, or false.

Because plus (+) is not a character traditionally used to introduce a command line option, ALP provides an alternate method of specifying a switch option that resembles a more commonly used syntax. The character that affects the actual value of the "switch" (that is, the (+) or (-) character) may also be specified directly after the option identifier; in this case the option must still be introduced by either the (+) or (-) character, but the trailing "switch value" takes precedence.

The following are examples of Switch Options:

+ML
-ml+
+Fl
-Fl-

Parameterized Option

Parameterized Options are introduced in the same manner as switch options, but are instead followed by a colon (:) or an equals sign (=) (with no intervening blank space) to indicate that the option takes one or more arguments. The format of the argument field is option specific.

Using the plus (+) character versus the minus (-) character to introduce a parameterized option may or may not have an effect upon how the option is interpreted. Refer to the description of each individual option for details.

The following are examples of Parameterized Options:

-Fl=Zappa.lst
-Sv:M510
+fo="\obj\dd\driver.obj"
-m:127-

File Names

A file name may be used as an argument to certain command line options or as a stand-alone command line parameter. The file name character set and naming conventions are operating system dependent, and are treated as transparently as possible by ALP. The use of operating system metacharacters in file names should be avoided, and file names should not begin with the plus (+) or minus (-) characters.

Any file name may be "qualified" with drive or path information as appropriate for the host operating system. ALP accepts both the forward slash (/) and the backward slash (\) as legal path name characters, as well as the colon (:) character. Care must be exercised however, because the underlying operating system may reject the usage of some of these characters.

Command Line Syntax

                                                 /----------------------\
                                                 |                      |
>>--ALP-------------------------------------------FileName File Options----><
         \-Global Options-/  \-Group Options-/                               

The assembler accepts one or more file names for processing. Each file name is taken to be the name of a source file to assemble; file names are not interpreted according to their file "type" or extension to determine if they are valid input files.

The OS/2 version of the assembler is enabled to accept wild-card characters (? and *) in file names, which emulates the UNIX ability to expand a single file name specification into a list of all files that match the wild -card pattern. The ? character matches any single file name character in the given position, and the * character matches any number of file name characters.

Global Options

Command line options fall into this category only if they apply to the assembler executable itself and not to any specified files. Options that request the display of assembler help messages fall into this category, as well as the option that controls display of the assembler banner.

Group Options

Command line options fall into this category if the settings they control can be applied to a list of multiple files within a given scope without causing ambiguities. Group options are useful for such operations as:

• Requesting a listing file be generated for all files within the group
• Specifying the target directory for all generated object files
• Controlling the display of warning and informational messages for all files within the group

Within a given scope (see #Command Line Scope Operator ()) the command line parser assigns the group classification to each option until the first source file name is encountered; group option settings are applied to all file names that follow within a given scope. After encountering the first source file name, options are assigned the file classification.

File Options

All options appearing to the right of a file name within a given scope (see #Command Line Scope Operator ()) are applied to that file only. File options take precedence over any settings inherited from previously encountered group options.

It should be noted that file names specified using wild-card characters and used in combination with file options may not yield the expected result; the file options will be applied only to the last file in the resulting wild-card expansion file name list.

Command Line Scope Operator ()

At any point on the command line, a new scope may be opened using the scope operator (). The scope operator effectively creates a new logical command line whose contents are enclosed in parentheses and is parsed in isolation from other scopes. Any group options in effect at the time the new scope is opened are inherited and applied to all files named within.

Command Line Options

This section describes all the ALP command line options. For each option, a table appears in the description section with the following format:

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
...	...	...	...	...

The values appearing in this table are defined as follows:

Type : This field specifies the type of the option described in that row, and can be one of:

S - #Switch Option

P - #Parameterized Option

Global Specifies whether or not the option is valid only in a global context; that is, in the outermost scope on the command line. These options typically have meaning only for the assembler executable itself, and not for any files to be processed.

Group Specifies whether or not the option is valid in a group context; that is, if the option may be applied to multiple files within a given scope without causing ambiguities.

File Specifies whether or not the option is valid only in a file context; that is, if the option may only be applied to a single file within a given scope.

Default This field shows the default value for the option being described.

Base Options

This section describes the standalone base options that are defined by a single unique mnemonic identifier character.

D - Define Text Macro

This option allows the definition of a symbolic identifier that becomes visible during the assembly of the input file. A single parameter must be specified using one of the following forms:

Name[=Value]

Name[:Value]

The Name entry must have the same lexical syntax as a normal assembler Identifier. The Nameentry is converted to a Text-EquateName before assembly begins. If no explicit value is specified for the name, then it is assigned the empty string. This is equivalent to specifying the following assembler statement:

Name   EQU   < >

If an explicit value is to be assigned, the Name entry must be immediately followed by a colon (:) or equals sign (=) delimiter with no intervening spaces. Blank characters may be specified between the delimiter and the value field. The Valuefield may contain any text data, but it must be enclosed in double quotes (";") if it contains blanks, tabs, or operating system metacharacters (such as & or |).

Note: If quotes are used to specify a value containing embedded blanks or tabs, then at least one blank is required between the delimiter (colon or equals sign) and the opening quote of the value field. For example:

-D:NAME= "This string will be correctly interpreted"
-D:NAME="This will not; no blank after the equals sign"

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	(no default value)

I - Specify Include File Search Path

See Fdi - Specify Include File Search Path.

File Control Options

All options that perform file or file name manipulation are described in this section. File Control Options begin with the letter "F", and the last letter of the option identifier specifies the type of file or file name to which the option applies as follows:

i Include File

l Listing File

m Messages File

o Object File

s Source File

Fl - Produce Listing File

Turn this flag on to produce an assembler listing file. Using the parameterized version of the option allows the listing file to be explicitly named.

Only this option controls the actual creation of a listing file; Listing Control Options have no effect if this option has not been turned on.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fl (no listing file is generated)
P	No	No	Yes	-Fl:<LstDIR><LstNAME>[<LstEXT>] (A listing file name is generated using the values of the referenced internal variables. The LstEXT extension is appended if this feature is turned on.

Fm - Produce Messages File

Turn this flag on to produce a messages file. Using the parameterized version of the option allows the messages file to be explicitly named.

Within the context of a given assembly, by default all error, warning, and informational messages are printed to the standard output device. Use of the Fm option allows these messages to be redirected to a separate file; this can be useful when dissecting the output from multiple assemblies. Messages with a severity greater than Error are printed to the standard error device, and do not appear in the messages file.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fm (no messages file is generated; all messages are printed on the standard output)
P	No	No	Yes	-Fm:<MsgDIR><MsgNAME>[<MsgEXT>] (A messages file name is generated using the values of the referenced internal variables. The MsgEXT extension is appended if this feature is turned on.

Fo - Produce Object File

An object file name is generated using the values of the referenced internal variables. The #ObjEXT extension is appended if this feature is turned on.

By default, this switch is turned on and thus an object file is produced (provided the assembly completes without errors); this switch may be turned off if an object file is not desired. Using the parameterized version of the option allows the object file to be explicitly named.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Fo (an object file is generated)
P	No	No	Yes	-Fo:<ObjDIR><ObjNAME>[<ObjEXT>]

Fdi - Specify Include File Search Path

This option accepts a path (or list of paths separated by semicolons) that are searched by the assembler while attempting to locate an INCLUDE file. When multiple occurrences of this option are specified within a given scope, the effect is cumulative rather than destructive; successive occurrences add to the existing list rather than overwriting previous definitions. The more conventional spelling "I" can be used as an alias for the Fdi option.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fdi:<IncDIR>

Fdl - Directory to Store Listing File (LstDIR)

This option affects the LstDIR variable and allows the user to specify a target directory where the listing file(s) will be stored; by default this variable is empty and listing file(s) are created in the current working directory. This value is ignored if the Fl option was used to explicitly name the listing file, and the name included absolute or relative path information.

If the value specified in this option is anything other than an unadorned drive letter (for example, D:) or a string ending with a path separator character (/ or \), then the path separator character appropriate for the underlying operating system is appended to the string.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fdl:<LstDIR>

Fdm - Directory to Store Messages File (MsgDIR)

This option affects the #MsgDIR variable and allows the user to specify a target directory where the messages file(s) will be stored; by default this variable is empty and messages file(s) are created in the current working directory. This value is ignored if the Fm option was used to explicitly name the message file, and the name included absolute or relative path information.

If the value specified in this option is anything other than an unadorned drive letter (for example, D:) or a string ending with a path separator character (/or \), then the path separator character appropriate for the underlying operating system is appended to the string.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fdm:<MsgDIR>

Fdo - Directory to Store Object File (ObjDIR)

This option affects the #ObjDIR variable and allows the user to specify a target directory where the object file(s) will be stored; by default this variable is empty and object file(s) are created in the current working directory. This value is ignored if the Fo option was used to explicitly name the object file, and the name included absolute or relative path information.

If the value specified in this option is anything other than an unadorned drive letter (for example, D:) or a string ending with a path separator character (/or \), then the path separator character appropriate for the underlying operating system is appended to the string.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fdo:<ObjDIR>

Fds - Directory to Locate Source File (SrcDIR)

This option affects the #SrcDIR variable and allows the user to specify a source directory from which source file(s) will be loaded; by default this variable is empty and source file(s) are searched for in the current working directory. This value is ignored if the source file name included absolute or relative path information.

If the value specified in this option is anything other than an unadorned drive letter (for example, D:) or a string ending with a path separator character (/or \), then the path separator character appropriate for the underlying operating system is appended to the string.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fds:<SrcDIR>

Fei - Control Include File Extension (IncEXT)

This option determines whether or not the value of the #IncEXT variable is appended to file names generated by the preprocessor when processing the INCLUDE directive. The parameterized version of this option affects the actual value of the #IncEXT variable.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fei (the value of IncEXT is not appended to include file names)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Fei:<IncEXT>

Fel - Control Listing File Extension (LstEXT)

This option determines whether or not the value of the #LstEXT variable is appended to listing file names. The parameterized version of this option affects the actual value of the LstEXT variable.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Fel (the value of LstEXT is appended to listing file names)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Fel:<LstEXT>

Fem - Control Messages File Extension (MsgEXT)

This option determines whether or not the value of the #MsgEXT variable is appended to messages file names. The parameterized version of this option affects the actual value of the MsgEXT variable.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Fem (the value of MsgEXT is appended to messages file names)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Fem:<MsgEXT>

Feo - Control Object File Extension (ObjEXT)

This option determines whether or not the value of the #ObjEXT variable is appended to object file names. The parameterized version of this option affects the actual value of the ObjEXT variable.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Feo (the value of ObjEXT is appended to object file names)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Feo:<ObjEXT>

Fes - Control Source File Extension (SrcEXT)

This option determines whether or not the value of the #SrcEXT variable is appended to source file names. The parameterized version of this option affects the actual value of the SrcEXT variable.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Fes (the value of SrcEXT is appended to source file names)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Fes:<SrcEXT>

Listing Control Options

This section describes all options related to controlling the content of the assembler listing file. All listing control options begin with the letter "L".

Options that manipulate the characteristics of individual listing file columns reference a particular column by having a single character mnemonic identifier as part of the option identifier. Listing column mnemonics are as follows:

C Conditional assembly nesting level

is a numeric value that appears during processing of a conditional assembly directive and is incremented for each level of nesting that occurs.

D Macro definition line number

tracks line numbers for each new MACRO definition introduced into the assembly.

F True or false conditional flag

appears during processing of a conditional assembly directive and is either a plus (+) character to denote that the conditional expression was TRUE and tokens appearing within the block are being interpreted, or a minus (-) character to denote that the conditional expression was FALSE and tokens appearing within the block are being ignored.

G Generated machine code data

column shows the hexadecimal values for data generated by machine instructions or data allocation statements.

I Include file nesting level

is a numeric value that appears during processing of INCLUDE files and is incremented for each level of nesting that occurs.

L Macro expansion indentation level

is a text field whose width reflects the current nesting level of expanded macros, and whose value contains a simulated "arrow"; using the "--->" characters.

M Macro expansion nesting level

is a numeric value that appears during macro expansions and is incremented for each level of nesting that occurs.

O Location counter offset value

is a numeric value displayed in hexadecimal notation and indicates the current offset of the location counter within the current segment or structure.

S Source line data

column contains the text data of the current line in the input source file.

X Cumulative listing line number

is incremented for every new line that appears in the listing file.

Y Individual source file line number

tracks line numbers for the top-level source file and for each separate INCLUDE file.

Z Macro expansion line number

tracks the current line number for each MACRO expanded during the assembly.

Lc* - Control Display of Individual Columns

This family of options controls whether or not an individual column physically appears in the listing file. The display of each column may be controlled with a switch option by using the standard ON (+) or OFF (-) switch values (see #Switch Option) or by using the parameterized option syntax (see #Parameterized Option) with one of the following keyword values in the argument field:

B

Abbreviation for BLANK.

BLANK

The column will appear as a place-holder in the listing file, but the column data will not be displayed.

OFF

The column will not be displayed.

ON

The column will be displayed.

Z

Abbreviation for ZBLANK.

ZBLANK

The column data will only display if its value is nonzero (valid only for numeric fields).

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcX (display Cumulative Listing Line Number)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcY (display Individual Source File Line Number)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcZ:Z (display Macro Expansion Line Number if not zero)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcD:Z (display Macro Definition Line Number if not zero)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcL (display Macro Expansion Indentation Level)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcM:Z (display Macro Expansion Nesting Level if not zero)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcI:Z (display Include File Nesting Level if not zero)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcC (display Conditional Assembly Nesting Level)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcF (display True or False Conditional Flag)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcO (display Location Counter Offset Value)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcG (display Generated Machine Code Data)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcS (display Source Line Data)

Lcm* - Specify Left Margin for Individual Columns

This family of options specifies the left margin value for each individual column, which determines the number of blank spaces that will appear to the left of the column data.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmX:0 (Cumulative Listing Line Number)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmY:1 (Individual Source File Line Number)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmZ:1 (Macro Expansion Line Number)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmD:1 (Macro Definition Line Number)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmL:0 (Macro Expansion Indentation Level)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmM:1 (Macro Expansion Nesting Level)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmI:1 (Include File Nesting Level)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmC:1 (Conditional Assembly Nesting Level)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmF:1 (True or False Conditional Flag)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmO:2 (Location Counter Offset Value)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmG:2 (Generated Machine Code Data)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmS:2 (Source Line Data)

Lct* - Specify Truncation of Individual Columns

This family of options specifies whether or not the data contained within an individual column will be truncated if it exceeds the column width, or whether it will overflow onto additional lines until the entire column contents have been printed.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcmX (truncate Cumulative Listing Line Number)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcmY (truncate Individual Source File Line Number)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcmZ (truncate Macro Expansion Line Number)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmD (do not truncate Macro Definition Line Number)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmL (do not truncate Macro Expansion Indentation Level)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcmM (truncate Macro Expansion Nesting Level)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcmC (truncate Conditional Assembly Nesting Level)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmO (do not truncate Location Counter Offset Value)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-LcmG (do not truncate Generated Machine Code Data)
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+LcmS (truncate Source Line Data)

Lcw* - Specify Width of Individual Columns

This family of options specifies the width of each individual listing column in single character positions. Note that the width of column L (Macro Expansion Indentation Level) will vary according to the macro expansion nesting level (which is also displayed as a numeric value in column M) if the nesting level value exceeds the column width. This behavior may be avoided by setting the width of column L such that its width never exceeds the value of column M, or by turning off the display of column L altogether.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes
P	Yes	Yes	Yes

Lc - Control display of false Conditional blocks

This switch determines whether or not sections of source code appear in the listing file when they are rendered inactive by a false conditional expression. By default, the assembler does not show source code in the listing file if it is skipped during conditional processing; turn this switch on if listing of all source code is desired.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lc (do not list false conditional blocks)

Ld - Control Display of Listing Directives

This switch controls whether or not assembler listing directives appear in the listing output. Listing directives are shown by default; turn this switch off to hide them.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Lc (show all listing directives)

Le - Control Display of Error/Warning/Info Messages

By default, any time the assembler prints an Error, Warning, or Info message during the assembly, the message also appears in the listing file following the source line to which it refers. Turn this switch off if such messages are not desired in the listing output.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Le (show messages in listing file)

Lf - Control Use of FormFeed Characters

When the assembler is generating formatted listing output and it needs to advance to the next page, it inserts the ASCII FormFeed character (0x0C) into the listing output stream. If this causes problems, turning this switch off will instead cause the assembler to generate the appropriate number of newline character sequences to perform the page eject operation.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Lf (the FormFeed character is used)

Li - Control Display of INCLUDE Files

When the assembler processes source code stored in an INCLUDE file, by default the contents of the file are expanded in the listing output; depending on the types of files that are included, this behavior can result in large volumes of listing output. Turn this switch off if the expansion is not desired.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Li (INCLUDE files are expanded in listing output)

Llp - Specify Length of Page

To correctly format the listing file for subsequent hardcopy output, the assembler must know how many physical lines of output will fit vertically on the printed page. This setting is especially important if the use of FormFeed characters has been turned off with the Lf option. The default value for this option is 66 lines per page.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Llp:66 (the default page length is 66 lines)

Related Information:

#Lf - Control Use of FormFeed Characters

#Lwp - Specify Width of Page

Lm - Control Display of Macro Expansions

This switch controls whether or not the text body of an expanded macro appears in the listing output. While turning this switch on can be very useful when debugging macros, it can also result in large volumes of listing output if many macros are utilized. By default, macro expansions do not appear in the listing output; turn this switch on if this behavior is desired.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lm (macro expansions do not appear in listing output)

Lmb - Specify Bottom Margin

This option determines how many blank lines will appear at the bottom of the page in the listing output; by default this value is 4. The correct behavior of this option depends on the setting of the Llp and Lf options, and that they match the settings of the physical output device. If there are problems with these settings, then the actual bottom margin may not appear to correctly reflect the value of this option.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lmb:4 (4 blank lines at bottom of page)

Related Information:

#Lf - Control Use of FormFeed Characters

#Llp - Specify Length of Page

#Lmb - Specify Middle Margin after Title

#Lmt - Specify Top Margin before Title

Lml - Specify Left Margin

This option specifies the number of blank characters that are printed to the left of every line of listing output. The default value for this option is 4.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lml:4 (left margin is 4 blank characters wide)

Related Information:

#Lmr - Specify Right Margin

#Lwp - Specify Width of Page

#Lcm* - Specify Left Margin for Individual Columns

Lmb - Specify Middle Margin after Title

This option specifies the number of blank lines that separate the assembler heading, the title and subtitle (if there are any), from both the column ruler (if there is one) and the body of the generated listing text. The default value for this option is 2 blank lines.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lmm:2 (2 blank lines after title and subtitle, and before ruler line)

Related Information:

#Llp - Specify Length of Page

#Lmb - Specify Bottom Margin

#Lmt - Specify Top Margin before Title

#Lr - Control Display of Column Ruler

Lmr - Specify Right Margin

This option specifies the number of blank characters that are reserved (but not actually printed) to the right of every line of listing output. The default value for this option is 4.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lmr:4 (right margin is 4 blank characters wide)

Related Information:

#Lml - Specify Left Margin

#Lwp - Specify Width of Page

#Lcm* - Specify Left Margin for Individual Columns

Lmt - Specify Top Margin before Title

This option specifies the number of blank lines that appear at the top of the page before any other listing output is generated. The default value for this option is 2 blank lines.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lmt:2 (2 blank lines at the top of the page)

Related Information:

#Llp - Specify Length of Page

#Lmb - Specify Bottom Margin

#Lmb - Specify Middle Margin after Title

Lp - Generate Listing on Specific Pass

This option allows the user to control whether or not listing information is generated on a specific pass of the assembler. By default, the assembler only generates listing information on pass two. If the user is encountering "phase errors" or other unusual situations, it may be helpful to request a listing for the first pass as well.

The arguments to this option are either a series of numeric digits (without intervening white space) or the ALL or NONE keywords. In the default assembler configuration, use of the -Lp:ALL form is equivalent to specifying -Lp:12, because the assembler makes two passes through the source file by default. The NONE keyword prevents generation of any pass-related information in the listing file; however, symbol table information will still appear if selected.

When using numeric digits to specify the desired pass numbers, a listing will only be generated for the numbers given in the argument field; the default setting (or settings given by previous occurrences of the option) will be discarded.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lp:2 (listing on pass 2 only)

Lr - Control Display of Column Ruler

This switch to determines whether or not the column ruler appears at the top of each page in the listing output. This ruler is simply a line of information containing a string of alphabetic characters corresponding to each vertical column of listing information. The ruler reflects the current width, margins, and placement of the various listing columns at the time each page is printed, and helps the user to determine which column they are looking at. Turn this switch off if display of the column ruler is not desired.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Lr (show the column ruler in listing output)

Ls - Control Display of Symbol Table

This switch determines whether or not a summary of the symbol table contents is included at the end of the listing file. The default behavior is to omit the symbol table summary; turn this switch on to include it.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Ls (do not include symbol table in listing output)

Lt1 - Specify Title

This option allows the user to specify the text of a default title to be printed at the top of each listing page; there is no default title. Title information must be enclosed in double quotes "" if it contains white space characters.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lt1:<empty> (no default title information)

Lt2 - Specify Subtitle

This option allows the user to specify the text of a default subtitle to be printed at the top of each listing page; there is no default subtitle. Subtitle information must be enclosed in double quotes "" if it contains white space characters.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lt2:<empty> (no default subtitle information)

Lwp - Specify Width of Page

To correctly format the listing file for subsequent hardcopy output, the assembler must know how many physical characters of output will fit horizontally on the printed page. The default value for this option is 132 character positions.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lwp:132 (the default page width is 132 character positions)

Related Information: #Lcm* - Specify Left Margin for Individual Columns #Lcw* - Specify Width of Individual Columns

Lwt - Specify Tab Expansion Width

This option specifies the width of a tab character in blank spaces. Tab characters appearing in the source file are always expanded into blank spaces when output to the listing file; the default behavior is to expand tab characters to every eighth character position.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Lwt:8 (tab characters are 8 character positions wide)

Message Control Options

This section describes all options related to the output and control of assembler messages. All Message Control Options begin with the letter "M".

M - Control Individual Messages or Groups

This option controls the types of messages that are displayed by manipulating message group identifier flags or individual message numbers. Only messages with a severity of Warning or Info are controllable with this option. Messages with a severity of Error, System, Fatal, Internal, or Usage cannot be suppressed.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-M:W+ (all warning messages are enabled)

All assembler messages are assigned a unique message number, and Warning or Info messages may belong to one or more message groups. The message group identifier flags are defined as follows:

ALL All warning and informational messages

BLK Messages regarding block structure violations

COD Messages regarding code generation

FIL File manipulation messages

I All informational messages

PP Preprocessor messages

SRC Source file lexical analyzer messages

STA Assembly statistics

W All warning messages

Any sequence of message groups or message numbers may be specified in the argument field of the M option; each argument must be followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) character to turn the value on or off, and no intervening white space characters may appear between arguments.

See #Assembler Messages for more information on message number values and the messages groups to which they belong.

Mb - Control Printing of the Assembler Banner

This switch controls whether or not the assembler start-up banner is printed. This switch is on by default; turn it off to suppress display of the banner.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	No	No	+Mb (Print the assembler banner)

Me - Set Number of Errors Before Assembler Aborts

This option specifies the maximum number of errors that the assembler will tolerate before ending the assembly. The default value is 50.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Me:50 (abort the assembly after 50 errors are encountered)

Mwe - Treat Warnings as Errors

This switch tells the assembler that any Warning messages are to be treated as though they were errors; this causes the assembler to end with a non-zero exit code, and helps prevent any warning conditions from "passing by" unnoticed.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Mwe (warnings are not considered to be errors)

Object Control Options

This section describes all options related to the output and control of object file information. All Object Control Options begin with the letter "O".

Od - Line Number and Symbolic Debug Information in Object File

This switch controls whether or not all forms of debug information are included in the object file, and is a shorthand method of specifying the options to control line numbering and symbolic debug information.

The parameterized version of this option may be used to specify the format of the debugging information. The setting of this value may be necessary depending on which linker is used to link the object file output, or on the debugger used to debug the executable. The argument must be one of the following keywords:

IBM32 Generate debugging information in the 32-bit IBM (HLL) format. Executable code that is to be debugged with the IBM family of debuggers should use this setting. This is the default value if no parameter is specified.

MS16 Generate debugging information in the 16-bit Microsoft (CodeView) format. You may need to use this setting if the object file output will be processed by a 16-bit linker, or if non-IBM debuggers will be utilized on the executable.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	(see default values for Ods and Odl)
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Od:IBM32 (use the IBM debug format)

Related Information:

#Odl - Line Numbering Information in Object File

#Ods - Symbolic Debug Information in Object File

Odl - Line Numbering Information in Object File

This switch controls whether or not line numbering debug information is included in the object file, thus allowing the assembler source file to be viewed from within a source-level debugger.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Odl (line numbering debug information is not included in object file)

Ods - Symbolic Debug Information in Object File

This switch controls whether or not symbolic debug information is included in the object file, thus allowing variables, labels, and expressions appearing in the assembler source file to be viewed from within a source-level debugger.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Ods (symbolic debug information is not included in object file)

Oug - Convert Global Identifiers to Uppercase

This switch controls whether external identifiers (declared with the EXTERN directive) and public identifiers (declared with the PUBLIC directive) are converted to uppercase before writing them to the object file. By default, no conversion is performed and the symbols are written to the object file exactly as they were entered into the symbol table during assembly.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Oug (do not convert global identifiers to uppercase in object file)

Related Information:

#Scs - Control Case Sensitivity for Symbol Names

#Ous - Convert Group and Segment Names to Uppercase

Ous - Convert Group and Segment Names to Uppercase

This switch controls whether external group names (declared with the GROUP directive) and segment names (declared with the SEGMENT directive) are converted to uppercase before writing them to the object file. By default, no conversion is performed and the names are written to the object file exactly as they were entered into the symbol table during assembly.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Ous (do not convert group or segment names to uppercase in object file)

Related Information:

#Scs - Control Case Sensitivity for Symbol Names

#Oug - Convert Global Identifiers to Uppercase

Source Control Options

All options related to parsing or processing the input source stream are described in this section. All Source Control Options begin with the letter "S".

Sc - Control Case Sensitivity for All Identifiers

This switch controls whether or not all identifiers are case sensitive, and is a shorthand method of specifying the options for user identifiers and keywords.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	(see default values for Sck and Scs)

Related Information:

#Sck - Control Case Sensitivity for Keywords

#Scs - Control Case Sensitivity for Symbol Names

Sck - Control Case Sensitivity for Keywords

This switch controls whether or not language keywords are case sensitive. By default, this flag is turned off; thus the spellings SEGMENT, Segment, and segment all refer to the same keyword. Turning this switch on would render the three spellings separate and distinct, and only the uppercase variant would be recognized as a keyword.

This option has no effect on user identifiers (see #Scs - Control Case Sensitivity for Symbol Names) or processor mnemonics.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Sck (All language keywords are case insensitive)

Scs - Control Case Sensitivity for Symbol Names

This switch controls whether or not user identifiers are case sensitive. By default, this flag is turned on; thus the identifiers GEORGE, George, and george are separate and distinct. Turning this switch off would cause the three spellings to refer to the same identifier.

If a case-insensitive assembly is being performed (-Scs), the actual spelling of the identifier is not altered (e.g., converted to uppercase) when it is entered into the symbol table. The actual symbol definition controls the spelling of the identifier regardless of whether or not a case-insensitive assembly was performed. The only exception to this rule is when processing a PUBLIC directive under MASM 5.10 emulation; the identifier spelling, which appears in the PUBLIC directive is honored over the one appearing in the actual identifier definition.

This option has no effect on language keywords (see #Sck - Control Case Sensitivity for Keywords), processor mnemonics, or register names.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Scs (All user identifiers are case sensitive)

Related Information:

#Oug - Convert Global Identifiers to Uppercase

#Ous - Convert Group and Segment Names to Uppercase

Sk - Control Use of Reserved Words as Labels

This switch controls whether or not certain assembler keywords (reserved words) may be used in the context of a code label (for example, TEST:). By default, this switch is off, and keywords may not be used as labels.

Even when this switch is turned on, there are severe restrictions on this capability. Processor mnemonics classify as the only "keywords" allowed in this situation, and only in the context of a code label (a label followed by a colon); using any reserved word as a directive name or data label is illegal.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Sk (Reserved words may not be used as labels)

Sfs - SHORT is Default Distance for Forward-Referenced Jumps

By default, when the assembler encounters an unqualified forward reference as the operand to a jump instruction, it makes a worst-case assumption that the target will not be close enough to allow generating the SHORT variation of the instruction. Enough space is reserved to generate the NEAR version, and if it is determined later that the target is close enough, the SHORT variation is generated and extra space is padded with NOP instructions. This helps insure that source files will assemble without "out of range" errors, but wastes space when the NOP instructions are generated.

Turning this switch on causes the assembler to assume that unqualified forward referenced jumps will always be reachable with the SHORT instruction variation; should this not be the case, an error is generated and the user may recode the instruction using the NEAR override.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Sfs (default distance is NEAR)

Sme - Control Visibility of MASM 6.00 Extended Mnemonics

This option controls whether or not the following processor mnemonics are recognized as keywords:

FLDENVD  FLDENVW  FNSAVED  FNSAVEW  FNSTENVD  FNSTENVW  FRSTORD 
FRSTORW  FSAVED   FSAVEW   FSTENVD  FSTENVW   IRETF     IRETDF
LOOPD    LOOPW    LOOPED   LOOPEW   LOOPNED   LOOPNEW   LOOPNZD
LOOPNZW  LOOPZD   LOOPZW   POPD     POPW      PUSHD     PUSHW

These mnemonics were introduced in MASM 6.00 to allow explicit word (16-bit) or double-word (32-bit) operations on 80386 or newer processors. Although MASM 5.10 supports the 80386 processor, it does not recognize these keywords. To avoid conflicts with preexisting macro libraries, ALP will also refuse to recognize these keywords when operating under MASM 5.10 compatibility mode (-Sv:M510) unless this option is turned on. This option is turned on automatically when the -Sv:M600 option is used.

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
S	Yes	Yes	Yes	-Sme (extended mnemonics are not enabled)

Related Information:

#Sv - Set Version Behavior

Sv - Set Version Behavior

This option controls the various modes of compatibility that the assembler is designed to emulate. The argument to the Svoption must be one of the following keywords:

ALP Native operating mode; don't emulate other assemblers

M510 Emulate Microsoft MASM Version 5.10

M600 Emulate Microsoft MASM Version 6.00

Type	Global	Group	File	Default
P	Yes	Yes	Yes	+Sv:ALP (do not emulate other assemblers)

Related Information:

#Sme - Control Visibility of MASM 6.00 Extended Mnemonics

The MASM2ALP Utility

MASM2ALP is a utility that accepts a MASM 5.10-compatible command line, transforms the command line parameters to the appropriate ALP syntax, and invokes alp.exeto perform the assembly. This allows the use of ALP instead of MASM in existing build environments without requiring major changes to makefiles or build scripts. You simply replace your existing MASM executable with MASM2ALP and resume operations.

MASM2ALP accepts the following MASM 5.10-style command line syntax:

masm2alp  [Options] SourceFile [,[ObjectFile][,[ListingFile][,[CrossRefFile]]]] [;]

Notes

• Options are normally specified first on the command line, but may appear anywhere before the optional semicolon (;) terminator. Options may begin with either a slash (/) or a dash (-), but once the first option is encountered, no further mixing of introductory characters is allowed. Options are not case sensitive. Individual command line options are discussed below.
• Filename arguments are position-dependent. Commas (,) must be used to separate each argument and to maintain argument position, both when arguments are explicitly specified or when they are skipped (left unspecified). The filename argument descriptions are as follows:
• SourceFile This argument is mandatory, and specifies the name of the assembly language source file to be processed. If no filename suffix is supplied, a default value of ".asm" is assumed.
• ObjectFile The optional name of the object-code output file to be produced. If no filename suffix is supplied, a default value of ".obj" is assumed. If no ObjectFile argument is given, the root portion of the SourceFileargument is used as the name of the object file.
• ListingFile The optional name of the listing output file to be produced. If no filename suffix is supplied, a default value of ".lst" is assumed. If no ListingFile argument or -L option is given, then no listing file is produced; otherwise the root portion of the SourceFile argument is used as the name of the listing file.
• CrossRefFile The optional name of the cross-reference output file. Since ALP does not support the creation of a cross-reference file, MASM2ALP ignores this argument.
• The trailing semicolon (;) operator may be used when no more filename arguments are to be specified and the default values are to be utilized for the remaining arguments. Any arguments or command line options that follow the semicolon will be ignored.
• MASM2ALP does not support the "prompting" behavior of Microsoft MASM when insufficient command line arguments are supplied. A syntax error is issued in this event.

Options:

MASM2ALP accepts the following command line options:

-A Forces MASM to write segments to the object file in alphabetical order. MASM normally writes segments in source code order. MASM2ALP ignores this option.

-B number Sets the size of the source file read buffer in 1K increments. MASM2ALP ignores this option.

-C Tells MASM to create a cross-reference file. MASM2ALP ignores this option.

-d Causes the assembler to generate listing file information during both pass 1 and 2. By default, the assembler only generates listing file information during pass 2.

-D symbol[=value] Defines a symbol visible during assembly. An optional text value may also be specified for the symbol.

-E Tells MASM to generate code compatible with floating-point emulation libraries. MASM2ALP ignores this option.

-H Prints the help information panel for the command line syntax.

-I path Specifies an INCLUDE file search path.

-L[A] Forces the creation of a listing output file. The -LAoption is an abbreviation for "list all", which forces macro expansions and false conditionals to also be included in the listing output.

- ML Directs the assembler to perform a case-sensitive assembly, and to preserve the case of external identifiers when writing them to the object file.

-MU Directs the assembler to perform a case-insensitive assembly, and to convert the names of external identifiers to uppercase when writing them to the object file. This is the default mode of operation for Microsoft MASM.

-MX Directs the assembler to perform a case-insensitive assembly, yet preserve the case of external identifiers when writing them to the object file.

-N Prevents the symbol table summary from being printed in the listing file .

-P Causes MASM to check for inpure code operations when assembling for a privileged mode processor. This feature is not supported by ALP, thus MASM2ALP ignores this option.

-S Forces MASM to write segments to the object file in source code order, nullifying the effects of any previously encountered -Aoption. MASM2ALP ignores this option.

-X Forces false conditionals to be included in the listing file output.

-Z Causes MASM to print the source line of any statement causing an assembly error to the standard output device. MASM2ALP ignores this option .

-ZD vCauses line number debugging information to be included in the object file output.

-ZI vCauses both line number and symbolic debugging information to be included in the object file output.

Language Elements

Description

The following sections describe the elements you use to build an ALP program source file.

Character Set

All elements in an assembler language source file are built from collections of characters contained in the character set, which are defined as:

• The uppercase and lowercase letters of the English alphabet
• The decimal digits 0 through 9
• The following graphic characters:

~   !   "   #   $   %   ^   &   '   (   )   | 
*   +   ,   -   .   /   :   ;   =   <   >   ? 
[   \   ]   _   {   }   @ 

• The space and horizontal tab characters
• The end of line character(s)

White Space

White space is a character or contiguous stream of characters that is ignored or removed from the input stream by the ALP preprocessor.

White space characters are any contiguous sequence of one or more space or tab characters not enclosed in single or double quotes. White space characters are significant only in that they serve to separate language tokens from one another; they are removed from the input stream by the scanner.

Syntax

Token:

Reserved-Word

Identifier

Literal

Punctuator

Reserved Words

Description

This section describes all of the assembler reserved words.

Syntax

Reserved-Word:

Preprocessor-Directive

Assembler-Directive

Processor-Mnemonic

Processor-Register

Scalar-TypeName

Distance-TypeName

Language-Name

Anonymous-Label-Alias

Location-Counter-Alias

Indeterminate-Value-Alias

Directive-Keyword

Operator-Keyword

Preprocessor Directives

Description

Preprocessor Directives are symbolic names that describe the various assembly-time text processing instructions interpreted by the preprocessor phase of the assembler.

Syntax

Preprocessor-Directive: one of

CATSTR      COMMENT     ELSE        ELSEIF
ELSEIF1     ELSEIF2     ELSEIFB     ELSEIFDEF
ELSEIFDIF   ELSEIFDIFI  ELSEIFE     ELSEIFIDN
ELSEIFIDNI  ELSEIFNB    ELSEIFNDEF  ENDIF
ENDM        EQU         EXITM       FOR
FORC        IF          IF1         IF2
IFB         IFDEF       IFDIF       IFDIFI
IFE         IFIDN       IFIDNI      IFNB
IFNDEF      INCLUDE     INSTR       IRP
IRPC        LOCAL       MACRO       PURGE
REPEAT      REPT        SIZESTR     SUBSTR

Assembler Directives

Description

Assembler Directives are symbolic names that describe the various assembly-time instructions interpreted by the assembler itself.

Syntax

Assembler-Directive: one of

.186          .286          .286C         .286P
.287          .386          .386C         .386P
.387          .486          .486C         .486P
.586          .586P         .686          .686P
.8086         .8087          ALIGN        .ALPHA
 ASSUME       %BIN          .CODE          COMM
.CONST        .CREF         .DATA         .DATA?
 DB            DD            DF            DOSSEG
.DOSSEG        DQ            DT            DW
 ECHO          END           ENDP          ENDS
 EQU          .ERR          .ERR1         .ERR2
.ERRB         .ERRDEF       .ERRDIF       .ERRDIFI
.ERRE         .ERRIDN       .ERRIDNI      .ERRNB
.ERRNDEF      .ERRNZ         EVEN          EXTERN
 EXTERNDEF     EXTRN        .FARDATA      .FARDATA?
 GROUP         INCLUDELIB    LABEL        .LALL
.LFCOND       .LIST         .LISTALL      .LISTIF
.LISTMACRO    .LISTMACROALL  LOCAL        .MMX
.MODEL         NAME         .NOCREF       .NOLIST
.NOLISTIF     .NOLISTMACRO  .NOMMX         OPTION
 ORG          %OUT           PAGE          PROC
 PUBLIC       .RADIX         RECORD       .SALL
 SEGMENT      .SEQ          .SFCOND       .STACK
 STRUC         STRUCT        SUBTITLE      SUBTTL
.TFCOND        TITLE         TYPEDEF       UNION
.XALL         .XCREF        .XLIST

Processor Mnemonics

Description

Processor Mnemonics are symbolic names given to the various instructions in the processor instruction set.

Syntax

Processor-Mnemonic: one of

AAA        AAD        AAM        AAS        ADC
ADD        AND        ARPL       BOUND      BSF
BSR        BSWAP      BT         BTC        BTR
BTS        CALL       CBW        CDQ        CLC
CLD        CLI        CLTS       CMC        CMOVA
CMOVAE     CMOVB      CMOVBE     CMOVC      CMOVE
CMOVG      CMOVGE     CMOVL      CMOVLE     CMOVNA
CMOVNAE    CMOVNB     CMOVNBE    CMOVNC     CMOVNE
CMOVNG     CMOVNGE    CMOVNL     CMOVNLE    CMOVNO
CMOVNP     CMOVNS     CMOVNZ     CMOVO      CMOVP
CMOVPE     CMOVPO     CMOVS      CMOVZ      CMP
CMPS       CMPSB      CMPSD      CMPSW      CMPXCHG
CMPXCHG8B  CPUID      CWD        CWDE       DAA
DAS        DEC        DIV        EMMS       ENTER
ESC        F2XM1      FABS       FADD       FADDP
FBLD       FBSTP      FCHS       FCLEX      FCMOVB
FCMOVBE    FCMOVE     FCMOVNB    FCMOVNBE   FCMOVNE
FCMOVNU    FCMOVU     FCOM       FCOMI      FCOMIP
FCOMP      FCOMPP     FCOS       FDECSTP    FDISI
FDIV       FDIVP      FDIVR      FDIVRP     FENI
FFREE      FIADD      FICOM      FICOMP     FIDIV
FIDIVR     FILD       FIMUL      FINCSTP    FINIT
FIST       FISTP      FISUB      FISUBR     FLD
FLD1       FLDCW      FLDENV     FLDENVD    FLDENVW
FLDL2E     FLDL2T     FLDLG2     FLDLN2     FLDPI
FLDZ       FMUL       FMULP      FNCLEX     FNDISI
FNENI      FNINIT     FNOP       FNSAVE     FNSAVED
FNSAVEW    FNSTCW     FNSTENV    FNSTENVD   FNSTENVW
FNSTSW     FPATAN     FPREM      FPREM1     FPTAN
FRNDINT    FRSTOR     FRSTORD    FRSTORW    FSAVE
FSAVED     FSAVEW     FSCALE     FSETPM     FSIN
FSINCOS    FSQRT      FST        FSTCW      FSTENV
FSTENVD    FSTENVW    FSTP       FSTSW      FSUB
FSUBP      FSUBR      FSUBRP     FTST       FUCOM
FUCOMI     FUCOMIP    FUCOMP     FUCOMPP    FWAIT
FXAM       FXCH       FXTRACT    FYL2X      FYL2XP1
HLT        IDIV       IMUL       IN         INC
INS        INSB       INSD       INSW       INT
INTO       INVD       INVLPG     IRET       IRETD
IRETDF     IRETF      JA         JAE        JB
JBE        JC         JCXZ       JE         JECXZ
JG         JGE        JL         JLE        JMP
JNA        JNAE       JNB        JNBE       JNC
JNE        JNG        JNGE       JNL        JNLE
JNO        JNP        JNS        JNZ        JO
JP         JPE        JPO        JS         JZ
LAHF       LAR        LDS        LEA        LEAVE 
LES        LFS        LGDT       LGS        LIDT 
LLDT       LMSW       LOCK       LODS       LODSB 
LODSD      LODSW      LOOP       LOOPD      LOOPE 
LOOPED     LOOPEW     LOOPNE     LOOPNED    LOOPNEW 
LOOPNZ     LOOPNZD    LOOPNZW    LOOPW      LOOPZ 
LOOPZD     LOOPZW     LSL        LSS        LTR 
MOV        MOVD       MOVQ       MOVS       MOVSB 
MOVSD      MOVSW      MOVSX      MOVZX      MUL 
NEG        NOP        NOT        OR         OUT 
OUTS       OUTSB      OUTSD      OUTSW      PACKSSDW 
PACKSSWB   PACKUSWB   PADDB      PADDD      PADDSB 
PADDSW     PADDUSB    PADDUSW    PADDW      PAND 
PANDN      PCMPEQB    PCMPEQD    PCMPEQW    PCMPGTB 
PCMPGTD    PCMPGTW    PMADDWD    PMULHW     PMULLW 
POP        POPA       POPAD      POPD       POPF 
POPFD      POPW       POR        PSLLD      PSLLQ 
PSLLW      PSRAD      PSRAW      PSRLD      PSRLQ 
PSRLW      PSUBB      PSUBD      PSUBSB     PSUBSW 
PSUBUSB    PSUBUSW    PSUBW      PUNPCKHBW  PUNPCKHDQ 
PUNPCKHWD  PUNPCKLBW  PUNPCKLDQ  PUNPCKLWD  PUSH 
PUSHA      PUSHAD     PUSHD      PUSHF      PUSHFD 
PUSHW      PXOR       RCL        RCR        RDMSR 
RDPMC      RDTSC      REP        REPE       REPNE 
REPNZ      REPZ       RET        RETF       RETN 
ROL        ROR        RSM        SAHF       SAL 
SAR        SBB        SCAS       SCASB      SCASD 
SCASW      SETA       SETAE      SETB       SETBE 
SETC       SETE       SETG       SETGE      SETL 
SETLE      SETNA      SETNAE     SETNB      SETNBE 
SETNC      SETNE      SETNG      SETNGE     SETNL 
SETNLE     SETNO      SETNP      SETNS      SETNZ 
SETO       SETP       SETPE      SETPO      SETS 
SETZ       SGDT       SHL        SHLD       SHR 
SHRD       SIDT       SLDT       SMSW       STC 
STD        STI        STOS       STOSB      STOSD 
STOSW      STR        SUB        TEST       UC2 
VERR       VERW       WAIT       WBINVD     WRMSR 
XADD       XCHG       XLAT       XLATB      XOR

Processor Registers

Description

Processor Registers are the symbolic names assigned to the various internal processor registers. They are normally used as operands to processor instructions.

Syntax

Processor-Register:

General-Purpose-Register

Segment-Register

Control-Register

Debug-Register

Test-Register

MMX-Register

Floating-Point-Register

General-Purpose-Register:

8-Bit-Register

16-Bit-Register

32-Bit-Register

8-Bit-Register: one of

AL AH BL BH CL CH DL DH

16-Bit-Register: one of

AX BX CX DX DI SI BP SP

32-Bit-Register: one of

EAX EBX ECX EDX EDI ESI EBP ESP

Segment-Register: one of

CS DS ES FS GS SS

Control-Register: one of

CR0 CR2 CR3 CR4

Debug-Register: one of

DR0 DR1 DR2 DR3 DR4 DR5 DR6 DR7

Test-Register: one of

TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7

MMX-Register: one of

MM0 MM1 MM2 MM3 MM4 MM5 MM6 MM7

Floating-Point-Register: ST

Scalar Type Names

Description

Scalar Type Names are the symbolic names given to the integral data types. These are the fundamental types of data upon which the processor can directly operate.

Syntax

Scalar-TypeName:

BYTE

SBYTE

WORD

SWORD

DWORD

SDWORD

REAL4

FWORD

QWORD

REAL8

TBYTE

REAL10

Distance Type Names

Description

Distance Type Names are the symbolic names given to the integral types of pointers directly supported by the processor. Their names reflect a fundamental property of the Intel processor architecture known as distance. The type of pointer is defined by the distance required to reach the information to which it points.

Syntax

Distance-TypeName:

NEAR

NEAR16

NEAR32

FAR

FAR16

FAR32

Language Names

Description

Language Names refer to the various high level programming languages (or more specifically, the calling conventions used by such languages) with which the assembler has the ability to interface.

Syntax

Language-Name:

C

SYSCALL

STDCALL

PASCAL

FORTRAN

BASIC

OPTLINK

Anonymous Label Aliases

Description

The Anonymous Label Aliases are reserved symbolic names that return a context-sensitive value when referenced in expressions.

The reserved name @B (backward reference) returns the internally generated name representing the nearest @@: code label appearing before the current location in the input stream.

The reserved name @F (forward reference) returns the internally generated name representing the nearest @@: code label appearing after the current location in the input stream.

Syntax

Anonymous-Label-Alias:

@B

@F

Location Counter Alias

Description

The Location Counter Alias is a reserved name used in expressions to return the offset within the current segment or structure being assembled.

Syntax

Location-Counter-Alias:

$

Indeterminate Value Alias

Description

The Indeterminate Value Alias is a reserved name used in expressions to represent an uninitialized value.

Syntax

Indeterminate-Value-Alias:

?

Directive Keywords

Description

Directive Keywords are symbolic names recognized and used in the body of various assembler directives.

Syntax

Directive-Keyword:

ABS         AT            BASIC         C
CASEMAP     CODE          COMMON        DOTNAME
EMULATOR    EPILOGUE      ERROR         EXPORT
EXPR16      EXPR32        FARSTACK      FLAT
FORTRAN     HUGE          LANGUAGE      LARGE
LJMP        MEDIUM        NEARSTACK     NODOTNAME
NOEMULATOR  NOKEYWORD     NOLANGUAGE    NOLJMP
NONE        NOOLDMACROS   NOOLDSTRUCTS  NOREADONLY
NOSCOPED    NOSIGNEXTEND  NOTHING       NOTPUBLIC
OLDMACROS   OLDSTRUCTS    OPTLINK       OS_DOS
OS_OS2      PAGE          PARA          PASCAL
PRIVATE     PROC          PROLOGUE      PUBLIC
READONLY    SCOPED        SEGMENT       SIGNEXTEND
SMALL       STACK         STDCALL       SYSCALL
TINY        USE16         USE32         USES

Operator Keywords

Description

Operator Keywords are symbolic names used in expressions to denote an operation to be performed on one or more operands.

Syntax

Operator-Keyword:

AND         DUP         EQ          GE
GT          HIGH        HIGHWORD    LE
LENGTH      LENGTHOF    LOW         LOWWORD
LT          MASK        MOD         NE
NOT         OFFSET      OPATTR      OR
PTR         SEG         SHL         SHORT
SHR         SIZE        SIZEOF      THIS
.TYPE       TYPE        WIDTH       XOR

Identifiers

Description

This section describes the syntax for identifiers and the various types of information they can be made to represent.

Syntax

Identifier:

Normal-Identifier

Dot-Identifier

Normal-Identifier

NonDigit

Normal-Identifier Identifer-Character

Dot-Identifier . Normal-Identifier

Identifier-Character NonDigit Digit

NonDigit: one of

_ $ @ ?
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Digit: one of

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Identifier Types

Description

This section describes the various types of identifiers that the assembler will create and manipulate.

Definition

Identifier-Type:

EquateName

FieldName

GroupName

LabelName

MacroName

SegmentName

UserDefined-TypeName

Equate Name

Definition

EquateName:

Numeric-EquateName

Text-EquateName

Description

An EquateName is a symbolic identifier that is associated with an expression or a body of text. The assembler substitutes the value of the EquateName at the point of reference.

Numeric Equate Name

An identifier becomes a Numeric-EquateName when it is defined in a EQU or = directive. Procedure parameter names and local variable names are also created as Numeric-EquateNames, but are visible only from within the procedure where they are defined. All other Numeric-EquateNames are globally-scoped identifiers visible across the entire module.

A Numeric-EquateName may only be referenced from within expressions, as its replacement value is itself an expression.

Text Equate Name

A Text-EquateName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a EQU preprocessor directive. A Text-EquateName is associated with a body of text whose content may not span across line breaks. In certain contexts the assembler replaces the Text-EquateName with the text that it represents and recursively evaluates the result.

Field Name

Definition

FieldName:

Record-FieldName

Structure-FieldName

Union-FieldName

Description

An identifier becomes a FieldName when it is defined within a RECORD, STRUCT, or UNION directive.

Record Field Name

A Record-FieldName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a RECORD directive. It is a special variation of a Numeric-EquateName and can be used in the same contexts.

Structure Field Name

An identifier becomes a Structure-FieldName when it is defined in a STRUCT directive. If the assembler is operating in M510 mode, or if the OPTION OLDSTRUCTS directive has been specified, then a Structure-FieldName is a globally-scoped identifier treated as a special variation of a Numeric-EquateName and can be used in the same contexts. Otherwise, a Structure-FieldName is private to the defining structure and is only accessible in expressions through use of the Structure/Union Field Selection (. Operator).

Union Field Name

An identifier becomes a Union-FieldName when it is defined in a UNION directive. A Union-FieldName is private to the defining union and is only accessible in expressions through use of the Structure/Union Field Selection (. Operator).

Group Name

A GroupName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a GROUP directive. It is referenced from within expressions.

Label Name

Definition

LabelName:

Code-LabelName

Data-LabelName

Description

A LabelName is globally-scoped identifier that is associated with a program address at application run-time. It has an explicit or inherited Type-Declaration, and an optional Language-Attribute. These attributes are described in the following sections.

Type Declaration

The type declaration associated with a label name depends on how the label was defined. See the Code-LabelName and Data-LabelName sections for descriptions on how this attribute is assigned.

Language Attribute

A LabelName can have an assigned Language-Attribute, set either implicitly through the use of a Language-Name keyword in the body of a .MODEL or OPTION directive, or explicitly through the use of an overriding Language-Name keyword in the body of a EXTERN/EXTRN, EXTERNDEF, PROC, or PUBLIC directive. The Language-Attribute determines the exact spelling of the LabelName identifier when it is written to the object file. According to the Language-Attribute, identifier spellings are modified from their appearance in the assembly language source module as follow:

LANGUAGE ATTRIBUTE	IDENTIFIER SPELLING
OPTLINK, SYSCALL	No modifications are made to the identifier when written to the object file.
C, STDCALL	A leading underscore character is appended to the front of the name.
BASIC, FORTRAN, PASCAL	All characters in the identifier are converted to uppercase.

Code Label Name

Definition

Code-LabelName:

Target-LabelName

Procedure-LabelName

Description

A Code-LabelName is an identifier that is associated with an executable code address at application run-time. There are two types of Code-LabelNames: Target-LabelNames and Procedure-LabelNames.

Target Label Name

An identifier becomes a Target-LabelName when it is defined with a :, ::, or LABEL directive.

If a Target-LabelName created with a single colon (:) is defined within the body of a procedure, then the name is visible only from within that procedure unless operating in M510 mode (and no .MODEL directive with a Language-Name has been specified), or unless the OPTION NOSCOPED directive has been specified.

A Target-LabelName defined outside the body of a procedure is visible to the entire module, and may also be given PUBLIC visibility.

Procedure Label Name

An identifier becomes a Procedure-LabelName when it is defined in a PROC directive.

Data Label Name

A Data-LabelName is an identifier that is the address of a program variable at application run-time. An identifier becomes a Data-LabelName when it is named in a data allocation statement, or when a scalar, aggregate, or vector type is associated with the identifier named in a LABEL, EXTERN/ EXTRN, EXTERNDEF, or COMM directive.

Macro Name

A MacroName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a MACRO directive. It is associated with a multi-line body of text. A MacroName may only be used in contexts where a normal assembler directive is expected.

Macro Parameter Name

An identifier becomes a Macro-ParameterName when it is named as a parameter to a macro in a MACRO directive. It is associated with a body of text whose content may not span across line breaks. It is only recognized and acted upon from within the body of a macro expansion.

Segment Name

A SegmentName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a SEGMENT directive. It may be referenced from within expressions or in the body of a GROUP directive.

User-Defined Type Name

Definition

UserDefined-TypeName:

Record-TypeName

Structure-TypeName

Typedef-TypeName

Union-TypeName

Description

An identifier becomes a UserDefined-TypeName when it is defined within a RECORD, STRUCT, TYPEDEF, or UNION directive.

Record Type Name

A Record-TypeName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a RECORD directive. It is recognized from within Expressions, Type-Declarations, or as a pseudo-directive in a data allocation statement.

Structure Type Name

A Structure-TypeName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a STRUCT directive. It is recognized from within Expressions, Type-Declarations, or as a pseudo-directive in a data allocation statement.

Typedef Type Name

A Typedef-TypeName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a TYPEDEF directive. It is recognized from within Expressions, Type-Declarations, or as a pseudo-directive in a data allocation statement.

Union Type Name

A Union-TypeName is a globally-scoped identifier created during the processing of a UNION directive. It is recognized from within Expressions, Type-Declarations, or as a pseudo-directive in a data allocation statement.

Predefined Identifiers

The following sections describe the predefined identifiers created by the assembler. When a case-sensitive assembly is being performed, the predefined identifiers must be spelled exactly as they appear in the following descriptions with respect to uppercase and lowercase characters.

Segment Information

The following sections describe the predefined identifiers created by the assembler in support of segment manipulation.

@code

The @code identifier is a Text-EquateName created by the assembler when a .MODEL directive is encountered, at which time the assembler performs an automatic ASSUME CS:@code operation. The @code symbol is not defined if a .MODEL directive has not been issued.

Under MASM 5.10 emulation, the @code symbol is set to the name of the implicitly-defined default code segment (the segment opened when a .CODE directive is used) and its value is never changed. In other modes, the @code symbol is updated to reflect whatever segment is opened by using .CODE, whether defined implicitly or as an explicit parameter to the .CODE directive.

The value assigned to the @code symbol when the default code segment is opened is determined by the memory model as follows:

Memory Model Value for @code

TINY DGROUP

SMALL _TEXT

MEDIUM module _TEXT

COMPACT_TEXT

LARGE module _TEXT

HUGE module _TEXT

FLAT CODE32

The module entry is replaced with base file name of the top-level module being assembled.

@CodeSize

The @CodeSize identifier is a Numeric-EquateName created by the assembler when a .MODEL directive is encountered. @CodeSize indicates whether code segments created by the .CODE directive are named such that the linker will combine them into a single (NEAR) segment or into multiple (FAR) segments. The @CodeSize symbol is set to 0 (NEAR) for the TINY, SMALL, COMPACT, and FLAT memory models, and to 1 (FAR) for the MEDIUM, LARGE, and HUGE memory models. The @CodeSize symbol is not defined if a .MODEL directive has not been issued.

@CurSeg

The @CurSeg identifier is a Text-EquateName defined by the assembler to hold the name of the currently opened segment. If no segment is currently open, @CurSeg will expand into an empty string.

@data

The @data identifier is a Text-EquateName created by the assembler when a .MODEL directive is encountered. It expands to the group name shared by all of the near data segments. If a .MODEL FLAT has been issued, the @data identifier expands to FLAT. For all other memory models, it expands to DGROUP.

@DataSize

The @DataSize identifier is a Numeric-EquateName created by the assembler when a .MODEL directive is encountered, and represents the default data distance. Depending on the currently selected memory model, the @DataSize identifier is set to the following values:

TINY 0

SMALL 0

COMPACT 1

MEDIUM 1

LARGE 1

HUGE 2

FLAT 0

@Model

The @Model identifier is a Numeric-EquateName created by the assembler when a .MODEL directive is encountered, and is set to a unique value for each memory model. The values are as follows:

TINY 1

SMALL 2

COMPACT 3

MEDIUM 4

LARGE 5

HUGE 6

FLAT 7

@WordSize

The @WordSize identifier is a Numeric-EquateName that reflects the address size attribute of the current segment. It is set to 2 for a USE16 segment, and 4 for a USE32 segment. If no segment is currently open, it reflects the default address size as determined by the currently selected processor.

Version Information

These identifiers offer methods of testing the various operating modes of the assembler to determine what features are activated or disabled, or how the assembler will behave under various conditions.

@Alp

The @Alp identifier is a Text-EquateName that can be tested to determine if ALP is assembling the source file (versus some other assembler). It is always set to the string 100.

@AlpMajor

The @AlpMajor identifier is a Text-EquateName that reflects the major portion of the three-part assembler version number. It is padded on the right with zeros to allow major version number comparisions independant of the minor version and revisions numbers. See @AlpVersion for more information.

This identifier is only defined in ALP mode.

@AlpMinor

The @AlpMinor identifier is a Text-EquateName that reflects the minor portion of the three-part assembler version number. It is padded on the right with zeros to allow minor version number comparisions independant of the major version and revisions numbers. See @AlpVersion for more information.

This identifier is only defined in ALP mode.

@AlpRevision

The @AlpRevision identifier is a Text-EquateName that reflects the revision portion of the three-part assembler version number. It allows revision number comparisions independant of the major and minor version numbers. See @AlpVersion for more information.

This identifier is only defined in ALP mode.

@AlpVersion

The @AlpVersion identifier is a Text-EquateName that reflects the full three-part assembler version number. This is an encoding of the version number printed in the program banner when the assembler is invoked. This number and its requisite parts may be tested to determine the presence or absence of features provided by the assembler.

The assembler version number consists of three parts:

1. The major version number (one digit)
2. The minor version number (two digits)
3. The revision number (three digits)

In the assembler banner, the numbers are separated by the period (.) character; the period is removed from the text defined by the predefined identifiers.

For example, if the major version number is 1, the minor version number is 2, and the revision number is 3, then the full version number is printed in the assembler banner as 1.02.003, and the various predefined version identifers would be set as follows:

@AlpVersion   102003
@AlpMajor     100000
@AlpMinor       2000
@AlpRevision     003

This identifier is only defined in ALP mode.

@Cpu

The @Cpu identifier is a Numeric-EquateName that reflects the currently selected processor for which ALP is assembling instructions. This value is affected by issuing a Processor-Control-Directive, and is a bit map that indicates the currently active processor instruction set(s).

B	A	9	8	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0	BIT SET IF ASSEMBLING FOR
											1	8086/8088
										1		80186
									1			80286
								1				80386
							1					80486
						1						80586 (Pentium)
					1							80686 (Pentium Pro)
				1								Privileged mode
			1									8087
		1										MMX Extensions
	1											80287
1												80387

@Version

The @Version identifier is a Text-EquateName that reflects the MASM-compatible version number. The current emulation mode of the assembler affects the value of this symbol as follows:

M510 510

M600 600

ALP 4294967295 (the highest possible value for an unsigned 32-bit integer)

Date and Time Information

These identifiers allow the programmer to query the system date or time during the assembly. Each time they are referenced, a new system request for the current date and time is made and the values held in the identifiers are refreshed.

@Date

The @Date identifier is a Text-EquateName that is set to the current system date. If the current operating mode is M600, the date is returned in the MM/DD/YY format. In native ALP mode, the date is returned in the MM/DD/YYYY format.

The @Date identifier is not available in M510 mode.

@Time

The @Time identifier is a Text-EquateName that is set to the current system time in 24-hour HH:MM:SS format.

The @Time identifier is not available in M510 mode.

File Information

These identifiers return information about the file(s) being assembled.

@FileName

The @FileName identifier is a Text-EquateName that is set to the base name of the main file being assembled (as it appears on the command line).

@Line

The @Line identifier is a Numeric-EquateName that is set to the current source line number in the file currently being assembled.

The @Line identifier is not available in M510 mode.

Literals

Description

Literals are the notational method whereby numeric values or strings of character data are represented in the source stream. Literals are also commonly referred to as constants (especially in the context of high level languages) because they typically represent objects whose values do not change throughout the life of the assembly or compilation. However, literals should not be confused with run-time "constants"; ("read-only"; data items allocated by the programmer); they are assembly-time tokens used by the assembler to represent numeric values or character strings.

Syntax

Literal:

Floating-Point-Literal

Integer-Literal

String-Literal

Integer Literals

Description

An integer literal represents a fixed-point numeric value. An integer literal must begin with one of the numeric digits 0 - 9, and may be optionally terminated with a suffix character called a radix specifier. The radix specifier tells the assembler whether the literal is to be interpreted as a base 2 (binary), 8 (octal), 10 (decimal), or 16 ( hexadecimal) number. If the literal is not suffixed with a radix specifier , the assembler uses the value of the current radix to determine the base of the number. The default radix is 10 (decimal), but the .RADIX directive can be used to specify an alternate radix.

Syntax

Integer-Literal:

Binary-Integer-Literal

Octal-Integer-Literal

Decimal-Integer-Literal

Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal

Binary Integer Literals

Syntax

Binary-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Binary-Integer-Literal

Qualified-Binary-Integer-Literal

Unqualified-Binary-Integer-Literal:

Binary-Digit

Binary-Integer-Literal Binary-Digit

Qualified-Binary-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Binary-Integer-Literal Binary-Radix

Binary-Digit:

0

1

Binary-Radix:

b

B

y

Y

Description

A base-2 number containing either of the digits 0 and 1.

Examples

The following are examples of unqualified binary integer literals:

10101
0
000001
1111000010101010

The following are examples of qualified binary integer literals:

00001111b
1111Y
00y
1111000010101010B

Octal Integer Literals

Syntax

Octal-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Octal-Integer-Literal

Qualified-Octal-Integer-Literal

Unqualified-Octal-Integer-Literal:

Octal-Digit

Octal-Integer-Literal Octal-Digit

Qualified-Octal-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Octal-Integer-Literal Octal-Radix

Octal-Digit: one of:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Octal-Radix:

o

O

q

Q

Description

A base-8 number containing any of the digits 0 through 7.

Examples

The following are examples of unqualified octal integer literals:

01234567
27
765

The following are examples of qualified octal integer literals:

27q
013o
567O
01234567Q 

Decimal Integer Literals

Syntax

Decimal-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Decimal-Integer-Literal

Qualified-Decimal-Integer-Literal

Unqualified-Decimal-Integer-Literal:

Decimal-Digit

Decimal-Integer-Literal Decimal-Digit

Qualified-Decimal-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Decimal-Integer-Literal Decimal-Radix

Decimal-Digit: one of:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Decimal-Radix:

d

D

t

T

Description

A base-10 number containing any of the digits 0 through 9.

Examples

The following are examples of unqualified decimal integer literals:

0123456789
19
090

The following are examples of qualified decimal integer literals:

01d
89t
4567D
0123456789T 

Hexadecimal Integer Literals

Syntax

Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal

Qualified-Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal

Unqualified-Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal:

Decimal-Digit

Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal Decimal-Digit

Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal Hexadecimal-Digit

Qualified-Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal:

Unqualified-Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal Hexadecimal-Radix

Decimal-Digit: one of:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Hexadecimal-Digit: one of:

a b c d e f
A B C D E F

Hexadecimal-Radix:

h

H

Description

A base-16 number using any combination of the digits 0 through 9 and the lowercase letters a through f or the uppercase letters A through F. The lowercase and uppercase representations of any given hexadecimal letter are equivalent.

Constraints

A hexadecimal integer literal may not begin with any of the alphabetic hexadecimal characters or it will be interpreted as an identifier; such numbers must be prefixed with the 0 digit.

Examples

The following are examples of unqualified hexadecimal integer literals:

01BD
9A
0AB

The following are examples of qualified hexadecimal integer literals:

1234ABCDh
01DH
0bh
1111FFFFH

Floating-Point Literals

Description

A floating-point literal is a notation for representing real numbers. The assembler provides both decimal and hexadecimal floating-point notations for representing real numbers.

Syntax

Floating-Point-Literal:

Decimal-Floating-Point-Literal

Hexadecimal-Floating-Point-Literal

Decimal Floating-Point Literals

Syntax

Decimal-Floating-Point-Literal:
Significand-Part
Significand-Part Exponent-Part

Significand-Part:
Digit-Sequence.Digit-Sequence
Digit-Sequence.

Exponent-Part:
E-Character Digit-Sequence
E-Character Sign Digit-Sequence

E-Character:
e
E

Sign:
-
+

Digit-Sequence:
Digit
Digit-Sequence Digit

Digit:one of:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Description

A decimal floating-point literal has a significand part that may be followed by an exponent part. The significand part consists of a digit sequence representing the whole-number part, followed by a period (.), followed by a digit sequence representing the fraction part. The exponent part consists of an introductory character (eor E), followed by an optional sign character (+or -), followed by a digit sequence representing the exponent.

Constraints

The introductory Digit-Sequence in the Significand-Part must be specified ( the literal cannot begin with a ".").

Examples

25.23 
2.523E1 
2523.0E-2

Hexadecimal Floating-Point Literals

Syntax

Hexadecimal-Floating-Point-Literal:
Hexadecimal-Literal Float-Radix

Hexadecimal-Literal:
Decimal-Digit
Hexadecimal-Literal Decimal-Digit
Hexadecimal-Literal Hexadecimal-Digit

Decimal-Digit:one of:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Hexadecimal-Digit:one of:
a b c d e f
A B C D E F

Float-Radix:
r
R

Description

A hexadecimal floating-point literal provides a means of initializing floating point values using a notation more closely tied to the internal machine representation than that of the Decimal-Floating-Point-Literal. Such literals are coded in a fashion similar to that of a normal Hexadecimal-Integer-Literal, but a different radix suffix is used to inform the assembler that the value is to be used in the allocation of real numbers rather than integers.

Constraints

A hexadecimal floating-point literal may not begin with any of the alphabetic hexadecimal characters or it will be interpreted as an identifier; such numbers must be prefixed with the 0 digit.

The literal must specify the correct number of hexadecimal digits according to the size of the real-number data-type to which it will be assigned. For REAL4, REAL8, and REAL10 variables, the respective number of digits in the literal must be 8, 16, and 20. For literals encoded with a leading zero, the respective number of digits must be 9, 17, and 21.

Examples

3F800000r

String Literals

Syntax

String-Literal:
D-String
S-String

D-String:
D-Quote D-Quote
D-Quote D-Char-Sequence D-Quote

S-String:
S-Quote S-Quote
S-Quote S-Char-Sequence S-Quote

D-Char-Sequence:
any printable character except D-Quote
D-Quote D-Quote

S-Char-Sequence:
any printable character except S-Quote
S-Quote S-Quote

D-Quote:
"

S-Quote:

Description

A string literal contains a sequence of zero or more characters enclosed in quotation mark symbols. Either a single (') or double (") quotation mark symbol may be used as the quote character that opens and closes the string literal. If a single quotation mark symbol is used as the quote character, then double quotation mark symbols may appear as data characters within the string literal, and vice versa. If the quote character must also appear as a character within the string literal, use two adjacent quote characters; this will allow a single occurrence of the quote character to be inserted into the string literal.

A quote character must be used to terminate the string literal before the end of the line is reached, otherwise an error message is issued and the literal is terminated by the end of line character. A string literal may span multiple lines only if a backslash (\) appears as the last non- whitespace character on the line, in which case the backslash, all surrounding whitespace characters, and the end of line character are deleted and the literal is continued with the first character on the next line.

Examples

'Hello, world'
"That's the way it is"
'Unless its not'
"SuperStringCon \
catenated"

Punctuators

Description

Punctuators are used as operators and separator characters.

Syntax

Punctuator:one of
[ ] ( ) { } * , : = ; %

Declarations

A Type Declaration is a language construct that specifies the characteristics of code and data objects used in a program.

Type Declarations

Description

A Type-Declaration is a common construct used in various assembler directives to establish type attribute information for a program object. A Type-Declaration is needed to determine the data type of a variable or labeled address. The TYPEDEF directive offers a method of assigning a name to a Type-Declaration.

Syntax

Type-Declaration:

TypeName

TypeName Array-Spec

Pointer-Spec

Pointer-Spec TypeName

Pointer-Spec TypeName Array-Spec

Pointer-Spec:

PTR

Distance-TypeName PTR

Pointer-Spec Array-Spec

Array-Spec:

[ Expression ]

Array-Spec [ Expression ]

TypeName:

Distance-TypeName

Scalar-TypeName

UserDefined-TypeName

Examples

The TYPEDEF directive is used to illustrate the type declaration syntax:

CHAR        typedef   byte               ;   Alias of intrinsic TypeName
PBYTE       typedef   ptr  byte          ;   Pointer to intrinsic TypeName
PCHAR       typedef   ptr  CHAR          ;   Pointer to TypeDef-TypeName
PPCHAR      typedef   ptr  PCHAR         ;   Pointer to a pointer to a CHAR
PPBYTE      typedef   ptr  ptr byte      ;   Similar to PPCHAR
PVOID       typedef   ptr                ;   Pointer to nothing (pointer to code)
PCODE       typedef   ptr  PROC          ;   Similar to PVOID
PFCODE      typedef   far  ptr far       ;   Far pointer to far code address

; vector declarations

ACHAR       typedef   CHAR[16]          ;   Array of 16 characters
AAWORD      typedef   word[2][2]        ;   multi-dimensional array
APBYTE      typedef   ptr[8] byte       ;   Array of 8 pointers to byte
APACHAR     typedef   ptr[4] ACHAR      ;   Array of 4 ptrs to arrays of 16 chars

SIZES_T     struct                     ;   define an intrinsic structure type
   little   byte      ?
   Medium   word      ? 
   BIG      dword     ? 
SIZES_T     ends 

SIZES       typedef   SIZES_T           ;   alias for intrinsic structure type
PSIZES      typedef   ptr SIZES_T       ;   and a type to point to it

PFORWARD    typedef   ptr FORWARD       ;   Pointers to forward-referenced types
FORWARD     struct                     ;   are assumed to be pointers to structs
   blah      word     ?
FORWARD     ends

Expressions

An expression is a sequence of operators and operands that are evaluated to derive a numeric result, an effective address, or a register operand.

Expressions are specified using standard infix notation, which is recursive in nature, ie., expressions may be nested within other expressions. The evaluation of an expression occurs in a left to right manner, and is influenced by the rules of operator precedence and associativity. The order in which expressions are evaluated can be controlled by grouping operands and operators together using parentheses ().

Expression Syntax

Description

This section describes the complete expression syntax.

Syntax

Expression:

Duplicative-Expression

Duplicative-Expression:

Attribute-Expression

Attribute-Expression DUP ( Initializer-List )

Attribute-Expression:

OR-Expression SHORT Additive-Expression

.TYPE OR-Expression

OPATTR OR-Expression

OR-Expression:

AND-Expression

OR-Expression OR AND-Expression

OR-Expression XOR AND-Expression

AND-Expression]]:

NOT-Expression]]

AND-Expression]] AND NOT-Expression

NOT-Expression]]:

Relational-Expression NOT Relational-Expression

Relational-Expression:

Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression EQ Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression NE Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression GT Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression GE Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression LT Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression LE Additive-Expression

Additive-Expression:'

Multiplicative-Expression

Additive-Expression + Multiplicative-Expression

Additive-Expression - Multiplicative-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression:

Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression * Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression / Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression MOD Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression SHL Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression SHR Narrowed-Expression

Narrowed-Expression:

Cast-Expression

HIGH Cast-Expression

HIGHWORD Cast-Expression

LOW Cast-Expression

LOWWORD Cast-Expression

Cast-Expression:

Element-Selection-Expression

OFFSET Cast-Expression

SEG Cast-Expression

THIS Element-Selection-Expression

TYPE Element-Selection-Expression

Cast-Expression PTR Cast-Expression

Cast-Expression : Cast-Expression

Element-Selection-Expression:

Sign-Expression

Element-Selection-Expression

Sign-Expression

Element-Selection-Expression . Sign-Expression

Sign-Expression:

Primary-Expression

- Primary-Expression

+ Primary-Expression

Primary-Expression:

Literal-Operand

Record-Constant

Identifier-Operand

Register-Operand

Integral-TypeName-Operand

Value-Substitution-Operand

LENGTH Identifier-Operand

LENGTHOF Identifier-Operand

MASK Identifier-Operand

SIZE Element-Selection-Expression

SIZEOF Element-Selection-Expression

WIDTH Identifier-Operand

Parenthesized-Expression

Indirected-Expression

Compound-Initializer

Literal-Operand:

Floating-Point-Literal

Integer-Literal

String-Literal]]

Record-Constant:

Identifier-Operand < Field-List >

Identifier-Operand { Field-List }

Field-List:

Attribute-Expression

Field-List , Attribute-Expression

Identifier-Operand:

Identifier

Register-Operand:

Processor-Register

Integral-TypeName-Operand:

Scalar-TypeName

Distance-TypeName

Value-Substitution-Operand:

Anonymous-Label-Alias

Location-Counter-Alias

Indeterminate-Value-Alias

FLAT

Parenthesized-Expression:

( Attribute-Expression )

Indirected-Expression:

[ Attribute-Expression ]

Compound-Initializer:

< Initializer-List >

{ Initializer-List }

Initializer-List:

Duplicative-Expression

Initializer-List , Duplicative-Expression

Duplicative Initialization Expression

Description

A Duplicative Initialization Expression is one that can be optionally used during the initialization of variables such that the operand is duplicated a specified number of times.

Syntax

Duplicative-Expression:

Attribute-Expression

Attribute-Expression

#DUP ( Initializer-List )

Initializer-List:

Duplicative-Expression

Initializer-List , Duplicative-Expression

Duplicative Initialization (DUP Operator)

Description

The DUP operator creates a Duplicated-ExpressionType from the Initializer-List enclosed in parentheses. This construct can be used to create arrays of information during data allocation.

Syntax

Attribute-Expression DUP (Initializer-List) Initializer-List: Duplicative-Expression Initializer-List,|Duplicative-Expression

Constraints

The left hand operand of the DUP operator must evaluate to an Absolute-ExpressionType.

Each Duplicative-Expression in the Initializer-List must evaluate to an Initializer-ExpressionType.

Examples

STR   STRUCT 
 One   BYTE  0
 Two   BYTE  0
STR   ENDS 

Array1  WORD 4 DUP (1,2,3,4)         ; allocates 16 words
Array2  STR  8 DUP (<1,2>)           ; 8 structures

Attribute Expression

Description

An Attribute Expression is one that optionally extracts or modifies one or more of the basic properties of its operand.

Syntax

Attribute-Expression:

OR-Expression

SHORT Additive-Expression

.TYPE OR-Expression

OPATTR OR-Expression

Expression Descriptor Bitmap (.TYPE Operator)

Description

The .TYPE operator is considered obsolete. The #OPATTR operator should be used instead.

The .TYPE operator returns a byte value bitmap that describes various attributes of its operand. The return value is 0 if the expression could not be correctly parsed or evaluated, otherwise the bitmap returned is formatted according to the following table:

7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0	BIT SET IF EXPRESSION
							1	Is a Direct-ExpressionType
						1		Is a Indirect-ExpressionType, an Indexed-ExpressionType, or a combination of both
					1			Is an Immediate-ExpressionType
				1				Is an Indirect-ExpressionType
			1					Is a Register-ExpressionType
		1						Was parsed and evaluated without error (no undefined symbols, etc.)
	1							Is relative to the SS Segment-Register
1								Contains an External Reference

.TYPE OR-Expression

Syntax

.TYPE OR-Expression

Examples

BumpCounter macro bump 
  if (((.TYPE (bump)) and 07h) eq 04h)
     Counter = Counter + bump
  else
     .err <Non-constant value passed to BumpCounter>
  endif
endm

Extended Descriptor Bitmap (OPATTR Operator)

OPATTR OR-Expression

Syntax

OPATTR OR-Expression'

Description

The OPATTR operator returns a superset of the information returned by the .TYPE operator, which should be considered obsolete.

The OPATTR operator returns a word value bitmap that describes various attributes of its operand. The return value is 0 if the expression could not be correctly parsed or evaluated, otherwise the bitmap returned is formatted according to the following table:

A98	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0	BIT SET IF EXPRESSION
								1	Is a Direct-ExpressionType
							1		Is a Indirect-ExpressionType, an Indexed-ExpressionType, or a combination of both
						1			Is an Immediate-ExpressionType
					1				Is an Indirect-ExpressionType
				1					Is a Register-ExpressionType
			1						Was parsed and evaluated without error (no undefined symbols, etc.)
		1							Is relative to the SS Segment-Register
	1								Contains an External Reference
LLL									Language encoding (described below)

The LLL field (bits 8, 9, and A) comprise an enumerated value that describes the language attribute assigned to the expression as follows:

• 000 No language attribute used in expression
• 001 C
• 010 SYSCALL
• 011 STDCALL
• 100 PASCAL
• 101 FORTRAN
• 110 BASIC
• 111 OPTLINK

Constraints

This operator is not available in M510 mode.

Examples

L_MASK     equ 011100000000y               ; mask to isolate language bits
L_OPTLINK  equ 011100000000y               ; setting for OptLink calling convention
VerifyCallBack   macro   ProcName 
  if (((OPATTR (ProcName)) and L_MASK) ne L_OPTLINK)
     .err <Call-back routine must have OptLink linkage>
  endif
endm

Force Short Relative Address (SHORT Operator)

Syntax

SHORT Additive-Expression

Description

The SHORT operator forces the assembler to calculate the distance from the start of the next instruction to the target specified by the operand (given by Additive-Expression) to be less than 128 bytes away. This can cause the assembler to generate more efficient control transfer instructions when the target is a forward reference. By default, the assembler assumes that the code-relative target is of NEAR distance when the target is an unqualified forward reference.

Constraints

The Additive-Expression must evaluate to a Direct-ExpressionType.

Examples

  JMP     Forward                ; target unknown, NEAR jump generated
  JMP     SHORT Forward          ; force SHORT encoding
  .
  .                      ; fewer than 128 bytes of instructions
  .
Forward:                 ; definition of target

Bitwise OR Expression

Description

A Bitwise OR Expression is one where an optional binary bitwise OR operation between the left and right operands is performed and the result returned.

Syntax

OR-Expression: AND-Expression OR-Expression OR AND-Expression OR-Expression XOR AND-Expression

Bitwise Inclusive OR (OR Operator)

Syntax

OR-Expression OR AND-Expression

Description

The OR operator performs a binary bitwise OR operation on the left and right hand operands.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

One  EQU  1
Two  EQU  2

MOV  AX, One OR Two        ; moves 3 into AX

Bitwise Exclusive OR (XOR Operator)

Syntax

OR-Expression XOR AND-Expression

Description

The XOR operator performs a binary bitwise XOR operation on the left and right hand operands.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

Lower  EQU  0101y          ; 7h - binary radix suffix
Upper  EQU  1100y          ; Eh - binary radix suffix

MOV  AX, Upper XOR Lower   ; moves 1001 into AX

Bitwise AND Expression

Description

A Bitwise AND Expression is one where an optional binary bitwise AND operation between the left and right operands is performed and the result returned.

Syntax

AND-Expression:

NOT-Expression

AND-Expression AND NOT-Expression

Bitwise AND (AND Operator)

Syntax

AND-Expression AND NOT-Expression

Description

The AND operator performs a binary bitwise AND operation on the left and right hand operands.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

Lower  EQU  0111y           ; 7h - binary radix suffix
Upper  EQU  1110y           ; Eh - binary radix suffix

MOV  AX, Upper XOR Lower    ; moves 0110 into AX

Bitwise One's Complement Expression

Description

A Bitwise One's Complement Expression is one that performs an optional unary bitwise negation of its operand and returns the result.

Syntax

NOT-Expression: Relational-Expression NOT Relational-Expression

Bitwise One's Complement (NOT Operator)

Syntax

NOT Relational-Expression

Description

The NOT operator performs a unary bitwise negation on its operand.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

  Value  EQU 0111y          ; 7h - binary radix suffix

  MOV    EAX, NOT Value     ; moves FFFFFFF8 into EAX

Relational Expression

Description

A Relational Expression is one where an optional binary comparision operation between the left and right operands is performed and the result returned.

Syntax

Relational-Expression:

Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression EQ Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression NE Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression GT Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression GE Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression LT Additive-Expression

Relational-Expression LE Additive-Expression

Equal To (EQ Operator)

Syntax

Relational-Expression EQ Additive-Expression

Description

The EQ operator performs a binary logical comparision on the left and right hand operands. It returns true (all bits on) if they are equal, and false (all bits off) if they are not equal.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

  IF 1234 EQ 5678
    TRUE = 1
  ELSE
    TRUE = 0                ; Sets TRUE to 0
  ENDIF 

Not Equal To (NE Operator)

Syntax

Relational-Expression NE Additive-Expression

Description

The NE operator performs a binary logical comparision on the left and right hand operands. It returns true (all bits on) if they are not equal, and false (all bits off) if they are equal.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

IF 1234 NE 5678
    TRUE = 1                ; Sets TRUE to 1
ELSE
    TRUE = 0
ENDIF

Greater Than (GT Operator)

Syntax

Relational-Expression GT Additive-Expression

Description

The GT operator performs a binary logical comparision on the left and right hand operands. It returns true (all bits on) if the left operand is greater than the right operand, and false (all bits off) if it is not.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

IF 1234 GT 5678 
  TRUE = 1 
ELSE 
  TRUE = 0              ; Sets TRUE to 0
ENDIF

Greater Than or Equal To (GE Operator)

Syntax

Relational-Expression GE Additive-Expression

Description

The GE operator performs a binary logical comparision on the left and right hand operands. It returns true (all bits on) if the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand, and false (all bits off) if it is not.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

IF 1234 GE 1234 
    TRUE = 1                ; Sets TRUE to 1
ELSE 
    TRUE = 0 
ENDIF

Less Than (LT Operator)

Syntax

Relational-Expression LT Additive-Expression

Description

The LT operator performs a binary logical comparision on the left and right hand operands. It returns true (all bits on) if the left operand is less than the right operand, and false (all bits off) if it is not.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

  IF 1234 LT 5678
      TRUE = 1               ; Sets TRUE to 1
  ELSE
      TRUE = 0
  ENDIF

Less Than or Equal To (LE Operator)

Syntax

Relational-Expression LE Additive-Expression

Description

The LE operator performs a binary logical comparision on the left and right hand operands. It returns true (all bits on) if the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand, and false (all bits off) if it is not.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

  IF 1234 LE 1234
    TRUE = 1                  ; Sets TRUE to 1
  ELSE 
    TRUE = 0
  ENDIF

Additive Expression

Description

A Additive Expression is one where an optional binary additive arithmetic operation between the left and right operands is performed and the result returned.

Syntax

Additive-Expression:

Multiplicative-Expression

Additive-Expression + Multiplicative-Expression

Additive-Expression - Multiplicative-Expression

Addition (+ Operator)

Syntax

Additive-Expression + Multiplicative-Expression

Description

The + operator performs a binary addition operation on the left and right hand operands, and returns the result.

Constraints

One of the operands must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType. If one of the operands references an external identifier, then the other operand must be a Constant-ExpressionType without an external reference. Both operands must be of scalar type.

Examples

 VALUE = 100 + 11          ; sets VALUE to 111

Subtraction (- Operator)

Syntax

Additive-Expression - Multiplicative-Expression

Description

The - operator performs a binary subtraction operation on the left and right hand operands, and returns the result.

Constraints

The right operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType and reference no external identifiers. If both operands are relocatable, they must reside within the same segment, in which case the result is converted to a Absolute-ExpressionType. Both operands must be of scalar type.

Examples

 VALUE = 111 - 11           ; sets VALUE to 100

Multiplicative Expression

Description

A Multiplicative Expression is one where an optional binary multiplicative arithmetic operation between the left and right operands is performed and the result returned.

Syntax

Multiplicative-Expression:

Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression * Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression / Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression MOD Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression SHL Narrowed-Expression

Multiplicative-Expression SHR Narrowed-Expression

Multiplication (* Operator)

Syntax

Multiplicative-Expression * Narrowed-Expression

Description

The * operator performs a binary multiplication operation on the left and right hand operands, and returns the result.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

 VALUE = 9 * 3                 ; sets VALUE to 27

Division (/ Operator)

Syntax

Multiplicative-Expression / Narrowed-Expression

Description

The / operator performs a binary division operation on the left and right hand operands, and returns the result.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

 VALUE = 27 / 9                ; sets VALUE to 3

Remainder (MOD Operator)

Syntax

Multiplicative-Expression MOD Narrowed-Expression

Description

The MOD operator performs a binary modulus division operation on the left and right hand operands, and returns the remainder as the result.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

 VALUE = 18 MOD 4              ; sets VALUE to 2

Bitwise Left Shift (SHL Operator)

Syntax

Multiplicative-Expression SHL Narrowed-Expression

Description

The SHL operator shifts the bits in the left hand operand to the left by the number of bits specified in the right hand operand, and returns the result.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

 VALUE = 1111y SHL 4          ; sets VALUE to 11110000y

Bitwise Right Shift (SHR Operator)

Syntax

Multiplicative-Expression SHR Narrowed-Expression

Description

The SHR operator shifts the bits in the left hand operand to the right by the number of bits specified in the right hand operand, and returns the result.

Constraints

Each operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

 VALUE = 11110000y SHR 4      ; sets VALUE to 00001111y

Narrowed Expression

Description

A Narrowed Expression is one that performs an optional unary narrowing operation on its operand and returns the result.

Syntax

Narrowed-Expression:

Cast-Expression HIGH Cast-Expression

HIGHWORD Cast-Expression

LOW Cast-Expression

LOWWORD Cast-Expression

Upper 8 Bits of WORD Expression (HIGH Operator)

Syntax

HIGH Cast-Expression

Description

The HIGH operator returns the upper 8 bits of a 16-bit expression. Only bits 8-15 are returned, even if the magnitude of the operand exceeds 16 bits.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

 FIRST  = 1234h
 SECOND = HIGH FIRST        ; Sets SECOND to 12h

Upper 16 Bits of DWORD Expression (HIGHWORD Operator)

Syntax

HIGHWORD Cast-Expression

Description

The HIGHWORD operator returns the upper 16 bits of a 32-bit expression. Only bits 16-31 are returned, even if the magnitude of the operand exceeds 32 bits.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

This operator is not available in M510 mode.

Examples

 FIRST  = 12345678h 
 SECOND = HIGHWORD FIRST    ; Sets SECOND to 1234h

Lower 8 Bits of WORD Expression (LOW Operator)

Syntax

LOW Cast-Expression

Description

The LOW operator returns the lower 8 bits of its operand.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

 FIRST  = 1234h
 SECOND = LOW FIRST         ; Sets SECOND to 34h

Lower 16 Bits of DWORD Expression (LOWWORD Operator)

Syntax

LOWWORD Cast-Expression

Description

The LOWWORD operator returns the lower 16 bits of its operand.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

This operator is not available in #M510 mode.

Examples

 FIRST  = 12345678h
 SECOND = LOWWORD FIRST     ; Sets SECOND to 5678h

Type Conversion Expression

Description

A Type Conversion Expression is one that performs an optional type conversion operation on its operand and returns the result.

Syntax

Cast-Expression:

Element-Selection-Expression

OFFSET Cast-Expression

SEG Cast-Expression

THIS Element-Selection-Expression

TYPE Element-Selection-Expression

Cast-Expression PTR Cast-Expression

Cast-Expression : Cast-Expression

Address Offset (OFFSET Operator)

Description

The OFFSET operator returns the offset portion of its operand. For relocatable values, this is the offset into the segment or group to which the expression is relative.

Syntax

OFFSET Cast-Expression

Constraints

The operand may evaluate to any one of the following #ExpressionTypes:

• Absolute-ExpressionType
• Constant-ExpressionType
• Immediate-ExpressionType
• Direct-ExpressionType
• Indirect-ExpressionType

Examples

CodeLabel:
       MOV   AX, CodeLabel            ; illegal, no data at address 
       MOV   AX, OFFSET   CodeLabel   ; we want the address itself

Address Segment (SEG Operator)

Syntax

SEG Cast-Expression

Description

The SEG operator returns the segment or group to which a relocatable expression is relative.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to one of the following ExpressionTypes:

• Immediate-ExpressionType
• Direct-ExpressionType
• Indirect-ExpressionType
• Indexed-ExpressionType

Examples

DATA    SEGMENT 
Stuff   DB    ? 
        MOV   AX, SEG Stuff    ; This construct is
        MOV   AX, DATA         ; equivalent to this
DATA    ENDS

Address Alias (THIS Operator)

Syntax

THIS Element-Selection-Expression

Description

The THIS operator returns an operand whose:

• Relative Frame attribute is set to that of the current segment
• Displacement attribute is set to the current location counter
• Type Declaration attribute is set to that of the expression given by the Element-Selection-Expression operand.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Type-ExpressionType.

Examples

DATA      SEGMENT

ALIAS   EQU   THIS BYTE        ; reference this address as a byte
Stuff   DB    ? 
        MOV   AL, ALIAS        ; This construct is
        MOV   AL, Stuff        ; equivalent to this
DATA    ENDS

Datatype Extraction (TYPE Operator)

Syntax

TYPE Element-Selection-Expression

Description

The TYPE operator returns the Type-ExpressionType attribute of its operand.

Constraints

None

Examples

CODE    SEGMENT 
        ASSUME  CS:CODE, DS:CODE
Stuff   DB      ?                        ; TYPE Stuff is BYTE
        MOV     [BX],(TYPE Stuff) PTR 1  ; stores 1 as a BYTE at [BX]
CODE    ENDS

Type Conversion (PTR Operator)

Syntax

Cast-Expression PTR Cast-Expression

Description

The PTRoperator converts the right operand to the type specified by the left operand.

Constraints

The left operand must be a Type-ExpressionType.

Examples

CODE     SEGMENT 
         MOV  BYTE PTR [BX], 1    ; stores 1 as a BYTE at [BX]
CODE     ENDS

Segment Override (: Operator)

Syntax

Cast-Expression : Cast-Expression

Description

The : (colon) operator forces the right operand to have the Relative Frame attribute of the left operand.

Constraints

The left operand must evaluate to one of the following #ExpressionTypes:

• Register-ExpressionType where the Register Value attribute is that of a Segment-Register
• Immediate-ExpressionType where the Relative Frame attribute is that of a GroupName or SegmentName.

Examples

DATA       SEGMENT
Variable   DW    ?
DATA       ENDS

DGROUP     GROUP DATA, CODE

CODE       SEGMENT
  ASSUME   CS:CODE, DS:DGROUP
  MOV      AX, DGROUP:Variable         ; insure Variable is relative to DGROUP
  ASSUME   DS:NOTHING
  MOV      BX, CS:Variable             ; access Variable through CS register
CODE       ENDS

Element Selection Expression

Description

A Element Selection Expression is one that optionally selects a specific element of its operand and returns a reference to it.

Syntax

Element-Selection-Expression:

Sign-Expression]]

Element-Selection-Expression [Sign-Expression]

Element-Selection-Expression .Sign-Expression

Subscript ([] Operator)

Syntax

Element-Selection-Expression [ Sign-Expression ]

Description

The [] binary operator performs a subscripting (or indexing) operation between the operand to the left of the brackets and the operand enclosed within the brackets. This is a simple additive operation of BYTE granularity; the arithmetic performed is not influenced by the Operand Size of either operand.

The syntax for this operator describes a binary operation between the left hand expression and the bracketed expression. The bracketed expression is also subject to the same operations performed during the processing of a standalone Indirected-Expression as described in the section on Primary-Expressions.

Constraints

Only one of the operands may specify a relocatable value.

Examples

CODE    SEGMENT 
        ASSUME  CS:CODE, DS:CODE

Value    DB    0                         ;   Value [0]
         DB    1                         ;   Value [1]
         DB    2                         ;   Value [2]
         DB    3                         ;   Value [3]
         DB    4                         ;   Value [4] 

  MOV      AL, Value [3]        ;   load AL with the fourth byte at Value (3)
  MOV      BX, offset Value     ;   get address of Value 
  MOV      AL, [BX] [1] [2]     ;   also gets the fourth byte ( 3 ) 

CODE     ENDS

Structure/Union Field Selection (. Operator)

Syntax

Element-Selection-Expression . Sign-Expression

Description

The . (period) operator selects a structure or union field entry. It adds the left and right hand operands together and returns the result. The left operand should be an Indirect-ExpressionType, Indexed-ExpressionType, or Type-ExpressionType whose Type Declaration attribute resolves to that of a Structure-TypeName or Union-TypeName. The right operand should refer to a FieldName defined within the referenced type.

The Operand Size attribute of the result depends on the operands involved. If both operands have an operand size, a Structure-FieldName appearing as the right hand operand would override the operand size of the left operand and would dictate the operand size of the resulting expression.

Constraints

Only one of the operands may specify a relocatable value.

Examples

Number   STRUC
  One    DB   1
  Two    DW   2
Number   ENDS

; The following line is only allowed in MASM 5.10 mode ( OPTION OLDSTRUCTS ) 

  MOV   AX,[BX] .Two         ;  BX points to a "Number", get the "Two" entry 

; In other modes, "Two" is private to the "Number" structure type, so 
; one of the following methods are required : 

  MOV   AX,(Number PTR[BX]).Two  ; Explicit override
  MOV   AX,[BX] + Number.Two     ; Fully qualified reference
  ASSUME BX:Number               ; Associate BX with "Number"
  MOV   AX,[BX].Two              ; then original syntax is allowed

Unary Arithmetic Expression

Description

A Unary Arithmetic Expression is one that optionally alters the sign of its operand and returns the result.

Syntax

Sign-Expression:

Primary-Expression

-Primary-Expression

+Primary-Expression

Unary Minus (- Operator)

Syntax

- Primary-Expression

Description

The - operator makes its operand into a negative number and returns the result.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

Value  EQU  1

MOV  AX, -Value     ; move -1 into AX

Unary Plus (+ Operator)

Syntax

+ Primary-Expression

Description

The + operator returns its operand.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Constant-ExpressionType.

Examples

Value EQU 1 
MOV   AX,+Value  ; move 1 into AX

Primary Expression

Description

A Primary Expression is one that returns an expression operand.

Syntax

Primary-Expression:

Literal-Operand

Record-Constant

Identifier-Operand

Register-Operand

Integral-TypeName-Operand

Value-Substitution-Operand

LENGTH Identifier-Operand

LENGTHOF Identifier-Operand

MASK Identifier-Operand

SIZE Element-Selection-Expression

SIZEOF Element-Selection-Expression

WIDTH Identifier-Operand

Parenthesized-Expression

Indirected-Expression

Compound-Initializer

Literal Operand

Syntax

Literal-Operand:

Floating-Point-Literal

Integer-Literal

String-Literal

Description

The assembler accepts several types of literal values as operands within expressions. Literal-Operands are converted to #ExpressionTypes according to the following table:

Floating-Point-Literal	Floating-Point-ExpressionType
Integer-Literal	Absolute-ExpressionType
String-Literal	Absolute-ExpressionType if the string length is less than or equal to the current Address Size; a String-ExpressionType otherwise.

The context where the expression is used determines whether or not a particular type of literal is legal.

Constraints

Arithmetic operations cannot be performed on #Floating-Point-Literals, thus they cannot be the operand of a unary or binary operator.

Value Substitution Operand

Syntax

Value-Substitution-Operand:

Anonymous-Label-Alias

Location-Counter-Alias

Indeterminate-Value-Alias

FLAT

Description

These operands are used to retrieve specialized values that are calculated internally by the assembler.

The FLAT operator returns an expression whose #Relative Frame is set to that of the predefined FLAT pseudo-group.

Constraints

The FLAT operand is only active when a 32-bit processor has been selected.

Record Constant Operand

Syntax

Record-Constant:

Identifier-Operand < Field-List >

Identifier-Operand { Field-List }

Field-List:

Attribute-Expression

Field-List , Attribute-Expression

Description

A Record-Constant provides a method of calculating a single numeric result value from a list of Record-FieldName values, and combining them together according to the definition of the Record-TypeName given by the Identifier-Operand. The result value is a Constant-ExpressionType suitable for use as an instruction operand, or for assigning to a record variable.

The Record-TypeName given by the Identifier-operand determines how the Field-List will be evaluated. The Attribute-Expression entries are position-dependent, and are matched with the corresponding Record-FieldName entries from the Record-TypeName definition to determine their width and shift values. Attribute-Expression entries may be omitted, in which case the default values from the record definition are used in the calculation.

Constraints

The Identifier-Operand must resolve to a Record-TypeName.

Examples

 DATE_T   record   Year  : 7 = 0,   ; 0 is 1980
                   Month : 4 = 1,   ; January
                   Day   : 5 = 1    ; 1st
 
 CODE SEGMENT
   mov  AX,DATE_T  < >                       ; January 1st, 1980
   mov  AX,DATE_T  < 1996 - 1980, 12, 25 >   ; Christmas, 1996
   mov  AX,DATE_T  < 10h, 0Ch, 19h >         ; equivalent values in hex
   mov  AX,DATE_T  < 10000y, 1100y, 11001y > ; equivalent values in binary
   mov  AX,2199h                             ; equivalent value manually coded
   mov  AX,0010000110011001y                 ; and in binary
 ;         YYYYYYYMMMMDDDDD
 CODE   ENDS

Register Operand

Syntax

Register-Operand:

Processor-Register

Description

Processor registers are valid expression operands. The context where the expression is used determines the allowable register operands.

Constraints

The currently selected processor dictates whether or not a register is visible to the expression evaluator.

Identifier Operand

Syntax

Identifier-Operand:

Identifier

Description

When an Identifier is used in an expression, it returns a value according to its Identifier-Type, as shown in the following table:

Identifier-Type	VALUE RETURNED
Numeric-EquateName	The value originally assigned to the equate.
Structure-FieldName	The offset in bytes from the beginning of the structure.
Union-FieldName	The offset in bytes from the beginning of the union (always 0).
Record-FieldName	The shift-count required to reach the field within the record.
Record-TypeName	The mask-value that isolates defined record fields from undefined fields.
Structure-TypeName	Zero if mode is M510, otherwise the size of the structure in bytes (the operand size of the structure type).
Union-TypeName	The size of the union in bytes (the operand size of the union type).
Typedef-TypeName	The operand size of the underlying data-type represented by the Typedef-TypeName.
GroupName	A Relative Frame attribute that represents the group, and a Displacement value of zero.
SegmentName	A Relative Frame attribute that represents the segment (or the group to which it belongs), and a Displacement value of zero if the mode is M510, or the current segment offset otherwise.
LabelName	The Relative Frame attribute where the label is defined, and the segment offset value of the label.

Constraints

The Identifier must resolve to one of the following Identifier-Types:

• Numeric-EquateName
• FieldName
• GroupName
• LabelName
• SegmentName
• UserDefined-TypeName

Integral Type-Name Operand

Syntax

Integral-TypeName-Operand:

Scalar-TypeName

Distance-TypeName

Description

When an Integral-TypeName-Operandis used in an expression, it is converted to a Type-ExpressionType. If used in a numeric context, the following numeric values are returned:

Integral-TypeName-Operand	VALUE RETURNED
Scalar-TypeName	The operand-size of the type in bytes.
Distance-TypeName	If mode is M510, NEAR returns FFFF, and FAR returns FFFE. Otherwise, NEAR and FAR are resolved and the values returned are: NEAR16=FF02, NEAR32=FF04, FAR16=FF05, FAR32=FF06.

Constraints

The NEAR32 and FAR32 keywords are only valid if a 32-bit processor has been selected.

Number of Data Elements (LENGTH Operator)

Syntax

LENGTH Identifier-Operand

Description

The LENGTH operator returns the number of data elements allocated to the operand. When applied to a variable initialized with a series of comma-separated expressions (elements), only the length of the first element is considered.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Data-LabelName.

Number of Data Elements (LENGTHOF Operator)

Syntax

LENGTHOF Identifier-Operand

Description

The LENGTHOF operator returns the number of data elements allocated to the operand.

Constraints

The operand must evaluate to a Data-LabelName.

This operator is not available in M510 mode.

Examples

<none>

Record or Field Bit-Mask (MASK Operator)

Syntax

MASK Identifier-Operand

Description

The MASK operator returns the bit mask required to isolate a field within a record.

Constraints

The Identifier-Operand must resolve to a Record-TypeName or Record-FieldName; otherwise the result is zero.

Size of Variable in Bytes (SIZE Operator)

Syntax

SIZE Element-Selection-Expression

Description

The SIZE operator returns the number of bytes allocated to the operand. When applied to a variable initialized with a series of comma-separated expressions (elements), only the size of the first element is considered.

Constraints

None

Size of Variable in Bytes (SIZEOF Operator)

Syntax

SIZEOF Element-Selection-Expression

Description

The SIZEOF operator returns the number of bytes allocated to the operand.

Constraints

This operator is not available in M510 mode.

Record or Field Width (WIDTH Operator)

Syntax

WIDTH Identifier-Operand

Description

The WIDTHoperator returns the width of a record or a record field name.

Constraints

The Identifier-Operand must resolve to a Record-TypeName or Record-FieldName; otherwise the result is zero.

Precedence (() Operator)

Syntax

Parenthesized-Expression:

( Attribute-Expression )

Description

Parentheses forces the Attribute-Expression operand to be evaluated at a higher precedence level.

Examples

Value =   2 + 3   * 4     ; Value = 14 
Value = ( 2 + 3 ) * 4     ; Value = 20

Indirection ([] Operator)

Syntax

Indirected-Expression:

[ Attribute-Expression ]

Description

During evaluation of the Attribute-Expression, the [](indirection) operator will convert a Register-ExpressionType to a Indexed-ExpressionType by moving the Register Value attribute to either the Base Register or Index Register attribute field as appropriate for the register(s) referenced in the expression. This operation allows values contained in the processor registers to be used during effective address calculation at application run time.

Constraints

See the Indexed-ExpressionType section for information on registers that are valid for use in this context.

Examples

CODE      SEGMENT 
          ASSUME   CS : CODE ,   DS : CODE 
Value     DW     0 
          MOV    BX , offset   Value        ; load the address of Value into BX
          MOV    [ BX ] , BX                ; store the contents of BX into the
                                            ; memory location addressed by [BX]
CODE       ENDS

Compound Initializer List (<> Operator)

Syntax

Compound-Initializer:

< Initializer-List >

{ Initializer-List }

Initializer-List:

Duplicative-Expression

Initializer-List , Duplicative-Expression

Description

The <> (or {}) operator provides a way of specifying a list of expressions to be used for initializing complex (multi-field) variables such as records or structures.

The <> operator encloses a list of comma-separated expressions; individual expressions are optional, but are also positional with respect to the record or structure fields they are intended to initialize. Commas must therefore be used to maintain field positions if empty expressions are encountered in the list.

The initializer list itself may also be left out entirely for those cases where a variable allocation will use the default initializers provided in the record or structure definition (the <>or {} themselves are still required).

Examples

Numbers   STRUCT
  One     DB     0
  Two     DW     0
  Three   DB     0
  Four    DD     0
Numbers   ENDS

First    Numbers   < >               ;  empty initializer list
Second   Numbers   < 1, 2, 3, 4 >    ;  override all defaults
Third    Numbers   < 1 >             ;  override first entry only
Fourth   Numbers   < 1, , , 4 >      ;  override first and last entries

Expression Evaluation

After an expression is parsed and checked for syntax errors, it is evaluated. During evaluation, all calculations and conversions are performed on the operands according to the operators that are applied to them. The final result is a collection of #Expression-Attributes, to which an ExpressionType is assigned.

Expression Attributes

This section describes the Expression-Attributesthat are associated with an expression after it is evaluated.

Address Size

If an expression refers to an effective address, then it also has an associated #address size. The following #ExpressionTypes normally reference an effective address, and thus have an associated address size:

• Immediate-ExpressionType
• Direct-ExpressionType
• Indirect-ExpressionType
• Indexed-ExpressionType

The address size can be either 2 (USE16) or 4 (USE32). For an expression that references a label, the address size of the segment where the label is defined determines the address size of the expression.

Operand Size

The Operand Size of an expression can be set explicitly using the #Type Conversion (PTR Operator), or it may be a side-effect inherited from the type of data referenced in the expression. The following table describes the operand sizes that will be assigned when an identifier is referenced in an expression:

REFERENCE	OPERAND SIZE
8-Bit-Register	1
16-Bit-Register	2
32-Bit-Register	4
Segment-Register	2
Control-Register	4
Debug-Register	4
Test-Register	4
MMX-Register	8
Floating-Point-Register	10
BYTE	1
SBYTE	1
WORD	2
SWORD	2
DWORD	4
SDWORD	4
REAL4	4
FWORD	6
QWORD	8
REAL8	8
TBYTE	10
REAL10	10
NEAR	2 or 4
NEAR16	2
NEAR32	4
FAR	4 or 6
FAR16	4
FAR32	6
Numeric-EquateName	Inherited from equate expression
GroupName	2
SegmentName	2
Code-LabelName	SIZE (TYPE Code-LabelName)
Data-LabelName	SIZE (TYPE Data-LabelName)
Structure-FieldName	SIZE Structure-FieldName
Record-TypeName	SIZE Record-TypeName
Structure-TypeName	SIZE Structure-TypeName
Union-TypeName	SIZE Union-TypeName

The Operand Size is 0 for all other identifier types.

Displacement

The Displacement value in an expression is the final calculated value of all numeric quantities, and must be a scalar value. It may also be a reference to a relocatable address, in which case the expression will also have a Relative Frame and/or an External Reference attribute. A Displacement may be used in the calculation of an effective address, either alone or in combination with a Base Register and/or an Index Register.

Relative Frame

The Relative Frame attribute will be present if the expression contains a direct or indirect reference to any of the following #Identifier-Types:

• GroupName
• LabelName
• SegmentName

The Relative Frame attribute indicates that the expression is relocatable, and specifies the GroupName or SegmentName to which the expression is relative.

External Reference

The External Reference attribute will be present if the expression references any external identifiers.

Register Value

The Register Value attribute specifies the value of the Processor-Register referenced in a Register-ExpressionType.

Base Register

The Base Register attribute specifies the value for the base register used in an Indexed-ExpressionType.

Index Register

The Index Register attribute specifies the value for the index register used in an Indexed-ExpressionType.

Scale Factor

The Scale Factor attribute specifies the scaling value used (if any) in an Indexed-ExpressionType.

Type Declaration

The Type Declaration attribute specifies the type of data referenced in the expression. This is the value extracted from the expression when it is used as the left operand of the #Type Conversion (PTR Operator).

Expression Types

Description

An ExpressionType is assigned to every expression during evaluation. The ExpressionType is used to determine whether or not an expression is legal for the context in which it is used. The type of an expression is influenced primarily by the operands that are used, but the use of expression operators also play an important part in determining the type of an expression.

Definition

ExpressionType:

Absolute-ExpressionType

Constant-ExpressionType

Direct-ExpressionType

Floating-Point-ExpressionType

Immediate-ExpressionType

Indirect-ExpressionType

Indexed-ExpressionType

Register-ExpressionType

String-ExpressionType

Type-ExpressionType

Duplicated-ExpressionType

Compound-ExpressionType

Absolute Expression Type

An Absolute-ExpressionType is an expression that evaluates to an integer quantity. Its value must be representable using one of the following types of scalar data:

• BYTE
• SBYTE
• WORD
• SWORD
• DWORD
• SDWORD
• FWORD
• QWORD
• TBYTE

The following restrictions apply to an Absolute-ExpressionType:

• It cannot be relocatable (it may not contain references to a GroupName, SegmentName or LabelName).
• It cannot reference any external symbols.
• It cannot contain any forward references.

Constant Expression Type

A Constant-ExpressionType is an Absolute-ExpressionType with the following restrictions relaxed:

• It may contain forward references to identifiers defined later in the source stream.
• It may reference a single external symbol, provided that the symbol was declared in an EXTERN directive with the ABS attribute.

Immediate Expression Type

An Immediate-ExpressionType has all the properties of a Constant-ExpressionType with the following restrictions relaxed:

• It may contain references to a GroupName, SegmentName or LabelName(it may be relocatable).
• It may reference a relocatable external symbol.

An Immediate-ExpressionType must not be larger than 32 bits in magnitude; its value must be representable using one of the following types of scalar data:

• BYTE
• SBYTE
• WORD
• SWORD
• DWORD
• SDWORD

Direct Expression Type

A Direct-ExpressionType is an expression that references a Code-LabelName. It can be used directly in code-relative instructions without conversion. There is no data type associated with the address that a Direct-ExpressionType represents, therefore It may not be used in a data-relative instruction without first being explicitly converted to another expression type.

Indirect Expression Type

An Indirect-ExpressionType is an expression that references a Data-LabelName. It can be used directly in data-relative instructions without conversion to another expression type.

Indexed Expression Type

An Indexed-ExpressionType is an expression that calculates an effective memory address using the contents of a Base-Register, an Index-Register, or both. A Processor-Register must first be converted to a Base-Register or Index-Register by specifying it as the operand of the [[#Indirection ([] Operator)]]before the expression can be converted to an Indexed-ExpressionType.

When calculating a 16-bit effective address, only the BP and BX registers may be used as Base-Registers, and only the DI and SI registers may be used as Index-Registers.

When calculating a 32-bit effective address, only the EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, EDI, ESI, EBP, and ESP registers may be used as Base-Registers, and only the EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, EDI, ESI, and EBP registers may be used as Index-Registers.

Note: Only a single Base-Register and a single Index-Register may be used in a given expression.

On 80386 (and higher) processors, the #Multiplication (* Operator) may be used with an Index-Registeroperand and an Absolute-ExpressionType operand to establish a scaling factor that is applied to the Index-Register during effective address calculation. The scaling factor effectively causes the Index-Register to be multiplied by a fixed value at run time. The scaling Expression must evaluate to 1 (no scale factor), 2, 4, or 8.

A Direct-ExpressionType or an Indirect-ExpressionType may be a sub-expression of an Indexed-ExpressionType.

Register Expression Type

A Register-ExpressionType is an expression that specifies a single Processor-Register.

String Expression Type

A String-ExpressionType is an expression that specifies a single String- Literal.

Floating-Point Expression Type

A Floating-Point-ExpressionType is an expression that specifies a single Floating-Point-Literal.

Type Expression Type

A Type-ExpressionTypeis an expression that specifies one of the following:

• A Scalar-TypeName
• A Distance-TypeName
• A UserDefined-TypeName

Compound Expression Type

A Compound-ExpressionType evaluates to a list of (possibly nested) expressions collected together as a unit by the #Compound Initializer List ( <> Operator). A Compound-ExpressionTypeis used to initialize #aggregate data types (such as records, structures, and unions) and #vector data types (arrays).

Duplicated Expression Type

A Duplicated-ExpressionType evaluates to an expression that is to be duplicated (repeated) a specified number of times. This type of expression is created using the #Duplicative Initialization (DUP Operator).

Operand Expression Type

An Operand-ExpressionType consists of those #ExpressionTypes that are valid for use as operands in processor instructions. The following ExpressionTypes are not valid for use as an Operand-ExpressionType:

• Compound-ExpressionType
• Duplicated-ExpressionType
• A String-ExpressionType is only valid as an Operand-ExpressionType if it is short enough to be converted to an Absolute-ExpressionType having an Operand Size less than or equal to the current Address Size setting.

Operand-ExpressionType:

Absolute-ExpressionType

Constant-ExpressionType

Immediate-ExpressionType

Direct-ExpressionType

Indirect-ExpressionType

Indexed-ExpressionType

Register-ExpressionType

String-ExpressionType

Floating-Point-ExpressionType

Type-ExpressionType

Description

An Operand-ExpressionTypeconsists of those #ExpressionTypes that are valid for use as operands in processor instructions. The following ExpressionTypes are not valid for use as an Operand-ExpressionType:

• Compound-ExpressionType
• Duplicated-ExpressionType

A String-ExpressionType is only valid as an Operand-ExpressionType if it is short enough to be converted to an Absolute-ExpressionType having an Operand Size less than or equal to the current Address Size setting.

Definition

Operand-ExpressionType:

Absolute-ExpressionType

Constant-ExpressionType

Immediate-ExpressionType

Direct-ExpressionType

Indirect-ExpressionType

Indexed-ExpressionType

Register-ExpressionType

String-ExpressionType

Floating-Point-ExpressionType

Type-ExpressionType

Initializer Expression Type

An Initializer-ExpressionType consists of those #ExpressionTypes that are valid for use in initializing variables. The following ExpressionTypes are not valid Initializer-ExpressionTypes:

• Indexed-ExpressionType
• Register-ExpressionType

Initializer-ExpressionType:

Scalar-Initializer-ExpressionType

Compound-ExpressionType

Duplicated-ExpressionType

Scalar-Initializer-ExpressionType:

Absolute-ExpressionType

Constant-ExpressionType

Immediate-ExpressionType

Direct-ExpressionType

Indirect-ExpressionType

String-ExpressionType

Floating-Point-ExpressionType

Type-ExpressionType

Description

An Initializer-ExpressionType consists of those #ExpressionTypes that are valid for use in initializing variables. The following ExpressionTypes are not valid Initializer-ExpressionTypes:

• Indexed-ExpressionType
• Register-ExpressionType

Definition

Initializer-ExpressionType:

Scalar-Initializer-ExpressionType

Compound-ExpressionType

Duplicated-ExpressionType

Scalar-Initializer-ExpressionType:

Absolute-ExpressionType

Constant-ExpressionType

Immediate-ExpressionType

Direct-ExpressionType

Indirect-ExpressionType

String-ExpressionType

Floating-Point-ExpressionType

Type-ExpressionType

Text Preprocessor

The text preprocessor is a functional unit within the assembler that performs the text preprocessing translation phase. During text preprocessing, the following actions are performed:

1. Language Elements are recognized.
2. Text equates and macros are expanded.
3. Macro directives and conditional assembly directives are recognized and processed.
4. The preprocessed output is passed on to the assembler for final processing.

This section also describes the various types of preprocessor directives:

Type	Function	Directives
Conditional Assembly	Tests for a specified condition and assembles a block of statements if the condition is true.	IF IFB IFDEF IFDIFI IFE IFIDN IFNB IFNDEF IF1 IF2 ELSE ENDIF
Text Equate	Allows assignment of simple text strings to a symbolic name. Provides functions for expanding and operating on the values.	CATSTR EQU INSTR SIZESTR SUBSTR
Macro	Provides text processing that is done sequentially at assembly time. By the end of assembly, ALP expands all macros and assembles the resulting text into object code.	ENDM EXITM FOR FORC IRP IRPC LOCAL MACRO PURGE REPEAT REPT
Miscellaneous	Miscellaneous text processing functions.	COMMENT ECHO %OUT INCLUDE

Text Operators

Description

The #Text Preprocessor recognizes certain punctuator characters as text operators. The programmer may use these operators to force the Text Preprocessor to perform various operations such as delineating text, expanding arguments, and converting expressions into their text representations.

Syntax

Text-Operator:

Literal-Character-Operator

Literal-Text-Operator

Text-Expansion-Operator

Text-Substitution-Operator

Literal Character Operator (!)

Syntax

Literal-Character-Operator:

! any printable character

Description

When you use an exclamation point (!) in an operand, ALP treats the next character literally. (!) is typically used to prevent the assembler from recognizing and acting upon special characters such as the semicolon (;) or the ampersand (&), forcing them to appear as normal data characters.

Constraints

The Literal-Character-Operator has no effect when used inside of a String-Literal.

Examples

In this example, use of the ! in the second macro argument prevents the assembler from interpreting the rest of the line as a comment:

MACRONAME   First, !; NonComment, Third              ; Comment

Literal Text Operator (<>)

Syntax

Literal-Text-Operator:

< Char-Sequence >

Char-Sequence

any printable character

Char-Sequence any printable character

Description

The literal-text operator directs the assembler to treat Char-Sequence as a single literal element regardless of whether it contains commas, spaces, or other separators. The operator is most often used with macro calls and the FOR directive to ensure that values in a parameter list are treated as a single parameter.

The literal-text operator can also be used to force ALP to treat other special characters such as the semicolon (;) or the ampersand (&) literally. For example, the semicolon inside angle brackets (<>) becomes a semicolon, not a comment indicator.

ALP removes one set of angle brackets each time the parameter is used in a macro. When using nested macros, you will need to supply as many sets of angle brackets as there are levels of nesting. The assembler recognizes nested occurrences of text literals.

Examples

The following example illustrates how to pass arbitrary text to a macro as a single parameter:

MACRONAME   First, <Second Argument>, <Third, <Nested>, Argument>

The macro will receive three separate arguments:

1. First
2. Second Argument
3. Third, <Nested>, Argument

Notice that the outermost set of angle brackets were removed from the second and third arguments.

Text Expansion Operator (%)

Syntax

Text-Expansion-Operator:

% 2nd through Nth token on line

% Text-EquateName

% Expression

Description

The % Text-Expansion-Operator has different effects depending upon the context in which it is used. Its primary purpose is convert various sources of information into text literals that may in turn be passed to macros as arguments.

The % Text-Expansion-Operator causes the following types of conversions:

Line Expansion

When used as the first token on the line, the % operator forces expansion of Text-EquateNames in contexts where they would otherwise be left unexpanded. Text-EquateNames passed as arguments to macros are not automatically expanded; this is one context where the % operator is useful.

Expansion of a Text Equate Operand

As with Line Expansion, the % operator may be used within the body of a line to expand individual Text-EquateNames. This can be useful when expansion of all Text-EquateNames on the line is not desired.

Conversion of Numeric Expression to Text

If the Text-Expansion-Operatoris not the first token on the line or immediately followed by a Text-EquateName, then the argument of the % operator is assumed to be an Expression, which is evaluated and converted to the text representation of its value. This is useful when the need arises to pass the text representation of a number to a macro.

Constraints

When the % Expression form of the expansion operator is used, the Expression must evaluate to an Immediate-ExpressionType.

Examples

MakErr       MACRO       X 
LB           =           0 
             REPEAT      X 
LB           =           LB + 1 
             MakLib      % LB 
             ENDM        ; ; End of REPEAT
             ENDM        ; ; End of MACRO
MakLib       MACRO       Y 
Err & Y :    DB     ' Error    & Y ' ,0 
             ENDM 

             MakErr   3 
Err1 :    DB    ' Error   1 ' ,0
Err2 :    DB    ' Error   2 ' ,0
Err3 :    DB    ' Error   3 ' ,0

Text Substitution Operator (&)

Syntax

Text-Substitution-Operator:

Macro-ParameterName &

& Macro-ParameterName

Description

An ampersand (&) is used in the body of a macro to force the substitution of a Macro-ParameterName with the value of its argument during expansion of the macro.

Constraints

The assembler does not substitute a Macro-ParameterName that is in a quoted string or not preceded by a delimiter in the expansion unless it is immediately preceded by an ampersand (&).

It is necessary to separate a Macro-ParameterName from other Identifer-Characters with an ampersand (&) before any substitution or paste operations are performed.

Examples

ErrGen    MACRO     X 
Error &X: push      bx 
ABX       mov       BX, "A"; 
AB &X     mp        ERROR 
          ENDM

The statement ErrGen A produces this code:

ErrorA :   push     bx 
ABX        mov      BX , "A"; 
ABA        jmp      ERROR 

Preprocessor Tokens

Syntax

Preprocessing-Token:

Identifier

Text-Literal

FileName

Comment

Description

During the text preprocessing translation phase, certain conditions will cause the preprocessor to convert raw #Language Elements (#Tokens) into Preprocessing-Tokens. The act of text preprocessing typically causes Preprocessing-Tokens to either be removed from the input stream or converted back into Tokens before being passed on to the assembler for final processing.

Text Literals

Syntax

Text-Literal:

operand of Literal-Character-Operator

operand of Literal-Text-Operator

Description

A Text-Literal is a single unit of text that is used by the #Text Preprocessor in many different text handling contexts. In some contexts ( such as the processing of arguments to be passed to a macro), normal language #Tokens are implicitly treated as Text-Literals, provided they are not a delimiter character such as a comma or a blank. In other contexts, it may be necessary to explicitly convert a unit of text to a Text-Literal using the Literal-Text-Operator.

Constraints

A normal language Token is never implicitly considered to be a Text-Literal if a Text-Literal is explicitly required in the syntax of the construct being parsed.

File Names

Syntax

FileName:

FileName-Text

Text-Literal

FileName-Text:

FileName-Character

FileName-Text FileName-Character

FileName-Character:

any printable character except blank (ASCII 32)

Description

FileName arguments may be coded as an arbitrary sequence of printable characters, or as a Text-Literal; use the Text-Literal form if the FileName is to contain embedded spaces or other special characters.

If path information is included in the FileName, you can separate the individual directory names with either the back slash (\) or the forward slash (/) and they will be treated identically by the assembler.

Examples

  INCLUDE      <inc\macros.inc> 
  INCLUDELIB   os2386.lib

Comments

Comments are language elements that have significance only to the programmer and not to the assembler. Comments are effectively removed from the input stream during the text preprocessing phase.

There are two classes of comments recognized by ALP:

• Comments that start with a character sequence and continue to the end of the line (EndOfLine-Comment)

• Comments that start with a character sequence and continue until the occurrence of another character sequence (Block-Comment). See the #COMMENT directive for a description of #Block-Comments.

There are two types of EndOfLine-Comments:

Macro-Comment

Macro-Comments (beginning with two semicolons) do not appear in the listing output even when the .LALL directive is used. Use of Macro-Comments can significantly reduce the amount of memory workspace used by the definition of a macro. As a macro definition is read, Macro-Comments are discarded and not entered into the macro definition, whereas NonMacro-Comments are treated as normal text and are retained.

NonMacro-Comment

NonMacro-Comment (beginning with a single semicolon) are preserved in macro definitions and appear in the listing output during macro expansions.

Syntax

Comment:

EndOfLine-Comment

Block-Comment

EndOfLine-Comment:

NonMacro-Comment

Macro-Comment

NonMacro-Comment:

; Char-Sequence

Macro-Comment:

;; Char-Sequence

Char-Sequence:

any printable character

Char-Sequence any printable character

#Block-Comment:

See the #COMMENT directive

Description

Comments are language elements that have significance only to the programmer and not to the assembler. Comments are effectively removed from the input stream during the text preprocessing phase.

There are two classes of comments recognized by ALP:

• Comments that start with a character sequence and continue to the end of the line (EndOfLine-Comment)
• Comments that start with a character sequence and continue until the occurrence of another character sequence (Block-Comment). See the #COMMENT directive for a description of #Block-Comments.

There are two types of EndOfLine-Comments:

Macro-Comment

Macro-Comments (beginning with two semicolons) do not appear in the listing output even when the .LALL directive is used. Use of Macro-Comments can significantly reduce the amount of memory workspace used by the definition of a macro. As a macro definition is read, Macro-Comments are discarded and not entered into the macro definition, whereas NonMacro-Comments are treated as normal text and are retained.

NonMacro-Comment

NonMacro-Comment (beginning with a single semicolon) are preserved in macro definitions and appear in the listing output during macro expansions.

Example

The following are examples of EndOfLine-Comments:

; Comments may be on a line all by themselves. They can be empty ... 
; 
                        ; They don't have to start in the first column
BumpCount MACRO Amount  ; They can appear to the right of statements
  Count = Count + Amount       ; This appears in macro expansions
  $Total = $Total + Amount     ;; This does not, discarded during definition
ENDM

Text Arguments

Many preprocessing directives operate on sequences of raw text characters called Text-Arguments. A Text-Argumentmay be specified using any one of several methods:

• Specifying the text directly using a raw Text-Literal.
• Using the Text-Expansion-Operator to convert a numeric expression to its text representation.
• Using a Text-EquateName in those contexts where a Text-Argumentis expected. In this case the preprocessor will automatically resolve the Text-EquateName and use its value as the Text-Argument.

Text-Argument:

Text-Literal

% Expression

Text-EquateName

Description

Many preprocessing directives operate on sequences of raw text characters called Text-Arguments. A Text-Argumentmay be specified using any one of several methods:

• Specifying the text directly using a raw Text-Literal.
• Using the Text-Expansion-Operator to convert a numeric expression to its text representation.
• Using a Text-EquateName in those contexts where a Text-Argument is expected. In this case the preprocessor will automatically resolve the Text-EquateName and use its value as the Text-Argument.

Syntax

Text-Argument:

Text-Literal

% Expression

Text-EquateName

Conditional Assembly Directives

At assembly time, ALP evaluates conditional assembly directives, assembling if the conditions are true. You can use conditional assembly directives when you want to test for a specified condition and assemble a block of statements if the condition is true. The #IFxx and #ENDIF directives enclose the statements to be considered for conditional assembly. The optional #ELSEIFxx and #ELSE blocks follow the #IFxx directive. There are many forms of the #IFxx and #ELSEIFxx directives.

This section describes the following conditional assembly directives:

#IF

#IFB

#IFDEF

#IFDIF

#IFDIFI

#IFE

#IFIDN

#IFIDNI

#IFNB

#IFNDEF

#IF1

#IF2

#ELSE

#ENDIF

IFxx (Begin Primary Conditional Block)

You can use each IFxxconditional directive with the #ELSExx, #ELSE and #ENDIF directives to provide the statements to be considered for conditional assembly. ALP assembles the statements following the #IFxx directive only if this condition is true.

Syntax

IFxx   operand
   .
   .
   .
[ ELSEIFxx ]   ( optional )
   .
   .
   .
[ ELSE ]   ( optional )
   .
   .
   .
ENDIF

Remarks

The following directives are members of the IFxx family:

• IF
• IFB
• IFDEF
• IFDIF
• IFDIFI
• IFE
• IFIDN
• IFIDNI
• IFNB
• IFNDEF
• IF1
• IF2

You can nest the conditional directives to any level. They are not limited to use within a macro. The assembler must know any operand to a conditional on pass one to avoid errors and incorrect evaluation.

IF (If Expression is True)

IF starts a conditional assembly statement, which is ended by the corresponding #ENDIF conditional assembly directive. Each IF directive must be ended by a matching ENDIF directive.

Syntax

IF Expression 
    .
    .
    .
[ ELSEIFxx ]   (optional)
    . 
    . 
    .
[ ELSE ]   (optional)
    .
    .
    .
ENDIF

Remarks

If the #IFxx conditional assembly statement is not ended by an #ENDIF directive, an unterminated conditional message is produced by the assembler. An ENDIF without a matching IF causes an error. ENDIF does not have an operand.

Note: The conditional directives can be nested to any level. They are not limited to use within a macro. Any operand to a conditional must be known on pass 1 to avoid errors and incorrect evaluation.

Example

IF   debug
     EXTERN   dump:FAR
     EXTERN   trace:FAR
     EXTERN   breakpoint:FAR
ENDIF

IFB (If Argument is Blank)

This is true if #Text-Argument is blank (contains no characters).

Syntax

IFB Text-Argument

Remarks

A #Text-Argument must be specified, the contents of which are checked for the presence of characters. An error is generated if a Text-Argument is not supplied.

IFDEF (If Identifier is Defined)

This is true if #Identifier has been defined as a label, variable, or symbol.

Syntax

IFDEF Identifier

IFDIF (If Arguments Are Different)

This is true if #Text-Argument-1 and Text-Argument-2 are different in a case-sensitive comparison.

Syntax

IFDIF Text-Argument-1, Text-Argument-2

Remarks

Both Text-Argument arguments must be specified. An error is generated if a either argument is not supplied.

Example

In the following example:

IFDIF <EAGLES>,<Eagles>;
  value = 1
ENDIF

the condition would be true; the arguments are different because they are compared with a case-sensitive algorithm.

IFDIFI (If Arguments Are Spelled Differently)

This is true if #Text-Argument-1 and Text-Argument-2 are different in a case-insensitive comparison.

Syntax

IFDIFI Text-Argument-1, Text-Argument-2

Remarks

Both Text-Argument arguments must be specified. An error is generated if a either argument is not supplied.

Example

In the following example:

IFDIFI <EAGLES>, <Eagles>
  value = 1
ENDIF

the condition would be false; the arguments are not different because they are compared using a case-insensitive algorithm.

IFE (If Expression is Not True)

This is true if expression is 0.

Syntax

IFE   Expression 

IFIDN (If Arguments Are Identical)

This is true if #Text-Argument-1 and Text-Argument-2 are identical in a case -sensitive comparison.

Syntax

IFIDN   Text-Argument - 1, Text-Argument - 2

Remarks

Both Text-Argument arguments must be specified. An error is generated if a either argument is not supplied.

Example

In the following example:

IFIDN   <EAGLES>, <Eagles>; 
  value   =   1 
ENDIF

the condition would be false; the arguments are not identical because they are compared using a case-insensitive algorithm.

IFIDNI (If Arguments Are Spelled Identically)

This is true if #Text-Argument-1 and Text-Argument-2 are identical in a case -insensitive comparison.

Syntax

IFIDNI   Text-Argument - 1, Text-Argument - 2

Remarks

Both Text-Argument arguments must be specified. An error is generated if a either argument is not supplied.

Example

In the following example:

IFIDNI <EAGLES>, <Eagles>
  value = 1
ENDIF

the condition would be true; the arguments are identical because they are compared using a case-insensitive algorithm.

IFNB (If Argument is Not Blank)

This is true if Text-Argument is not blank (characters are present).

Syntax

IFNB Text-Argument

Remarks

A Text-Argument must be specified, the contents of which are checked for the presence of characters. An error is generated if a Text-Argument is not supplied.

IFNDEF (If Identifier is Not Defined)

This is true if symbol has not yet been defined as a label, variable, or symbol.

Syntax

IFNDEF symbol

IF1 (If Assembling On Pass 1)

This is true on pass one.

Syntax

IF1

Remarks

IF1 does not have an operand.

IF2 (If Assembling On Pass 2)

This is true on pass two.

Syntax

IF2 

Remarks

IF2does not have an operand.

ELSEIFxx/ELSE (Begin Alternate Conditional Block)

Each conditional directive can be used with the ELSE directive to provide the statements to be considered for conditional assembly. The ELSE directive allows the assembly of the statements following it when the #IFxx condition or intervening ELSEIFxx conditions are false.

Syntax

IFxx 
    . 
    . 
    . 
[ ELSEIFxx ]   ( optional ) 
    . 
    . 
    . 
[ ELSE ]   ( optional ) 
    . 
    . 
    . 
ENDIF 

Remarks

There is a corresponding ELSEIFxx directive to match all forms of the #IFxx family of directives:

• #ELSEIF
• #ELSEIFB
• #ELSEIFDEF
• #ELSEIFDIF
• #ELSEIFDIFI
• #ELSEIFE
• #ELSEIFIDN
• #ELSEIFIDNI
• #ELSEIFNB
• #ELSEIFNDEF
• #ELSEIF1
• #ELSEIF2

For information about the meaning of the conditional tests performed by the ELSEIFxx directives, refer to the definitions for the corresponding #IFxx directives.

Any number of ELSEIFxx blocks may be used within a given IFxx statement. Only one ELSE block is permitted for a given IFxx. A conditional directive with more than one ELSE or an ELSE without a conditional directive causes an error. ELSE does not have an operand.

Note: The conditional directives can be nested to any level. They are not limited to use within a macro. Any operand to a conditional must be known on pass 1 to avoid errors and incorrect evaluation.

Example

IF DEFBUF
  BUF DB 100 DUP(0)
ELSE 
  EXTERN BUF:BYTE
ENDIF

ENDIF (End a Conditional Assembly Statement)

ENDIF ends the conditional assembly statement begun by the corresponding #IFxx conditional assembly directive. Each IFxx directive must be ended by a matching ENDIF directive.

Syntax

IFxx 
    . 
    . 
    . 
[ ELSEIFxx ]   ( optional ) 
    . 
    . 
    . 
[ ELSE ]   ( optional ) 
    . 
    . 
    . 
ENDIF

Remarks

If the #IFxx conditional assembly statement is not ended by an ENDIF directive, an unterminated conditional message is produced by the assembler. An ENDIF without a matching IFxx causes an error. ENDIF does not have an operand.

Note: The conditional directives can be nested to any level. They are not limited to use within a macro. Any operand to a conditional must be known on pass 1 to avoid errors and incorrect evaluation.

Example

IF  debug
   EXTERN   dump:FAR
   EXTERN   trace:FAR
   EXTERN   breakpoint:FAR
ENDIF

Text Equate Directives

A Text Equate is a symbolic name you give to a series of characters. Text equates are used to expand text within a source statement. The directives described in this section create and manipulate text equates.

EQU
CATSTR
INSTR
SIZESTR
SUBSTR

CATSTR (Concatenate Strings)

CATSTR concatenates a list of text values specified by string into a single text value and assigns it to Name.

Syntax

Name CATSTR string[, string] ...

EQU Directive (Assign Text to a Symbolic Constant)

The EQU directive assigns the contents of a text literal to Name.

Syntax

Name EQU   Text - Literal

Remarks

The value of the Text-Literal is assigned to the Name entry. In normal contexts, subsequent references to Name will cause the preprocessor to replace Name with the value specified by the Text-Literal entry. This is a simple text substitution operation.

The Name entry is a globally-scoped Identifier that is converted to a Text-EquateName. The Name cannot have been previously defined as a different Identifier-Type. However, the Name entry can be redefined as many times as desired with different values for the Text-Literal entry.

See also #EQU and #=.

Example

A   EQU  < BP + >    ; explicit text literal, A is a text equate
A   EQU  < 3 >       ; redefinition of A with different value

INSTR (Search In String For Value)

INSTRsearches a specified String for an occurrence of a given Sub-String and assigns its position (1-based) to Name. The search is case sensitive. Startis the position in String to start the search for Sub-String. If Startis not given, it is assumed to be 1 (the start of the string). If Sub-String is not found, the position assigned to Name is 0.

Syntax

Name   INSTR   [ Start , ] String , Sub-String

Remarks

INSTRassigns the position value to a name as if it were a numeric equate.

Example

pos   INSTR   < person > , < son >

SIZESTR (Return Size Of String)

Assigns the number of characters given by the Text-Argument to Name.

Syntax

Name  SIZESTR  Text-Argument

SUBSTR (Extract a Sub-string From a String)

Assigns a substring of Text-Argument starting at Position to the symbol given by Name..

Syntax

Name SUBSTR Text-Argument,Position[,Length]

Remarks

The Position parameter indicates the starting character of the substring to extract from the Text-Argument, and must be 1 or greater. If specified, the Length parameter indicates how many characters are desired, otherwise the remainder of the string is extracted.

Macro Directives

A macro procedure or function, which is comprised of one or more statements.

Macro processing is text processing that is done sequentially at assembly time. By the end of assembly, ALP expands all macros and assembles the resulting text into object code.

This section describes the following types of macros:

• Macro procedures, which expand to one or more complete statements and can optionally take parameters
• Repeat blocks, which generate a group of statements a specified number of times or until a condition becomes true

This section describes the following macro directives:

ENDM

EXITM

FOR/IRP

FORC/IRPC

LOCAL

MACRO

PURGE

REPEAT/REPT

ENDM (End Current Macro Definition)

End each #MACRO, #REPEAT/REPT, #FOR/IRP, and #FORC/IRPC directive with the ENDMdirective.

Syntax

ENDM

Remarks

If the ENDM directive is not used with the #MACRO, #REPEAT/REPT, #FOR/IRP, and #FORC/IRPC directives, an error occurs. An unmatched ENDM also causes an error.

If the assembler produces an error message stating that it found the end-of -file on the source and cannot find an #END statement when there was an END, the likely cause is a missing ENDM or ENDIF statement. Without ENDM, the assembler treats the rest of the source as part of the #MACRO definition.

Note: The name field is not allowed. Do not confuse the ENDM directive with other ending directives that do require the name of the block being ended, such as ENDP or ENDS.

Example

addup   MACRO     ad1, ad2, ad3
        MOV       AX, ad1         ;; first parameter in AX
        ADD       AX, ad2         ;; add next two parameters 
        ADD       AX, ad3         ;; leave sum in AX
        ENDM

EXITM (End Current Macro Expansion)

Use the EXITM directive when a block contains a directive that tests for some condition and you want to end the current macro expansion when the test proves that the remainder of the expansion is not required. When an EXITM directive is run, the expansion is stopped immediately, and any remaining expansion or repetition is not produced.

Syntax

EXITM

Remarks

Only the block containing the EXITM directive is ended; outer levels of a nested macro expansion continue unaffected.

EXITM is executed at macro expansion time and is not a substitute for the #ENDM directive, which marks the end of the macro body and is recognized at macro definition time.

Example

DSEG   SEGMENT 
      . 
      . 
      . 
SYM   =   0 
    REPEAT 16
; ; Check for paragraph boundary
      IF   ( $ - DSEG ) MOD 16 EQ 0
      EXITM   ; ; quit if padded to boundary
      ENDIF 
SYM = SYM + 1 
      DB   SYM   ; ; produce numbered padding
      ENDM 

FOR/IRP (Iterative Macro Expansion Using List of Arguments)

The FOR directive, used in combination with the #ENDM directive, designates a block of statements to be repeated, once for each argument in the list enclosed by angle brackets. Each repetition substitutes the next item in the <Argument-List> entry for every occurrence of Parameter in the block.

Syntax

FOR  Parameter , < Argument-List >
    .
    .
    .
ENDM

Remarks

The obsolete spelling for the FOR directive is IRP.

You must enclose the <Argument-List> entry in angle brackets. It has the following format:

< [ Argument   [ ,   Argument   . . . ] ] >

If an empty (<>) Argument is found in <Argument-List>, the Parameter name is replaced by a null value. If the argument list is empty, the FORdirective is ignored and no statements are copied. The assembler processes the block once for each Argumentin the <Argument-List>, replacing each occurrence of Parameterin the macro body with the current Argument value.

The #FOR/IRP-#ENDM block does not have to be within a macro definition.

Example

In this example, the assembler produces the code DB1 through DB10.

FOR     X ,   < 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 10 > 
DB      X 
ENDM 

In the next example:

FOR      ARGUMENT , < " first   line " , 13 , 10 , 
" second   line " , 13 , 10 > 
DB      ARGUMENT 
ENDM 

The assembler produces the code:

DB     " first   line " 
DB     13 
DB     10 
DB     " second   line " 
DB     13 
DB     10 

FORC/IRPC (Iterative Macro Expansion Using List of Characters)

The assembler repeats the statements in the block once for each character in the string. Each repetition substitutes the next character in the string for every occurrence of Parameterin the block.

Syntax

FORC   Parameter ,   String   ( or   < String > ) 
    . 
    . 
    . 
ENDM 

Remarks

The obsolete spelling for the FORCdirective is IRPC.

The FORCdirective is similar to the #FOR/IRP directive except that a String is used instead of <Argument-List>, and the angle brackets around the string are optional. The string should be enclosed with angle brackets (<>) if it contains spaces, commas, or other separating characters.

The FORC/IRPC-#ENDM block does not have to be within a macro definition.

Example

In this example, the assembler produces the code DB 1 through DB 8:

FORC      X, 12345678
DB        X
ENDM

LOCAL (Identify Names Local to a Macro Definition)

The LOCAL directive is used inside the body of a macro definition, and provides a method of automatically generating unique assembler labels each time the macro is expanded. The names appearing in the argument list of the LOCAL directive are known only to the enclosing macro, and each time they are referenced during a macro expansion a unique symbol is created. This prevents the assembler from issuing duplicate definition errors when the macro is expanded more than once and symbols contained therein are being used to create assembler labels.

Syntax

LOCAL Name [, Name .... ]

Remarks

The LOCAL directive is recognized only within the body of a macro given by a #MACRO, #FOR/IRP, #FORC/IRPC, or #REPEAT/REPT definition. The symbols created by the preprocessor are of the form ??nnnn, where nnnn is a hexadecimal number in the range 0000 through FFFF. You must avoid using identifiers of this form for your own purposes, because doing so can cause duplicate definition errors.

To insure that they have the proper effect, LOCAL statements should appear in the body of the macro before any other directives are used. It is acceptable for blank lines or comments to precede any LOCAL statements.

You can use multiple LOCAL statements if the argument list is too long to fit on one line, or if you want a vertical list of LOCAL symbols.

Example

DISPLAY MACRO TT 

; Blank lines and comments are ok here
      LOCAL AGAIN 

;; DOS macro to display message addressed by BX TT times
      MOV     CX, TT
      MOV     AH, 9
      MOV     DX, BX
; Generate a unique label for AGAIN
AGAIN:
      INT     21H 
      LOOP    AGAIN 
      ENDM

MACRO (Assign a Body of Text to a Name)

This directive produces a given sequence of statements from various places in your program, even though different parameters may be required each time you call the sequence.

Macro processing consists of two separate and distinct phases: #Macro Definition and #Macro Expansion.

Macro Definition

A macro definition consists of three essential parts:

• The MACRO directive, defining the Name and the Parameter-List
• The body of the macro, containing the prototypes of statements to produce when you invoke the macro for expansion.
• The #ENDM directive, ending the definition of the macro.

Syntax

Name MACRO [Parameter [, Parameter ...]]
  .
  .
  .
ENDM

Remarks

The Name field must be a valid preprocessor identifier and specifies the symbolic name that the user will refer to when invoking the macro for expansion. If Name is already defined, it must be that of a previous macro definition, otherwise an error message is issued. Macros may be redefined to have a different Parameter-Lists or macro body text; doing so causes the previous definition to be lost.

The optional Parameter-List is the complete comma-separated list of all Parameter valuess given in the macro definition statement. A parameter must be a valid symbol name according to the rules for naming preprocessor and assembler identifiers. Each parameter becomes a symbol that is local to the macro being defined and is recognized during macro expansion prior to searching the global name space. Thus, macro parameters need not have names unique from identifiers defined elsewhere in the program.

Macro Expansion

To expand the macro, the macro Name (defined in the Name field of the MACRO definition statement) is coded as you would any other assembler directive, followed by the list of arguments (if any) that you want to pass to the macro.

Syntax

Name [Argument [, Argument ...]]

Remarks

The Name field must be the name of a macro defined previously with a MACRO directive.

Each Argument field denotes a text value that you want to pass to the macro. The relative positions of the elements are important, because each Argument is associated in left-to-right fashion with the corresponding Parameter as defined in the Parameter-List during the macro definition.

The number of Argument entries given when the macro is invoked need not be the same as the number of Parameter entries. If you pass extra Arguments to the macro, they are ignored; if too few are supplied, empty text values are associated with the remaining Parameters. You may also associate an empty text value with a Parameter by passing an explicitly empty text literal <> as an Argument.

Commas are normally used to separate arguments, although blanks or tabs are also considered to be argument separators. For this reason, any argument that must contain an argument separator character (commas, blanks, or tabs) should be enclosed in angle brackets <>. For example:

PUSHVEC   MACRO   PARM1, PARM2
          MOV     AX, PARM1
          PUSH    AX
          MOV     AX, PARM2
          PUSH    AX
          ENDM
          .
          .
          .
          PUSHVEC   DS, <OFFSET VARNAME>
 ; PUSH DWORD VECTOR OF VARNAME ONTO STACK

You can also use angle brackets to produce variable lengths of results. For example:

STRING   MACRO     NUMBERS
         DB        NUMBERS
         ENDM
           . 
           . 
           . 
         STRING   <1,2,3,4>
         ; PRODUCE 4 BYTES OF INTEGER NUMBERS

Remarks

Each time a macro is invoked (expanded) by specifying its name, the preprocessor emits the statements contained in the body of the macro and passes them to the assembler for processing. During the expansion process, any replacement parameters encountered in the macro body (as named in the Parameter-List of the macro definition) are replaced with the corresponding Argument (if any) passed through the argument-list at the time the macro was invoked.

Example

GEN   MACRO   XX, YY, ZZ
      MOV     AX, XX
      ADD     AX, YY
      MOV     ZZ, AX
      ENDM

When the call is made, for example:

GEN   ED, KISER, SUM

The assembler produces the following code:

MOV     AX, ED
ADD     AX, KISER 
MOV     SUM, AX

PURGE (Remove Macro Definition)

The PURGE directive deletes the definition of a specified macro entry, letting you reuse space.

Syntax

PURGE Macro-Name [, ...]

Remarks

It is not necessary to purge a macro before redefining it. You may use PURGE to recover memory during assembly by deleting the contents of unreferenced macros. An Out of Memory condition can occur if a large, general-purpose macro library is included.

Example

The directive:

PURGE     MACRONAME

performs the same function as redefining the macro with no contents, as in:

MACRONAME MACRO
          ENDM

In the following example, assume that MAC1 is a macro included in MACRO.LIB:

INCLUDE   MACRO.LIB
PURGE     MAC1
MAC1      ; Calls the purged macro
          ; but produces nothing

REPEAT/REPT (Iterative Macro Expansion Using a Count Expression)

REPEAT specifies the number of times to generate the statements inside the macro.

Syntax

REPEAT Expression
 Statements
ENDM

Remarks

The Expression field must evaluate to an Absolute-ExpressionType (it cannot contain forward references). Because the repeat block will be expanded at assembler time, the number of iterations must be known then.

ECHO Directive (Display Message on Standard Output Device)

The ECHO directive displays progress through a long assembly or displays the value of conditional assembly parameters.

Syntax

ECHO Text

Remarks

The assembler lists the Text entry on the standard output device during assembly when the assembler encounters the ECHO directive.

ECHO is not available under MASM 5.10 emulation; you must use %OUT, which is the obsolete spelling for the ECHO directive.

Example

Example 1:

IF IBM
  ECHO IBM VERSION
ENDIF 

IF2
  ECHO STARTING SECOND PASS
   . 
   . 
   . 
  ENDIF

Example 2:

INNER   MACRO    TEXT, VAL
        ECHO     TEXT  VAL 
        ENDM
        . 
        . 
        . 
HERE    =  $ - CSEG 
        INNER <CURRENT LOCATION>,%HERE 

INCLUDE Directive (Insert File Contents into Input Stream)

The INCLUDE directive "stacks" the current source file and begins reading tokens from the source file given by the FileName argument. If you use the INCLUDE directive, you need not repeat a sequence of statements that are common to several source files.

Syntax

INCLUDE FileName

Remarks

The assembler uses the following search order when attempting to open the INCLUDE file:

1. If the FileName argument contains a fully qualified path name (one that begins with a back slash or forward slash), then the assembler attempts to open the file exactly as specified, and no other search is performed if the file is not found.
2. If the FileName begins with a relative path name or contains no path information, the assembler begins searching for the INCLUDE file by looking in the directory of the source file that issued the INCLUDE directive.
3. The assembler searches for FileName in the list of directories given by any #-Fdi or #-I options found on the command line.
4. The assembler searches for FileName in the list of directories given by the <BaseEXE>_INCLUDE environment variable.
5. The assembler searches for FileName in the list of directories given by the INCLUDE environment variable.
6. Lastly, the assembler searches for FileName in the current directory. If the named file is not found, the assembler issues a fatal error message and the assembler is ended.

In no case does the assembler strip relative path information from the FileName when performing search steps 2 through 6.

When the file named in the INCLUDE directive is located, the assembler opens it and assembles all of the statements contained therein until the end of the file is reached. The file is then closed and assembler resumes in the original module at the line following the INCLUDE directive.

An INCLUDE file should not contain an #END assembler directive to denote the end of the included module; the assembler closes the included module when its physical end of file is reached.

INCLUDE files may be nested to any reasonable level, and is limited only by the operating system's ability to provide the necessary resources.

Example

INCLUDE OS2.INC

COMMENT Directive (Program Information Block)

COMMENT lets you enter comments about your program without having to enter semicolons (;) for each line.

Syntax

COMMENT   Delimiter   Text   Delimiter

Remarks

The first non-blank character after COMMENT is the first delimiter. The COMMENT directive causes the assembler to treat all Text between Delimiter and Delimiter as a comment. The text must not contain the delimiter character. This directive is used for multiple-line comments. A COMMENT defined in the body of a macro does not appear unless .LALL is requested.

Example

COMMENT *You can enter as many lines
of text between the delimiters
   . 
   . 
   . 
as you need to describe your program.*

Assembler Directives

This section describes the various types of ALP directives:

Type	Function	Directives
Conditional error	Debugs programs and checks for assembly-time errors.	.ERR .ERR1 .ERR2 .ERRDEF .ERRNDEF .ERRE .ERRNZ .ERRB .ERRDIF .ERRDIFI .ERRIDN .ERRIDNI .ERRNB
Data allocation	Allows you to create and initialize variables for use within your program.	BYTE DB DD DF DQ DT DW DWORD FWORD QWORD REAL4 REAL8 REAL10 SBYTE SDWORD SWORD TBYTE WORD
Intermodule linkage	Simplifies data sharing and a provides a high-level interface to multiple-module programming.	COMM END EXTERN/EXTRN EXTERNDEF INCLUDELIB NAME PUBLIC
Listing control	Controls the assembler listing of your source file.	%BIN .CREF .LALL .LIST .LISTALL .LISTIF .LISTMACRO .LISTMACROALL .NOCREF .NOLIST .NOLISTIF .NOLISTMACRO PAGE .SALL .SFCOND SUBTITLE SUBTTL .TFCOND TITLE .XALL .XCREF .XLIST
Procedure control	Allows you to organize your code into procedures.	PROC LOCAL ENDP
Processor control	Selects processors and coprocessors.	.186 .286 .286P .287 .386 .386P .387 .486 .486P .586 .586P .686 .686P .8086 .8087 .MMX .NOMMX
Segments	Creates and manages segments.	ALIGN .ALPHA .CODE .CONST .DATA .DATA? DOSSEG .DOSSEG ENDS EVEN .FARDATA .FARDATA? GROUP .MODEL ORG SEGMENT .SEQ .STACK
Type definition	Allows the creation of complex user-defined data types.	RECORD STRUC STRUCT TYPEDEF UNION
Miscellaneous	Provides miscellaneous functions.	= .ABORT ASSUME EQU LABEL OPTION .RADIX

Conditional Error Control

Use conditional error control directives to debug programs and check for assembly-time errors. If you insert a conditional assembly directive in your code, you can test assembly-time conditions at that point. You can also test for boundary conditions in macros by using conditional error control directives.

Errors generated by conditional error control directives cause ALP to return a nonzero return code. If a severe error is detected during assembly, ALP does not generate the object module.

This section describes the following conditional error control directives:

.ERR

.ERR1

.ERR2

.ERRB

.ERRDEF

.ERRDIF

.ERRDIFI

.ERRE

.ERRIDN

.ERRIDNI

.ERRNB

.ERRNDEF

.ERRNZ

.ERR/.ERR1/.ERR2 (Force Assembly Error Condition)

The .ERR, .ERR1, and .ERR2 directives cause errors at the points at which they occur in the source file.

Syntax

.ERR
   or 
.ERR1
   or 
.ERR2

Remarks

The .ERR directive causes an error regardless of the pass. .ERR1 causes an error on the first pass only. .ERR2 causes an error on the second pass only. If you use the -Lp:1option to request a first pass listing, the . ERR1 error message appears on the screen and in the listing file. Like other error conditions occurring during pass one, the error generated by .ERR1 does not cause the assembly to fail.

Example

This example ensures that you define either the DOS or the OS2 symbol. If you define neither, the assembler assembles the nested ELSE condition and produces an error message. The .ERR directive causes an error on each pass.

IFDEF   DOS 
       . 
       . 
       . 
ELSE 
       IFDEF   OS2 
          . 
          . 
          . 
       ELSE 
          . ERR 
       ENDIF 
ENDIF

.ERRB/.ERRNB (Error if Argument Blank/Non-Blank)

The .ERRB and .ERRNB directives test the given Text-Argument.

Syntax

.ERRB Text-Argument

or

.ERRNB Text-Argument

Remarks

If Text-Argument is blank, the .ERRB directive produces an error. If Text-Argument is not blank, .ERRNB produces an error.

You can test for the existence of parameters by using these directives within macros.

Example

In this example, the directives ensure that only one argument is passed to the macro. If no argument is passed to the macro, the .ERRB directive produces an error. If more than one argument is passed, the .ERRNB directive produces an error.

WORK  MACRO  REALARG,TESTARG
   .ERRB  <REALARG>  ;; Error if no parameters
   .ERRNB <TESTARG>  ;; Error if more than one parameter
       .
       .
       .
    ENDM

.ERRDEF/.ERRNDEF (Error if Symbol Defined/Not Defined)

The .ERRDEF and .ERRNDEF directives test whether a symbol has been defined.

Syntax

.ERRDEF   Identifier 

or

.ERRNDEF   Identifier

Remarks

If Identifier is defined as a label, a variable, or a symbol, the .ERRDEF directive produces an error. If you have not defined Identifier, .ERRNDEF produces an error. When Identifier is a forward reference, the assembler considers it undefined on the first pass and defined on the second pass.

Example

In this example, .ERRDEF ensures that SYMBOL is not defined before entering the blocks, and .ERRNDEF ensures that you defined SYMBOL somewhere within the blocks.

.ERRDEF    SYMBOL 
IFDEF      CONFIG1 
           .
           .  SYMBOL EQU 0 
           .
ENDIF
IFDEF      CONFIG2
           .
           .  SYMBOL EQU 1
           .
ENDIF
.ERRNDEF   SYMBOL

.ERRDIF/.ERRDIFI (Error if Arguments are Different)

The .ERRDIF and .ERRDIFI directives generate an assembler error if the two #Text-Arguments are different.

Syntax

.ERRDIF  Text-Argument-1, Text-Argument-2

or

.ERRDIFI Text-Argument-1, Text-Argument-2

Remarks

The .ERRDIF directive performs a case-sensitive comparision, and the .ERRDIFI directive performs a case-insensitive comparision.

Example

In this example, a check is made to verify that the currently opened segment is _TEXT. This helps to insure that the macro is used only from within the default near code segment, and not from a program with a memory model that uses far code pointers (MEDIUM, LARGE, or HUGE).

RETURN   MACRO 
    ;; Use the expansion operator (%) to resolve @CurSeg equate
    % .errdif <_TEXT>,<@CurSeg>  ;; Must be in near .CODE segment
    RETN                         ;; Force a near return
ENDM

.ERRE/.ERRNZ (Error if Expression False/True)

The .ERRE and .ERRNZ directives test the value of an Expression.

Syntax

.ERRE  Expression 
   or 
.ERRNZ Expression

Remarks

If the Expression evaluates to be false (zero), the .ERRE directive produces an error. If the Expression evaluates to be true (not zero), the .ERRNZdirective produces an error. The Expression must evaluate to an absolute value and cannot contain forward references.

Example

In this example, .ERRE checks the boundaries of a parameter that the program passes to the macro BUFFER. If count is less than or equal to 128, the expression that the directive tests is true (not zero) and the directive produces no error. If COUNT is greater than 128, the expression is false (zero) and the directive produces an error.

BUFFER MACRO  COUNT,BNAME
        .ERRE   COUNT LE 128
        BNAME   DB COUNT DUP (0) ;; Reserve memory, but no more than 128 bytes
        ENDM

BUFFER  128,BUF1    ; Data reserved - no error
BUFFER  129,BUF2    ; Error produced 

.ERRIDN/.ERRIDNI (Error if Arguments are Identical)

The .ERRIDN and .ERRIDNI directives generate an assembly error if the two #Text-Arguments are identical.

Syntax

.ERRIDN Text-Argument-1, Text-Argument-2
   or 

.ERRIDNI Text-Argument-1, Text-Argument-2

Remarks

The .ERRIDN directive performs a case-sensitive comparision, and the .ERRIDNI directive performs a case-insensitive comparision.

Example

In this example, .ERRIDN protects against the passing the AX register as the second parameter, because the macro does not work if this happens. This example uses the .ERRIDNI directive since the macro needs to check for all possible spellings of the AX register.

ADDEM  MACRO   AD1 , AD2 , SUM 
       .ERRIDNI  <ax>,<AD2>  ;; ERROR IF AD2 is ax
       MOV        AX, AD1    ;; Would overwrite if AD2 were AX
       ADD        AX, AD2
       MOV        SUM, AX    ;; SUM must be register or memory
ENDM

Data Allocation

Data allocation statements allow you to reserve storage for your program data. To initiate a data allocation statement, an Old-Style-Allocation-Directive may be used, but in modes other than #M510 it is preferable to use a Scalar-TypeName or UserDefined-TypeName, which the assembler treats as a pseudo-directive. To introduce consistency into the descriptions, all such variations will be referred to as the Allocation-TypeName.

The Allocation-TypeName that you select determines the data-type of the allocated storage. An optional symbolic name may be associated with the storage, and the storage may also be initialized with specific values if so desired.

Syntax

[Name] Allocation-TypeName Initializer [,Initializer ...]

Allocation-TypeName:

Old-Style-Allocation-Directive

Scalar-TypeName

Record-TypeName

Structure-TypeName

Union-TypeName

Typedef-TypeName

Old-Style-Allocation-Directive: one of

DB DW DD DF DQ DT

Remarks

The various fields of the data allocation statement are described as follows:

Name If the Nameentry is present, it must be specified as a valid Identifier unique to the scope in which it appears. If the allocation statement is assembled into an open segment, the assembler converts the identifier to a Data-LabelName to allow referencing the storage by a symbolic variable name. If the allocation statement is assembled into the body of a #STRUCT or #UNION type definition, then the assembler converts the identifier to a Structure-FieldName or Union-FieldName.

Allocation-TypeName If the Allocation-TypeName is specified as a Typedef- TypeName, the assembler resolves it to its underlying data type to determine what type of initialization is to be performed.

If the Allocation-TypeName entry resolves to a Scalar-TypeName or a pointer to some other type, then the Initializer field must be specified using an expression syntax that can be resolved to a Scalar-Initializer-ExpressionType. See the following section on #Initialization of Scalar Types for a full description of this topic.

If the Allocation-TypeName entry resolves to a Record-TypeName, Structure- TypeName, or Union-TypeName, then the Initializer field must be specified using the Compound-Initializer syntax. See the following section on #Initialization of Aggregate Types for a full description of this topic.

If the Allocation-TypeName entry resolves to an array of any other type, then the Initializer field must be specified using the Compound-Initializer syntax. See the following section on #Initialization of Vector Types for a full description of this topic.

Initializer Each Initializer entry is an Expression that must resolve to an Initializer-ExpressionType appropriate for the type of data described by the Allocation-TypeName field.

Each Initializer entry may also be duplicated by making it the operand of a Duplicative-Expression. When assembling in #ALP mode however, the DUP operator is considered obsolete and its use is discouraged. Instead, a Typedef-TypeName associated with the declaration of a true array should be used in the Allocation-TypeName field along with the appropriate compound initializer.

Initialization of Scalar Types

A scalar data item represents a numeric quantity that may be increased or decreased in magnitude as a single unit. Thus, an Initializer expression for a scalar data item must be coded such that it resolves to a single scalar value. See the section on Scalar-Initializer-ExpressionType for the syntax and semantics of such expressions.

The old-style allocation directives (DB, DW, DD, DF, DQ, and DT) are supported in all assembler emulation modes, but for modes other than #M510, the Scalar-TypeName keywords should be used instead.

When the Scalar-TypeName keywords are used instead of the old-style allocation directives, the assembler has full knowledge of the data types of the variables being created. This allows the assembler to make more intelligent code generation decisions, and it enables the assembler to correctly describe the variable in the symbolic debugging information that it generates for the source level debugger. #Scalar-TypeNames may only be used as allocation directives in the #ALP or #M600 modes.

To allocate an uninitialized scalar data item, use the Indeterminate-Value-Alias($) in the Initializer field.

Type Name	Data Type	Initializer Description
DB, BYTE, or SBYTE	Allocates 8-bit (byte) values.	Each Initializer must be in the range from 0 to 255 (unsigned) for a DB or BYTE directive, and from -128 to 127 (signed) for a SBYTE directive.
DW, WORD, or SWORD	Allocates 16-bit (word) values.	Each Initializer must be in the range from 0 to 65535 (unsigned) for a DW or WORD directive, and from -32768 to 32767 (signed) for a SWORD directive.
DD, DWORD, or SDWORD	Allocates 32-bit (double-word) values.	If the Initializer is an integer, each must be in the range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (unsigned) for a DD or DWORD directive, and from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (signed) for a SDWORD directive. If the DD directive is being used, an Initializer may also resolve to a 32-bit Floating-Point-Expression Type.
DF or FWORD	Allocates 48-bit (6-byte far-word) values.	Each Initializer typically specifies the full address of a 32-bit far code or data label, but normal 32-bit integer values may also be used. The processor does not support 48-bit integer operations, thus the assembler does support 48-bit integer precision when initializing such variables. These directives are typically only useful for defining pointer variables for use on 32-bit processors.
DQ or QWORD	Allocates 64-bit (quad-word) values.	Both DQ and QWORD allow an integer Initializer with 64-bit (8-byte) precision. If the DQ directive is being used, the Initializer field may resolve to a 64-bit Floating-Point-ExpressionType.
DT or TBYTE	Allocates 80-bit (10-byte) values	Both DT and TBYTE allow an integer Initializer with 80-bit (10-byte) precision. If the DT directive is being used, the Initializer field may resolve to a 80-bit Floating-Point-ExpressionType.
REAL4, REAL8, or REAL10	Allocates real (floating-point) values of a specific size (4 bytes, 8 bytes, or 10 bytes).	Each Initializer must resolve to a Floating-Point-ExpressionType. The assembler converts the floating-point literal to the IEEE format appropriate for the type of variable being allocated.

Examples

Here are some examples of scalar initialization:

; Allocate some integer variables
uint8      BYTE       0, 255            ; min, max values for unsigned byte
sint8      SBYTE   -128, 127            ; min, max values for   signed byte
USHORT_T   TYPEDEF WORD                 ; Define a typedef alias for WORD
ushort     USHORT_T   0, 0FFFFh         ; and use it as allocation type name

; Some things to know about string-literal initializers
char       BYTE   "a"                   ; a single BYTE value (061h)
is_int     WORD   "ab"                  ; a single WORD value (06162h)
this_too   DWORD  "abcd"                ; a single DWORD value (061626364h)
too_long   WORD   "abcd"                ; error, expression too big for a word
string     BYTE   "string",0            ; but strings can allocate many bytes

; Integers, pointers, and old-style initializations
PDWORD_T   TYPEDEF PTR DWORD            ; First, define a pointer type
ulong      DWORD   0, 0FFFFFFFFh        ; min, max values for unsigned dword 
pulong     PDWORD_T OFFSET ulong        ; pointer to the ulong variable
old_style  DD      1.314                ; old style, floats are accepted
new_int    SDWORD  1.314                ; new style, error - must use integers
new_real   REAL4   1314                 ; new style, error - must use floats

; Allocate some real numbers using decimal floating-point literals
float_f    REAL4   123.45               ; 4-byte IEEE real
double_f   REAL8   98.7654E1            ; 8-byte IEEE real
longdbl_f  REAL10  1000.0E-2            ; 10-byte IEEE real

; The same values using hexdecimal floating-point literals
float_h    REAL4    42F6E666r           ; 4-byte IEEE real
double_h   REAL8    408EDD3B645A1CACr   ; 8-byte IEEE real
longdbl_h  REAL10 4002A000000000000000r ; 10-byte IEEE real

Initialization of Aggregate Types

An aggregate data item is a collection of one or more sub-items of possibly dissimilar types that are allocated, initialized, and treated as a single unit. The sub-items usually have unique names, and their positions relative to other sub-items is significant. The assembler provides the ability to define aggregate types through use of the #RECORD, #STRUCT, and #UNION directives.

Initialization of an aggregate data item requires a programming notation that isolates the entire aggregate from surroundings constructs, and denotes the position of each sub-item within the aggregate. The syntax for this construct is as follows:

Aggregate-Initializer:

{[Initializer-List]}

<[Initializer-List]>

Initializer-List:

Initializer-Item

Initializer-List,[LineBreak] Initializer-Item

Initializer-Item:

[Scalar-Initializer]

[Aggregate-Initializer]

[Array-Initializer]

The syntax requires that an Aggregate-Initializer be enclosed in an outer set of braces or angle brackets, but the Initializer-List or individual comma-separated Initializer-Items may be left unspecified, in which case a default initializer value is used. Commas are used to denote the position of each sub-item within the entire aggregate, and nested initializers are allowed to accommodate imbedded occurrences of other aggregates (or vector types, which share the same initializer syntax).

When initializing an instance of a union, the assembler only allows an initializer to be specified for the first field defined in the union type.

Examples

Here are some examples of aggregate initialization:

YES     equ  1 
NO      equ  0 
MAYBE   equ -1 

BOOL_T  typedef sbyte 

IDEAS_T struct
   sanctum    BOOL_T  ?            ; For scalar data, use the ? operator
   peace      BOOL_T  ?            ; to request an uninitialized value.
   pilzner    BOOL_T  ?
IDEAS_T   ends

PROBLEM_T   struct 
    work     BOOL_T   YES          ; Establish default initial values that
    car      BOOL_T   NO           ; can be inherited when an instance of
    house    BOOL_T   MAYBE        ; the structure is allocated
PROBLEM_T   ends 

SOLUTION_T  struct 
    fixing   PROBLEM_T   {}        ; Outermost set of braces required even
             IDEAS_T     {}        ; with unspecified (default) initializers
SOLUTION_T  ends 

DATA   segment 
   ProblemWith   PROBLEM_T  { NO ,  , MAYBE }           ; First-level structure
   ThinkOf       SOLUTION_T { { YES , YES , YES },      ; Intializer syntax for
                              {  NO ,  NO ,  NO } }     ; imbedded structures
DATA   ends 

CODE    segment 
        assume   ds : DATA 
        mov   al, NO 
        or    al, ProblemWith.work
        or    al, ProblemWith.car
        or    al, ProblemWith.house
        jz    exit 
        mov   ThinkOf.fixing.work, NO       ; References to named fields in 
        mov   ThinkOf.fixing.car, NO        ; imbedded structures must be
        mov   ThinkOf.fixing.house, NO      ; fully qualified.
exit:   mov   ThinkOf.pilzner, YES          ; Reference to "promoted" field 
        ret 
CODE   ends
end

Initialization of Vector Types

A vector data item is a linear collection of one or more sub-items of identical type that are allocated, initialized, and treated as a single unit. A vector (more commonly referred to as an array) is defined to have a specific number of items n, which are numbered from 0 to n - 1 and occupy a contiguous area of allocated storage. The items in the vector may be of any type, possibly even other vectors (commonly known as a multi-dimensional array). The assembler provides the ability to define vector types through the use of the standard Type-Declaration syntax.

The syntax required to initialize a vector is similar to that used for an aggregate data type, and is as follows:

Array-Initializer:

{[Initializer-List] }

<[Initializer-List] >

Initializer-List:

Initializer-Item

Initializer-List, [LineBreak] Initializer-Item

Initializer-Item:

[Scalar-Initializer]

[Aggregate-Initializer]

[Array-Initializer]

The syntax requires that an Array-Initializer be enclosed in an outer set of braces or angle brackets, but the Initializer-List or individual comma-separated Initializer-Items may be left unspecified, in which case a default initializer value is used. Commas are used to denote the position of each sub-item within the entire array, and nested initializers are allowed to accommodate imbedded occurrences of other arrays (or aggregate types, which share the same initializer syntax).

Examples

Here are some examples of vector initialization:

; Data structures to define a "computer" data type

TRUE         equ          1
FALSE        equ          0
MB           equ       1024                   ; Megabytes

BOOL_T       typedef   BYTE                   ; true or false value
INCHES_T     typedef   BYTE                   ; number of inches
MONITOR_T    typedef   INCHES_T               ; size of monitor in inches
KEYBOARD_T   typedef   BOOL_T                 ; is a keyboard installed?
MOUSE_T      typedef   BOOL_T                 ; is a mouse installed?
KBYTES_T     typedef   WORD                   ; number of kilobytes
MBYTES_T     typedef   WORD                   ; number of megabytes
FPRESENT_T   typedef   BOOL_T [2]             ; up to two floppies installed
FSIZE_T      typedef   KBYTES_T [2]           ; how big they are
DPRESENT_T   typedef   BOOL_T [4]             ; up to four hardfiles installed
DSIZE_T      typedef   MBYTES_T [4]           ; how big they are
RAM_T        typedef   DWORD                  ; how much memory we have
NAME_T       typedef   BYTE [64]              ; what we call the system

FLOPPIES_T   struct
DriveCount   FPRESENT_T   { TRUE, FALSE }    ; assume one floppy installed
DriveSize    FSIZE_T      { 360, 0 }         ; assume 360KB in size :-)
FLOPPIES_T   ends

DRIVES_T     struct
DriveCount   DPRESENT_T   { TRUE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE }     ; one drive installed
DriveSize    DSIZE_T      { 20, 0, 0, 0 }                   ; 20MB in size (!)
DRIVES_T     ends

COMPUTER_T   struct
Monitor      MONITOR_T     14                 ; Assume a 14 inch monitor
Keyboard     BOOL_T        TRUE               ; We have a keyboard
Mouse        BOOL_T        FALSE              ; but no mouse
Memory       RAM_T         640                ; Assume 640KB
Floppies     FLOPPIES_T    {}                 ; Go with the defaults
HardFiles    DRIVES_T      {}                 ; Go with the defaults 
ModelName    NAME_T        {}                 ; No default name
COMPUTER_T   ends

DATA   segment
Circa1997    COMPUTER_T    \               ; initializer begins on next line
   { 17,                                   ; of course, we have a 17 " monitor
     TRUE, TRUE,                           ; a keyboard and a mouse
     32 * MB,                              ; 32 Megabytes of ram
     { { },                                ; still one floppy
       { 1440 } },                         ; but it has a 1.2 MB capacity
     { { , TRUE, TRUE },                   ; also have second and third hardfiles
       { 512, 1024, 4096 } },              ; 512MB, 1 GIG, and 4 GIG
     { "Spiffatron   9000", 10, 13,        ; with a fancy system name
       "Acme   Computers", 10, 13, 0 } }
DATA   ends
end

Intermodule Linkage

To use symbols and procedures in more than one module, ALP must recognize shared data as global to all modules. ALP provides directives to simplify data sharing and a high-level interface to multiple-module programming. With these directives, you can define shared symbols and refer to them from other modules.

This section describes the following intermodule linkage directives:

COMM

END

EXTERN/EXTRN

EXTERNDEF

INCLUDELIB

NAME

PUBLIC

COMM (Declare Communal Variable)

Declares an uninitialized common or communal variable that is allocated by the linker.

Syntax

COMM [Language-Name] [Distance] Name [[Count]]:TypeName[:Size] [, ...]

Remarks

The arguments to the COMM directive are as follows:

Language-Name Optional parameter that determines how Name is spelled when written to the object file. Used when interfacing with routines written in high-level languages. If not specified, the language defaults to the value set by #.MODEL or #OPTION LANGUAGE.

Distance One of NEAR or FAR; determines the distance of allocated variable. If not specified, the current memory model determines the distance. The default is NEAR if no memory model is active.

Name The name of the variable to be allocated by the linker. This field is required.

[Count] Optional; if specified, this parameter must be surrounded by square brackets. The Count parameter can be thought of as a major (row) array dimension. It defaults to 1 if not specified.

TypeName Required parameter that specifies the type of the variable being allocated. It must be a single keyword or identifier that specifies a Distance-TypeName, Scalar-TypeName, or UserDefined-TypeName.

Size Size is an optional parameter that can be thought of as a minor (column) array dimension. It defaults to 1 if not specified.

Communal variables are allocated by the linker. When the linker combines object modules together, all instances of an identically-named communal variable are merged into a single instance (union), and are uninitialized.

The allocated size of a communal variable is the largest size requested by all encountered references.

The allocation order with respect to the addresses of other global symbols is undefined; an application must not depend on the address of a communal variable being less than or greater than that of another global symbol.

A variable allocated with the COMM directive need not be declared in all referencing modules as communal; the linker matches all #EXTERN/EXTRN references with that of the communal variable. Similarly, a variable allocated in one module with the #PUBLIC directive may be declared in other modules as communal.

Since communal variables cannot be initialized and their address positions cannot be compared, use of the COMM directive is discouraged. The #EXTERNDEF directive should be used instead.

END (Define End of Module and Entry Point)

The ENDdirective has two functions:

• Identifies the end of the source program.
• Identifies the symbol that is the name of the entry point (through the Expression on the END directive)

Syntax

END [Expression]

Remarks

All source files must have the END directive as the last statement. Any lines following the END statement are ignored by the assembler.

When the linker builds an application program from one or more object modules, it needs to know where the entry point is for the operating system to pass initial control. If you do not specify an entry point, none is assumed. Only one module can identify a label as the entry point by specifying that label on its END statement. Any module not defining an operating system entry point must not have an entry point identified on its END statement. If you fail to define an entry point for the main module, your program may not be able to initialize correctly. It will assemble and link without error, but it cannot run.

Example

The following example is the END statement for the section of code that starts with the name BEGIN.

END BEGIN

EXTERN/EXTRN (Declare External Identifier)

The EXTERN directive specifies a declaration for the external symbol Name so that it may be referred to within this module. The actual definition for the symbol occurs in some other module, and the linker resolves all such external declarations to a single definition for Name.

Syntax

EXTERN [Language-Name] Name [(Default-Resolution)]:Type [, ...]

Where Typeis one of:

• ABS
• Type-Declaration

Remarks

The obsolete spelling for the EXTERN directive is EXTRN.

The external source module that defines the symbol must give it public visibility in the corresponding object module, which is accomplished in assembler language by declaring it with the #COMM directive, defining the symbol in association with an #EXTERNDEF or #PUBLIC directive, or by specifying the PUBLIC or EXPORT attributes in a #PROC directive.

If the EXTERN directive is given within a segment, the assembler assumes that the symbol is located within that segment. If the segment is not known, place the EXTERN directive outside all segments and either use an explicit segment prefix or an ASSUME directive.

A Type value of ABS indicates that Name is an externally-defined constant value. Local references to Nameare treated as immediate values having an Operand Size equal to the Address Size of the segment containing the reference.

Note: If the Type of EXTERN is ABS, it may not be used anywhere in this module where conversion to an immediate value of type BYTE is required. Additionally, the defining module must define the value as a constant symbol.

For example:

FOO      EQU  5
PUBLIC   FOO

Use of the (default_resolution) syntax declares the external symbol Name to be a "weak" symbol, in which case the linker will pair all such declarations with the symbol default_resolution unless a standard "strong" public definition for Name is encountered during the link.

Example

IN THE SAME SEGMENT	IN ANOTHER SEGMENT
IN MODULE 1: cseg segment public tagn . . . tagn: . . . cseg ends IN MODULE 2: cseg segment extern tagn:near . . . jmp tagn cseg ends	IN MODULE 1: csega segment public tagf . . . tagf: . . . csega ends IN MODULE 2: extern tagf:far csegb segment . . . jmp tagf csegb ends

EXTERNDEF (Declare Global Identifier)

The EXTERNDEF directive combines the functionality of the #EXTERN/EXTRN and #PUBLIC directives. It provides a uniform way to declare global symbols that are to be shared across multiple modules.

Syntax

EXTERNDEF [Language-Name] Name:Type [, ...]

Where Typeis one of:

• ABS
• Type-Declaration

Remarks

A symbol declared with EXTERNDEF is treated as #PUBLIC if a definition for the symbol is encountered during the assembly, otherwise the symbol is assumed to be defined in another module and is treated as if it were declared with the #EXTERN/EXTRN directive.

Example

The following example shows how a declaration for the ReturnCode symbol can be shared between two modules (Main.asm and FileErr.asm) by way of a common header file (ErrNum.inc):

; ----------------------------------------------------------------------
; ErrNum.inc

RETCODE_T   typedef   DWORD

RC_NoError        equ   0 
RC_FileNotFound   equ   1 
RC_SystemError    equ   3 

EXTERNDEF   ReturnCode:RETCODE_T      ; declaration

; ----------------------------------------------------------------------
; FileErr.asm
.386 
.MODEL FLAT 
INCLUDE ErrNum.inc                   ; bring in error number definitions
                                     ; and declaration for ReturnCode

.CODE
; Tell the user about the file error,
; then make sure the program has a non-zero exit status
FileError  proc 
           . . .
           mov  ReturnCode, RC_FileNotFound
           ret
FileError  endp 
           end 

; ----------------------------------------------------------------------
; Main.asm
.386
.MODEL FLAT
INCLUDE ErrNum.inc                  ; bring in error number definitions
                                    ; and declaration for ReturnCode
EXTERNDEF FileError:PROC            ; This could be in a common header too

.DATA
ReturnCode RETCODE_T RC_NoError     ; actual definition of ReturnCode

.CODE
Main  proc
      . . . 
      . . . 
      call FileError            ; hypothetical error condition
      . . .
      . . .
      mov  eax, ReturnCode      ; load the exit status
      call Exit                 ; and shutdown the program
Main  endp
      end Main

INCLUDELIB (Pass Library Name to Linker through Object File)

The INCLUDELIB directive is used to inform the linker that a library file of a given name is to be used when attempting to resolve external references declared by this module.

Syntax

INCLUDELIB FileName

Remarks

The FileName argument is parsed as a contiguous string of arbitrary characters, and should constitute a file name that is valid in the context where it will be used. The FileName should be coded as a <text-literal> if it is to contain embedded spaces or other special characters.

The assembler emits a special record into the object file which contains the string of characters given by the FileName entry. This record instructs the linker to include the named library file in its list of libraries to be searched during the process of resolving external references. The assembler attaches no other meaning to the object file record, and it is up to the linker to interpret the file name for any special meaning (such as search path information, file name extension, and so on).

Use of this directive avoids the need to explicitly reference the library name in a linker invocation parameter, and helps to avoid the problems that can arise when such parameters are specified incorrectly.

Example

INCLUDELIB OS2386.LIB

NAME (Specify Module Name)

The NAME directive assigns a module a name.

Syntax

NAME module-name

Remarks

The NAME directive is ignored; it is provided for backward compatibility with other assemblers.

PUBLIC (Make Symbol Visible to Other Modules)

The PUBLIC directive makes defined symbols available to other programs that are to be linked. The information referred to by the PUBLIC directive is passed to the linker.

Syntax

PUBLIC [Language-Name] Identifier[, ...]

Remarks

Identifier can be a variable or a label (including PROC labels). Register names and any symbols defined by EQU or = to floating-point numbers or integers larger than 4 bytes are incorrect entries.

Example

         PUBLIC     GETINFO   ; Make GETINFO visible to linker
GETINFO  PROC       FAR 
         PUSH       BP        ; Save caller's register
         MOV        BP,SP     ; Get address of parameters
                              ; BODY OF SUBROUTINE
         POP        BP        ; restore caller's register
         RET                  ; return to caller
GETINFO  ENDP

Listing Control

ALP creates an assembler listing of your source file whenever you use a related source code directive or specify the #+Fl option on the ALP command line.

The assembler listing contains:

• Cumulative Listing Line Number
• Individual Source File Line Number
• Macro Expansion Line Number
• Macro Definition Line Number
• Macro Expansion Indentation Level
• Macro Expansion Nesting Level
• Include File Nesting Level
• Conditional Assembly Nesting Level
• True or False Conditional Flag
• Location Counter Offset Value
• Generated Machine Code Data
• Source Line Data

If requested (via the [[#+Ls] ]command line option) a symbol table listing is produced that shows the names and values of all of the user-defined identifiers created during the assembly. The values of certain predefined identifiers are also show in the symbol table listing.

The symbol table listing is divided into the following categories:

• Macro Names
• Text Equate Names
• Structures/Union Type Names
• Orphaned Structure Fields
• Record Type Names
• Typedef Type Names
• Group Names
• Segment Names
• Numeric Equate Names
• Code Label Names
• Procedure Names
• Variable Names

ALP places the symbol table listing at the end of the listing output. ALP lists only the types of symbols encountered in the program. For example, if your program does not define any macros, the Macro Names section is omitted from the listing output.

This section describes the following listing control directives:

%BIN

.CREF

.LALL

.LFCOND

.LIST

.LISTALL

.LISTIF

.LISTMACRO

.LISTMACROALL

.NOCREF

.NOLIST

.NOLISTIF

.NOLISTMACRO

PAGE

.SALL

.SFCOND

SUBTITLE

SUBTTL

.TFCOND

TITLE

.XALL

.XCREF

.XLIST

%BIN (Set Listing Width for Object Code Field)

Sets the width of the object code field in the listing file to size columns.

Syntax

%BIN size

.CREF/.XCREF (Control Symbol Cross Referencing)

The output of the cross-reference information is controlled by these directives. The default condition is the .CREF directive. When the assembler finds a .XCREF directive, cross-reference information results in no output until the assembler finds

Note: The assembler does not produce cross-referencing information. These directives are provided for source file compatibility with other assemblers.

Syntax

.CREF

or

 .XCREF [[operand[, ...]]

Remarks

The .XCREF directive can have an optional operand consisting of a list of one or more variable names suppressed in the cross-reference listing.

.LFCOND (List False Conditionals)

You use the .LFCOND (List False Conditionals) directive to list conditional blocks that are evaluated as false.

Syntax

.LFCOND

Remarks

Equivalent to the .LISTIF directive.

.LFCOND does not have an operand. You can end this state either by issuing .TFCOND, which reverts to the default state concerning listing of false conditionals (but with the default state redefined as being in the opposite state,) or by issuing the .SFCOND, which suppresses the listing of false conditionals.

The assembler does not print false conditionals within macros when .LALL is set.

.LIST/.XLIST (Control Listing File Output)

These two directives control output to the listing file.

Syntax

.LIST 

or

.XLIST

Remarks

If a listing is not being created, these directives have no effect. The .LIST is the default condition. When the assembler finds an .XLIST, the assembler does not list the source and the object code until it finds a .LIST directive.

.LISTALL (List All Statements)

Starts the listing of all statements.

Syntax

.LISTALL

Remarks

Equivalent to the combination of .LIST, .LISTIF, and .LISTMACROALL.

.LISTIF (List False Conditionals)

Starts the listing of all statements, including those in false conditional blocks.

Syntax

.LISTIF

Remarks

Equivalent to the combination of .LIST, .LISTIF, and .LISTMACROALL.

.LISTMACRO/.XALL (List Code and Data Statements in Macros)

Starts listing of only those statements that generate code or data when processing macro expansions.

Syntax

.LISTMACRO 

or

.XALL

Remarks

ALP does not support this mode; it is provided for compatibility with other assemblers.

.LISTMACROALL/.LALL (List All Statements in Macros)

Starts listing of all statements when processing macros expansions.

Syntax

.LISTMACROALL 

or

.LALL

.NOCREF (Suppress Symbol Cross Referencing)

Suppresses the listing of symbols in the symbol table and cross-referencing output.

Note: The assembler does not produce cross-referencing information. This directive is provided for source file compatibility with other assemblers.

Syntax

.NOCREF [name[,name]...]

Remarks

If names are specified, only the given names are suppressed. Same as .XCREF.

.NOLIST (Suppress List Output)

Suppresses program listing.

Syntax

.NOLIST

Remarks

Same as .XLIST.

.NOLISTIF (Do Not List False Conditionals)

Suppresses listing of conditional blocks whose condition evaluates to false (0).

Syntax

.NOLISTIF

Remarks

This is the default. Same as .SFCOND.

.NOLISTMACRO (Do Not List Macro Expansions)

Suppresses listing of macro expansion.

Syntax

.NOLISTMACRO

Remarks

Same as .SALL.

This is the default setting for ALP.

PAGE (Control Listing Page Length and Width)

The PAGE directive controls the length and width of each listing page. Place the PAGE directive in the source file to control the format of the listing file produced during assembly.

Syntax

PAGE [operand-1][,operand-2] 

or

PAGE +

Remarks

Using PAGE + or the PAGE directive without an operand entries causes the printer to go to the top of the page and increases the page number by 1. The assembler normally takes this action only when a page is full.

The operand-1 entry specifies the actual number of lines that can be physically printed on the page; the default value is 66.

Use the operand-2 entry to control the width of the page. The page width without a specified number is 132.

Note: The PAGE directive does not set the printer to the desired line width. For proper formatting of the listing, initialize the printer to operate at a corresponding line width before printing the listing file.

SUBTITLE/SUBTTL (Specify Listing Page Subtitle)

Defines the subtitle displayed in the user area of each page in the listing output.

Syntax

SUBTITLE text 

or

SUBTTL text

.TFCOND (Toggle Listing of False Conditionals)

Toggles listing of false conditional blocks.

Syntax

.TFCOND

TITLE (Specify Listing Page Title)

Defines the title displayed in the user area of each page in the listing output.

Syntax

TITLE text

Procedure Control

Procedure control directives allow you to organize your code into procedures. The PROC and ENDP directives mark the beginning and end of a procedure. Also, PROC can automatically:

• Preserve higher register values that should not change but that the procedure might otherwise alter
• Set up a local stack pointer, so that you can access parameters and local variables placed on the stack
• Adjust the stack when the procedure ends

This section describes the following procedure control directives:

PROC

LOCAL

ENDP

PROC (Identify Code Procedure)

The PROC directive identifies a block of code. By dividing the code into blocks, each of which performs a distinct function, you can clarify the overall function of the complete module.

The PROC directive also identifies the procedure distance to help insure that the assembler generates the appropriate instructions for calling and returning from the procedure while maintaining the integrity of the run-time stack.

Syntax

Procedure-Name PROC [Attributes] [Register-List] [Parameter-List]
   .
   .
   .
RET [Constant]
   .
   .
   .
Procedure-Name ENDP

Refer to the following sections for descriptions of the optional arguments to the PROC directive:

• Attributes
• Register-List
• Parameter-List

Remarks

You can execute the block of code identified by the PROC directive in-line, jump to it, or start it with a CALL instruction. If the PROC is called from code that has another ASSUME CS value, you must use the appropriate FAR, FAR16, or FAR32 distance attribute.

The NEAR attribute causes any RET instruction coded within the procedure to be an intra-segment return that pops a return offset from the stack. You can call a NEAR subroutine only from the same segment. However, the FAR attribute causes RET to be an inter-segment return that pops both a return offset and a segment base from the stack. You can call a FAR subroutine from any segment; a FAR subroutine is usually called from a segment other than the one containing the subroutine.

Example

In this example, the Near_Name subroutine is called by the Far_Name subroutine.

           PUBLIC   Far_Name
Far_Name   PROC     FAR
           CALL     Near_Name
           RET                  ; Pops return offset and seg base value
Far_Name   ENDP

           PUBLIC   Near_Name
Near_Name  PROC     NEAR
           .
           .
           .
           RET                  ; pops only return offset
Near_Name  ENDP

You can call the Near_Name subroutine directly from a NEAR segment by using:

CALL Near_Name

A FAR segment can indirectly call the second subroutine by first calling the Far_Name subroutine with:

CALL Far_Name

A CALL to a forward-referenced symbol assumes the symbol is NEAR. If that symbol is FAR, the CALL must have an override, for example:

CALL FAR PTR Forward_Reference

Attributes

The optional fields in the Attributes argument control how the procedure is defined.

Syntax

[Distance] [Language] [Visibility]

Remarks

The various Attribute fields are defined as follows:

Distance Determines the type of CALL instruction that should be used to invoke the procedure, and the type of RET instruction generated by the assembler. The default is NEAR if no #.MODEL directive has been specified, or if the model has been set to TINY, SMALL, COMPACT, or FLAT. The default is FAR if the model has been set to LARGE, MEDIUM, or HUGE. If the programmer is using segments with mixed address sizes (USE16 and USE32) on a 32-bit processor, then the NEAR16, FAR16, NEAR32, and FAR32 keywords may also be used.

Language Determines the calling convention used by the procedure, and the naming convention used when writing the procedure name to the object file. The calling convention defines the layout of the stack frame upon entry to the procedure and how the stack frame is destroyed upon procedure exit. See the section on #LabelNames for more information on language naming conventions.

With the BASIC, FORTRAN, and PASCAL calling conventions, the called procedure expects arguments to be pushed on the stack from left to right, causing the rightmost parameter to be at the lowest stack address and closest in proximity to the frame pointer (the BP or EBP register). With this arrangement, the called procedure always knows the exact amount of stack space used by the parameters, and is responsible for removing them from the stack with a RET Constant instruction when the procedure exits. Such procedures are unable to accept a variable number of arguments.

With the C, STDCALL, SYSCALL, and OPTLINK calling conventions, the called procedure expects arguments to be pushed on the stack from right to left, causing the leftmost parameter to be at the lowest stack address and closest in proximity to the frame pointer (the BP or EBP register). With this arrangement, the calling procedure is free to push additional arguments on the stack, and is responsible for restoring the stack after the called procedure returns (STDCALL requires the called procedure to restore the stack if a fixed number of arguments is being passed).

With the OPTLINK 32-bit calling convention (as defined by the IBM VisualAge C/C++ Compiler environment), up to three parameters will be passed in machine registers to the called procedure, provided they not larger than a DWORD in size. The EAX, EDX, and ECX registers (respectively) are used for this purpose. Stack space for the parameters is still allocated, but the parameter values are not actually copied onto the stack. Refer to the documentation for the IBM VisualAge C++ compiler for more information on the OPTLINK calling convention.

Visibility Determines if the procedure name is written to the object file as a global identifier, allowing it to be referenced by other modules. The allowable values are PRIVATE, PUBLIC, and EXPORT. If operating in #M510 mode and no #.MODEL directive with a Language-Name has been specified, then the default visibility is PRIVATE. In all other situations, the default visibility is PUBLIC unless the default has been overridden by an #OPTION LANGUAGE directive.

When the PRIVATE keyword is used, the procedure name is visible only within the defining module at assembly-time. When the visibility is PUBLIC, the procedure name is made visible to other modules at link-time. The same is true of EXPORT visibility, but in this case the assembler emits a special record into the object file that causes the linker to also make the symbol visible as an exported entry point in the executable module, allowing it be called by other modules at program run-time.

Register List

The optional Register-List defines those registers used in the body of the procedure that must be preserved on behalf of the caller. The assembler generates code to save these registers on the stack when the procedure is entered, and to restore them when the procedure exits.

Syntax

USES Register [Register ...]

Register:

16-Bit-Register

32-Bit-Register

Segment-Register

Remarks

When more than one register is specified, do not use commas to separate the register keywords; use blanks or tabs instead.

Parameter List

The optional Parameter-List defines the parameters that the caller passes to the procedure on the run-time stack.

Syntax

[,[LineBreak]] Parm-List

Parm-List:

Parm-Spec[,[LineBreak]Parm-Spec...]

Parm-Spec:

Parameter-Name[:Type]

The introductory comma in front of the Parm-List is only required if a LineBreak is used to put the first Parm-Spec on the line following the PROC directive.

The optional LineBreak entry allows you to end a Parm-Spec entry with a comma, enter an optional EndOfLine-Comment followed by a physical NewLine character, then continue the Parm-List on the next line.

Remarks

Each Parameter-Name is defined as a Numeric-EquateName]] that is visible only from within the body of the procedure. The value assigned to the parameter name is an expression that defines the parameter type and its location on the stack relative to the value of the frame pointer (the BP or EBP register). The assembler automatically calculates the correct offset value based upon the size of the parameter type.

The Type field is specified as a Type-Declaration and defines the data type associated with the Parameter-Name. If this field is omitted, the data type defaults to WORD if the procedure is defined within a USE16 segment, and DWORD if the procedure is defined within a USE32 segment.

The programmer can read from and store into the locations defined by the Parm-Spec entries as though they were regular named variables, but if the parameter names are to be combined in indexed expressions with other registers, the normal rules for specifying BP - and EBP - relative expressions must be followed.

Example

This example defines a ReadBuffer procedure to accept four arguments passed on the stack.

         .386                      ; Assemble for 32-bit processors
         .model flat ,syscall      ; OS/2 programming model/calling convention
 
         EXTERN DosRead:PROC       ; OS/2 DosRead() API
         INCLUDELIB os2386.lib     ; This lets us link to the API
 
         .code                     ; Open the code segment
 
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
; Call operating system to read input into a buffer
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ReadBuffer   PROC,                 ; need comma to continue the PROC statement 
             hFile:dword,          ; parm 1: Read handle
             pBuffer: ptr byte,    ; parm 2: Address of input buffer
             cbRead: dword,        ; parm 3: Size of input buffer 
             pulActual:ptr dword   ; parm 4: Address of byte count from read
 
         ; set up to call the OS/2 DosRead entry point
 
         PUSH pulActual            ; arg 4
         PUSH cbRead               ; arg 3
         PUSH pBuffer              ; arg 2
         PUSH hFile                ; arg 1
         CALL DosRead              ; Invoke syscall (SYSTEM) function
         ADD  ESP, DWORD*4         ; Remove the four parameters we pushed
                                   ; onto the stack for the DosRead call RET
ReadBuffer    ENDP

LOCAL (Define Local Procedure Variables)

The LOCAL directive defines local stack variables from within a code procedure.

Syntax

LOCAL Local-Spec [,[LineBreak] Local-Spec...]

Local-Spec:'

Local-Name[:Type-Declaration]

Local-Name[Count][:Type-Declaration]

The optional LineBreak entry allows you to end a Local-Spec entry with a comma, enter an optional EndOfLine-Comment followed by a physical NewLine character, then continue with a new Local-Spec on the next line.

Remarks

The LOCAL assembler directive can only appear within the body of a procedure. If used, the LOCAL directive(s) must immediately follow the PROC statement that encloses them, and they must appear before any instructions, code labels, or directives that modify the location counter. Multiple LOCAL directives may appear in succession.

Each Local-Name is defined as a Numeric-EquateName that is visible only from within the body of the procedure. The value assigned to the variable name is an expression that defines the type of the variable and its location on the stack relative to the value of the frame pointer (the BP or EBP register). The assembler reserves space on the stack for each local variable and automatically calculates their locations. After all Local-Spec entries have been processed, the assembler allocates the space by generating instructions to adjust the stack pointer. The assembler also generates instructions to restore the state of the stack and frame pointers when the procedure exits.

The optional [Count] entry can be used to indicate that the variable is a simple "array" of values, where Count is a constant expression. If used, the square brackets surrounding the Countmust be specified. Use of this notation is discouraged however, because it does not associate a "true array" data type with the variable, and cannot be viewed as such from within a symbolic debugger. ALP allows the variable to be associated with a "true array" data type through use of the native Type-Declaration syntax.

The Type-Declaration field specifies the data type to be associated with the Local-Name. If this field is omitted, the data type defaults to WORD if the procedure is defined within a USE16 segment, and DWORD if the procedure is defined within a USE32 segment.

Example

; bootdrv.asm : Returns value of OS/2 boot drive as exit code
; assemble as : alp +Od bootdrv.asm
; link as     : link386 /de bootdrv;
 
         .386                            ; Assemble for 32-bit processors
         .model   flat, syscall          ; OS/2 flat model/calling convention
         .stack   4096 

         EXTERN   DosExit:PROC           ; OS/2 DosExit() API
         EXTERN   DosQuerySysInfo:PROC   ; OS/2 DosQuerySysInfo() API
         INCLUDELIB   os2386.lib         ; link with these routines

; These are values taken from OS/2 API headers. See the OS/2 Toolkit
; Control Program Programming Guide and Reference for more information.

EXIT_PROCESS      EQU  1                 ; for DosExit
QSV_BOOT_DRIVE    EQU  5                 ; For DosQuerySysInfo

ULONG   TYPEDEF   DWORD                  ; use OS/2 type convention

         .code                           ; open code segment

main     PROC
         LOCAL   BootDrive:ULONG         ; place to put value of boot drive

         ; Push parameters to DosQuerySysInfo onto the stack

         PUSH    sizeof BootDrive        ; arg 4 : size of output buffer
         LEA     EAX, BootDrive          ; arg 3 : Address of buffer
         PUSH    EAX 
         PUSH    QSV_BOOT_DRIVE          ; arg 2 : last ordinal value to return
         PUSH    QSV_BOOT_DRIVE          ; arg 1 : first ordinal, same as last
         CALL    DosQuerySysInfo         ; invoke API
         ADD     ESP, DWORD*4            ; remove the parameters from the stack

         CMP     EAX,0                   ; Did the API succeed?
         MOV     EAX,0                   ; if not, use zero as a return code
         JNZ     SomeKindOfError         ; and skip around to the exit logic
         MOV     EAX, BootDrive          ; else, return the boot drive value
SomeKindOfError:
         push    EAX                     ; exit code
         push    EXIT_PROCESS            ; terminates all threads
         call    DosExit                 ; exit to calling process
         RET                             ; never executed
main     ENDP

         END     main

ENDP (Close a Procedure Definition Block)

Every procedure block opened with the PROC directive must be ended with the ENDP directive.

Syntax

procedure-name ENDP

Remarks

If the ENDP directive is not used with the PROC directive, an error occurs. An unmatched ENDP also causes an error.

Note: See the PROC directive in this chapter for more detail and examples of ENDP use.

Example

PUSH       AX              ; Push third parameter
PUSH       BX              ; Push second parameter
PUSH       CX              ; Push first parameter
CALL       ADDUP           ; Call the procedure
ADD        SP,6            ; Bypass the pushed parameters
.
.
.
ADDUP     PROC NEAR        ; Return address for near call
                           ; takes two bytes
          PUSH BP          ; Save base pointer - takes two more
                           ; so parameters start at 4th byte
          MOV  BP,SP       ; Load stack into base pointer
          MOV  AX,[BP+4]   ; Get first parameter
                           ; 4th byte above pointer
          ADD  AX,[BP+6]   ; Get second parameter
                           ; 6th byte above pointer
          ADD  AX,[BP+8]   ; Get third parameter
                           ; 8th byte above pointer
          POP  BP          ; Restore base
          RET              ; Return
ADDUP     ENDP

In this example, three numbers are passed as parameters for the procedure ADDUP. Parameters are often passed to procedures by pushing them before the call so that the procedure can read them off the stack.

Processor Control

ALP provides a set of directives for selecting processors and coprocessors. Once you select a processor, you must only use the instruction set available for that processor. The default is the 8086 processor. If you always want your code to run on this processor, you need not add any processor directives.

This section describes the following processor control directives:

.8086

.8087

.186

.286

.286P

.287

.386

.386P

.387

.486

.486P

.586

.586P

.686

.686P

.MMX

.NOMMX

.8086 (Select 8086 Processor Instruction Set)

The .8086 directive tells the assembler to recognize and assemble 8086 instructions. This directive assembles only 8086 and 8088 instructions (the 8088 instructions are identical to the 8086 instructions). ALP assembles 8086 instructions by default.

Syntax

.8086

Remarks

The .8086directive does not have an operand.

Note: The .8086 directive does not end ALP 8087/80287 mode.

.8087 (Select 8087 Coprocessor Instruction Set)

The .8087 directive tells the assembler to recognize and assemble 8087 instructions and data formats. ALP assembles 8087 instructions by default.

Syntax

.8087

Remarks

The .8087 directive does not have an operand.

.186 (Select 80186 Processor Instruction Set)

The .186 directive tells the assembler to recognize and assemble 8086 or 8088 instructions and the additional instructions for the 80186 microprocessor.

Syntax

.186

Remarks

The .186 directive does not have an operand. Use it only for programs that run on an 80186 microprocessor.

.286 (Select 80286 Processor Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of nonprivileged instructions for the 80286 processor. Disables assembly of instructions introduced with later processors. Also enables 80287 instructions.

Syntax

.286

.286P (Select 80286 Processor Protected Mode Instruction Set)

The .286P directive tells the assembler to recognize and assemble the protected instructions of the 80286 in addition to the 8086, 8088, and nonprotected 80286 instructions.

Syntax

.286P

Remarks

The .286P directive does not have an operand. Use it only for programs run on an 80286 processor using both protected and nonprotected instructions.

.287 (Select 80287 Coprocessor Instruction Set)

The .287 directive tells the assembler to recognize and assemble instructions for the 80287 floating point math coprocessor. The 80287 instruction set consists of all 8087 instructions, plus three additional instructions.

Syntax

.287

Remarks

The .287 directive does not have an operand. Use it only for programs that have 80287 floating point instructions and run on an 80287 math coprocessor.

.386 (Select 80386 Processor Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of nonprivileged instructions for the 80386 processor. Disables assembly of instructions introduced with later processors. Also enables 80387 instructions.

Syntax

.386

.386P (Select 80386 Processor Protected Mode Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of all instructions (including privileged) for the 80386P processor. Disables assembly of instructions introduced with later processors. Also enables 80387 instructions.

Syntax

.386P

.387 (Select 80387 Coprocessor Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of instructions for the 80387 coprocessor.

Syntax

.387

.486 (Select 80486 Processor Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of instructions for the 80486 processor. Also enables 80387 (and later) floating point instructions.

Syntax

.486

Remarks

The .486 directive is not available in M510 mode.

.486P (Select 80486 Processor Protected Mode Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of all instructions (including privileged) for the 80486 processor. Also enables 80387 (and later) floating point instructions.

Syntax

.486P

Remarks

The .486Pdirective is not available in #M510 mode.

.586 (Select Pentium/586 Processor Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of instructions for the Pentium processor family. Also enables 80387 (and later) floating point instructions.

Syntax

.586

Remarks

The .586directive is not available in M510 mode or M600 mode.

.586P (Select Pentium/586 Processor Protected Mode Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of all instructions (including privileged) for the Pentium processor family. Also enables 80387 (and later) floating point instructions.

Syntax

.586P

Remarks The .586P directive is not available in M510 mode or M600 mode.

.686 (Select Pentium Pro/686 Processor Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of instructions for the Pentium Pro processor family. Also enables 80387 (and later) floating point instructions.

Syntax

.686

Remarks

The .686directive is not available in #M510 mode or #M600 mode.

.686P (Select Pentium Pro/686 Processor Protected Mode Instruction Set)

Enables assembly of all instructions (including privileged) for the Pentium Pro processor family. Also enables 80387 (and later) floating point instructions.

Syntax

.686P

Remarks

The .686P directive is not available in #M510 mode or #M600 mode.

.MMX (Select MMX Processor Instruction Set Extensions)

Enables recognition of mnenomics for the MMX instruction set extensions.

Syntax

.MMX

Remarks

If 586 mnemonics (or later) are not already being recognized, the .MMX directive also causes an implicit .586 directive to be executed.

Issuing any .486 (or earlier) processor selection directive causes recognition of MMX mnemonics to be disabled.

If MMX mnemonics are being recognized, issuing a .586 (or later) processor selection directive does not cause recognition of MMX mnemonics to be disabled. If this behavior is desired, use the .NOMMX directive.

The .MMX directive is not available in #M510 mode or #M600 mode.

.NOMMX (Deselect MMX Processor Instruction Set Extensions)

Disables recognition of mnenomics for the MMX instruction set extensions.

Syntax

.NOMMX

Remarks

Does not affect recognition of instruction mnemonics for the currently selected primary processor; it only disables recognition of the MMX mnemonics.

The .NOMMX directive is not available in #M510 mode or #M600 mode.

Example

; Top of file - no processor currently selected 
.MMX            ; enables both MMX and 586 mnemonics 
.NOMMX          ; 586 mnemonics still enabled 
.686            ; 686 mnemonics now being recognized 
.MMX            ; 686 and MMX mnemonics now being recognized 
.NOMMX          ; 686 mnemonics still enabled

Segments

A segment is a collection of instructions or data whose addresses are all relative to the same segment register. The code in your assembler language program defines and organizes segments.

You can define segments by using segment directives or full segment definitions.

This section describes the following directives used to create and manage segments:

ALIGN

.CODE

.CONST

.DATA

.DATA?

DOSSEG

.DOSSEG

ENDS

EVEN

.FARDATA

.FARDATA?

GROUP

.MODEL

ORG

SEGMENT

.SEQ

.STACK

ALIGN (Align Code or Data Item)

Advances the current location counter to the next byte boundary that is a multiple of Expression.

Syntax

ALIGN Expression

Example

To align to a 2-byte boundary:

ALIGN 2

To align to a 4-byte boundary:

ALIGN 4

.CODE (Opens Default or Named Code Segment)

Closes the currently opened segment (if any) and opens the default code segment or a segment with the name given by an optional SegmentName parameter. The .CODE directive may only be used if previous .MODEL directive has been processed.

Syntax

.CODE [SegmentName]

Remarks

When the SegmentName parameter is omitted from the .CODE directive, the assembler generates a default code segment whose name is determined by the memory model as follows:

Memory Model	Value for @code
TINY	_TEXT
SMALL	_TEXT
MEDIUM	module_TEXT
COMPACT_TEXT	LARGE module_TEXT
HUGE	module_TEXT
FLAT	CODE32

The module entry is replaced with base file name of the top-level module being assembled.

When operating in #M510 mode, the SegmentName parameter may only be specified for those memory models that allow multiple code segments (MEDIUM , LARGE, and HUGE), and the value of the #@code symbol is not altered from the default. For other modes of operation, the SegmentName parameter is allowed for any model other than TINY, and the #@code symbol is updated to reflect the SegmentName value.

.CONST (Opens Default Constant Data Segment)

When used with .MODEL, starts a constant data segment for initialized read-only data.

Syntax

.CONST

Remarks

The name of the segment is CONST32 in flat model, and CONST for all other models.

.DATA (Opens Default Data Segment)

When used with .MODEL, starts a near data segment for initialized data.

Syntax

.DATA

Remarks

The name of the segment is DATA32 in flat model, and _DATA for all other models.

.DATA? (Opens Default Uninitialized Data Segment)

When used with .MODEL, starts a near data segment for uninitialized data.

Syntax

.DATA ?

Remarks

The name of the segment is BSS32 in flat model, and _BSS for all other models.

.DOSSEG/DOSSEG (Specify Standard DOS Segment Ordering)

Orders the segments according to the DOS segment convention: CODE first, then segments not in DGROUP, and then segments in DGROUP. The segments in DGROUP follow this order:

1. Segments not in BSS or STACK
2. BSS segments
3. STACK segments

Syntax

.DOSSEG (preferred form) or DOSSEG

Remarks

.DOSSEG is the preferred form.

Use of this directive allows the linker to control the segment ordering according to conventions used in many high-level languages.

ENDS (Close a Segment, Structure, or Union Declaration)

Closes a program segment opened with SEGMENT directive, or ends a structure or union definition opened with the STRUCT or UNION directives. Every SEGMENT, STRUCT, and UNION directive must end with a corresponding ENDS directive.

Syntax

Segment-Name ENDS or
Structure-Name ENDS
   or
Union-Name ENDS

Remarks

If the ENDS directive is not used with the corresponding SEGMENT, STRUCT, or UNION directive, an error occurs. An unmatched ENDS also causes an error.

Note: See the #SEGMENT, #STRUCT, and #UNION directives for more details and examples of the use of ENDS.

Example

CONST      SEGMENT      word public 'CONST'
SEG1       DW           ARRAY_DATA
SEG2       DW           MESSAGE_DATA
CONST      ENDS

EVEN (Align Code or Data Item on an Even Boundary)

The EVEN directive causes the program counter to go to an even boundary (an address that begins a word). This ensures that the code or data that follows is aligned on an even boundary.

Syntax

EVEN

Remarks

If the program counter is not already at an even boundary, EVEN causes the assembler to add a NOP (no operation) instruction so that the counter reaches an even boundary. An error message occurs if EVEN is used with a byte-aligned segment. If the program counter is already at an even boundary, EVEN does nothing.

Example

Before: PC points to 0019 hex (25 decimal).

EVEN

After: PC points to 001A hex (26 decimal).

.FARDATA (Opens Default or Named Far Data Segment)

When used with .MODEL, starts a far data segment for initialized data.

Syntax

.FARDATA [SegmentName]

Remarks

If the SegmentName parameter is not specified, the assembler sets it to FAR_DATA.

.FARDATA? (Opens Default or Named Uninitialized Far Data Segment)

When used with .MODEL, starts a far data segment for uninitialized data.

Syntax

.FARDATA? [SegmentName]

Remarks

If the SegmentName parameter is not specified, the assembler sets it to FAR_BSS.

GROUP (Treat Multiple Segments as a Single Unit)

The GROUP directive associates a group Name with one or more segments, and causes all labels and variables defined in the given segments to have addresses relative to the beginning of the group, rather than to the segments where they are defined.

Syntax

Name GROUP Segment-Name [, ...]

Remarks

Each Segment-Name entry must be a unique segment name assigned by the #SEGMENT directive. A Segment-Name entry may be a forward reference to a subsequently declared segment name.

An additional occurrence of a given group Name in a subsequent GROUP directive does not constitute a redefinition, but instead the effect is cumulative. The group Name itself is declared the first time it appears in a GROUP directive, but the group definition is not complete until the end of the source module is reached. The final group definition is the cumulative list of all unique segments named in all occurrences of a GROUP directive for that group Name.

Segments in a group need not be contiguous. Segments that do not belong to the group can be loaded between segments that do belong to the group. The only restriction is that for USE16 segments the distance (in bytes) between the first byte in the first segment of the group and the last byte in the last segment must not exceed 65535 bytes.

Group names can be used with the #ASSUME directive and as an operand prefix with the segment override operation (:).

Example

The following example shows how to use the GROUP directive to combine segments:

In Module A:

CGROUP    GROUP      XXX,YYY 
XXX       SEGMENT 
          ASSUME     CS:CGROUP 
          . 
          . 
          . 
XXX       ENDS 
YYY       SEGMENT 
          ASSUME     CS:CGROUP
          .
          .
          .
YYY       ENDS

In Module B:

CGROUP    GROUP      ZZZ
ZZZ       SEGMENT 
          ASSUME     CS:CGROUP
          .
          . 
          . 
ZZZ       ENDS

The next example shows how to set DS with the paragraph number of the group called DGROUP.

As immediate:

MOV        AX,DGROUP
MOV        DS,AX

In assume:

ASSUME     DS:DGROUP

As an operand prefix:

MOV      BX,OFFSET DGROUP:FOO
DW       FOO
DW       DGROUP:FOO

Note:

1. DW FOO returns the offset of the symbol within its segment.
2. DW DGROUP:FOO returns the offset of the symbol within the group.

The next example shows how you can use the GROUP directive to create a .COM file type.

PAGE      ,132 
TITLE     GRPCOM - Use GROUP to create a DOS.COM file
; Use the DOS EXE2BIN utility to convert GRPCOM.EXE to GRPCOM.COM.

CG        GROUP      CSEG,DSEG      ; ALL SEGS IN ONE GROUP
DISPLAY   MACRO      TEXT
LOCAL     MSG
DSEG      SEGMENT    BYTE PUBLIC 'DATA'
MSG       DB         TEXT,13,10,"$"
DSEG      ENDS
;; Macro produces partly in DSEG,
;; partly in CSEG
         MOV        AH,9
         MOV        DX,OFFSET CG:MSG
;; Note use of group name
;; in producing offset
         INT   21H 
         ENDM 
DSEG     SEGMENT BYTE PUBLIC 'DATA'
; Insert local constants and work areas here
DSEG     ENDS
CSEG     SEGMENT BYTE PUBLIC 'CODE'
 ASSUME  CS:CG, DS:CG, SS:CG, ES:CG  ; SET BY LOADER
         ORG  100H   ; Skip to end of the PSP
ENTPT    PROC NEAR   ; COM file entry at 0100H
      DISPLAY   "USING MORE THAN ONE SEGMENT"
      DISPLAY   "YET STILL OBEYING .COM RULES"
         RET        ; Near return to DOS
ENTPT    ENDP
CSEG     ENDS
         END        ENTPT

.MODEL (Define Program Memory Segmentation Model)

The .MODEL directive establishes a predefined set of definitions, conventions, and modifications to various default operating behaviors of the assembler. These adjustments are designed to simply certain programming tasks and to allow a more seamless integration with routines written in high level languages.

Syntax

.MODEL Memory-Model [,Language-Type][,OS-Type][,Stack-Distance]

Memory-Model:

TINY

SMALL

COMPACT

MEDIUM

LARGE

HUGE

FLAT

Language-Type:

BASIC

C

FORTRAN

OPTLINK

PASCAL

STDCALL

SYSCALL

OS-Type:

OS_DOS

OS_OS2

Stack-Distance:

FARSTACK

NEARSTACK

Remarks

The .MODEL directive should be placed at the top of the file, after any #processor control directives, but before any of the following simplified segmentation directives are encountered:

• #.CODE
• #.CONST
• #.DATA
• #.DATA?
• [[#.FARDATA]
• #.FARDATA?
• #.STACK

Each of these directives close any segment that is currently opened, then open a different segment whose name and attributes are determined by the Memory-Model argument.

Memory-Model

The fundamental purpose of establishing a programming memory model is to define how the program will be organized within the constraints of the segmented processor architecture. It defines whether there are single or multiple default code and data segments, or whether the default code and data segments are merged into a single segment. The operating system upon which the program will run is a determining factor of which memory models can be used. The following table describes these relationships.

Memory Model	Default Code	Default Data	Merged?	Operating Systems
Tiny	Near	Near	Yes	DOS
Small	Near	Near	No	DOS, 16-Bit OS/2, Win16
Medium	Far	Near	No	DOS, 16-Bit OS/2, Win16
Compact	Near	Far	No	DOS, 16-Bit OS/2, Win16
Large	Far	Far	No	DOS, 16-Bit OS/2, Win16
Huge	Far	Far	No	DOS, 16-Bit OS/2, Win16
Flat	Near	Near	Yes	32-Bit OS/2, Win32

The assembler creates the default code and data segments, then automatically generates an #ASSUME CS:#@code and an #ASSUME DS:#@data statement to refer to them.

Language-Type

Specifies the default naming convention for all public identifiers written that to the object file, and the method whereby parameters are passed to procedures (the calling convention). See the section on the #PROC directive for a detailed explanation of the effects of the Language-Type setting.

OS-Type

This parameter identifies the target operating system upon which the program will run, and is provided for compatibility with other assemblers. ALP ignores this parameter.

Stack-Distance

The NEARSTACK parameter causes the assembler to assume that the stack segment and the default data segment are the same, and that the DS register is equal to the SS register. This is the default setting. The assembler performs an automatic #ASSUME SS:#@data statement when a near stack is used.

The FARSTACK parameter causes the assembler to assume that the stack is in a different physical segment from that of the default data, and that SS register is not equal to DS. This is typically the case for code in a 16- bit dynamic link library that must use the caller's stack. The assembler performs an automatic #ASSUME SS:STACK when this keyword is used.

ORG (Adjust Segment Location Counter)

The ORG directive sets the location counter to the value of Expression. Subsequent instructions are generated beginning at this new location.

Syntax

ORG Expression

Remarks

The assembler must know all names used in Expression on pass 1, and the value must be either absolute or in the same segment as the location counter.

The numeric value of Expression must not be a quantity larger than that which is representable by an unsigned integer having the same word size as the current segment.

You can use the current address operator ($) to refer to the current value of the location counter.

Example

ORG      120H
ORG      $+2       ; SKIP NEXT 2 BYTES

To conditionally skip to the next 256-byte boundary:

CSEG     SEGMENT      PAGE
BEGIN    =            $
         . 
         . 
         . 
         IF ($-BEGIN) MOD 256
; IF NOT ALREADY ON 256 BYTE BOUNDARY
         ORG   ($-BEGIN)+256-(($-BEGIN) MOD 256)
         ENDIF

SEGMENT (Open a Program Information Segment)

Defines or reopens a segment called Segment-Name which will contain all subsequently emitted code or data.

Syntax

Segment-Name SEGMENT [align][combine][use]['class']

Remarks

A segment definition may be followed by zero or more segment attributes, at most one from each of the following selections:

align Instructs the linker to align the segment at the next align boundary. One of:

BYTE The next 8-bit boundary.

DWORD The next 32-bit boundary.

PAGE The next 256-byte boundary (4096 under 32-bit OS/2).

PARA The next 16-byte boundary (default).

WORD The next 16-bit boundary.

combine Controls how the linker will combine this segment with identically-named segments from other modules. One of:

AT address Locates the segment at the absolute paragraph given by address.

COMMON Unioned with segments from other modules.

PRIVATE Will not be combined with other segments (default).

PUBLIC Concatenated to segments from other modules.

STACK Concatenated to segments from other modules. At load time:

SS=beginning of segment

SS:(E)SP=end of segment

use Word size of the segment.

USE16 The segment will have a 16-bit word size.

USE32 The segment will have a 32-bit word size.

'class' Instructs the linker to order segments according to the class name given by class. Segments will not be combined if their class names differ.

.SEQ (Specifies Sequential Segment Ordering)

Orders segments sequentially (the default order).

Syntax

.SEQ

.STACK (Defines Default Stack Segment With Optional Size)

When used with .MODEL, defines a stack segment with the segment name STACK. The optional Size specifies the number of bytes for the stack (default 1024).

Syntax

.STACK [Size]

Remarks

The .STACK directive does not leave the stack segment open when the statement is completed, since it is not a common practice to emit initialized data into the stack segment.

The name of the segment is STACK32 in flat model, and STACK for all other models.

Type Definition

Type definition directives allow the creation of user-defined data types.

This section describes the following type definition directives:

• RECORD
• STRUCT/STRUC
• TYPEDEF
• UNION

RECORD (Define a Record Type Name)

A record is a bit pattern you define to format bytes, words, or dwords for bit-packing. The RecordName becomes a Record-TypeName that can be used create record variables.

Syntax

RecordName RECORD FieldDeclaration [,[LineBreak] FieldDeclaration...]

Where FieldDeclaration has the following form:

FieldName:Width[=InitialValue]

The optional LineBreak entry allows you to end a FieldDeclaration with a comma, enter an optional EndOfLine-Comment followed by a physical NewLine character, then continue the record definition on the next line.

Remarks

The RecordName and FieldName entries are unique globally-scoped #Identifiers that must be specified. Upon successful processing of the RECORD definition, the RecordName entry is converted to a Record-TypeName, and all FieldNames are converted to #Record-FieldNames.

Each Width entry in a FieldDeclaration is specified as an Expression which must evaluate to an Absolute-ExpressionType. The cumulative value of all Width entries becomes the total RecordWidth and must not exceed 32, the size of a DWORD, the maximum size for a Record-TypeName. The Operand Size of the record becomes 1 (BYTE) if the RecordWidth is from 1 through 8, 2 (WORD) if the RecordWidth is from 9 through 16, and 4 (DWORD) if the RecordWidth is from 17 through 32. Any other value causes an error. If the total number of bits in the RecordWidth is not evenly divisible by the Operand Size, the assembler right-justifies the fields into the least-significant bit positions of the record.

When a Record-FieldName is referenced in an expression, the value returned is the shift value required to access the field. The #WIDTH operator is used on the Record-FieldName to return the width of the field in bits, and the #MASK operator is used to obtain the value necessary for isolating the field within the record.

The InitialValue entry contains the default value to used for the field when a record variable is allocated. If the field is at least 7 bits wide, you can initialize it to an ASCII character (for example, FIELD:7='Z').

To initialize a record, use the form:

[Identifier] Record-TypeName Expression[,Expression...]

The Identifier entry is an optional name for the first byte, word, or dword of the reserved memory. The Record-TypeName defines the format and default field values, and is the RecordName you assigned to the record in the RECORD directive.

At least one Expression entry must be specified; additional entries are optional. The Expression must resolve to a Compound-ExpressionType, which may also be duplicated by specifying it as a sub-expression of a Duplicated-ExpressionType. Each Compound-ExpressionType represents a single allocated record entry; each explicit sub-expression of the Compound-ExpressionType represents a field value which overrides the default InitialValue for the field given in the record definition.

Example

Define the record fields; begin with the most significant fields first:

MODULE  RECORD  R:7,     ; First field. ",LineBreak" syntax
                E:4,     ; may be used to split RECORD
                D:5      ; definition across multiple lines

Fields are 7 bits, 4 bits, and 5 bits; the assembler gives no default value. Most significant byte first, this looks like:

RRRR RRRE EEED DDDD

To reserve its memory:

STG_FLD  MODULE <7,,2>   ; Initializer is a Compound-ExpressionType

This defines R=7 and D=2 and leaves E unknown; it produces 2 bytes, the least significant byte first:

02 0E

Define the record fields:

AREA   RECORD   FLA:8='A', FLB:8='B'

To reserve its memory:

CHAR_FLD  AREA <,'P'>

This defines FLA='A' (the default) and changes FLB='P'.

To use a field in the record:

DEFFIELD     RECORD     X:3, Y:4, Z:9
             .
             .
             .
TABLE        DEFFIELD   10   DUP (<0,2,255>)
             . 
             . 
             . 
             MOV   DX, TABLE [2]
; Move data from record to register
; other than segment register
             AND   DX, MASK Y 
; Mask out fields X and Y
; to remove unwanted fields
; The MASK of Y equals 1E00H
; 00011111000000000B   (1E00H)   Is the value
             MOV   CL,Y      ; Get shift count
                             ; 9 is the value
             SHR   DX,CL     ; Field to low-order
                             ; bits of register, DX is now
                             ; equal to the value of field Y
             MOV   CL,WIDTH Y  ; Get number of bits
                             ; in field-4 is the value,
                             ; the WIDTH of Y is 4

STRUCT/STRUC (Define a Structure Type Name)

Defines a Structure-TypeName that represents an #aggregate data type containing one or more fields.

Syntax

Structure-Name STRUCT
   FieldDeclaration 
    .
    .
    .
Structure-Name ENDS

Where FieldDeclaration has the following form:

[FieldName] Allocation-TypeName InitialValue[,InitialValue...]

Remarks

The obsolete spelling for the STRUCT directive is STRUC.

The syntax for the FieldDeclaration is that of a normal data allocation statement. See the section on #Data Allocation for a full description of this syntax.

The various parts of the FieldDeclaration are described as follows:

FieldName Each FieldName entry is converted to Structure-FieldName when processing of the structure definition is complete. If this field is omitted and the Allocation-TypeName resolves to a Structure-TypeName or Union-TypeName, then all of the fields defined within the imbedded structure or union are promoted to be visible at the same level as other FieldName entries in the current structure given by the Structure-Name.

Allocation-TypeName The allowable values for this field are described in detail in the #Data Allocation section. In modes other than #M510, the assembler accepts imbedded occurrences of other structures or unions by specifying an identifier that resolves to a Structure-TypeName or Union-TypeName in this field.

InitialValue The InitialValue field must be an Expression that resolves to an ExpressionType appropriate for the Allocation-TypeName utilized in the FieldDeclaration. The InitialValue expressions become part of the structure type definition. These values are used as default initializers when an instance of the structure is allocated and no explict override values are specified for a particular field.

Example

Define a Structure-TypeName called Numbers:

   Numbers     STRUCT
   One         DB       0
   Two         WORD     0
               BYTE     3 
   Four        DWORD    ? 
   Numbers     ENDS 

Allocate a structure variable called Values using the Numbers Structure-TypeName, overriding the One, Two, and Four Structure-FieldName entries with explicit values, and the third (unnamed) entry is initialized with the default InitialValueinherited from the FieldDeclaration:

Values Numbers <1, 2, , 4>

TYPEDEF (Create a User-Defined Type Name)

Defines a Typedef-TypeName that is an alias for another type declaration.

Syntax

TypeName TYPEDEF Type-Declaration

Remarks

The TypeName entry is a unique globally-scoped Identifier that must be specified. Upon successful processing of the TYPEDEF directive, the TypeName entry is converted to a Typedef-TypeName which can then be used in expressions or as a directive in data allocation statements.

The TYPEDEF directive can be used to create a direct alias for another intrinsic type (a Scalar-TypeName, Record-TypeName, Structure-TypeName, Union-TypeName, or other Typedef-TypeName), a pointer to another type, or it can be used to create vector types (arrays).

Examples

The following are examples of TYPEDEF usage:

CHAR        typedef   byte                  ; CHAR is an alias for intrinsic type
PCHAR       typedef   ptr  CHAR             ; PCHAR is a pointer to CHAR

BUFFER_T    struct
  pLetter   PCHAR     ?                     ; current position in buffer
  Letters   CHAR      "ABCDEF",0            ; array of characters
BUFFER_T    ends

BUFFER      typedef   BUFFER_T              ; alias for intrinsic type
PBUFFER     typedef   ptr BUFFER_T          ; pointer to the BUFFER type

DATA        SEGMENT
HexChars    BUFFER    <>                    ; allocate structure via typedef
pHexChars   PBUFFER   offset  HexChars      ; point to the allocated structure
DATA        ENDS

UNION (Define a Union Type Name)

Defines a Union-TypeName that represents an #aggregate data type containing one or more fields. All of the fields occupy the same physical position in storage.

Syntax

Union-Name UNION
   FieldDeclaration 
    . 
    . 
    . 
Union-Name ENDS

Where FieldDeclaration has the following form:

[FieldName] Allocation-TypeName InitialValue [, InitialValue ...]

Remarks

This directive is not available in #M510 mode.

The syntax for the FieldDeclaration is that of a normal data allocation statement. See the section on #Data Allocation for a full description of this syntax.

The various parts of the FieldDeclaration are described as follows:

FieldName Each FieldName entry is converted to Union-FieldName when processing of the union definition is complete. If this field is omitted and the Allocation-TypeName resolves to a Structure-TypeName or Union- TypeName, then all of the fields defined within the imbedded structure or union are promoted to be visible at the same level as other FieldName entries in the current union given by the Union-Name.

Allocation-TypeName The allowable values for this field are described in detail in the #Data Allocation section. The assembler accepts imbedded occurrences of other structures or unions by specifying an identifier that resolves to a Structure-TypeName or Union-TypeName in this field.

InitialValue The InitialValue field must be an Expression that resolves to an ExpressionType appropriate for the Allocation-TypeName utilized in the FieldDeclaration. Only the InitialValue expression for the first field becomes part of the union type definition; expressions specified for the remaining fields are ignored. This value is used as the default initializer when an instance of the union is allocated and no explict override value is specified for the field.

Example

       .386
IS_sint32    equ   -4
IS_sint16    equ   -2
IS_sint8     equ   -1
NO_TYPE      equ    0
IS_uint8     equ    1
IS_uint16    equ    2
IS_uint32    equ    4

TYPE_T       typedef SBYTE

DATA_T       union
   uint8      BYTE     ?
   sint8      SBYTE    ?
   uint16     WORD     ?
   sint16     SWORD    ?
   uint32     DWORD    ?
   sint32     SDWORD   ?
DATA_T       ends

VALUE_T      struct
   DataType    TYPE_T   NO_TYPE
   DataValue   DATA_T   {}
VALUE_T      ends

             .data
Value        VALUE_T {IS_uint8 ,{1}}             ; unsigned 8-bit value of 1

           .code

;Procedure: IsNegative
; Returns: 1 in EAX if Value. DataValue holds a negative number
;          0 in EAX if Value. DataValue holds a positive number

IsNegative   proc
             cmp     Value.DataType, NO_TYPE        ; check sign of TYPE_T
             jns     short Positive                 ; if positive, so is value

;   check   for   signed 8-bit integer
             cmp     Value.DataType,IS_sint8
             jne     short @F                        ; not 8, check for 16
             movsx   EAX, Value.DataValue.sint8      ; convert 8 bits to 32
             jmp     short Check                     ; and check the value

; check for signed 16-bit integer
@@:          cmp     Value.DataType, ISuuuuuuu_sint16
             jne     short @F                         ; not 16, check for 32
             movsx   EAX, Value.DataValue.sint16      ; convert 16 bits to 32
             jmp     short Check                      ; and check the value

; check for signed 32-bit integer
@@:          cmp     Value.DataType, IS_sint32
             jne     short Positive                   ; unknown, assume positive
             mov     EAX, Value.DataValue.sint32      ; get full 32 bit number

Check:       or      EAX, EAX                      ; check for negative value
             jns     short Positive                ; no sign bit, positive
             mov     EAX,1                         ; indicate negative
             ret                                   ; and return
Positive:    mov     EAX,0                         ; indicate positive
             ret                                   ; and return
IsNegative   endp
end

Miscellaneous

This section describes the following miscellaneous directives:

=

.ABORT

ASSUME

EQU

LABEL

OPTION

.RADIX

= (Assign an Expression to an Assembler Variable)

The = directive lets you create a symbolic assembler-time variable. Numeric expressions may be assigned to the variable as many times as necessary.

Syntax

Name = Expression

Remarks

The = directive is similar to the #EQU assembler directive except you can redefine Name without causing an error condition. However, the = directive is more restrictive about the allowable #ExpressionTypes that can be utilized in the Expression field, and it cannot be used to create #Text-EquateNames.

Name is a globally-scoped Identifier. The Expression entry must evaluate to an Operand-ExpressionType. If an evaluation error occurs, or if the Expression references an external identifier, or if the Expression evaluates to one of the following #Operand-ExpressionTypes:

• Indexed-ExpressionType
• Register-ExpressionType
• Floating-Point-ExpressionType
• Compound-ExpressionType
• Duplicated-ExpressionType

then an error message is issued and the assignment does not take place. Otherwise, the Identifier is converted to a Numeric-EquateName.

See also the #EQU assembler directive and the EQU preprocessor directive.

Example

EMP   = 6         ; Establish as redefineable numeric equate
EMP   EQU 6       ; OK, value is the same, EMP remains redefinable
EMP   EQU 7       ; Error, can't change value with EQU
EMP   = 7         ; OK, EMP is redefineable with =
EMP   = EMP + 1   ; Can refer to its previous definition

Note: The #Expression-Attributes inherited from the Expression during an assignment are not retained in subsequent assignments. For example:

VECTOR = WORD PTR 4            ; Type-Declaration attribute
      MOV [BX], VECTOR         ; Store the 4 as a word
VECTOR = 6                     ; Type-Declaration attribute discarded
      MOV [BX], VECTOR         ; Error, no size for operands

.ABORT (Terminate the Assembly)

Terminates the assembly at the point where the .ABORT directive is encountered. The remainder of the input stream is not read.

Syntax

.ABORT

Remarks

The .ABORT directive is only available in #ALP mode.

ASSUME (Inform Assembler of Register Contents)

The ASSUME directive establishes an assembly-time association between a machine register and a program object or data type. By informing the assembler of the type of information to which a register points, certain programming tasks can be simplified and the assembler can perform some operations automatically.

Syntax

ASSUME Association [,Association ...]

Association:

Segment-Register-Assocation

General-Purpose-Register-Assocation

NOTHING

Segment-Register-Association:

Segment-Register: Expression

Segment-Register: NOTHING

General-Purpose-Register-Association:

General-Purpose-Register: Type-Declaration

General-Purpose-Register: NOTHING

Remarks

If the NOTHING keyword is specified for the Association field, all register associations are cancelled.

If the NOTHING keyword is specified for a particular Segment-Register or General-Purpose-Register, only the association for that register is cancelled.

The following sections describe the two types of register associations:

• Segment-Register-Association
• General-Purpose-Register-Association

Segment Register Association

A Segment-Register-Association establishes an assembly-time association between a Segment-Register and an expression that resolves to a GroupName or SegmentName. It allows the programmer to describe for the assembler what values are held in the segment registers at program run-time.

When the user program executes, all instructions that access memory do so through a particular segment register. To generate the correct encoding for an instruction that accesses a memory location, the assembler must know which segment register will be used in the effective memory address. In general, accessing a memory location from within a user program is done by referencing a named variable defined within a particular named segment.

Before accessing a named program variable (in a named memory segment), it is the programmer's responsibility to insure that the desired segment register actually references the correct physical segment at program run-time. Unless the ASSUME directive is used to describe this association, the assembler has no way of knowing which segment register (if any) is addressing a named segment when a reference to a named variable contained therein is encountered. In this situation, the programmer is forced to use the #Segment Override (: Operator) in every instruction to "reach" the desired variable and cause the assembler to generate the proper instruction encoding. The association established by the ASSUME directive allows the assembler to take over the task of verifying memory references and generating the appropriate instructions.

If you temporarily use a segment register to contain a value other than the segment or group identified in the ASSUME association, then you should reflect the change with a new ASSUME statement, or cancel the association with an ASSUME xS:NOTHING construct.

When the contents of a segment register are used for addressability, the register value should never contradict the association established for that register.

When the #Reference directive is utilized and the program is designed to follow the conventions that it establishes, the ASSUME directive is no longer needed in most cases.

Example

Data    SEGMENT
Stuff   WORD 0
Data    ENDS 

Code   SEGMENT 
       ASSUME NOTHING      ; Cancel all register assumptions
       mov ax, Data        ; Load general-purpose register with segment frame,
       mov DS, ax          ; then establish addressablity through DS 
       mov ES, ax          ; and ES. The assembler doesn't "know" this yet
       mov Stuff, 1        ; Error, can't reach Stuff
       ASSUME ES:Data      ; Associate ES register with Data segment
       add Stuff, bx       ; Now we can reach Stuff, but the assembler needs 
                           ; to generate an ES override instruction byte
       ASSUME DS:SEG Stuff ; Expression to extract the segment value of Stuff
                           ; This has the same effect as ASSUME DS:Data
                           ; Now both DS and ES are associated with Data
       add Stuff, cx       ; This time, the instruction doesn't need an
                           ; override byte because DS is the default
                           ; register for normal accesses to memory
       ASSUME DS:NOTHING   ; Cancel the association between DS and Data
       add Stuff, dx       ; Once again, the ES override is generated
       add DS:Stuff, dx    ; Must use "force" if we want the default encoding
Code   ends
       end

Warning:

If an ASSUME CS:Expression is placed before the code segment it is referencing, the assembler will ignore the ASSUME. The ASSUME CS:Expression statement must follow the SEGMENT definition statement of the code segment it is referencing.

The ASSUME statement for the CS register should be placed immediately following the code #SEGMENT statement, before any labels are defined in that code segment.

General-Purpose Register Association

A General-Purpose-Register-Association establishes an assembly-time association between a General-Purpose-Register and a Type-Declaration. It allows the programmer to describe for the assembler what type of data is being held in the general purpose register at program run-time.

This feature can be very useful when the programmer is treating a general- purpose register as a "pointer" to a particular type of storage. If this " pointer" is being utilized many times in the program, (perhaps changing in value but never in the type of data to which it points), the ASSUME directive can be used to associate the register with the type of data to which it points. This frees the programmer from having to use an explicit #Type Conversion (PTR Operator) every time the register is used to access memory.

A register may only be associated with a data type whose operand size matches that of the register. For instance, the following construct is illegal:

ASSUME EBX:BYTE       ; Error, EBX is a DWORD register

The most useful situation is for the register to contain a pointer to another data type. In this situation, the [[Indirection ([] Operator)]] may be used store or retrieve data through the register without the need for an explicit conversion operation:

     ASSUME   EDI:NOTHING            ; This is the assembler default setting 
     MOV      [EDI],1                ; What is the size supposed to be?
     MOV      byte ptr [EDI],1       ; Fixes the problem, but this can get tiring 
     ASSUME   EDI:PTR BYTE           ; EDI is now a pointer to a byte
     MOV      [EDI],1                ; assembler knows what to do with this now
     INC      [EDI]                  ; and this too

The following constructs are legal but not particularly useful since they simply restate what is already known about the registers (the operand size), and the assembler doesn't enforce a strict level of type checking against register operands:

     ASSUME   ECX:SDWORD              ; Signed double-word matches size of ECX
     ASSUME   EBX:DWORD               ; Unsigned double-word matches size of EBX 
     MOV      ECX, 0FFFFEEEEh         ; Register type-checking is not strict
     MOV      EBX, -1                 ; enough to flag these as errors

In fact, any data type that matches the size of the register may be used; the assembler checks the sizes and reports mismatches, but effectively ignores any settings that are not pointers to other types. Consider the following example:

     STRUCT_T   STRUCT
       One      BYTE   1
       Two      BYTE   2
       Three    BYTE   3
       Four     BYTE   4
     STRUCT_T   ENDS

     ASSUME   EBX:STRUCT_T               ; Ok, STRUCT_T is 4 bytes in size
     MOV      EBX ,  - 1                 ; Legal, but not very meaningful ...

     ; A more useful situation (given that EBX is now holding data of type
     ;  STRUCT_T) would be for the assembler to allow the following notation: 

     MOV      EBX,{ 4 , 3 , 2 , 1 }  ; Hypothetical (UNSUPPORTED!) syntax...

     ; It would also be nice at this point if the symbolic debugger could 
     ; show us the value of EBX in the appropriate format, but the assembler 
     ; does not support the emitting of context-sensitive symbolic debugging
     ; information.

EQU (Assign an Expression to a Symbolic Constant)

The EQU directive assigns the value of Expression to Name.

Syntax

Name EQU Expression

Remarks

If Name has already been defined as a Numeric-EquateName and its currently assigned value differs from the value given by Expression, an error message is produced. Unlike symbols created with the = (equal sign) directive, symbols created with the EQU directive cannot be redefined with different values.

The Expression entry must evaluate to an Operand-ExpressionType. If an evaluation error occurs or if the Expression evaluates to one of the following Operand-ExpressionTypes:

• Indexed-ExpressionType
• Floating-Point-ExpressionType
• Compound-ExpressionType
• Duplicated-ExpressionType

then the Identifier is converted to a Text-EquateName. Otherwise, the Identifier is converted to a Numeric-EquateName.

See also #EQU and #=.

Example

A    EQU     <BP+>   ; explicit text literal, A is a text equate
B    EQU     BP+     ; invalid expression - text equate equivalent to A
B    EQU     1+2     ; valid expression - but still a text equate <1+2>
C    EQU     1+2     ; converted to assembler symbolic constant, value=3
C    EQU     <3>     ; illegal, cannot convert back to text equate

LABEL (Associate a Symbolic Name With Current Address)

The LABEL directive defines the following attributes of Name:

• Segment: current segment being assembled
• Offset: current position within this segment
• Type: the operand of the LABEL directive

Syntax

Name LABEL Type-Declaration
  or 
Name:
  or 
Name::

Remarks

The LABEL directive provides a method of labeling a memory location and assigning it a type without allocating any storage. It can be used to create multiple labels of differing types that are aliases for the same memory location.

The Name entry is an Identifier that is converted to a LabelName according to the value given by Type-Declaration. See the section on #label names for more information on the details of this conversion.

The : and :: forms of this directive are used for defining code labels. In this case, the Nameentry is converted to a Target-LabelName. The double-colon form of the directive is used when the Name must be visible outside of the procedure block in which it is defined.

Example

To refer to a data area but use a length different from the original definition of that area:

BARRAY   LABEL   BYTE
ARRAY    DW      100  DUP (0)
          .
          .
          .
         ADD      AL, BARRAY [99]     ; ADD 100th BYTE TO AL
         ADD      AX, ARRAY [98]      ; ADD  50th WORD TO AX

To define multiple entry points within a procedure:

SUBRT  PROC    FAR
       .
       .
       .
SUB2   LABEL     FAR     ; Should have same attribute as containing PROC
       .
       .
       .
       RET 
SUBRT  ENDP

OPTION (Modify Default Behaviors)

The OPTION directive allows the user to alter certain default behaviors of the assembler, normally to provide backward compatibility with older assemblers. The OPTION directive is not available when assembling in #M510 mode.

Syntax

OPTION Option-Item [,[LineBreak] Option-Item ...]

Remarks

The Option-Item arguments are defined as follows (the underlined keywords denote the default values):

DOTNAME| NODOTNAME Allows user identifiers to begin with an introductory dot (.) character.

EXPR16| EXPR32 Specifies whether expressions are evaluated using 16-bit or 32-bit arithmetic. Some programs may require reverting back to EXPR16 in order to assemble without problems. Once this value has been set it cannot be changed. The use of a processor selection directive to select a 32-bit processor is equivalent to selecting OPTION EXPR32, which prevents any further attempt to select OPTION EXPR16.

LANGUAGE:Language-Name Specifies the default language type for identifiers with PUBLIC or EXPORT visibility. This option overrides any setting given in the #.MODEL directive.

OFFSET:Offset-Type Determines how relocatable offset values are written to the object file output, encoded in the form of a linker "fixup" record. The possible values for Offset-Type are SEGMENT, GROUP, and FLAT.

OLDSTRUCTS| NOOLDSTRUCTS The OLDSTRUCTS keyword causes structure field names to become global identifiers rather than local names private to the structure type. It also prevents the #Structure/Union Field Selection (. Operator) from performing strict checking on its operands, requiring its left operand to have a structure type and its right operand to be the name of a field contained therein.

PROC:Visibility Specifies the default visibility for procedure names. This can be one of PRIVATE, PUBLIC, or EXPORT.

SCOPED| NOSCOPEDThe NOSCOPED keyword forces all code label names defined within procedures to be visible to the entire module and not just from within the defining procedure.

SEGMENT:Address-Size Explicitly sets the default address size value. This is used to control the address size of segments that are opened without explict USE16 or USE32 keywords, and of global identifiers that are declared outside of segment boundaries. The possible values for Address-Size are USE16, USE32, and FLAT.

.RADIX (Set the Default Base for Numeric Literals)

The .RADIX directive lets you change the default RADIX (decimal) to base 2, 8, 10, or 16.

Syntax

.RADIX Expression

Remarks

The Expression entry is in decimal radix regardless of the current radix setting.

The .RADIX directive does not affect real numbers initialized as variables with DD, DQ, or DT.

When using .RADIX 16, be aware that if the hex constant ends in either B or D, the assembler thinks that the B or D is a request to cancel the current radix specification with a base of binary or decimal, respectively. In such cases, add the H base override (just as if .RADIX 16 were not in use).

Example

The statement:

.RADIX 16 
DW     120B

produces an error because 2 is not a valid binary number. The correct specification is:

DW     120BH

The following example:

.RADIX 16 
DW    89CD

also produces an error because C is not a valid decimal number. The correct specification is:

DW    89CDH

The dangerous case is when no error is produced. For example:

.RADIX 16
DW   120D

produces a constant whose value is 120 decimal, not '120D' hex, which might have been the intended value.

The following two move instructions are the same:

MOV   BX, OFFH
.RADIX    16 
MOV    BX , OFF 

The following example:

.RADIX 8 
DQ   19.0      ; Treated as decimal

produces a constant whose value is 19 decimal because 19.0 is a real number. However, if you leave off the decimal point, the following:

.RADIX  8
DQ    19  ; uses current radix

produces a syntax error because nine is not a valid number in .RADIX 8.

Processor Reference

This chapter presents an overview of the instruction set and lists the complete instruction set in alphabetical order. For each instruction, the forms are given for each operand combination, including object code produced, operands required, execution time, and a description. For each instruction, there is an operational description and a summary of exceptions generated.

Intel Instruction Set Overview

This section contains an introduction to the Intel instruction set and presents the terminology necessary to understand the encoding and operation of each individual instruction.

Operand-Size and Address-Size Attributes

When executing an instruction, the processor can address memory using either 16 or 32-bit addresses. Consequently, each instruction that uses memory addresses has associated with it an address-size attribute of either 16 or 32 bits. The use of 16-bit addresses implies both the use of 16-bit displacements in instructions and the generation of 16-bit address offsets (segment relative addresses) as the result of the effective address calculations. 32-bit addresses imply the use of 32-bit displacements and the generation of 32-bit address offsets. Similarly, an instruction that accesses words (16 bits) or doublewords (32 bits) has an operand-size attribute of either 16 or 32 bits.

The attributes are determined by a combination of defaults, instruction prefixes, and (for programs executing in protected mode) size-specification bits in segment descriptors.

Default Segment Attribute

For programs running in protected mode, the D bit in executable-segment descriptors specifies the default attribute for both address size and operand size. These default attributes apply to the execution of all instructions in the segment. A clear D bit sets the default address size and operand size to 16 bits; a set D bit, to 32 bits.

Programs that execute in real mode or virtual-8086 mode have 16-bit addresses and operands by default.

Operand-Size and Address-Size Instruction Prefixes

The internal encoding of an instruction can include two byte-long prefixes: the address-size prefix, 67H, and the operand-size prefix, 66H. (A later section, "Instruction Format", shows the position of the prefixes in an instruction's encoding.) These prefixes override the default segment attributes for the instruction that follows. The following table shows the effect of each possible combination of defaults and overrides.

Effective Size Attributes

Segment Default D = ...	0	0	0	0	1	1	1	1
Operand-Size Prefix 66H	N	N	Y	Y	N	N	Y	Y
Address-Size Prefix 67H	N	Y	N	Y	N	Y	N	Y
Effective Operand Size	16	16	32	32	32	32	16	16
Effective Address Size	16	32	16	32	32	16	32	16

Y = Yes, this instruction prefix is present

N = No, this instruction prefix is not present

Address-Size Attribute for Stack

Instructions that use the stack implicitly (for example: POP EAX) also have a stack address-size attribute of either 16 or 32 bits. Instructions with a stack address-size attribute of 16 use the 16-bit SP stack pointer register; instructions with a stack address-size attribute of 32 bits use the 32-bit ESP register to form the address of the top of the stack.

The stack address-size attribute is controlled by the B bit of the data-segment descriptor in the SS register. A value of zero in the B bit selects a stack address-size attribute of 16; a value of one selects a stack address-size attribute of 32.

Instruction Format

All instruction encodings are subsets of the general instruction format shown in the following figure. Instructions consist of optional instruction prefixes (in any order), one or two primary opcode bytes, possibly an address specifier consisting of the ModR/M byte and the SIB (Scale Index Base) byte, a displacement, if required, and an immediate data field, if required.

Instruction Format

INSTRUCTION PREFIX	ADDRESS-SIZE PREFIX	OPERAND-SIZE PREFIX	SEGMENT OVERRIDE
0 OR 1	0 OR 1	0 OR 1	0 OR 1
NUMBER OF BYTES
OPCODE	MODR/M	SIB	DISPLACEMENT	IMMEDIATE
0 OR 1	0 OR 1	0 OR 1	0 OR 1	0 OR 1
NUMBER OF BYTES

Smaller encoding fields can be defined within the primary opcode or opcodes. These fields define the direction of the operation, the size of the displacements, the register encoding, or sign extension; encoding fields vary depending on the class of operation.

Most instructions that can refer to an operand in memory have an addressing form byte following the primary opcode byte(s). This byte, called the ModR/M byte, specifies the address form to be used. Certain encodings of the ModR/M byte indicate a second addressing byte, the SIB (Scale Index Base) byte, which follows the ModR/M byte and is required to fully specify the addressing form.

Addressing forms can include a displacement immediately following either the ModR/M or SIB byte. If a displacement is present, it can be 8-, 16- or 32-bits.

If the instruction specifies an immediate operand, the immediate operand always follows any displacement bytes. The immediate operand, if specified, is always the last field of the instruction.

Zero or one bytes are reserved for each group of prefixes. The prefixes are grouped as follows:

1. Instruction Prefixes: REP, REPE/REPZ, REPNE/REPNZ, LOCK
2. Segment Override Prefixes: CS, SS, DS, ES, FS, GS
3. Operand Size Override
4. Address Size Override

For each instruction, one prefix may be used from each group. The effect of redundant prefixes (more than one prefix from a group) is undefined and may vary from processor to processor. The prefixes may come in any order.

The following are the allowable instruction prefix codes:

F3H     REP prefix (used only with string instructions)
F3H     REPE/REPZ prefix (used only with string instructions)
F2H     REPNE/REPNZ prefix (used only with string instructions)
F0H     LOCK prefix 

The following are the segment override prefixes:

2EH     CS segment override prefix 
36H     SS segment override prefix 
3EH     DS segment override prefix 
26H     ES segment override prefix 
64H     FS segment override prefix 
65H     GS segment override prefix 
66H     Operand-size override 
67H     Address-size override 

ModR/M and SIB Bytes

The ModR/M and SIB bytes follow the opcode byte(s) in many of the processor instructions. They contain the following information:

• The indexing type or register number to be used in the instruction
• The register to be used, or more information to select the instruction
• The base, index, and scale information

The ModR/M byte contains three fields of information:

• The mod field, which occupies the two most significant bits of the byte, combines with the r/m field to form 32 possible values: eight registers and 24 indexing modes.
• The reg field, which occupies the next three bits following the mod field, specifies either a register number or three more bits of opcode information. The meaning of the reg field is determined by the first (opcode) byte of the instruction.
• The r/m field, which occupies the three least significant bits of the byte, can specify a register as the location of an operand, or can form part of the addressing-mode encoding in combination with the mod field as described above.

The based indexed forms of 32-bit addressing require the SIB byte. The presence of the SIB byte is indicated by certain encodings of the ModR/M byte. The SIB byte then includes the following fields:

• The ss field, which occupies the two most significant bits of the byte, specifies the scale factor.
• The index field, which occupies the next three bits following the ss field and specifies the register number of the index register.
• The base field, which occupies the three least significant bits of the byte, specifies the register number of the base register.

ModR/M and SIB Byte Formats

                 MODR/M BYTE
 
    7     6    5     4     3   2    1     0
  /------------------------------------------\
  |  MOD     |   REG/OPCODE   |     R/M      |
  \------------------------------------------/
 
           SIB (SCALE INDEX BASE) BYTE
 
    7     6    5     4     3   2    1     0
  /------------------------------------------\
  |    SS    |     INDEX      |     BASE     |
  \------------------------------------------/

16-Bit Addressing Forms with the ModR/M Byte

r8(/r) r16(/r) r32(/r) /digit (Opcode) REG =			AL AX EAX 0 000	CL CX ECX 1 001	DL DX EDX 2 010	BL BX EBX 3 011	AH SP ESP 4 100	CH BP EBP 5 101	DH SI ESI 6 110	BH DI EDI 7 111
Effective Address	MOD	R/M	MODR/M Values in Hexadecimal
[BX+SI]	00	000	00	08	10	18	20	28	30	38
[BX+DI]		001	01	09	11	19	21	29	31	39
[BP+SI]		010	02	0A	12	1A	22	2A	32	3A
[BP+DI]		011	03	0B	13	1B	23	2B	33	3B
[SI]		100	04	0C	14	1C	24	2C	34	3C
[DI]		101	05	0D	15	1D	25	2D	35	3D
disp16		110	06	0E	16	1E	26	2E	36	3E
[BX]		111	07	0F	17	1F	27	2F	37	3F
[BX+SI]+disp8	01	000	40	48	50	58	60	68	70	78
[BX+DI]+disp8		001	41	49	51	59	61	69	71	79
[BP+SI]+disp8		010	42	4A	52	5A	62	6A	72	7A
[BP+DI]+disp8		011	43	4B	53	5B	63	6B	73	7B
[SI]+disp8		100	44	4C	54	5C	64	6C	74	7C
[DI]+disp8		101	45	4D	55	5D	65	6D	75	7D
[BP]+disp8		110	46	4E	56	5E	66	6E	76	7E
[BX]+disp8		111	47	4F	57	5F	67	6F	77	7F
[BX+SI]+disp16	10	000	80	88	90	98	A0	A8	B0	B8
[BX+DI]+disp16		001	81	89	91	99	A1	A9	B1	B9
[BP+SI]+disp16		010	82	8A	92	9A	A2	AA	B2	BA
[BP+DI]+disp16		011	83	8B	93	9B	A3	AB	B3	BB
[SI]+disp16		100	84	8C	94	9C	A4	AC	B4	BC
[DI]+disp16		101	85	8D	95	9D	A5	AD	B5	BD
[BP]+disp16		110	86	8E	96	9E	A6	AE	B6	BE
[BX]+disp16		111	87	8F	97	9F	A7	AF	B7	BF
EAX/AX/AL	11	000	C0	C8	D0	D8	E0	E8	F0	F8
ECX/CX/CL		001	C1	C9	D1	D9	E1	E9	F1	F9
EDX/DX/DL		010	C2	CA	D2	DA	E2	EA	F2	FA
EBX/BX/BL		011	C3	CB	D3	DB	E3	EB	F3	FB
ESP/SP/AH		100	C4	CC	D4	DC	E4	EC	F4	FC
EBP/BP/CH		101	C5	CD	D5	DD	E5	ED	F5	FD
ESI/SI/DH		110	C6	CE	D6	DE	E6	EE	F6	FE
EDI/DI/BH		111	C7	CF	D7	DF	E7	EF	F7	FF

Notes:

1. disp8 denotes an 8-bit displacement following the ModR/M byte, to be sign-extended and added to the index.
2. disp16 denotes a 16-bit displacement following the ModR/M byte, to be added to the index. Default segment register is SS for the effective addresses containing a BP index, DS for other effective addresses.

32-Bit Addressing Forms with the ModR/M Byte

r8(/r) r16(/r) r32(/r) /digit (Opcode) REG =			AL AX EAX 0 000	CL CX ECX 1 001	DL DX EDX 2 010	BL BX EBX 3 011	AH SP ESP 4 100	CH BP EBP 5 101	DH SI ESI 6 110	BH DI EDI 7 111
Effective Address	MOD	R/M	MODR/M Values in Hexadecimal
[EAX] | 00 | 000 | 00 | 08 | 10 | 18 | 20 | 28 | 30 | 38 [ECX] | | 001 | 01 | 09 | 11 | 19 | 21 | 29 | 31 | 39 [EDX] | | 010 | 02 | 0A | 12 | 1A | 22 | 2A | 32 | 3A [EBX] | | 011 | 03 | 0B | 13 | 1B | 23 | 2B | 33 | 3B [--][--] | | 100 | 04 | 0C | 14 | 1C | 24 | 2C | 34 | 3C disp32 | | 101 | 05 | 0D | 15 | 1D | 25 | 2D | 35 | 3D [ESI] | | 110 | 06 | 0E | 16 | 1E | 26 | 2E | 36 | 3E [EDI] | | 111 | 07 | 0F | 17 | 1F | 27 | 2F | 37 | 3F disp8[EAX] | 01 | 000 | 40 | 48 | 50 | 58 | 60 | 68 | 70 | 78 disp8[ECX] | | 001 | 41 | 49 | 51 | 59 | 61 | 69 | 71 | 79 disp8[EDX] | | 010 | 42 | 4A | 52 | 5A | 62 | 6A | 72 | 7A disp8[EBX] | | 011 | 43 | 4B | 53 | 5B | 63 | 6B | 73 | 7B disp8[--][--] | | 100 | 44 | 4C | 54 | 5C | 64 | 6C | 74 | 7C disp8[EBP] | | 101 | 45 | 4D | 55 | 5D | 65 | 6D | 75 | 7D disp8[ESI] | | 110 | 46 | 4E | 56 | 5E | 66 | 6E | 76 | 7E disp8[EDI] | | 111 | 47 | 4F | 57 | 5F | 67 | 6F | 77 | 7F disp32[EAX] | 10 | 000 | 80 | 88 | 90 | 98 | A0 | A8 | B0 | B8 disp32[ECX] | | 001 | 81 | 89 | 91 | 99 | A1 | A9 | B1 | B9 disp32[EDX] | | 010 | 82 | 8A | 92 | 9A | A2 | AA | B2 | BA disp32[EBX] | | 011 | 83 | 8B | 93 | 9B | A3 | AB | B3 | BB disp32[--][--]| | 100 | 84 | 8C | 94 | 9C | A4 | AC | B4 | BC disp32[EBP] | | 101 | 85 | 8D | 95 | 9D | A5 | AD | B5 | BD disp32[ESI] | | 110 | 86 | 8E | 96 | 9E | A6 | AE | B6 | BE disp32[EDI] | | 111 | 87 | 8F | 97 | 9F | A7 | AF | B7 | BF EAX/AX/AL | 11 | 000 | C0 | C8 | D0 | D8 | E0 | E8 | F0 | F8 ECX/CX/CL | | 001 | C1 | C9 | D1 | D9 | E1 | E9 | F1 | F9 EDX/DX/DL | | 010 | C2 | CA | D2 | DA | E2 | EA | F2 | FA EBX/BX/BL | | 011 | C3 | CB | D3 | DB | E3 | EB | F3 | FB ESP/SP/AH | | 100 | C4 | CC | D4 | DC | E4 | EC | F4 | FC EBP/BP/CH | | 101 | C5 | CD | D5 | DD | E5 | ED | F5 | FD ESI/SI/DH | | 110 | C6 | CE | D6 | DE | E6 | EE | F6 | FE EDI/DI/BH | | 111 | C7 | CF | D7 | DF | E7 | EF | F7 | FF

Notes:

1. [--][--] means a SIB follows the ModR/M byte.
2. disp8 denotes an 8-bit displacement following the SIB byte, to be sign-extended and added to the index.
3. disp32 denotes a 32-bit displacement following the SIB byte, to be added to the index.

32-Bit Addressing Forms with the SIB Byte

r32			EAX	ECX	EDX	EBX	ESP	[*]	ESI	EDI
Base =			0	1	2	3	4	5	6	7
Base =			000	001	010	011	100	101	110	111
Scaled Index	SS	Index	SIB Values in Hexadecimal
[EAX]	00	000	00	01	02	03	04	05	06	07
[ECX]		001	08	09	0A	0B	0C	0D	0E	0F
[EDX]		010	10	11	12	13	14	15	16	17
[EBX]		011	18	19	1A	1B	1C	1D	1E	1F
none		100	20	21	22	23	24	25	26	27
[EBP]		101	28	29	2A	2B	2C	2D	2E	2F
[ESI]		110	30	31	32	33	34	35	36	37
[EDI]		111	38	39	3A	3B	3C	3D	3E	3F
[EAX*2]	01	000	40	41	42	43	44	45	46	47
[ECX*2]		001	48	49	4A	4B	4C	4D	4E	4F
[EDX*2]		010	50	51	52	53	54	55	56	57
[EBX*2]		011	58	59	5A	5B	5C	5D	5E	5F
none		100	60	61	62	63	64	65	66	67
[EBP*2]		101	68	69	6A	6B	6C	6D	6E	6F
[ESI*2]		110	70	71	72	73	74	75	76	77
[EDI*2]		111	78	79	7A	7B	7C	7D	7E	7F
[EAX*4]	10	000	80	81	82	83	84	85	86	87
[ECX*4]		001	88	89	8A	8B	8C	8D	8E	8F
[EDX*4]		010	90	91	92	93	94	95	96	97
[EBX*4]		011	98	89	9A	9B	9C	9D	9E	9F
none		100	A0	A1	A2	A3	A4	A5	A6	A7
[EBP*4]		101	A8	A9	AA	AB	AC	AD	AE	AF
[ESI*4]		110	B0	B1	B2	B3	B4	B5	B6	B7
[EDI*4]		111	B8	B9	BA	BB	BC	BD	BE	BF
[EAX*8]	11	000	C0	C1	C2	C3	C4	C5	C6	C7
[ECX*8]		001	C8	C9	CA	CB	CC	CD	CE	CF
[EDX*8]		010	D0	D1	D2	D3	D4	D5	D6	D7
[EBX*8]		011	D8	D9	DA	DB	DC	DD	DE	DF
none		100	E0	E1	E2	E3	E4	E5	E6	E7
[EBP*8]		101	E8	E9	EA	EB	EC	ED	EE	EF
[ESI*8]		110	F0	F1	F2	F3	F4	F5	F6	F7
[EDI*8]		111	F8	F9	FA	FB	FC	FD	FE	FF

Notes: [*] means a disp32 with no base if MOD is 00, [EBP] otherwise. This provides the following addressing modes:

disp32[index]           (MOD=00)
disp8[EBP][index]       (MOD=01)
disp32[EBP][index]      (MOD=10)

How to Read the Instruction Set Pages

The following sections describe how to interpret the description pages for each instruction listed in the Intel Instruction Set section. Each instruction family is introduced by a descriptive heading such as the following:

CMC-Complement Carry Flag

Each instruction family may be accompanied by descriptive sections labeled as follows: Details Table, Operation, Flags Affected, Protected Mode Exceptions, Real Address Mode Exceptions, Virtual-8086 Mode Exceptions, and optionally, a Notes section. The following sections explain the notational conventions and abbreviations used in these paragraphs of the instruction descriptions.

Details Table

For each instruction family, a table is given to list the details of each individual instruction. The following is an example of this table:

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F5	CMC	2	2	2	2	2	2	Complement carry flag

The Encoding, Instruction, and Description columns are described in the following sections. The columns labeled 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are collectively described in the Clocks section. A timing entry appearing in one of these columns is an indication that the associated processor implements that particular instruction variation. The column names are abbreviated, and are described as follows:

0 The 8088/8086/8087 Processor Family

1 The 80186/8087 Processor Family

2 The 80286/80287 Processor Family

3 The 80386/80387 Processor Family

4 The 80486 Processor Family

5 The Pentium Processor Family

Encoding Column

The "Encoding" column gives the complete object code produced for each form of the instruction. When possible, the codes are given as hexadecimal bytes, in the same order in which they appear in memory. Definitions of entries other than hexadecimal bytes are as follows:

• /digit: (digit is between 0 and 7) indicates that the ModR/M byte of the instruction uses only the r/m (register or memory) operand. The reg field contains the digit that provides an extension to the instruction's opcode.
• /r: indicates that the ModR/M byte of the instruction contains both a register operand and an r/m operand.
• cb, cw, cd, cp: a 1-byte (cb), 2-byte (cw), 4-byte (cd) or 6-byte (cp) value following the opcode that is used to specify a code offset and possibly a new value for the code segment register.
• ib, iw, id: a 1-byte (ib), 2-byte (iw), or 4-byte (id) immediate operand to the instruction that follows the opcode, ModR/M bytes or scale-indexing bytes. The opcode determines if the operand is a signed value. All words and doublewords are given with the low-order byte first.
• +rb, +rw, +rd: a register code, from 0 through 7, added to the hexadecimal byte given at the left of the plus sign to form a single opcode byte. The codes are:

rb	rw	rd
AL = 0	AX = 0	EAX = 0
CL = 1	CX = 1	ECX = 1
DL = 2	DX = 2	EDX = 2
BL = 3	BX = 3	EBX = 3
AH = 4	SP = 4	ESP = 4
CH = 5	BP = 5	EBP = 5
DH = 6	SI = 6	ESI = 6
BH = 7	DI = 7	EDI = 7

• +i: used in floating-point instructions when one of the operands is ST(i) from the FPU register stack. The number i (which can range from 0 to 7) is added to the hexadecimal byte given at the left of the plus sign to form a single opcode byte.

Instruction Column

The "Instruction" column gives the syntax of the instruction statement as it would appear in an assembler program. The following is a list of the symbols used to represent operands in the instruction statements:

rel8

A relative address in the range from 128 bytes before the end of the instruction to 127 bytes after the end of the instruction.

rel16

A relative address in the range from 32768 bytes before the end of the instruction to 32767 bytes after the end of the instruction. Applies to instructions with an operand-size attribute of 16 bits, and must be within the same code segment as the instruction assembled.

rel32

A relative address in the range from 2147483648 bytes before the end of the instruction to 2147483647 bytes after the end of the instruction. Applies to instructions with an operand-size attribute of 32 bits, and must be within the same code segment as the instruction assembled.

ptr16

16

A far pointer, typically in a code segment different from that of the instruction. The notation 16:16 indicates that the value of the pointer has two parts. The value to the left of the colon is a 16-bit selector or value destined for the code segment register. The value to the right reflects the operand-size attribute of the instruction (16 bits) and corresponds to the offset within the destination segment.

ptr16

32

A far pointer, typically in a code segment different from that of the instruction. The notation 16:32 indicates that the value of the pointer has two parts. The value to the left of the colon is a 16-bit selector or value destined for the code segment register. The value to the right reflects the operand-size attribute of the instruction (32 bits) and corresponds to the offset within the destination segment.

r8

One of the byte registers AL, CL, DL, BL, AH, CH, DH, or BH.

r16

One of the word registers AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, or DI.

r32

One of the doubleword registers EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, or EDI.

imm8

An immediate byte value. imm8 is a signed number between -128 and +127 inclusive. For instructions in which imm8 is combined with a word or doubleword operand, the immediate value is sign-extended to form a word or doubleword. The upper byte of the word is filled with the topmost bit of the immediate value.

imm16

An immediate word value used for instructions whose operand-size attribute is 16 bits. This is a number between -32768 and +32767 inclusive.

imm32

An immediate doubleword value used for instructions whose operand-size attribute is 32-bits. It allows the use of a number between +2147483647 and -2147483648 inclusive.

r/m8

A one-byte operand that is either the contents of a byte register (AL, BL, CL, DL, AH, BH, CH, DH), or a byte from memory.

r/m16

A word register or memory operand used for instructions whose operand-size attribute is 16 bits. The word registers are: AX, BX, CX, DX, SP, BP, SI, DI. The contents of memory are found at the address provided by the effective address computation.

r/m32

A doubleword register or memory operand used for instructions whose operand-size attribute is 32-bits. The doubleword registers are: EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI. The contents of memory are found at the address provided by the effective address computation.

r/m64

A quadword register or memory operand used for instructions whose operand- size attribute is 64-bits. The reg/opcode field represents the opcode. The contents of memory are found at the address provided by the effective address computation.

m

A 16 or 32-bit memory operand.

m8

A memory byte addressed by DS:[E]SI or ES:[E]DI (used only by string instructions).

m16

A memory word addressed by DS:[E]SI or ES:[E]DI (used only by string instructions).

m32

A memory doubleword addressed by DS:[E]SI or ES:[E]DI (used only by string instructions).

m16

16

A memory operand containing a far pointer composed of two numbers. The number to the left of the colon corresponds to the pointer's segment selector. The number to the right corresponds to its offset.

m16

32

A memory operand containing a far pointer composed of two numbers. The number to the left of the colon corresponds to the pointer's segment selector. The number to the right corresponds to its offset.

m16&16

A memory operand consisting of data item pairs whose sizes are indicated on the left and the right side of the ampersand. All memory addressing modes are allowed. Used by the BOUND instruction to provide an operand containing an upper and lower bounds for array indices.

m16&32

A memory operand consisting of data item pairs whose sizes are indicated on the left and the right side of the ampersand. All memory addressing modes are allowed. Used by the by LIDT and LGDT to provide a word with which to load the limit field, and a doubleword with which to load the base field of the corresponding Global and Interrupt Descriptor Table Registers.

m32&32

A memory operand consisting of data item pairs whose sizes are indicated on the left and the right side of the ampersand. All memory addressing modes are allowed. Used by the BOUND instruction to provide an operand containing an upper and lower bounds for array indices.

moffs8

The memory offset of a BYTE variable used in some variants of the MOV instruction. The actual address is given by a simple offset relative to the segment base. No ModR/M byte is used in the instruction. The address- size attribute of the instruction determines the size of the offset data.

moffs16

The memory offset of a WORD variable used in some variants of the MOV instruction. The actual address is given by a simple offset relative to the segment base. No ModR/M byte is used in the instruction. The address- size attribute of the instruction determines the size of the offset data.

moffs32

The memory offset of a DWORD variable used in some variants of the MOV instruction. The actual address is given by a simple offset relative to the segment base. No ModR/M byte is used in the instruction. The address- size attribute of the instruction determines the size of the offset data.

Sreg

A segment register. The segment register bit assignments are ES=0, CS=1, SS=2, DS=3, FS=4, and GS=5.

m32real

A single-precision floating-point operand in memory.

m64real

A double-precision floating-point operand in memory.

m80real

An extended-precision floating-point operand in memory.

m80bcd

A 80 byte binary-coded decimal operand in memory.

m16int

A word integer operand in memory. Used in some floating-point instructions.

m32int

A short integer operand in memory. Used in some floating-point instructions.

m64int

A long integer operand in memory. Used in some floating-point instructions.

m14byte

A 14-byte floating-point operand in memory.

m28byte

A 28-byte floating-point operand in memory.

m94byte

A 94-byte floating-point operand in memory.

m108byte

A 108-byte floating-point operand in memory.

ST or ST(0)

Top element of the FPU register stack.

ST(i)

ith element from the top of the FPU register stack. (i=0..7)

Clocks Columns

Each "Clocks" column gives the approximate number of clock cycles the instruction takes to execute on that particular processor. The clock count calculations makes the following assumptions:

• Data and instruction accesses hit in the cache.
• The target of a jump instruction is in the cache.
• No invalidate cycles contend with the instruction for use of the cache.
• Page translation hits in the TLB.
• Memory operands are aligned.
• Effective address calculations use a base register which is not the destination register of the preceding instruction.
• No exceptions are detected during execution.
• There are no write-buffer delays.

The following symbols are used in the clock count specifications:

• n, which represents a number of repetitions.
• m, which represents the number of components in the next instruction executed, where the entire displacement (if any) counts as one component, the entire immediate data (if any) counts as one component, and every other byte of the instruction and prefix(es) each counts as one component.
• pm:, a clock count that applies when the instruction executes in Protected Mode. pm: is not given when the clock counts are the same for Protected and Real Address Modes.

When an exception occurs during the execution of an instruction and the exception handler is in another task, the instruction execution time is increased by the number of clocks to effect a task switch. This parameter depends on several factors:

• The type of TSS used to represent the new task (32 bit TSS or 16 bit TSS).
• Whether the current task is in V86 mode.
• Whether the new task is in V86 mode.
• Whether accesses hit in the cache.
• Whether a task gate on an interrupt/trap gate is used.

The following table summarizes the task switch times for exceptions, assuming cache hits and the use of task gates.

Task Switch Times for Exceptions

OLD TASK	NEW TASK
	TO 32 BIT TSS	TO 16 BIT TSS	TO VM TSS
VM/32 bit/16 bit TSS	85	87	71

Description Column

The "Description" column following the "Clocks" columns briefly explains the various forms of the instruction. The "Operation" and "Description" sections contain more details of the instruction's operation.

Description

The "Description" section contains further explanation of the instruction's operation.

Operation

The "Operation" section contains an algorithmic description of the instruction which uses a notation similar to the Algol or Pascal language. The algorithms are composed of the following elements:

• Comments are enclosed within the symbol pairs "(*" and "*)".
• Compound statements are enclosed between the keywords of the "if" statement (IF, THEN, ELSE, FI) or of the "do" statement (DO, OD), or of the "case" statement (CASE ... OF, ESAC).
• Execution continues until the END statement is encountered.
• A register name implies the contents of the register. A register name enclosed in brackets implies the contents of the location whose address is contained in that register. For example, ES:[DI] indicates the contents of the location whose ES segment relative address is in register DI. [SI] indicates the contents of the address contained in register SI relative to SI's default segment (DS) or overridden segment.
• Brackets are also used for memory operands, where they mean that the contents of the memory location is a segment-relative offset. For example, [SRC] indicates that the contents of the source operand is a segment- relative offset.
• A ← B; indicates that the value of B is assigned to A.
• The symbols =, <>, ò, and ó are relational operators used to compare two values, meaning equal, not equal, greater or equal, less or equal, respectively. A relational expression such as A = B is TRUE if the value of A is equal to B; otherwise it is FALSE.
• A * B indicates that the value of A is multiplied by the value of B.

The following identifiers are used in the algorithmic descriptions:

• OperandSize represents the operand-size attribute of the instruction, which is either 16 or 32 bits. AddressSize represents the address-size attribute, which is either 16 or 32 bits. For example,

IF instruction = CMPSW
THEN OperandSize ← 16;
ELSE 
  IF instruction = CMPSD 
  THEN OperandSize ← 32;
  FI;
FI;

indicates that the operand-size attribute depends on the form of the CMPS instruction used. Refer to the explanation of address-size and operand-size attributes at the beginning of this chapter for general guidelines on how these attributes are determined.

• StackAddrSize represents the stack address-size attribute associated with the instruction, which has a value of 16 or 32 bits, as explained earlier in the chapter.
• SRC represents the source operand. When there are two operands, SRC is the one on the right.
• DEST represents the destination operand. When there are two operands, DEST is the one on the left.
• LeftSRC, RightSRC distinguishes between two operands when both are source operands.
• eSP represents either the SP register or the ESP register depending on the setting of the B-bit for the current stack segment.

The following functions are used in the algorithmic descriptions:

• Truncate to 16 bits(value) reduces the size of the value to fit in 16 bits by discarding the uppermost bits as needed.
• Addr(operand) returns the effective address of the operand (the result of the effective address calculation prior to adding the segment base).
• ZeroExtend(value) returns a value zero-extended to the operand-size attribute of the instruction. For example, if OperandSize = 32, ZeroExtend of a byte value of -10 converts the byte from F6H to doubleword with hexadecimal value 000000F6H. If the value passed to ZeroExtend and the operand-size attribute are the same size, ZeroExtend returns the value unaltered.
• SignExtend(value) returns a value sign-extended to the operand-size attribute of the instruction. For example, if OperandSize = 32, SignExtend of a byte containing the value -10 converts the byte from F6H to a doubleword with hexadecimal value FFFFFFF6H. If the value passed to SignExtend and the operand-size attribute are the same size, SignExtend returns the value unaltered.
• Push(value) pushes a value onto the stack. The number of bytes pushed is determined by the operand-size attribute of the instruction. The action of Push is as follows:

IF StackAddrSize = 16 
THEN 
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
     SP ← SP -2;
     SS:[SP] ← value; (* 2 bytes assigned starting at byte address in SP *)
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     SP ← SP -4;
     SS:[SP] ← value; (* 4 bytes assigned starting at byte address in SP *)
  FI;
ELSE (* StackAddrSize = 32 *)
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
  ESP ← ESP -2;
     SS:[ESP] ← value; (* 2 bytes assigned starting at byte address in ESP*)
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     ESP ← ESP -4;
     SS:[ESP] ← value; (* 4 bytes assigned starting at byte address in ESP*)
  FI;
FI;

• Pop(value) removes the value from the top of the stack and returns it. The statement EAX ← Pop( ); assigns to EAX the 32-bit value that Pop took from the top of the stack. Pop will return either a word or a doubleword depending on the operand-size attribute. The action of Pop is as follows:

IF StackAddrSize = 16 
THEN 
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
     ret val ← SS:[SP]; (* 2-byte value *)
     SP ← SP + 2;
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     ret val ← SS:[SP]; (* 4-byte value *)
     SP ← SP + 4;
  FI;
ELSE (* StackAddrSize = 32 *)
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
     ret val ← SS:[ESP]; (* 2 byte value *)
     ESP ← ESP + 2;
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     ret val ← SS:[ESP]; (* 4 byte value *)
     ESP ← ESP + 4;
  FI;
FI;
RETURN(ret val); (*returns a word or doubleword*)

Pop ST is used on floating-point instruction pages to mean pop the FPU register stack.

• Bit[BitBase, BitOffset] returns the value of a bit within a bit string, which is a sequence of bits in memory or a register. Bits are numbered from low-order to high-order within registers and within memory bytes. In memory, the two bytes of a word are stored with the low-order byte at the lower address.

If the base operand is a register, the offset can be in the range 0..31. This offset addresses a bit within the indicated register. An example, 'BIT [EAX, 21]' is illustrated in the following figure.

Bit Offset for BIT[EAX,21]

  31            21                            0
┌──────────────┬──┬────────────────────────────┐
└──────────────┴──┴────────────────────────────┘
                 ↑                             ↑
                 │                             │
                 └────────BITOFFSET=21─────────┘

If BitBase is a memory address, BitOffset can range from -2 gigabits to 2 gigabits. The addressed bit is numbered (Offset MOD 8) within the byte at address (BitBase + (BitOffset DIV 8)), where DIV is signed division with rounding towards negative infinity, and MOD returns a positive number. This is illustrated in the following figure.

Memory Bit Indexing

 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
 ┌──┬──┬────────┬────────────────┬──────────────┐
 └──┴──┴────────┴────────────────┴──────────────┘
 │  BITBASE+1   │    BITBASE     │   BITBASE-1  │
     ↑                           │
     └──────OFFSET=+13───────────┘

 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
 ┌──────────────┬────────────────┬──────────────┐
 └──────────────┴────────────────┴──────────────┘
 │  BITBASE     │   BITBASE-1    │   BITBASE-2  │
                │                      ↑
                └─────OFFSET=-11───────┘

• I-O-Permission(I-O-Address, width) returns TRUE or FALSE depending on the I/O permission bitmap and other factors. This function is defined as follows:

IF TSS type is 16-bit THEN RETURN FALSE; FI;
Ptr← [TSS+66]; (* fetch bitmap pointer *)
BitStringAddr ← SHR (I-O-Address, 3) + Ptr;
MaskShift ← I-O-Address AND 7;
CASE width OF:
 BYTE: nBitMask ← 1;
 WORD: nBitMask ← 3;
 DWORD: nBitMask ← 15;
ESAC;
mask ← SHL (nBitMask, MaskShift);
CheckString ← [BitStringAddr] AND mask;
IF CheckString = 0 
THEN RETURN (TRUE);
ELSE RETURN (FALSE);
FI;

• Switch-Tasks is described in detail in the Intel documentation.

Flags Affected

Pages describing basic instructions have a "Flags Affected" section the contains a flags information table similar to the following:

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
0			*	*	?	*	0

The first row of the table lists the mnemonic identifiers for the various flags. The entries in the second row are filled in according to how the flag is affected by the instruction:

VALUE	MEANING
<blank>	Instruction does not affect flag
0	Instruction clears the flag
1	Instruction sets the flag
?	Instruction's effect on the flag is undefined
*	Instruction modifies the flag (either sets or clears depending on operands)

The following table lists the mnemonic identifier, full name, and purpose of the flags that are applicable to all processor families and that are most commonly used from within application-level programs. Not all flags are included in this table; see the Intel documentation for a more complete description of flag usage from within systems-level programs.

MNEMONIC	FLAG NAME	PURPOSE
OF	Overflow	Result exceeds positive or negative limit of number range
DF	Direction	Setting the DF flag causes string instructions to auto-decrement, that is, to process strings from high addresses. Clearing the DF flag causes string instructions to auto-increment, or to process strings from low addresses to high addresses.
IF	Interrupt Enable	Controls the acceptance of external interrupts signalled via the INTR pin.
SF	Sign	Result is negative (less than zero)
ZF	Zero	Result is zero
AF	Auxiliary carry	Carry out of bit position 3 (used for BCD)
PF	Parity	Low byte of result has even parity (even number of set bits)
CF	Carry	Carry out of most significant bit of result

The flags information table is usually followed by a paragraph description of how the flags are affected:

• If a flag is always cleared or always set by the instruction, the value is given (0 or 1) after the flag name. Arithmetic and logical instructions usually assign values to the status flags in a uniform manner. Nonconventional assignments are described in the Operation section.
• The values of flags listed as "undefined" may be changed by the instruction in an indeterminate manner.

All flags not listed are unchanged by the instruction.

FPU Flags Affected

The floating-point instruction pages have a section called "FPU Flags Affected," which tells how each instruction can affect the four condition code bits of the FPU status word. These pages contain a condition code information table similar to the following:

C0	C1	C2	C3
?	*	?	?

The first row of the table lists the names of the floating-point condition code flags. The entries in the second row are filled in according to how the flag is affected by the instruction:

VALUE	MEANING
<blank>	Instruction does not affect flag
0	Instruction clears the flag
1	Instruction sets the flag
?	Instruction's effect on the flag is undefined
*	Instruction modifies the flag (either sets or clears depending on operands)

The four FPU condition code bits (C0, C1, C2, and C3) are similar to the flags in a CPU; the processor updates these bits to reflect the outcome of arithmetic operations. The effect of these instructions on the condition code bits is summarized in the following table:

Condition Code Interpretation

INSTRUCTION	C0	C3	C2	C1
FCOM, FCOMP, FCOMPP, FTST, FUCOMPP, FICOM, FICOMP	Result of Comparison		Operands is not Comparable	Zero or O/U#
FXAM	Operand class			Sign or O/U#
FPREM, FPREM1	Q2	Q1	0=reduction complete 1=reduction incomplete	Q0 or O/U#
FIST, FBSTP, FRINDINT, FST, FSTP, FADD, FMUL, FDIV, FDIVR, FSUB, FSUBR, FSCALE, FSQRT, FPATAN, F2XM1, FYL2X, FYL2XP1	UNDEFINED			Roundup or O/U#
FPTAN, FSIN, FCOS, FSINCOS	UNDEFINED		0=reduction complete 1=reduction incomplete	Roundup or O/U# (UNDEFINED if C2=1)
FCHS, FABS, FXCH, FINCSTP, FDECSTP, Constant Loads, FXTRACT, FLD, FILD, FBLD, FSTP (ext. real)	UNDEFINED			Zero or O/U#
FLDENV, FRSTOR	Each bit loaded from memory
FLDCW, FSTENV, FSTCW, FSTSW, FCLEX	UNDEFINED
FINIT, FSAVE	Zero	Zero	Zero	Zero

NOTES: O/U# When both IE and SF bits of status word are set, this bit distinguishes between stack overflow (C1=1) and underflow (C1=0).

Reduction If FPREM and FPREM1 produces a remainder that is less than the modulus, reduction is complete. When reduction is incomplete the value at the top of the stack is a parial remainder, which can be used as input to further reduction. For FPTAN, FSIN, FCOS and FSINCOS, the reduction bit is set if the operand at the top of the stack is too large. In this case, the original operand remains at the top of the stack.

Roundup When the PE bit of the status word is set, this bit indicates whether the last rounding in the instruction was upward.

UNDEFINED Do not rely on any specific value in these bits.

The condition code bits are used primarily for conditional branching. The FSTSW AX instruction stores the FPU status word directly into the AX register, allowing these condition codes to be inspected efficiently. The SAHF instruction can copy C3 - C0 directly to the CPU's flag bits to simplify conditional branching. The following table shows the mapping of these bits to the CPU flag bits.

FPU FLAG	IU FLAG
C0	CF
C1	(None)
C2	PF
C3	ZF

Numeric Exceptions

For floating-point instruction pages, this section lists the exception flags of the FPU status word that each instruction can set. Exceptions are listed in abbreviated form, and are defined as follows:

IS Invalid operand due to stack overflow/underflow

I Invalid operand due to other cause

D Denormalized operand

Z Divide by zero

O Numeric overflow

U Numeric underflow

P Inexact result (precision)

Protected Mode Exceptions

This section lists the exceptions that can occur when the instruction is executed in protected mode. The exception names are a pound sign (#) followed by two letters and an optional error code in parentheses. For example, #GP(0) denotes a general protection exception with an error code of 0. The following table associates each two-letter name with the corresponding interrupt number.

Exceptions

MNEMONIC	INTERRUPT	DESCRIPTION
#UD	6	Invalid opcode
#NM	7	Device not available
#DF	8	Double fault
#TS	10	Invalid TSS
#NP	11	Segment or gate not present
#SS	12	Stack fault
#GP	13	General protection fault
#PF	14	Page fault
#MF	16	Floating-point error
#AC	17	Alignment check

Refer to the Intel documentation for a description of the exceptions and the processor state upon entry to the exception. Application programmers should consult the documentation provided with their operating systems to determine the actions taken when exceptions occur.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Because less error checking is performed by the processor in Real Address Mode, this mode has fewer exception conditions. Refer to the Intel documentation for further information on these exceptions.

Virtual-8086 Mode Exceptions

Virtual 8086 tasks provide the ability to simulate Virtual 8086 machines. Virtual 8086 Mode exceptions are similar to those for the 8086 processor, but there are some differences. Refer to the Intel documentation for complete information on Virtual Mode exceptions.

Intel Instruction Set

The following section describes the individual processor instructions in detail.

Protected Mode Exceptions

None

Real Address Mode Exceptions

None

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

None

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF

None

FPU Flags Affected

C0	C1	C2	C3
?	*	?	?

C1 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C2, C3 undefined.

FPU Flags Affected

C0	C1	C2	C3
?	?	?	?

C0, C1, C2, C3 undefined.

FPU Flags Affected

C0	C1	C2	C3
*	*	*	*

C0, C1, C2, C3 as described in FPU Flags Affected.

FPU Flags Affected

C0	C1	C2	C3
*	*	*	*

C0, C1, C2, C3 as loaded.

AAA - ASCII Adjust after Addition

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
37	AAA	X	X	X	X	X	X	ASCII adjust AL after addition

Description

Run the AAA instruction only following an ADD instruction that leaves a byte result in the AL register. The lower nibbles of the operands of the ADD instruction should be in the range 0 through 9 (BCD digits). In this case, the AAA instruction adjusts the AL register to contain the correct decimal digit result. If the addition produced a decimal carry, the AH register is incremented, and the CF and AF flags are set. If this same addition also produced FH in the upper nibble of AL then AH is incremented again. If there was no decimal carry, the CF and AF flags are cleared and the AH register is unchanged. In either case, the AL register is left with its top nibble set to 0. To convert the AL register to an ASCII result, follow the AAA instruction with OR AL, 30H.

Operation

ALcarry ← AL > 0F9H; (* 1 if true *)
IF ((AL AND 0FH) > 9) OR (AF = 1)
THEN 
   AL ← (AL + 6) AND 0FH;
   AH ← AH + 1 + ALcarry;
   AF ← 1;
   CF ← 1;
ELSE 
   AF ← 0;
   CF ← 0;
   AL ← AL AND 0FH;
FI;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
?			?	?	*	?	*

The AF and CF flags are set if there is a decimal carry, cleared if there is no decimal carry; the OF, SF, ZF, and PF flags are undefined.

AAD - ASCII Adjust AX before Division

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D5 0A	AAD	X	X	X	X	X	X	ASCII adjust before division

Description

The AAD instruction is used to prepare two unpacked BCD digits (the least-significant digit in the AL register, the most-significant digit in the AH register) for a division operation that will yield an unpacked result. This is accomplished by setting the AL register to AL+ (second byte of opcode * AH), and then clearing the AH register. The AX register is then equal to the binary equivalent of the original unpacked two-digit number.

Operation

regAL = AL;
regAH = AH;
AL ← (regAH * imm8 + regAL) AND OFFH;
AH ← 0;

Note: imm8 has the value of the instruction's second byte. The second byte under normally assembly of this instruction will be 0A, however, explicit modification of this byte will result in the operation described above and may alter results.

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
?			*	*	?	*	?

The SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result; the OF, AF, and CF flags are undefined.

AAM - ASCII Adjust AX after Multiply

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D4 0A	AAM	X	X	X	X	X	X	ASCII adjust AX after

Description

Run the AAM instruction only after running a MUL instruction between two unpacked BCD digits that leaves the result in the AX register. Because the result is less than 100, it is contained entirely in the AL register. The AAM instruction unpacks the AL result by dividing AL by the second byte of the opcode, leaving the quotient (most-significant digit) in the AH register and the remainder (least-significant digit) in the AL register.

Operation

regAL ← AL;
AH ← regAL / imm8;
AL ← regAL MOD imm8;

Note: imm8 has the value of the instruction's second byte. The second byte under normally assembly of this instruction will be 0A., however, explicit modification of this byte will result in the operation described above and may alter results.

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
?			*	*	?	*	?

The SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result; the OF, AF, and CF flags are undefined.

AAS - ASCII Adjust AL after Subtraction

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
3F	AAS	X	X	X	X	X	X	ASCII adjust AL after subtraction

Description

Run the AAS instruction only after a SUB instruction that leaves the byte result in the AL register. The lower nibbles of the operands of the SUB instruction must have been in the range of 0 through 9 (BCD digits). In this case, the AAS instruction adjusts the AL register so it contains the correct decimal digit result. If the subtraction produced a decimal carry, the AH register is decremented, and the CF and AF flags are set. If no decimal carry occurred, the CF and AF flags are cleared, and the AH register is unchanged. In either case, the AL register is left with its top nibble set to 0. To convert the AL result to an ASCII result, follow the AAS instruction with OR AL, 30H.

Operation

ALborrow ← AL < 6; (* 1 if true *)
IF (AL AND 0FH) > 9 OR AF = 1
THEN
   AL ← (AL - 6) AND 0FH;
   AH ← AH - 1 - ALborrow;
   AF ← 1;
   CF ← 1;
ELSE
   CF ← 0;
   AF ← 0;
   AL ← AL AND 0FH
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|? |  |  |? |? |* |? |* 

The AF and CF flags are set if there is a decimal carry, cleared if there is no decimal carry; the OF, SF, ZF, and PF flags are undefined.

ADC - Add with Carry

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
14 ib	ADC AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry immediate byte to AL
15 iw	ADC AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry immediate word to AX
15 id	ADC EAX,imm32				X	X	X	Add with carry immediate dword to EAX
80 /2 ib	ADC r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry immediate byte to r/m byte
81 /2 iw	ADC r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry immediate word to r/m word
81 /2 id	ADC r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	Add with carry immediate dword to r/m dword
83 /2 ib	ADC r/m16,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry sign-extended immediate byte to r/m word
83 /2 ib	ADC r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Add with carry sign-extended immediate byte into r/m dword
10 /r	ADC r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry byte register to r/m byte
11 /r	ADC r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry word register to r/m word
11 /r	ADC r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Add with carry dword register to r/m word
12 /r	ADC r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry r/m byte to byte register
13 /r	ADC r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add with carry r/m word to word register
13 /r	ADC r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Add with carry r/m dword to dword register

Description

The ADC instruction performs an integer addition of the two operands DEST and SRC and the carry flag, CF. The result of the addition is assigned to the first operand (DEST), and the flags are set accordingly. The ADC instruction is usually run as part of a multi-byte or multi-word addition operation. When an immediate byte value is added to a word or doubleword operand, the immediate value is first sign-extended to the size of the word or doubleword operand.

Operation

DEST ← DEST + SRC + CF;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*			*	*	*	*	*

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, CF, and PF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

\#GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

ADD - Add

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
04 ib	ADD AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add immediate byte to AL
05 iw	ADD AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add immediate word to AX
05 id	ADD EAX,imm32				X	X	X	Add immediate dword to EAX
80 /0 ib	ADD r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add immediate byte to r/m byte
81 /0 iw	ADD r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add immediate word to r/m word
81 /0 id	ADD r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	Add immediate dword to r/m dword
83 /0 ib	ADD r/m16,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add sign-extended immediate byte to r/m word
83 /0 ib	ADD r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Add sign-extended immediate byte to r/m dword
00 /r	ADD r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add byte register to r/m byte
01 /r	ADD r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add word register to r/m word
01 /r	ADD r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Add dword register to r/m dword
02 /r	ADD r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add r/m byte to byte register
03 /r	ADD r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add r/m word to word register
03 /r	ADD r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Add r/m dword to dword register

Description

The ADD instruction performs an integer addition of the two operands (DEST and SRC). The result of the addition is assigned to the first operand (DEST ), and the flags are set accordingly. When an immediate byte is added to a word or doubleword operand, the immediate value is sign-extended to the size of the word or doubleword operand.

Operation

DEST ← DEST + SRC;

Flags Affected

OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
* |  |  |* |* |* |* |*

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, CF, and PF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) is the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

AND - Logical AND

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
24 ib	AND AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate byte to AL
25 iw	AND AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate word to AX
25 id	AND EAX,imm32				X	X	X	AND immediate dword to EAX
80 /r ib	AND r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate byte to r/m byte
81 /4 iw	AND r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate word to r/m word
81 /r id	AND r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	AND immediate dword to r/m dword
83 /4 ib	AND r/m16,imm8				X	X	X	AND sign-extended immediate byte to r/m word
83 /4 ib	AND r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	AND sign-extended immediate byte with r/m dword
20 /r	AND r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND byte register to r/m byte
21 /r	AND r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND word register to r/m word
21 /r	AND r/m32,r32				X	X	X	AND dword register to r/m dword
22 /r	AND r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND r/m byte to byte register
23 /r	AND r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND r/m word to word register
23 /r	AND r32,r/m32				X	X	X	AND r/m dword to dword register

Description

Each bit of the result of the AND instruction is a 1 if both corresponding bits of the operands are 1; otherwise, it becomes a 0.

Operation

DEST ← DEST AND SRC;
CF ← 0;
OF ← 0;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
0			*	*	?	*	0

The CF and OF flags are cleared; the PF, SF, and ZF flags are set according to the result; the AF flag is undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

ARPL - Adjust RPL Field of Selector

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description                       |
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------|
|63 /r     |ARPL r/m16,r16      | | |X|X|X|X|Adjust RPL of r/m16 to not less   |
|          |                    | | | | | | |than RPL of r16                   |

Description

The ARPL instruction has two operands. The first operand is a 16-bit memory variable or word register that contains the value of a selector. The second operand is a word register. If the RPL field ("requested privilege level" - bottom two bits) of the first operand is less than the RPL field of the second operand, the ZF flag is set and the RPL field of the first operand is increased to match the second operand. Otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared and no change is made to the first operand. The ARPL instruction appears in operating system software, not in application programs. It is used to guarantee that a selector parameter to a subroutine does not request more privilege than the caller is allowed. The second operand of the ARPL instruction is normally a register that contains the CS selector value of the caller.

Operation

IF RBL bits(0,1) of DEST < RPL bits(0,1) of SRC 
THEN 
   ZF ← 1;
   RPL bits(0,1) of DEST ← RPL bits (0,1) of SRC;
ELSE 
   ZF ← 0;
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|  |  |  |  |* |  |  |  

The ZF flag is set if the RPL field of the first operand is less than that of the second operand, otherwise ZF is cleared.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the ARPL instruction is not recognized in Real Address Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the ARPL instruction is not recognized in Virtual 8086 Mode.

BOUND - Check Array Index Against Bounds

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|62 /r     |BOUND r16,m16&16    | |X|X|X|X|X|Check if r16 is within m16&16
|          |                    | | | | | | |bounds (passes test)
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|62 /r     |BOUND r32,m32&32    | | | |X|X|X|Check if r32 is within m32&32
|          |                    | | | | | | |bounds (passes test)

Description

The BOUND instruction ensures that a signed array index is within the limits specified by a block of memory consisting of an upper and a lower bound. Each bound uses one word when the operand-size attribute is 16-bits and a doubleword when the operand-size attribute is 32-bits. The first operand (a register) must be greater than or equal to the first bound in memory (lower bound), and less than or equal to the second bound in memory (upper bound) plus the number of bytes occupied for the operand size. If the register is not within bounds, an Interrupt 5 occurs; the return EIP points to the BOUND instruction. The bounds limit data structure is usually placed just before the array itself, making the limits addressable via a constant offset from the beginning of the array.

Operation

IF (LeftSRC < [RightSRC] OR LeftSRC > [RightSRC + 
OperandSize/8])
  (* Under lower bound or over upper bound *)
THEN Interrupt 5;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 5 if the bounds test fails, as described above; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3. The second operand must be a memory operand, not a register. If the BOUND instruction is run with a ModR/M byte representing a register as the second operand, #UD occurs.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 5 if the bounds test fails; Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 6 if the second operand is a register.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

BSF - Bit Scan Forward

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|0F BC     |BSF r16,r/m16       | | | |X|X|X|Bit scan forward on r/m word 
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|0F BC     |BSF r32,r/m32       | | | |X|X|X|Bit scan forward on r/m dword

Description

The BSF instruction scans the bits in the second word or doubleword operand starting with bit 0. The ZF flag is set if all the bits are 0; otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared and the destination register is loaded with the bit index of the first set bit.

Operation

IF r/m = 0 
THEN 
   ZF ← 1;
   register ← UNDEFINED;
ELSE 
   temp ← 0;
   ZF ← 0;
   WHILE BIT[r/m,temp] = 0 
   DO 
      temp ← temp + 1;
      register ← temp;
  OD;
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|? |  |  |? |* |? |? |? 

The ZF flag is set if all bits are 0; otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared. OF , SF, AF, PF, CF = undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

BSR-Bit Scan Reverse

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F BD	BSR r16,r/m16				X	X	X	Bit scan reverse on r/m word
0F BD	BSR r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Bit scan reverse on r/m dword

Description

The BSR instruction scans the bits in the second word or doubleword operand from the most significant bit to the least significant bit. The ZF flag is set if all the bits are 0; otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared and the destination register is loaded with the bit index of the first set bit found when scanning in the reverse direction.

Operation

IF r/m = 0 
THEN 
   ZF ← 1;
   register ← UNDEFINED;
ELSE 
   temp ← OperandSize =1;
   ZF ← 0;
   WHILE BIT[r/m,temp] = 0 
   DO 
      temp ← temp - 1;
      register ← temp;
  OD;
FI;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
?			?	*	?	?	?

The ZF flag is set if all bits are 0; otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared. OS , SF, AF, PF, CF = undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

BSWAP - Byte Swap

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F C8+rd	BSWAP r32					X	X	Swap bytes to convert little/big endian data in a 32-bit register to big/little endian form

Description

The BSWAP instruction reverses the byte order of a 32-bit register, converting a value in little/big endian form to big/little endian form. When BSWAP is used with 16-bit operand size, the result left in the destination register is undefined.

Operation

TEMP ← r32 
r32(7..0) ← TEMP(31..24)
r32(15..8) ← TEMP(23..16)
r32(23..16) ← TEMP(15..8)
r32(31..24) ← TEMP(7.0)

Notes

BSWAP is not supported on Intel386 processors. Include functionally-equivalent code for Intel386 CPUs.

BT - Bit Test

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F A3	BT r/m16,r16				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag
0F A3	BT r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag
0F BA /4 ib	BT r/m16,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag
0F BA /4 ib	BT r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag

Description

The BT instruction saves the value of the bit indicated by the base (first operand) and the bit offset (second operand) into the CF flag.

Operation

CF ← BIT [LeftSRC, RightSRC];

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |* 

The CF flag contains the value of the selected bit.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

The index of the selected bit can be given by the immediate constant in the instruction or by a value in a general register. Only an 8-bit immediate value is used in the instruction. This operand is taken modulo 32, so the range of immediate bit offsets is 0..31. This allows any bit within a register to be selected. For memory bit strings, this immediate field gives only the bit offset within a word or doubleword. Immediate bit offsets larger than 31 are supported by some assemblers by using the immediate bit offset field in combination with the displacement field of the memory operand. In this case, the low-order 3 to 5 bits (3 for 16 bit operands, 5 for 32-bit operands) of the immediate bit offset are stored in the immediate bit offset field, and the high-order bits are shifted and combined with the byte displacement in the addressing mode by the assembler. The processor will ignore the high-order bits if they are not zero. When accessing a bit in memory, the processor may access four bytes starting from the memory address given by:

Effective Address + (4* (BitOffset DIV 32))

for a 32-bit operand size, or two bytes starting from the memory address given by:

Effective Address + (2 * (BitOffset DIV 16))

for a 16-bit operand size. It may do so even when only a single byte needs to be accessed in order to reach the given bit. You must therefore avoid referencing areas of memory close to address space holes. In particular, avoid references to memory-mapped I/O registers. Instead, use the MOV instructions to load from or store to these addresses, and use the register form of these instructions to manipulate the data.

BTC - Bit Test and Complement

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F BB	BTC r/m16,r16				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and complement
0F BB	BTC r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and complement
0F BA /7 ib	BTC r/m16,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and complement
0F BA /7 ib	BTC r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and complement

Description

The BTC instruction saves the value of the bit indicated by the base (first operand) and the bit offset (second operand) into the CF flag and then complements the bit.

Operation

CF ← BIT[LeftSRC, RightSRC];
BIT[LeftSRC, RightSRC] ← NOT BIT[LeftSrc, RightSRC];

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |* 

The CF flag contains the complement of the selected bit.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, and GS segments; # SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

The index of the selected bit can be given by the immediate constant in the instruction or by a value in a general register. Only an 8-bit immediate value may be used in the instruction. This operand is taken modulo 32, so the range of immediate bit offsets is 0..31. This allows any bit within a register to be selected. For memory bit strings, this immediate field gives only the bit offset within a word or doubleword. Immediate bit offsets larger then 31 are supported by some assemblers by using the immediate bit offset field in combination with the displacement field of the memory operand. In this case, the low-order 3 to 5 bits (3 for 16-bit operands, 5 for 32-bit operands) of the immediate bit offset are stored in the immediate bit offset field, and the high-order bits are shifted and combined with the byte displacement in the addressing mode by the assembler. The processor will ignore the high order bits if they are not zero. When accessing a bit in memory, the processor may access four bytes starting from the memory address given by:

Effective Address + (4 * (BitOffset DIV 32))

for a 32-bit operand size, or two bytes starting from the memory address given by:

Effective Address + (2 * (BitOffset DIV 16))

for a 16-bit operand size. It may do so even when only a single byte needs to be accessed in order to reach the given bit. Therefore, referencing areas of memory close to address space holes should be avoided. In particular, avoid references to memory-mapped I/O registers. Instead, use the MOV instructions to load from or store to these addresses, and use the register form of these instructions to manipulate the data.

BTR-Bit Test and Reset

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F B3	BTR r/m16,r16				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and reset
0F B3	BTR r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and reset
0F BA /6 ib	BTR r/m16,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and reset
0F BA /6 ib	BTR r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and reset

Description

The BTR instruction saves the value of the bit indicated by the base (first operand) and the bit offset (second operand) into the CF flag and then stores 0 in the bit.

Operation

CF ← BIT[LeftSRC, RightSRC];
BIT[LeftSRC, RightSRC] ← 0;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |* |

The CF flag contains the value of the selected bit.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

The index of the selected bit can be given by the immediate constant in the instruction or by a value in a general register. Only an 8-bit immediate value is used in the instruction. This operand is taken modulo 32, so the range of immediate bit offsets is 0..31. This allows any bit within a register to be selected. For memory bit strings, this immediate field gives only the bit offset within a word or doubleword. Immediate bit offsets larger than 31 are supported by some assemblers by using the immediate bit offset field in combination with the displacement field of the memory operand. In this case, the low-order 3 to 5-bits (3 for 16-bit operands, 5 for 32-bit operands) of the immediate bit offset are stored in the immediate bit offset field, and the high-order bits are shifted and combined with the byte displacement in the addressing mode by the assembler. The processor will ignore the high-order bits if they are not zero. When accessing a bit in memory, the processor may access four bytes starting from the memory address given by:

Effective Address + 4 * (BitOffset DIV 32)

for a 32-bit operand size, or two bytes starting from the memory address given by:

Effective Address + 2 * (BitOffset DIV 16)

for a 16-bit operand size. It may do so even when only a single byte needs to be accessed in order to reach the given bit. You must therefore avoid referencing areas of memory close to address space holes. In particular, avoid references to memory-mapped I/O registers. Instead, use the MOV instructions to load from or store to these addresses, and use the register form of these instructions to manipulate the data.

BTS-Bit Test and Set

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F AB	BTS r/m16,r16				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and set
0F AB	BTS r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and set
0F BA /5 ib	BTS r/m16,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and set
0F BA /5 ib	BTS r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Save bit in carry flag and set

Description

The BTS instruction saves the value of the bit indicated by the base (first operand) and the bit offset (second operand) into the CF flag and then stores 1 in the bit.

Operation

CF ← BIT[LeftSRC, RightSRC];
BIT[LeftSRC, RightSRC] ← 1;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |* 

The CF flag contains the value of the selected bit.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

The index of the selected bit can be given by the immediate constant in the instruction or by a value in a general register. Only an 8-bit immediate value is used in the instruction. This operand is taken modulo 32, so the range of immediate bit offsets is 0..31. This allows any bit within a register to be selected. For memory bit strings, this immediate field gives only the bit offset within a word or doubleword. Immediate bit offsets larger than 31 are supported by some assemblers by using the immediate bit offset field in combination with the displacement field of the memory operand. In this case, the low-order 3 to 5 bits (3 for 16-bit operands, 5 for 32-bit operands) of the immediate bit offset are stored in the immediate bit offset field, and the high-order bits are shifted and combined with the byte displacement in the addressing mode by the assembler. The processor will ignore the high-order bits if they are not zero. When accessing a bit in memory, the processor may access four bytes starting from the memory address given by:

   Effective Address + (4 * (BitOffset DIV 32))

for a 32-bit operand size, or two bytes starting from the memory address given by:

   Effective Address + (2 * (BitOffset DIV 16))

for a 16-bit operand size. It may do this even when only a single byte needs to be accessed in order to get at the given bit. You must therefore be careful to avoid referencing areas of memory close to address space holes. In particular, avoid references to memory-mapped I/O registers. Instead, use the MOV instructions to load from or store to these addresses, and use the register form of these instructions to manipulate the data.

CALL - Call Procedure

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
E8 cw	CALL rel16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Call near, displacement relative to next instruction
FF /2	CALL r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Call near, register indirect/memory indirect
9A cd	CALL ptr16:16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Call intersegment, to full pointer given
9A cd	CALL ptr16:16			X	X	X	X	Call gate, same privilege
9A cd	CALL ptr16:16			X	X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, no parameters
9A cd	CALL ptr16:16			X	X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, x parameters
9A cd	CALL ptr16:16			X	X	X	X	Call to task (via task state segment/task gate for 286)
FF /3	CALL m16:16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Call intersegment, address at r/m dword
FF /3	CALL m16:16			X	X	X	X	Call gate, same privilege
FF /3	CALL m16:16			X	X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, no parameters
FF /3	CALL m16:16			X	X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, x parameters
FF /3	CALL m16:16			X	X	X	X	Call to task (via task state segment/task gate for 286)
E8 cd	CALL rel32				X	X	X	Call near, displacement relative to next instruction
FF /2	CALL r/m32				X	X	X	Call near, register indirect/memory indirect
9A cp	CALL ptr16:32				X	X	X	Call intersegment, to full pointer given
9A cp	CALL ptr16:32				X	X	X	Call gate, same privilege
9A cp	CALL ptr16:32				X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, no parameters
9A cp	CALL ptr16:32				X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, x parameters
9A cp	CALL ptr16:32				X	X	X	Call to task
FF /3	CALL m16:32				X	X	X	Call intersegment, address at r/m fword
FF /3	CALL m16:32				X	X	X	Call gate, same privilege
FF /3	CALL m16:32				X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, no parameters
FF /3	CALL m16:32				X	X	X	Call gate, more privilege, x parameters
FF /3	CALL m16:32				X	X	X	Call to task

Description

The CALL instruction causes the procedure named in the operand to be run. When the procedure is complete (a return instruction is run within the procedure), processing continues at the instruction that follows the CALL instruction. The action of the different forms of the instruction are described below. Near calls are those with destination of type r/m16, r/m32, rel16, rel32; changing or saving the segment register value is not necessary. The CALL rel16 and CALL rel32 forms add a signed offset to the address of the instruction following the CALL instruction to determine the destination. The rel16 form is used when the instruction's operand-size attribute is 16- bits; rel32 is used when the operand-size attribute is 32-bits. The result is stored in the 32-bit EIP register. With rel16, the upper 16-bits of the EIP register are cleared, resulting in an offset whose value does not exceed 16-bits. CALL r/m16 and CALL r/m32 specify a register or memory location from which the absolute segment offset is fetched. The offset fetched from r/m is 32-bits for an operand-size attribute of 32 (r/m32), or 16-bits for an operand-size of 16 (r/m16). The offset of the instruction following the CALL instruction is pushed onto the stack. It will be popped by a near RET instruction within the procedure. The CS register is not changed by this form of CALL. The far calls, CALL ptr:16 and CALL ptr16:32, use a four-byte or six-byte operand as a long pointer to the procedure called. The CALL m16:16 and m16: 32 forms fetch the long pointer from the memory location specified (indirection). In Real Address Mode or Virtual 8086 Mode, the long pointer provides 16-bits for the CS register and 16 or 32-bits for the EIP register (depending on the operand-size attribute). These forms of the instruction push both the CS and IP or EIP registers as a return address. In Protected Mode, both long pointer forms consult the AR byte in the descriptor indexed by the selector part of the long pointer. Depending on the value of the AR byte, the call will perform one of the following types of control transfers:

• A far call to the same protection level
• An inter-protection level far call
• A task switch

A CALL-indirect-thru-memory, which uses the stack pointer (ESP) as a base register, references memory before the CALL. The base used is the value of the ESP before the instruction runs. For more information on Protected Mode control transfers, refer to the Intel documentation.

Operation

IF rel/16 or rel32 type of call 
THEN (* near relative call *)
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN 
      Push(IP);
      EIP ← (EIP + rel16) AND 0000FFFFH;
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
      Push(EIP);
      EIP ← EIP + rel32;
   FI;
FI;
IF r/m16 or r/m32 type of call 
THEN (* near absolute call *)
IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN 
      Push(IP);
      EIP ← [r/m16] AND 0000FFFFH;
   ELSE (*OperandSize = 32 *)
      Push(EIP);
      EIP ←[r/m32]
   FI;
FI 

IF (PE = 0 OR (PE = 1 AND VM = 1))
(* real mode or virtual 8086 mode *)
   AND instruction = far CALL 
     (* i.e., operand type is m16:16, m16:32, ptr16:16, ptr16:32*)
THEN 
    IF OperandSize = 16 
    THEN 
      Push(CS);
      Push(IP); (* address of next instruction; 16 bits *)
    ELSE 
      Push(CS); (* padded with 16 high-order bits *)
      Push(EIP); (* address of next instruction; 32 bits *)
FI;
IF operand type is m16:16 or m16:32
THEN (* indirect far call *)
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN 
      CS:IP ← [m16:16];
   EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH; (* clear upper 16 bits *)
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
      CS:EIP ← [m16:32[;
   FI;
FI;
IF operand type is ptr:16 or ptr16:32
THEN (* direct far call *)
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN 
      CS:IP ← ptr:16;
      EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH; (* clear upper 16 bits *)
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
      CS:EIP ← ptr16:32;
   FI;
 FI;
FI;

IF (PE = 1 AND VM = 0) (* Protected mode, not V86 mode *)
 AND instruction = far CALL  
THEN 
 If indirect, then check access of EA doubleword;
   #GP(0) if limit violation;
 New CS selector must not be null else #GP(0);
 Check that new CS selector index is within its 
   descriptor table limits; else #GP(new CS selector);
 Examine AR byte of selected descriptor for various legal values;
   depending on value:
   go to CONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT;
   go to NONCONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT;
   go to CALL-GATE;
   go to TASK-GATE;
   go to TASK-STATE-SEGMENT;
 ELSE #GP(code segment selector);
FI;

CONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT:
 DPL must be ó CPL ELSE #GP(code segment selector);
 Segment must be present ELSE #NP(code segment selector);
 Stack must be big enough for return address ELSE #SS(0);
 Instruction pointer must be in code segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
 Load code segment descriptor into CS register;
 Load CS with new code segment selector;
 Load EIP with zero-extend(new offset);
 IF OperandSize=16 THEN EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH; FI;

NONCONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT:
 RPL must be ó CPL ELSE #GP(code segment selector)
 DPL must be = CPL ELSE #GP(code segment selector)
 Segment must be present ELSE #NP(code segment selector)
 Stack must be big enough for return address ELSE #SS(0)
 Instruction pointer must be in code segment limit ELSE #GP(0)
 Load code segment descriptor into CS register 
 Load CS with new code segment selector 
 Set RPL of CS to CPL 
 Load EIP with zero-extend(new offset);
 IF OperandSize=16 THEN EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH; FI;

 CALL-GATE
 Call gate DPL must be ò CPL ELSE #GP(call gate elector)
 Call gate DPL must be ò RPL ELSE #GP(call gate elector)
 Call gate just be present ELSE #NP(call gate selector)
 Examine code segment selector in call gate descriptor:
   Selector must not be null ELSE #GP(0)
   Selector must be within its descriptor table 
     limits ELSE #GP(code segment selector)
   AR byte of selected descriptor must indicate code 
     segment ELSE #GP(code segment selector)
   DPL of selected descriptor must be ó CPL ELSE 
     #GP(code segment selector)
   IF non-conforming code segment AND DPL < CPL 
   THEN go to MORE-PRIVILEGE
   ELSE go to SAME-PRIVILEGE
   FI;

MORE-PRIVILEGE:
 Get new SS selector for new privilege level from TSS 
   Check selector and descriptor for new SS:
     Selector must not be null ELSE #TS(0)
     Selector index must be within its descriptor 
       table limits ELSE #TS(SS selector)
     Selector's RPL must equal DPL of code segment 
       ELSE #TS(SS selector)
     Stack segment DPL must equal DPL of code 
       segment ELSE #TS(SS selector)
     Descriptor must indicate writable data segment 
       ELSE #TS(SS selector)
     Segment present ELSE #SS(SS selector)
IF OperandSize=32
 THEN 
     New stack must have room for parameters plus 16 bytes 
       ELSE #SS(SS selector)
     EIP must be in code segment limit ELSE #GP(0)
     Load new SS:eSP value from TSS 
     Load new CS:EIP value from gate 
 ELSE 
   New stack must have room for parameters plus 8 bytes 
     ELSE #SS(SS selector)
   IP must be in code segment limit ELSE #GP(0)
   Load new SS:eSP value from TSS 
   Load new CS:IP value from gate 
 FI;
 Load CS descriptor 
 Load SS descriptor 
 Push long pointer of old stack onto new stack 
 Get word count from call gate, mask to 5 bits 
 Copy parameters from old stack onto new stack 
 Push return address onto new stack 
 Set CPL to stack segment DPL 
 Set RPL of CS to CPL 

SAME-PRIVILEGE:
 IF OperandSize=32
 THEN 
   Stack must have room for 6-byte return address (padded to 8 bytes)
     ELSE #SS(0)
   EIP must be within code segment limit ELSE #GP(0)
   Load CS:EIP from gate 
 ELSE 
   Stack must have room for 4-byte return address ELSE #SS(0)
   IP must be within code segment limit ELSE #GP(0)
   Load CS:IP from gate 
FI;
Push return address onto stack 
Load code segment descriptor into CS register 
Set RPL of CS to CPL 

TASK-GATE:
   Task gate DPL must be ó CPL ELSE #TS(gate selector)
   Task gate DPL must be ó RPL ELSE #TS(gate selector)
   Task Gate must be present ELSE #NP(gate selector)
   Examine selector to TSS, given in Task Gate descriptor:
     Must specify global in the local/global bit ELSE #TS(TSS selector)
     Index must be within GDT limits ELSE #TS(TSS selector)
     TSS descriptor AR byte must specify nonbusy TSS 
       ELSE #TS(Tss selector)
     Task State Segment must be present ELSE #NP(TSS selector)
 SWITCH-TASKS (with nesting) to TSS 
 IP must be in code segment limit ELSE #TS(0)

TASK-STATE-SEGMENT
 TSS DPL must be ó CPL ELSE #TS(TSS selector)
 TSS DPL must be ó RPL ELSE #TS(TSS selector)
 TSS descriptor AR byte must specify available TSS 
    ELSE #TS(TSS selector)
 Task State Segment must be present ELSE #NP(TSS selector)
 SWITCH-TASKS (with nesting) to TSS 
 IP must be in code segment limit ELSE #TS(0)

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |

All flags are affected if a task switch occurs; no flags are affected if a task switch does not occur.

Protected Mode Exceptions

For far calls: #GP, #NP, #SS, and #TS, as indicated in the "Operation" section. For near direct calls: #GP(0) if procedure location is beyond the code segment limits; #SS(0) if pushing the return address exceeds the bounds of the stack segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3. For a near indirect call: #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address is the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #GP(0) if the indirect offset obtained is beyond the code segment limits; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

Any far call from a 32-bit code segment to a 16-bit code segment should be made from the first 64 Kbytes of the 32-bit code segment, because the operand-size attribute of the instruction is set to 16, allowing only a 16- bit return address offset to be saved.

CBW/CWDE-Convert Byte to Word/Convert Word to Doubleword

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
98	CBW	X	X	X	X	X	X	AX ← sign extend of AL
98	CWDE				X	X	X	EAX ← sign-extend of AX

Description

The CBW instruction converts the signed byte in the AL register to a signed word in the AX register by extending the most significant bit of the AL register (the sign bit) into all of the bits of the AH register. The CWDE instruction converts the signed word in the AX register to a doubleword in the EAX register by extending the most significant bit of the AX register into the two most significant bytes of the EAX register. Note that the CWDE instruction is different from the CWD instruction. The CWD instruction uses the DX:AX register pair rather than the EAX register as a destination.

Operation

IF OperandSize = 16 (* instruction = CBW *)
THEN AX ← Sign Extend(AL);
ELSE (* OperandSize = 32, instruction = CWDE *)
  EAX ← Sign Extend(AX);
FI;

CDQ - Convert Double to Quad

See entry for CWD/CDQ-Convert Word to Double/Convert Double to Quad.

CLC - Clear Carry Flag

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------
|F8        |CLC                 |X|X|X|X|X|X|Clear carry flag

Description

The CLC instruction clears the CF flag. It does not affect other flags or registers.

Operation

CF ← 0;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |

The CF flag is cleared.

CLD - Clear Direction Flag

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------------
|FC        |CLD                 |X|X|X|X|X|X|Clear direction flag

Description

The CLD instruction clears the direction flag. No other flags or registers are affected. After a CLD instruction is run, string operations will increment the index registers (SI and/or DI) that they use.

Operation

DF ← 0;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |0 |  |  |  |  |  |  |

The DF flag is cleared.

CLI - Clear Interrupt Flag

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
FA	CLI	X	X	X	X	X	X	Clear interrupt flag; interrupts disabled when interrupt flag cleared

Description

The CLI instruction clears the IF flag if the current privilege level is at least as privileged as IOPL. No other flags are affected. External interrupts are not recognized at the end of the CLI instruction from that point on until the IF flag is set.

Operation

IF PE = 0 
THEN 
  IF ←0;
ELSE 
  IF VM = 0 (* Running in protected Mode *)
  THEN
     IF IOPL = 3 
     THEN IF ← 0;
     ELSE IF CPL ó IOPL 
               THEN IF ← 0;
               ELSE #GP(0);
               FI;
     FI;
  ELSE (* Running in Virtual-8086 mode *)
     IF IOPL = 3 
     THEN IF ← 
     ELSE #GP(0);
     FI;
  FI;
FI;

Decision Table

The following decision table indicates which action in the lower portion of the table is taken given the conditions in the upper portion of the table.

PE =	0	1	1	1	1
VM =	-	0	-	0	1
CPL	-	óIOPL	-	>IOPL	-
IOPL	-	-	= 3	-	< 3
IF ← 0	Y	Y	Y
#GP(0)				Y	Y

Notes: - Don't care Blank Action Not Taken Y Action in Column 1 taken

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |0 |  |  |  |  |  |

IF cleared.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is greater (has less privilege) than the I/O privilege level in the flags register. The I/O privilege level specifies the least privileged level at which I/O can be performed.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) as for protected mode.

CLTS - Clear Task-Switched Flag in CR0

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 06	CLTS			X	X	X	X	Clear task-switched flag

Description

The CLTS instruction clears the task-switched (TS) flag in the CR0 register. This flag is set by the processor every time a task switch occurs. The TS flag is used to manage processor extensions as follows:

• Every processing of an ESC instruction is trapped if the TS flag is set.
• Processing of a WAIT instruction is trapped if the MP flag and the TS flag are both set.

Thus, if a task switch was made after an ESC instruction was begun, the floating-point unit's context may need to be saved before a new ESC instruction can be issued. The fault handler saves the context and clears the TS flag. The CLTS instruction appears in operating system software, not in application programs. It is a privileged instruction that can only be run at privilege level 0.

Operation

TS Flag in CR0 ← 0;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |

The TS flag is cleared (the TS flag is in the CR0 register, not the flags register).

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the CLTS instruction is run with a current privilege level other than 0.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

None (valid in Real Address Mode to allow initialization for Protected Mode ).

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Protected Mode.

CMC - Complement Carry Flag

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F5	CMC	X	X	X	X	X	X	Complement carry flag

Description

The CMC instruction reverses the setting of the CF flag. No other flags are affected.

Operation

CF ← NOT CF;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |*

The CF flag contains the complement of its original value.

CMP - Compare Two Operands

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
3C ib	CMP AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare immediate byte to AL
3D iw	CMP AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare immediate word to AX
3D id	CMP EAX,imm32				X	X	X	Compare immediate dword to EAX
80 /7 ib	CMP r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare immediate byte to r/m byte
81 /7 iw	CMP r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare immediate word to r/m word
81 /7 id	CMP r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	Compare immediate dword to r/m dword
83 /7 ib	CMP r/m16,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare sign-extended immediate byte to r/m word
83 /7 ib	CMP r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Compare sign-extended immediate byte to r/m dword
38 /r	CMP r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare byte register to r/m byte
39 /r	CMP r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare word register to r/m word
39 /r	CMP r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Compare dword register to r/m dword
3A /r	CMP r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare r/m byte to byte register
3B /r	CMP r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare r/m word to word register
3B /r	CMP r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Compare r/m dword to dword register

Description

The CMP instruction subtracts the second operand from the first but, unlike the SUB instruction, does not store the result; only the flags are changed. The CMP instruction is typically used in conjunction with conditional jumps and the SETcc instruction. (Refer to Appendix D for the list of signed and unsigned flag tests provided.) If an operand greater than one byte is compared to an immediate byte, the byte value is first sign-extended.

Operation

LeftSRC - SignExtend(RightSRC);

(* CMP does not store a result; its purpose is to set the flags *)

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|* |  |  |* |* |* |* |* 

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

,Real Address Mode Exceptions Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

CMPS/CMPSB/CMPSW/CMPSD - Compare String Operands

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
A6	CMPS m8,m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare bytes ES:[(E)DI] (second operand) with [(E)SI] (first operand)
A7	CMPS m16,m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare words ES:[(E)DI] (second operand) with [(E)SI] (first operand)
A7	CMPS m32,m32				X	X	X	Compare dwords ES:[(E)DI] (second operand) with [(E)SI] (first operand)
A6	CMPSB	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare bytes ES:[(E)DI] with DS:[(E)SI]
A7	CMPSW	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare words ES:[(E)DI] with DS:[(E)SI]
A7	CMPSD				X	X	X	Compare dwords ES:[(E)DI] with DS:[(E)SI]

Description

The CMPS instruction compares the byte, word, or doubleword pointed to by the source-index register with the byte, word, or doubleword pointed to by the destination-index register. If the address-size attribute of this instruction of 16-bits, the SI and DI registers will be used for source- and destination-index registers; otherwise the ESI and EDI registers will be used. Load the correct index values into the SI and DI (or ESI and EDI) registers before running the CMPS instruction. The comparison is done by subtracting the operand indexed by the destination-index register from the operand indexed by the source-index register. Note that the direction of subtraction for the CMPS instruction is [SI] - [ DI] or [ESI] - [EDI]. The left operand (SI or ESI) is the source and the right operand (DI or EDI) is the destination. This is the reverse of the usual Intel convention in which the left operand is the destination and the right operand is the source. The result of the subtraction is not stored; only the flags reflect the change. The types of the operands determine whether bytes, words, or doublewords are compared. For the first operand (SI or ESI), the DS register is used, unless a segment override byte is present. The second operand (DI or EDI) must be addressable from the ES register; no segment override is possible. After the comparison is made, both the source-index register and destination-index register are automatically advanced. If the DF flag is 0 (a CLD instruction was run), the registers increment; if the DF flag is 1 (an STD instruction was run), the registers decrement. The registers increment or decrement by 1 if a byte is compared, by 2 if a word is compared, or by 4 if a doubleword is compared. The CMPSB, CMPSW and CMPSD instructions are synonyms for the byte, word, and doubleword CMPS instructions, respectively. The CMPS instruction can be preceded by the REPE or REPNE prefix for block comparison of CX or ECX bytes, words, or doublewords. Refer to the description of the REP instruction for more information on this operation.

Operation

IF (instruction = CMPSD) OR
   (instruction has operands of type DWORD)
THEN OperandSize ← 32;
ELSE OperandSize ← 16;
FI;
IF AddressSize = 16
THEN
  use SI for source-index and DI for destination-index
ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *)
  use ESI for source-index and EDI for destination-index;
FI;
IF byte type of instruction
THEN
  set ZF based on
  [source-index] - [destination-index] ; (* byte comparison *)
  IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 1 ELSE IncDec ← -1; FI;
ELSE
  IF OperandSize = 16
  THEN
     set ZF based on
     [source-index] - [destination-index] ; (* word comparison *)
     IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 2 ELSE IncDec ← -2; FI;
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     set ZF based on
     [source-index] - [destination-index] ; (* dword comparison *)
     IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 4 ELSE IncDec ← -4; FI;
  FI;
FI;
source-index = source-index + IncDec;
destination-index = destination-index + IncDec;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*			*	*	*	*	*

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

CMPXCHG - Compare and Exchange

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F B0 /r	CMPXCHG r/m8,r8					X	X	Compare AL with r/m byte. If equal, set ZF and load byte reg into r/m byte. Else, clear ZF and load r/m byte into AL
0F B1 /r	CMPXCHG r/m16,r16					X	X	Compare AX with r/m word. If equal, set ZF and load word reg into r/m word. Else, clear ZF and load r/m word into AX
0F B1 /r	CMPXCHG r/m32,r32					X	X	Compare EAX with r/m dword. If equal, set ZF and load dword reg into r/m dword. Else, clear ZF and load r/m dword into EAX.

Description

The CMPXCHG instruction compares the accumulator (AL, AX, or EAX register) with DEST. If they are equal, SRC is loaded into DEST. Otherwise, DEST is loaded into the accumulator.

Operation

IF accumulator=DEST
         ZF ← 1 
         DEST ← SRC 
ELSE 
         ZF ← 0 
         accumulator ← DEST 

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*			*	*	*	*	*

The CF, PF, AF, SF, and OF flags are affected as if a CMP instruction had been run with DEST and the accumulator as operands. The ZF flag is set if the destination operand and the accumulator are equal; otherwise it is cleared.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

This instruction can be used with a LOCK prefix. In order to simplify interface to the processor's bus, the destination operand receives a write cycle without regard to the result of the comparison. DEST is written back if the comparison fails, and SRC is written into the destination otherwise. (The processor never produces a locked read without also producing a locked write.) This instruction is not supported on Intel386 processors.

CMPXCHG8B - Compare and Exchange 8 Bytes

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F C7 /1	CMPXCHG8B r/m64						X	Compare EDX:EAX with r/m qword. If equal, set ZF and load ECX:EBX into r/m qword. Else, clear ZF and load r/m qword into EDX:EAX

Description

The CMPXCHG8B instruction compares the 64-bit value in EDX:EAX with DEST. EDX contains the high-order 32 bits, and EAX contains the low-order 32 bits of 64-bit value. If they are equal, the 64-bit value in ECX:EBX is stored into DEST. ECX contains the high-order 32 bits and EBX contains the low- order 32 bits. Otherwise, DEST is loaded into EDX:EAX.

Operation

IF EDX:EAX=DEST
         ZF ← 1 
         DEST ← ECX:EBX
ELSE 
         ZF ← 0 
         EDX:EAX ← DEST 

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
				*

The ZF flag is set if the destination operand and EDX:EAX are equal; otherwise it is cleared. The CF, PF, AF, SF, and OF flags are unaffected.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

The destination operand must be a memory operand, not a register. If the CMPXCHG8B instruction is run with a modr/m byte representing a register as the destination operand, #UD occurs.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3. #UD if modr/m byte represents a register as the destination.

Notes

This instruction can be used with a LOCK prefix. In order to simplify interface to the processor's bus, the destination operand receives a write cycle without regard to the result of the comparison. DEST is written back if the comparison fails, and SRC is written into the destination otherwise. (The processor never produces a locked read without also producing a locked write.) The "r/m64" syntax had previously been used only in the context of floating point operations. It indicates a 64-bit value, in memory at an address determined by the modr/m byte. This instruction is not supported on Intel486 processors.

CPUID - CPU Identification

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F A2	CPUID						X	EAX ← CPU identification information

Description

The CPUID instruction provides information to software about the vendor, family, model, and stepping of microprocessor on which it is running. An input value loaded into the EAX register for this instruction indicates what information should be returned by the CPUID instruction. Following processing of the CPUID instruction with a zero in EAX, the EAX register contains the highest input value understood by the CPUID instruction. For the Pentium processor, the value in EAX will be a one. Also included in the output of this instruction with an input value of zero in EAX is a vendor identification string contained in the EBX, EDX, and ECX registers. EBX contains the first four characters, EDX contains the next four characters and ECX contains the last four characters. For Intel processors, the vendor identification string is "GenuineIntel" as follows:

EBX ← 756e6547h (* "Genu", with G in the low nibble of BL *)
EDX ← 49656e69h (* "ineI", with i in the low nibble of DL *)
ECX ← 6c65746eh (* "ntel", with n in the low nibble of CL *)

Following processing of the CPUID instruction with an input value of one loaded into the EAX register, EAX[3:0] contains the stepping id of the microprocessor, EAX[7:4] contains the model (the first model will be indicated by 0001B in these bits) and EAX[11:8] contains the family (5 for the Pentium processor family). EAX[31:12] are reserved, as well as EBX, and ECX. The Pentium processor sets the feature register, EDX, to 1BFH indicating which features the Pentium processor supports. A feature flag set to one indicates that the corresponding feature is supported. The feature set register is defined as follows:

EDX[0:0] FPU on chip
EDX[6:1] Refer to the Intel documentation
EDX[7:7] Machine Check Exception
EDX[8:8] CMPXCHG8B Instruction
EDX[31:9] Reserved

Software should determine the vendor identification in order to properly interpret the feature register flag bits. For more information on the feature set register, see the Intel documentation.

Operation

switch (EAX)
  case 0:
      EAX ← hv;(* hv=1 for the Pentium processor *)
                      (* hv is the highest input value that is understood by CPUID. *)
      EBX ← Vendor identification string;
      EDX ← Vendor identification string;
      ECX ← Vendor identification string;
      break;
  case 1:
      EAX[3:0] ← Stepping ID;
      EAX[7:4] ← Model;
      EAX[11:8] ← Family;
      EAX[31:12] ← Reserved;
      EBX ← reserved;      (* 0 *)
      ECX ← reserved;      (* 0 *)
      EBX ← feature flags;
      break;
  default:  (* EAX > hv *)
      EAX ← reserved, undefined;
      EBX ← reserved, undefined;
      ECX ← reserved, undefined;
      EDX ← reserved, undefined;
      break;
end-of-switch

CWD/CDQ - Convert Word to Double/Convert Double to Quad

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
99	CWD	X	X	X	X	X	X	DX ← sign-extend of AX
99	CDQ				X	X	X	EDX ← sign-extend of EAX

Description

CWD and CDQ double the size of the source operand. The CWD instruction copies the sign (bit 15) of the word in the AX register into every bit position in the DX register. The CDQ instruction copies the sing (bit 31) of the doubleword in the EAX register into every bit position in the EDX register. The CWD instruction can be used to produce a doubleword dividend from a word before a word division, and the CDQ instruction can be used to produce a quadword dividend from a doubleword before doubleword division. The CWD and CDQ instructions are different mnemonics for the same opcode. Which one gets run is determined by whether it is in a 16- or 32-bit segment and the presence of any operand-size override prefixes.

Operation

IF OperandSize = 16 (* instruction = CWD *)
THEN DX ← SignExtend(AX);
ELSE (* OperandSize = 32, instruction = CDQ *)
  EDX ←SignExtend(EAX);
FI;

CWDE - Convert Word to Doubleword

See entry for CBW/CWDE-Convert Byte to Word/Convert Word to Doubleword.

DAA - Decimal Adjust AL after Addition

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------------------------
|27        |DAA                 |X|X|X|X|X|X|Decimal adjust AL after addition

Description

Run the DAA instruction only after running an ADD instruction that leaves a two-BCD-digit byte result in the AL register. The ADD operands should consist of two packaged BCD digits. The DAA instruction adjusts the AL register to contain the correct two-digit packed decimal result.

Operation

IF (((AL AND 0FH) > 09H) or EFLAGS.AF = 1)
THEN 
  AL ← AL + 06H;
FI;
IF (((AL AND 0F0H) > 90H) or EFLAGS.CF = 1)
THEN 
  AL ← AL + 60H;
  CF ← 1;
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|? |  |  |* |* |* |* |* |

The AF and CF flags are set if there is a decimal carry, cleared if there is no decimal carry; the SF, ZF and PF flags are set according to the result. The OF flag is undefined.

DAS - Decimal Adjust AL after Subtraction

Details Table

|Encoding |Instruction  |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description 
|---------+-------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|2F       |DAS          |X|X|X|X|X|X|Decimal adjust AL after subtraction

Description

Run the DAS instruction only after a subtraction instruction that leaves a two-BCD-digit byte result in the AL register. The operands should consist of two packed BCD digits. The DAS instruction adjusts the AL register to contain the correct packed two-digit decimal result.

Operation

tmpCF ← 0;
tmpAL ← AL;
IF (((tmpAL AND 0FH) > 9H) or AF = 1)
THEN 
  AF ← 1;
  AL ← AL - 6H;
  tmpCF ← (AL < 0) OR CF;
FI;
IF ((tmpAL > 99H) or CF = 1)
THEN 
  AL ← AL - 60H;
  tmpCF ← 1;
FI;
CF ← tmpCF;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|? |  |  |* |* |* |* |* |

The AF and CF flags are set if there is a decimal borrow, cleared if there is no decimal borrow; the SF, ZF and PF flags are set according to the result. The OF flag is undefined.

DEC - Decrement by 1

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
FE /1	DEC r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Decrement r/m byte by 1
FF /1	DEC r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Decrement r/m word by 1
FF /1	DEC r/m32				X	X	X	Decrement r/m dword by 1
48+rw	DEC r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Decrement word register by 1
48+rd	DEC r32				X	X	X	Decrement dword register by 1

Description

The DEC instruction subtracts 1 from the operand. The DEC instruction does not change the CF flag. To affect the CF flag, use the SUB instruction with an immediate operand of 1.

Operation

DEST ← DEST - 1;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*			*	*	*	*

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, and PF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

DIV - Unsigned Divide

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F6 /6	DIV r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Unsigned divide AX by r/m byte (AL=Quotient, AH=Remainder)
F7 /6	DIV r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Unsigned divide DX:AX by r/m word (AX=Quotient, DX=Remainder)
F7 /6	DIV r/m32				X	X	X	Unsigned divide EDX:EAX by r/m dword (EAX=Quotient, EDX=Remainder)

Description

The DIV instruction performs an unsigned division. The dividend is implicit ; only the divisor is given as an operand. The remainder is always less than the divisor. The type of the divisor determines which registers to use as follows:

SIZE	DIVIDEND	DIVISOR	QUOTIENT	REMAINDER
byte	AX	r/m8	AL	AH
word	DX:AX	r/m16	AX	DX
dword	EDX:EAX	r/m32	EAX	EDX

Operation

temp ← dividend / divisor;
IF temp does not fit in quotient 
THEN Interrupt 0;
ELSE 
  quotient ← temp;
  remainder ← dividend MOD (r/m);
FI;

Note: Divisions are unsigned. The divisor is given by the r/m operand. The dividend, quotient, and remainder use implicit registers. Refer to the table under "Description".

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|? |  |  |? |? |? |? |? |

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 0 if the quotient is too large to fit in the designated register (AL, AX, or EAX), or if the divisor is 0; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 0 if the quotient is too big to fit in the designated register (AL, AX, or EAX), or if the divisor is 0; Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

ENTER - Make Stack Frame for Procedure Parameters

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
C8 iw 00	ENTER imm16,0		X	X	X	X	X	Make procedure stack frame
C8 iw 01	ENTER imm16,1		X	X	X	X	X	Make stack frame for procedure parameters
C8 iw ib	ENTER imm16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Make stack frame for procedure parameters

Description

The ENTER instruction creates the stack frame required by most block- structured high-level languages. The first operand specifies the number of bytes of dynamic storage allocated on the stack for the routine being entered. The second operand gives the lexical nesting level (0 to 31) of the routine within the high-level language source code. It determines the number of stack frame pointers copied into the new stack frame from the preceding frame. Both the operand-size attribute and the stack-size attribute are used to determine whether BP or EBP is used for the current frame pointer and SP or ESP is used for the stack pointer. If the operand-size attribute is 16-bits, the processor uses the BP register as the frame pointer and the SP register as the stack pointer, unless the stack-size attribute is 32-bits in which case it uses EBP for the frame pointer and ESP for the stack pointer. If the operand-size attribute is 32-bits, the processor uses the EBP register for the frame pointer and the ESP register for the stack pointer, unless the stack-size attribute is 16-bits in which case it uses BP for the frame pointer and SP for the stack pointer. If the second operand is 0, the ENTER instruction pushes the frame pointer (BP or EBP register) onto the stack; the ENTER instruction then subtracts the first operand from the stack pointer and sets the frame pointer to the current stack-pointer value. For example, a procedure with 12 bytes of local variables would have an ENTER 12,0 instruction at its entry point and a LEAVE instruction before every RET instruction. The 12 local bytes would be addressed as negative offsets from the frame pointer.

Operation

level ← level MOD 32 
2ndOperand <- 2ndOperand MOD 32 
IF operand_size = 16 THEN Push(bp) ELSE Push(ebp) FI;
IF stkSize = 16 THEN framePtr = sp ELSE framePtr = esp FI;
FOR i ← 1 TO (2ndOperand - 1)
DO 
  IF oprand_size = 16 
  THEN
      IF stkSize = 16 
      THEN
        bp = bp - 2 
        Push([bp]) (* word push *)
      ELSE (* stkSize = 32 *)
        ebp = ebp - 2 
        Push([ebp]) (* word push *)
      FI;
  ELSE (* operand_size = 32 *)
      IF stkSize = 16 
        bp = bp - 4 
        Push([bp]) (* doubleword push *)
      ELSE (* stkSize = 32 *)
        ebp = ebp - 4 
        Push([ebp]) (* doubleword push *)
      FI;
  FI;
OD;
IF stkSize = 16 
THEN Push(framePtr); (* word push *)
ELSE Pushd(framePtr); (* doubleword push *)
FI;
IF stkSize = 16 
THEN 
  bp = framePtr 
  sp = sp - 1stOperand 
ELSE 
  ebp = framePtr 
  esp = esp - 1stOperand 
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. SS(0) if the SP or ESP value would exceed the stack limit at any point during instruction processing; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

F2XM1 - Compute (2 to the power of X) minus 1

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------------
|D9 F0     |F2XM1               |X|X|X|X|X|X|Replace ST with (2ST - 1)

Description

F2XM1 replaces the contents of ST with (2ST-1). ST must lie in the range -1 < ST < 1.

Operation

ST ← (2ST-1);

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If the operand is outside the acceptable range, the result of F2XM1 is undefined. Values other than 2 can be exponentiated using the formula xy = 2(y * log2x) The instructions FLDL2T and FLDL2E load the constants log210 and log2e, respectively. FYL2X can be used to calculate y * log2x for arbitrary positive x.

FABS - Absolute Value

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|D9 E1     |FABS                |X|X|X|X|X|X|Replace ST with its absolute value

Description

The absolute value instruction clears the sign bit of ST. This operation leaves a positive value unchanged, or replaces a negative value with a positive value of equal magnitude.

Operation

sign bit of ST ← 0 

Numeric Exceptions

IS

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

The invalid-operation exception is raised only on stack underflow. No exception is raised if the operand is a signalling NaN or is in an unsupported format.

FADD/FADDP/FIADD - Add

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
DE C1	FADD	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add ST to ST(1) and pop ST
D8 C0+i	FADD ST,ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add ST(i) to ST
DC C0+i	FADD ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add ST to ST(i)
D8 /0	FADD m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add m32real to ST
DC /0	FADD m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add m64real to ST
DE C0+i	FADDP ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add ST to ST(i) and pop ST
DE /0	FIADD m16int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add m16int to ST
DA /0	FIADD m32int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Add m32int to ST

Description

The addition instructions add the source and destination operands and return the sum to the destination. The operand at the stack top can be doubled by coding: FADD ST, ST(0)

Operation

DEST ← DEST +SRC;
If instruction = FADDP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF ( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the source operand is in memory, it is automatically converted to the extended-real format.

FBLD - Load Binary Coded Decimal

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|DF /4     |FBLD m80bcd         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push m80bcd onto the FPU stack

Description

FBLD converts the BCD source operand into extended-real format, and pushes it onto the FPU stack. See Figure 6-10 for BCD data layout.

Operation

Decrement FPU stack-top pointer;
ST(0) ← SRC;

Numeric Exceptions

IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF ( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

The source is loaded without rounding error. The sign of the source is preserved, including the case where the value is negative zero. The packed decimal digits are assumed to be in the range 0-9. The instruction does not check for invalid digits (A-FH), and the result of attempting to load an invalid encoding is undefined. ST(7) must be empty to avoid causing an invalid-operation exception.

FBSTP - Store Binary Coded Decimal and Pop

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|DF /6     |FBSTP m80bcd        |X|X|X|X|X|X|Store ST in m80bcd and pop ST

Description

FBSTP converts the value in ST into a packed decimal integer, stores the result at the destination in memory, and pops ST. Non-integral values are first rounded according to the RC field of the control word. See Figure 6- 10 for BCD data layout.

Operation

DEST ← ST(0);
pop ST;

Numeric Exceptions

P, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

FCHS - Change Sign

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------------------
|D9 E0     |FCHS                |X|X|X|X|X|X|Replace ST with a value of
|          |                    | | | | | | |opposite sign

Description

The change sign instruction inverts the sign bit of ST. This operation replaces a positive value with a negative value of equal magnitude, or vice -versa.

Operation

sign bit of ST ← NOT (sign bit of ST)

Numeric Exceptions

IS

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CRO is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

The invalid-operation exception is raised only on stack underflow, even if the operand is signalling NaN or is an unsupported format.

FCLEX/FNCLEX - Clear Exceptions

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9B DB E2	FCLEX	X	X	X	X	X	X	Clear FP exception flags after checking for FP error conditions
DB E2	FNCLEX	X	X	X	X	X	X	Clear FP exeption flags without checking for FP error conditions

Description

FCLEX clears the exception flags, the exception status flag, and the busy flag of the FPU status word.

Operation

SW[0..7] ← 0;
SW[15]   ← 0;

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

FCLEX checks for unmasked floating-point error conditions before clearing the exception flags, FNCLEX does not.

FCOM/FCOMP/FCOMPP - Compare Real

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D8 D1	FCOM	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(1)
D8 D0+i	FCOM ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(i)
D8 /2	FCOM m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with m32real
DC /2	FCOM m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with m64real
D8 D9	FCOMP	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(1) and pop ST
D8 D8+i	FCOMP ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(i) and pop ST
D8 /3	FCOMP m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with m32real and pop ST
DC /3	FCOMP m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with m64real and pop ST
DE D9	FCOMPP	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(1) and pop ST twice

Description

The compare real instructions compare the stack top to the source, which can be a register or a single- or double-real memory operand. If no operand is encoded, ST is compared to ST(1). Following the instruction, the condition codes reflect the relation between ST and the source operand.

Operation

Case (relation of operands) OF 
  Not comparable:     C3, C2, C0 ← 111;
  ST > SRC:           C3, C2, C0 ← 000;
  ST < SRC:           C3, C2, C0 ← 001;
  ST = SRC:           C3, C2, C0 ← 100;
If instruction = FCOMP THEN pop ST; Fl;
If instruction = FCOMPP THEN pop ST; pop ST; Fl;

FPU Flags Affected

FPU FLAGS |EFLAGS
----------+------
C0        |CF
----------+------
C1        |None
----------+------
C2        |PF
----------+------
C3        |ZF

C1 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C2, C3 as specified above.

Numeric Exceptions

D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF ( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would like outside effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF (fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If either operand is NaN or is in an undefined format, or if a stack fault occurs, the invalid-operation exception is raised, and the condition bits are set to "unordered." The sign of zero is ignored, so that -0.0 =-+0.0.

FCOS - Cosine

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------------------
|D9 FF     |FCOS                | | | |X|X|X|Replace ST with its cosine

Description

The cosine instruction replaces the contents of ST with cos(ST). ST, expressed in radians, must lie in the range 101 < 2 63.

Operation

IF operand is in range 
THEN 
    C2 ← 0;
    ST ← cos(ST);
ELSE 
    C2 ← 1;
FI;

FPU Flags Affected

|C0|C1|C2|C3|
|--+--+--+--|
|? |* |? |* |

C1, C2 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C3 undefined.

Numeric Exceptions

P,D,I,IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If the operand is outside the acceptable range, the C2 flag is set, and ST remains unchanged. It is the programmer's responsibility to reduce the operand to an absolute value smaller than 263 by subtracting an appropriate integer multiple of 2ã. See the Intel documentation for discussion of the proper value to use for ã in performing such reductions.

FDECSTP - Decrement Stack-Top Pointer

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|D9 F6     |FDECSTP             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Decrement top-of-stack pointer for
|          |                    | | | | | | |FPU register stack

Description

FDESCSTP subtracts one (without carry) from the three-bit TOP field of the FPU status word.

Operation

IF TOP=0
THEN TOP ← 7;
ELSE TOP ← TOP-1;
FI;

Numeric Exceptions

None.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

The effect of FDECSTP is to rotate the stack. It does not alter register tags or contents, nor does it transfer data.

FDISI/FNDISI - Disable Interrupts

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9B DB E1	FDISI	X	X					Sets the interrupt enable mask in the control word
DB E1	FNDISI	X	X					Sets the interrupt enable mask in the control word

Description

Operation

FPU Flags Affected

C0|C1|C2|C3
--+--+--+--
  |  |  |

Numeric Exceptions

Protected Mode Exceptions

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Notes

FDIV/FDIVP/FIDIV - Divide

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D8 /6	FDIV m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST ö m32real
DC /6	FDIV m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST ö m64real
D8 F0+i	FDIV ST,ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST ö ST(i)
DC F8+i	FDIV ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST(i) ö ST
DE F8+i	FDIVP ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST(i) ö ST; pop ST
DE F9	FDIV	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(1) with ST(1) ö ST; pop ST
DE /6	FIDIV m16int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST ö m16int
DA /6	FIDIV m32int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST ö m32int

Description

The division instructions divide the stack top by other operand and return the quotient to the destination.

Operation

FDIV DEST, SRC 
DEST ← DEST ö SRC 
If instruction = FDIVP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, Z, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the source operand is in memory, it is automatically converted to the extended-real format. The performance of the division instructions depends on the PC (Precision Control) field of the FPU control word. If PC specifies a precision of 53 bits, the division instructions will run in 33 clocks. If the specified precision is 24 bits, the division instructions will take only 19 clocks.

FDIVR/FDIVRP/FIDIVR - Reverse Divide

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D8 /7	FDIVR m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m32real ö ST
DC /7	FDIVR m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m64real ö ST
D8 F8+i	FDIVR ST,ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST(i) ö ST
DC F0+i	FDIVR ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST ö ST(i)
DE F0+i	FDIVRP ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST ö ST(i); pop ST
DE F1	FDIVR	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(1) with ST ö ST(1); pop ST
DE /7	FIDIVR m16int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m16int ö ST
DA /7	FIDIVR m32int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m32int ö ST

Description

The division instructions divide the other operand by the stack top and return the quotient to the destination.

Operation

FDIVR DEST, SRC 
DEST ← SRC ö DEST 
IF instruction = FDIVRP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, Z, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the source operand is in memory, it is automatically converted to the extended-real format. The performance of the division instructions depends on the PC (Precision Control) field of the FPU control word. If PC specifies a precision of 53 bits, the reverse division instructions will run in 33 clocks. If the specified precision is 24 bits, the reverse division instructions will take only 19 clocks.

FENI/FNENI - Enable Interrupts

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9B DB E0	FENI	X	X					Clears the interrupt control mask in the control word
DB E0	FNENI	X	X					Clears the interrupt enable mask in the control word

Description

Operation

FPU Flags Affected

|C0|C1|C2|C3
|--+--+--+--
|  |  |  |

Numeric Exceptions

Protected Mode Exceptions

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Notes

FFREE - Free Floating-Point Register

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------
|DD C0+i   |FFREE ST(i)         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Tag ST(i) as empty

Description

FFREE tags the destination register as empty.

Operation

TAG(i) ← 11B;

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

FFREE does not affect the contents of the destination register. The floating-point stack pointer (TOP) is also unaffected.

FICOM/FICOMP - Compare Integer

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|DE /2     |FICOM m16int        |X|X|X|X|X|X|Compare ST with m16int
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|DA /2     |FICOM m32int        |X|X|X|X|X|X|Compare ST with m32int
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|DE /3     |FICOMP m16int       |X|X|X|X|X|X|Compare ST with m16int and pop ST
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|DA /3     |FICOMP m32int       |X|X|X|X|X|X|Compare ST with m32int and pop ST

Description

The compare integer instructions compare the stack top to the source. Following the instruction, the condition codes reflect the relation between ST and the source operand.

Operation

CASE (relation of operands) OF 
   Not comparable:  C3, C2, C0 ← 111;
   ST > SRC:        C3, C2, C0 ← 000;
   ST < SRC:        C3, C2, C0 ← 001;
   ST = SRC:        C3, C2, C0 ← 100;
If instruction = FICOMP THEN pop ST; FI;

FPU Flags Affected

|FPU FLAGS   |EFLAGS
|------------+------
|C0          |CF
|------------+------
|C1          |(none)
|------------+------
|C2          |PF
|------------+------
|C3          |ZF

C1 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C2, C3 as specified above.

Numeric Exceptions

D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

The memory operand is converted to extended-real format before the comparison performed. If either operand is a NaN or is in an undefined format, of if a stack fault occurs, the invalid operation exception is raised, and the condition bits are set to "unordered".

FILD - Load Integer

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|DF /0     |FILD m16int         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push m16int onto the FPU stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|DB /0     |FILD m32int         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push m32int onto the FPU stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|DF /5     |FILD m64int         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push m64int onto the FPU stack

Description

FILD converts the source signed integer operand into extended-real format, and pushes it onto the FPU stack.

Operation

Decrement FPU stack-top pointer;
ST(0) ← SRC;

Numeric Exceptions

IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

The source is loaded without rounding error. ST(7) must be empty to avoid causing an invalid-operation exception.

FINCSTP - Increment Stack-Top Pointer

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|D9 F7     |FINCSTP             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Increment top-of-stack pointer for
|          |                    | | | | | | |FPU register stack

Description

FINCSTP adds one (without carry) to the three-bit TOP field of the FPU status word.

Operation

IF TOP = 7 
THEN TOP ← 0;
ELSE TOP ← TOP + 1;
FI;

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM is either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

The effect of FINCSTP is to rotate the stack. It does not alter register tags or contents, nor does it transfer data. It is not equivalent to popping the stack, because it does not set the tag of the old stack-top to empty.

FINIT/FNINIT - Initialize Floating-Point Unit

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|9B DB E3  |FINIT               |X|X|X|X|X|X|Initialize FPU after checking for
|          |                    | | | | | | |unmasked FP error condition
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|DB E3     |FNINIT              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Initialize FPU without checking
|          |                    | | | | | | |for unmasked FP error condition

Description

The initialization instructions set the FPU into a known state, unaffected by any previous activity. The FPU control word is set to 037FH (round to nearest, all exceptions masked, 64-bit precision). The status word is cleared (no exception flags set, stack register R0=stack-top). The stack registers are all tagged as empty. The error pointers (both instruction and data) are cleared.

Operation

CW ← 037FH;      (* Control word *)
SW ← 0;          (*Status word*)
TW ← FFFFH;      (* Tag word *)
FEA ← 0; FDS ← 0; (* Data pointer *)
FIP ← 0; FOP ← 0; FCS ← 0; (* Instruction pointer *)

FPU Flags Affected

|C0|C1|C2|C3|
|--+--+--+--|
|0 |0 |0 |0 |

C0, C1, C2, C3 cleared.

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

FINIT checks for unmasked floating-point error conditions before performing the initialization; FNINIT does not. On the Pentium processor, unlike the Intel387 math coprocessor, FINIT and FNINIT clear the error pointers.

FIST/FISTP-Store Integer

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|DF /2     |FIST m16int         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Store ST in m16int
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|DB /2     |FIST m32int         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Store ST in m32int
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|DF /3     |FISTP m16int        |X|X|X|X|X|X|Store ST in m16int and pop ST
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|DB /3     |FISTP m32int        |X|X|X|X|X|X|Store ST in m32int and pop ST
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|DF /7     |FISTP m64int        |X|X|X|X|X|X|Store ST in m64int and pop ST

Description

FIST converts the value in ST into a signed integer according to the RC field of the control word and transfers the result to the destination. ST remains unchanged. FIST accepts word and short integer destinations; FISTP accepts these and long integers as well.

Operation

DEST ← ST(0);
IF instruction = FISTP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

P, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

Negative zero is stored with the same encoding (00..00) as positive zero. If the value is too large to represent as an integer, an I exception is raised. The masked response is to write the most negative integer to memory.

FLD-Load Real

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 /0	FLD m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Push m32real onto the FPU stack
DD /0	FLD m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Push m64real onto the FPU stack
DB /5	FLD m80real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Push m80real onto the FPU stack
D9 C0+i	FLD ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Push ST(i) onto the FPU stack

Description

FLD pushes the source operand onto the FPU stack. If the source is a register, the register number used is that before the stack-top pointer is decremented. In particular, coding FLD ST(0) duplicates the stack top.

Operation

Decrement FPU stack-top pointer; ST(0) ← SRC;

Numeric Exceptions

D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the source operand is single- or double-real format, it is automatically converted to the extended-real format. Loading an extended-real operand does not require conversion, so the I and D exceptions will not occur in this case. ST(7) must be empty to avoid causing an invalid-operation exception.

FLD1/FLDL2T/FLDL2E/FLDPI/FLDLG2/FLDLN2/FLDZ - Load Constant

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 E8     |FLD1                |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push +1.0 onto the FPU Stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 E9     |FLDL2T              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push log210 onto the FPU stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 EA     |FLDL2E              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push log2e onto the FPU stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 EB     |FLDPI               |X|X|X|X|X|X|Load ã (pi) onto the FPU stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 EC     |FLDLG2              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push log102 onto the FPU stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 ED     |FLDLN2              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push loge2 onto the FPU stack
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 EE     |FLDZ                |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push +0.0 onto the FPU stack

Description

Each of the constant instructions pushes a commonly-used constant (in extended-real format) onto the FPU stack.

Operation

Decrement FPU stack-top pointer;
ST(0) ← CONSTANT;

Numeric Exceptions

IS

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

ST(7) must be empty to avoid an invalid exception. An internal 66-bit constant is used and rounded to external-real format (as specified by the RC bit of the control words). The precision exception is not raised.

FLDCW - Load Control Word

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------
|D9 /5     |FLDCW m16           |X|X|X|X|X|X|Load FPU control word from m16

Description

FLDCW replaces the current value of the FPU control word with the value contained in the specified memory word.

Operation

CW ← SRC;

Numeric Exceptions

None, except for unmasking an existing exception.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

FLDCW is typically used to establish or change the FPU's mode of operation. If an exception bit in the status word is set, loading a new control word that unmasks that exception will result in a floating-point error condition. When changing modes, the recommended procedure is to clear any pending exceptions before loading the new control word.

FLDENV - Load FPU Environment

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 /4	FLDENV m14byte/m28byte	X	X	X	X	X	X	Load FPU environment from m14byte or m28byte
D9 /4	FLDENVW m14byte				X	X	X	Load FPU environment from m14byte
D9 /4	FLDENVD m28byte				X	X	X	Load FPU environment from m28byte

Description

FLDENV reloads the FPU environment from the memory area defined by the source operand. This data should have been written by previous FSTENV or FNSTENV instruction. The FPU environment conists of the FPU control word, status word, tag word, and error pointers (both data and instruction). The environment layout in memory depends on both the operand size and the current operating mode of the processor. The USE attribute of the current code segment determines the operand size: The 14-byte operand applies to a USE16 segment, and the 28- byte operand applies to a USE32 segment. Refer to the Intel documentation for figures of the environment layouts for both operand sizes in both real mode and protected mode. (In virtual-8086 mode, the real mode layout is used.) FLDENV should be run in the same operating mode as the corresponding FSTENV or FNSTENV.

Operation

FPU environment ← SRC;

Numeric Exceptions

None, except for loading an unmasked exception.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the environment image contains an unmasked exception, loading it will result in a floating-point error condition.

FMUL/FMULP/FIMUL - Multiply

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
DE C9	FMUL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST(1) by ST and pop ST
D8 /1	FMUL m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST by m32real
DC /1	FMUL m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST by m64real
D8 C8+i	FMUL ST,ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST by ST(i)
DC C8+i	FMUL ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST(i) by ST
DE C8+i	FMULP ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST(i) by ST and pop ST
DE /1	FIMUL m16int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST by m16int
DA /1	FIMUL m32int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply ST by m32int

Description

The multiplication instructions multiply the destination operand by the source operand and return the product to the destination.

Operation

DEST ← DEST * SRC;
IF instruction = FMULP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, D, I.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments;
#SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment;
#PF(fault-code) for a page fault;
#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set;
#AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the source operand is in memory, it is automatically converted to the extended-real format.

FNOP-No Operation

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 D0	FNOP	X	X	X	X	X	X	No operation is performed

Description

FNOP performs no operation. It affects nothing except instruction pointers.

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set. 

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

FPATAN-Partial Arctangent

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 F3	FPATAN	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replaces ST(1) with arctan(ST(1) ö ST) and pop ST

Description

The partial arctangent instruction computes the arctangent of ST(1) ö ST, and returns computed value, expressed in radians, to ST(1). It then pops ST. The result has the same sign as the operand from ST(1), and a magnitude less than ã.

Operation

ST(1) ← arctan(ST(1) ö ST); pop ST;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set. 

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set. 

Notes

There is no restriction on the range of arguments that FPATAN can accept. The fact that FPATAN takes two arguments and computes the arctangent of their ratio simplifies the calculation of other trigonometric functions. For instance, arcsin(x) (which is the arctangent of x ö û(1-xý)) can be computed using the following sequence of operations: Push x onto the FPU stack; compute û(1-xý) and push the resulting value onto the stack; run FPATAN.

FPREM-Partial Remainder

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 F8	FPREM	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with the remainder obtained on dividing ST by ST(1)

Description

The partial remainder instruction computes the remainder obtained on dividing ST by ST(1), and leaves the result in ST. The sign of the remainder is the same as the sign of the original dividend in ST. The magnitude of the remainder is less than that of the modulus.

Operation

EXPDIF ← exponent(ST) - exponent(ST(1));
IF EXPDIF < 64 
THEN 
   Q ← integer obtained by chopping ST ö ST(1) toward zero;
   ST ← ST - (ST(1) * Q);
   C2 ← 0;
   C0, C1, C3 ← three least-significant bits of Q; (* Q2, Q1, Q0 *)
ELSE 
   C2 ← 1;
   N ← a number between 32 and 63;
   QQ ← integer obtained by chopping (ST ö ST(1)) ö 2EXPDIF-N
       toward zero;
   ST ← ST - (ST(1) * QQ * 2EXPDIF-N;
FI;

Numeric Exceptions

U, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set. 

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set. 

Notes

FREM produces an exact result; the precision (inexact) exception does not occur and the rounding control has no effect. The FPREM instruction is not the remainder operation specified in IEEE Std 754. To get that remainder, the FPREM1 instruction should be used. FPREM is supported for compatibility with the 8087 and Intel287 math coprocessors. FPREM works by iterative subtraction, can reduce the exponent of ST by no more than 63 in one execution. If FPREM succeeds in producing a remainder that is less than the modulus, the function is complete and the C2 flag is cleared. Otherwise, C2 is set, and the result in ST is called the partial remainder. The exponent of the partial remainder is less than the exponent of the original dividend by at least 32. Software can run the instruction again (using the partial remainder in ST as the dividend) until C2 is cleared. A higher-priority interrupting routine that needs the FPU can force a context switch between the instructions in the remainder loop. An important use of FPREM is to reduce the arguments of periodic functions. When reduction is complete, FPREM provides the three least-significant bits of the quotient in flags C3, C1, and C0. This is important in argument reduction for the tangent function (using a modulus of ã/4), because it locates the original angle in the correct one of eight sectors of the unit circle.

FPREM1 - Partial Remainder

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 F5	FPREM1				X	X	X	Replace ST with the remainder obtained on dividing ST by ST(1)

Description

The partial remainder instruction computes the remainder obtained on dividing ST by ST(1), and leaves the result in ST. The magnitude of the remainder is less than that of the modulus.

Operation

EXPDIF ← exponent(ST) - exponent(ST(1));
IF EXPDIF < 64
THEN
  Q ← integer obtained by rounding ST ö ST(1) to the nearest integer;
      (*or the nearest even integer if the result is exactly halfway between 2 integers *)
  ST ← ST - (ST(1) * Q);
  C2 ← 0;
  Q ← ST - (ST(1) * Q);
  C0, C1, C3 ← three least-significant bits of Q; (* Q2, Q1, Q0 *)
  C2 ← 0;
  C0, C1, C3 ← three least-significant bits of Q; (* Q2, Q1, Q0 *)
ELSE
  C2 ← 1;
  N ← a number between 32 and 63;
  QQ ← integer obtained by chopping (ST ö ST(1)) ö 2EXPDIF-N;
      toward zero;
  ST ← ST - (ST(1) * QQ * 2EXPDIF-N
FI;

Numeric Exceptions

U, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

FPREM1 produces an exact result; the precision (inexact) exception does not occur and the rounding control has no effect. The FPREM1 instruction is not the remainder operation specified in IEEE Std 754. It differs from FPREM in the way it rounds the quotient of ST and ST(1), when the exponent difference of exp(ST) -exp(ST)1 is less than 64. FPREM1 works by iterative subtraction, can reduce the exponent of ST by no more than 63 in one execution. If FPREM1 succeeds in producing a remainder that is less than one half the modulus, the function is complete and the C2 flag is cleared. Otherwise, C2 is set, and the result in ST is called the partial remainder. The exponent of the partial remainder is less than the exponent of the original dividend by at least 32. Software can run the instruction again (using the partial remainder in ST as the dividend) until C2 is cleared. A higher-priority interrupting routine that needs the FPU can force a context switch between the instructions in the remainder loop. An important use of FPREM1 is to reduce the arguments of periodic functions. When reduction is complete, FPREM1 provides the three least-significant bits of the quotient in flags C3, C1, and C0. This is important in argument reduction for the tangent function (using a modulus of ã/4), because it locates the original angle in the correct one of eight sectors of the unit circle.

FPTAN-Partial Tangent

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 F2	FPTAN	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with its tangent and push 1 onto the FPU stack

Description

The partial tangent instruction replaces the contents of ST with tan(ST), and then pushes 1.0 onto the FPU stack. ST, expressed in radians, must lie in the range |0| < 263.

Operation

IF operand is in range 
THEN 
  C2 ← 0;
  ST ← tan(ST);
  Decrement stack-top pointer;
  ST ← 1.0;
ELSE 
  C2 ← 1;
FI;

FPU Flags Affected

|C0|C1|C2|C3|
|--+--+--+--|
|? |* |* |? |

C1, C2 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C3 undefined.

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If the operand is outside the acceptable range, the C2 flag is set, and ST remains unchanged. It is the programmer's responsibility to reduce the operand to an absolute value smaller than 263 by subtracting an appropriate integer multiple of 2ã. Refer to the Intel documentation 6 for a discussion of the proper value to use for ã in performing such reductions. The fact that FPTAN pushes 1.0 onto the FPU stack after computing tan(ST) maintains compatibility with the 8087 and Intel287 math coprocessors, and simplifies the calculation of other trigonometric functions. For instance, the cotangent (which is the reciprocal of the tangent) can be computed by running FDIVR after FPTAN. ST(7) must be empty to avoid an invalid-operation exception.

FRNDINT-Round to Integer

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 FC	FRNDINT	X	X	X	X	X	X	Round ST to an integer

Description

The round to integer instruction rounds the value in ST to an integer according to the RC field of the FPU control word.

Operation

ST ← rounded ST;

Numeric Exceptions

P, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

FRSTOR/FRSTRW/FRSTRD - Restore FRU State

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
DD /4	FRSTOR m94byte/m108byte	X	X	X	X	X	X	Load FPU state from m94byte or m108byte
DD /5	FRSTORW m94byte				X	X	X	Load FPU state from m94byte
DD /4	FRSTORD m108byte				X	X	X	Load FPU state from m108byte

Description

FRSTOR reloads the FPU state (environment and register stack) from the memory area defined by the source operand. This data should have been written by a previous FSAVE or FNSAVE instruction.

The FPU environment consists of the FPU control word, status word, tag word, and error pointers (both data and instruction). The environment layout in memory depends on both the operand size and the current operating mode of the processor. The USE attribute of the current code segment determines the operand size: the 14-byte operand applies to a USE16 segment, and the 28- byte operand applies to a USE32 segment. Refer to the Intel documentation for the environment layouts for both operand sizes in both real mode and protected mode. (In virtual-8086 mode, the real mode layout is used.) The stack registers, beginning with ST and ending with ST(7), are in the 80 bytes that immediately follow the environment image. FRSTOR should be run in the same operating mode as the corresponding FSAVE or FNSAVE.

Operation

FPU state ← SRC;

Numeric Exceptions

None, except for loading an unmasked exception.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the state image contains an unmasked exception, loading it will result in a floating-point error condition.

FSAVE/FNSAVE-Store FPU State

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9B DD /6	FSAVE m94byte/m108byte	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU state to m94byte or m108byte after checking for unmasked FP error condition; then re-initialize the CPU
9B DD /6	FSAVEW m94byte				X	X	X	Store FPU state to m94byte after checking for unmasked FP error condition; then re-initialize the FPU
9B DD /6	FSAVED m108byte				X	X	X	Store FPU state to m108byte after checking for unmasked FP error condition; then re-initialize the FPU
DD /6	FNSAVE m94byte/	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m94byte or m108byte without checking for unmasked FP error condition; then re-initialize the FPU
DD /6	FNSAVEW m94byte				X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m94byte without checking for unmasked FP error condition; then re-initialize the FPU
DD /6	FNSAVED m108byte				X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m108byte without checking for unmasked FP error condition; then re-initialize the FPU

Description

The save instructions write the current FPU state (environment and register stack) to the specified destination, and then re-initialize the FPU. The environment consists of the FPU control word, status word, tag word, and error pointers (both data and instruction).

The state layout in memory depends on both operand size and the current operating mode of the processor. The USE attribute of the current code segment determines the operand size: the 94-byte operand applies to USE16 segment, and the 108-byte operand applies to a USE32 segment.

Refer to the Intel documentation for the environment layouts for both operand sizes in both real mode and protected mode. (In virtual-8086 mode, the real mode layout is used.) The stack registers, beginning with ST and ending with ST( 7), are stored in the 80 bytes that immediately follow the environment image.

Operation

DEST ← FPU state;
initialize FPU; (* Equivalent to FNINIT *)

FPU Flags Affected

|C0|C1|C2|C3|
|--+--+--+--|
|0 |0 |0 |0 |

C0, C1, C2, C3 cleared.

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

FSAVE and FNSAVE do not store the FPU state until all FPU activity is complete. Thus, the saved image reflects the state of the FPU after any previously decoded instruction has been run. If a program is to read from the memory image of the state following a save instruction, it must issue an FWAIT instruction to ensure that the storage is complete. The save instructions are typically used when an operating system needs to perform a context switch, or an exception handler needs to use the FPU, or an application program wants to pass a "clean" FPU to a subroutine.

FSCALE-Scale

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 FD	FSCALE	X	X	X	X	X	X	Scale ST by ST(1)

Description

The scale instruction inteprets the value in (ST(1) as an integer, and adds this integer to the exponent of ST. Thus, FSCALE provides rapid multiplication or division by integral powers of 2.

Operation

ST ← ST * 2ST(1);

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

FSCALE can be used as an inverse to FXTRACT. Because FSCALE does not pop the exponent part, however, FSCALE must be followed by FSTP ST(1) in order to completely undo the effect of a preceding FXTRACT. There is no limit on the range of the scale factor in ST(1). If the value is not integral, FSCALE uses the nearest integer smaller in magnitude; i.e. , it chops the value toward 0. If the resulting integer is zero, the value in ST is not changed.

FSETPM-Set Protected Mode

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
DB E4	FSETPM			X				Sets the operating mode of the 80287 to protected virtual address mode

Description

Sets the operating mode of the 80287 to Protected Virtual-Address mode. When the 80287 is first initialized following hardware RESET, it operates in Real-Address mode, just as does the 80286 CPU. Once the 80287 NPX has been set into Protected mode, only a hardware RESET can return the NPX to operation in Real-Address mode. When the 80287 operates in Protected mode, the NPX exception pointers are represented differently than they are in Real-Address mode (see the FSAVE and FSTENV instructions). This distinction is evident primarily to writers of numeric exception handlers, however. For general application programmers, the operating mode of the 80287 need not be a concern.

Operation

FPU Flags Affected

C0	C1	C2	C3

Numeric Exceptions

Protected Mode Exceptions

Real Address Mode Exceptions

FSIN-Sine

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------
|D9 FE     |FSIN                | | | |X|X|X|Replace ST with its sine

Description

The sine instruction replaces the contents of ST with sin(ST). ST, expressed in radians, must lie in the range |01| < 263.

Operation

If operand is in range 
THEN 
  C2 ← 0;
ELSE 
  C2 ← 1;
FI:

FPU Flags Affected

|C0|C1|C2|C3|
|--+--+--+--|
|? |* |* |? |

C1, C2 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C3 undefined.

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If the operand is outside the acceptable range, the C2 flag is set, and ST remains unchanged. It is the programmer's responsibility to reduce the operand to an absolute value smaller than 263 by subtracting an appropriate integer multiple of 2ã. Refer to the Intel documentation for a discussion of the proper value to use the ã in performing such reductions.

FSINCOS-Sine and Cosine

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|D9 FB     |FSINCOS             | | | |X|X|X|Compute the sine and cosine of ST;
|          |                    | | | | | | |replace ST with the sine, then
|          |                    | | | | | | |push the cosine onto the FPU stack

Description

FSINCOS computes both sin(ST) and cos(ST), replaces ST with the sine and then pushes the cosine onto the FPU stack. ST, expressed in radians, must lie in the range |0| < 263.

Operation

IF operand is in range 
THEN 
  C2 ← 0;
  TEMP ← cos(ST);
  ST ← sin(ST);
  Decrement FPU stack-top pointer;
  ST ← TEMP;
ELSE 
  C2 ← 1;
FI:

FPU Flags Affected

|C0|C1|C2|C3|
|--+--+--+--|
|? |* |* |? |

C1, C2 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C3 undefined.

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If the operand is outside the acceptable range, the C2 flag is set, and ST remains unchanged. It is the programmer's responsibility to reduce the operand to an absolute value smaller than 263 by subtracting an appropriate integer multiple of 2ã. Refer to the Intel documentation for a discussion of the proper value to use for ã in performing such reductions. It is faster to run FSINCOS than to run both FSIN and FCOS.

FSQRT-Square Root

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 FA	FSQRT	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with its square root

Description

The square root instruction replaces the value in ST with its square root.

Operation

ST ← square root of ST;

Numeric Exceptions

P, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

The square root of -0 is -0.

FST/FSTP-Store Real

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 /2	FST m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Copy ST to m32real
DD /2	FST m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Copy ST to m64real
DD D0+i	FST ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Copy ST to ST(i)
D9 /3	FSTP m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Copy ST to m32real and pop ST
DD /3	FSTP m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Copy ST to m64real and pop ST
DB /7	FSTP m80real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Copy ST to m80real and pop ST
DD D8+i	FSTP ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Copy ST to ST(i) and pop ST

Description

FST copies the current value in the ST register to the destination, which can be another register or a single- or double-real memory operand. FSTP copies and then pops ST; it accepts extended-real memory operands as well as the types accepted by FST. If the source is register, the register number used is that before the stack is popped.

Operation

DEST ← ST(0);
IF instruction = FSTP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

Register or extended-real destinations: IS

Single- or double-real destinations: P, U, O, I, IS

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the destination is single- or double-real, the significand is rounded to the width of the destination according to the RC field of the control word, and the exponent is converted to the width and bias of the destination format. The over/underflow condition is checked for as well. If ST contains zero, ñì, or a NaN, then the significand is not rounded, but chopped (on the right) to fit the destination. Nor is the exponent converted; it too is chopped on the right. These operations preserve the value's identity as ì or NaN (exponent all ones). The invalid-operation exception is not raised when the destination is a nonempty stack element. A denormal operand in ST(0) causes an underflow. No denormal operand exception is raised.

FSTCW/FNSTCW-Store Control Word

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9B D9 /7	FSTCW m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU control word to m16 after checking for unmasked FP error condition
D9 /7	FNSTCW m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU control word to m16 without checking for unmasked FP error condition

Description

FSTCW and FNSTCW write the current value of the FPU control word to the specified destination.

Operation

DEST ← CW;

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code for a page fault; # AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

FSTCW checks for unmasked floating-point error conditions before storing the control word FNSTCW does not.

FSTENV/FNSTENV-Store FPU Environment

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9B D9 /6	FSTENV m14byte/m28byte	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m14byte or m28byte after checking for unmasked FP error condition; then mask all FP exceptions.
9B D9 /6	FSTENVW m14byte				X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m14byte after checking for unmasked FP error condition; then mask all FP exceptions
9B D9 /6	FSTENVD m28byte				X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m28byte after checking for unmasked FP error condition; then mask all FP exceptions
D9 /6	FNSTENV m14byte/m28byte	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m14byte or m28byte without checking for unmasked FP error condition; then mask all FP exceptions
D9 /6	FNSTENVW m14byte				X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m14byte without checking for unmasked FP error condition; then mask all FP exceptions
D9 /6	FNSTENVD m28byte				X	X	X	Store FPU environment to m28byte without checking for unmasked FP error condition; then mask all FP exceptions

Description

The store environment instructions write the current FPU environment to the specified destination, and then mask all floating-point exceptions. The FPU environment consists of the FPU control word, status word, tag word, and error pointer (both data and instruction).

The environment layout in memory depends on both the operand size and the current operating mode of the processor. The USE attribute of the current code segment determines the operand size: the 14-byte operand applies to a USE16 segment, and the 28-byte operand applies to a USE32 segment. Figures 6-6 through 6-8 show the environment layouts for both operand sizes in both real mode and protected mode. (In virtual-8086 mode, the real mode layout is used).

Operation

DEST ← FPU environment;
CW[0..5] ← 111111B;

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

FSTENV and FNSTENV do not store the environment until FPU activity is complete. Thus, the save environment reflects the state of the FPU after any previously decoded instruction has been run.

The store environment instructions are often used by exception handlers because they provide access to the FPU error pointers. The environment is typically saved onto the memory stack. After saving the environment, FSTENV and FNSTENV sets all the exception masks in the FPU control word. This prevents floating-point errors from interrupting the exception handler.

FSTENV checks for unmasked floating-point error conditions before storing the FPU environment; FNSTENV does not.

FSTSW/FNSTSW-Store Status Word

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9B DF /7	FSTSW m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU status word to m16 after checking for unmasked FP error condition
9B DF E0	FSTSW AX			X	X	X	X	Store FPU status word to AX register after checking for unmasked FP error condition
DF /7	FNSTSW m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store FPU status word to m16 without checking for unmasked FP error condition
DF E0	FNSTSW AX			X	X	X	X	Store FPU status word to AX register without checking for unmasked FP error condition

Description

FSTSW and FNSTSW write the current value of the FPU status word to the specified destination, which can be either a two-byte location in memory or the AX register.

Operation

DEST ← SW;

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

FSTSW checks for unmasked floating-point error conditions before storing the status word; FNSTSW does not. FSTSW and FNSTSW are used primarily in conditional branching (after a comparison, FPREM, FPREM1, or FXAM instruction). They can also be used to invoke exception handlers (by polling the exception bits) in environments that do not use interrupts. When FNSTSW AX is run, the AX register is updated before the processor runs any further instructions. The status stored is that from the completion of the prior ESC instruction.

FSUB/FSUBP/FISUB-Subtract

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D8 /4	FSUB m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST - m32real
DC /4	FSUB m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST - m64real
D8 E0+i	FSUB ST,ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST - ST(i)
DC E8+i	FSUB ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST(i) - ST
DE E8+i	FSUBP ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST - ST(i); pop ST
DE E9	FSUB	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(1) with ST - ST(1); pop ST
DE /4	FISUB m16int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST - m16int
DA /4	FISUB m32int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST - m32int

Description

The subtraction instructions subtract the other operand from the stack top and return the difference to the destination.

Operation

DEST ← ST - Other Operand;
IF instruction = FSUBP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the source operand is in memory, it is automatically converted to the extended-real format.

FSUBR/FSUBRP/FISUBR-Reverse Subtract

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D8 /5	FSUBR m32real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m32real - ST
DC /5	FSUBR m64real	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m64real - ST
D8 E8+i	FSUBR ST,ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with ST(i) - ST
DC E0+i	FSUBR ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST - ST(i)
DE E0+i	FSUBRP ST(i),ST	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(i) with ST - ST(i)
DE E1	FSUBR	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST(1) with ST - ST(1); pop ST
DE /5	FISUBR m16int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m16int - ST
DA /5	FISUBR m32int	X	X	X	X	X	X	Replace ST with m32int - ST

Description

The reverse subtraction instructions subtract the stack top from the other operand and return the difference to the destination.

Operation

DEST ← Other Operand - ST;
IF instruction = FSUBRP THEN pop ST FI;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in SS segment; #PF(fault- code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

If the source operand is in memory, it is automatically converted to the extended-real format.

FTST-Test

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|D9 E4     |FTST                |X|X|X|X|X|X|Compare ST with 0.0

Description

The test instruction compares the stack top to 0.0. Following the instruction, the condition codes reflect the result of the comparison.

Operation

CASE (relation of operands) OF 
     Not comparable:   C3, C2, C0 ← 111;
     ST > SRC:         C3, C2, C0 ← 000;
     ST < SRC:         C3, C2, C0 ← 001;
     ST = SRC:         C3, C2, C0 ← 100;

FPU Flags Affected

|FPU FLAGS   |EFLAGS
|------------+------
|C0          |CF
|------------+------
|C1          |(none)   
|------------+------
|C2          |PF
|------------+------
|C3          |ZF

C1 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C2, C3 as specified above.

Numeric Exceptions

D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If ST contains a NaN or an object of undefined format, or if a stack fault occurs, the invalid-operation exception is raised, and the condition bits are set to "unordered." The sign of zero is ignored, so that -0.0=+0.0.

FUCOM/FUCOMP/FUCOMPP-Unordered Compared Real

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
DD E1	FUCOM				X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(1)
DD E0+i	FUCOM ST(i)				X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(i)
DD E9	FUCOMP				X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(1) and pop ST
DD E8+i	FUCOMP ST(i)				X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(i) and pop ST
DA E9	FUCOMPP				X	X	X	Compare ST with ST(1) and pop ST twice

Description

The unordered compare real instructions compare the stack top to the source , which must be a register. If no operand is encoded, ST is compared to ST( 1). Following the instruction, the condition codes reflect the relation between ST and the source operand.

Operation

CASE (relation of operands) OF
     Not comparable:   C3, C2, C0 ← 111;
     ST > SRC:         C3, C2, C0 ← 000;
     ST < SRC:         C3, C2, C0 ← 001;
     ST = SRC:         C3, C2, C0 ← 100;
IF instruction = FUCOMP THEN pop ST; FI;
IF instruction = FUCOMPP THEN pop ST; pop ST; FI;

FPU Flags Affected

FPU FLAGS	EFLAGS
C0	CF
C1	(none)
C2	PF
C3	ZF

C1 as described in FPU Flags Affected; C0, C2, C3 as specified above.

Numeric Exceptions

D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If either operand is an SNaN or is in an undefined format, or if a stack fault occurs, the invalid-operation exception is raised, and the condition bits are set to "unordered".

If either operand is a QNaN, the condition bits are set to "unordered." Unlike the ordinary compare instructions (FCOM, etc.), the unordered compare instructions do not raise the invalid-operation exception on account of a QNaN operand.

The sign of zero is ignored, so that -0.0=+0.0.

FWAIT-Wait

Details Table

|Encoding |Instruction   |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|---------+--------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------
|9B       |FWAIT         |X|X|X|X|X|X|Alias for WAIT

Description

FWAIT causes the processor to check for pending unmasked numeric exceptions before proceeding.

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if both MP and TS in CR0 are set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if both MP and TS in CR0 are set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if both MP and TS in CR0 are set.

Notes

As its opcode shows, FWAIT is not actually an ESC instruction, but an alternate mnemonic for WAIT. Coding FWAIT after an ESC instruction ensures that any unmasked floating-point exceptions the instruction may cause are handled before the processor has a chance to modify the instruction's results. Refer to the Intel documentation for more information about when to use FWAIT.

FXAM-Examine

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction     |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+----------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------------------------
|D9 E5     |FXAM            |X|X|X|X|X|X|Report the type of object in the
|          |                | | | | | | |ST register

Description

The examine instruction reports the type of object contained in the ST register by setting the FPU Flags.

Operation

C1 ← sign bit of ST; (* 0 for positive, 1 for negative *)

CASE (type of object in ST) OF 
     Unsupported:  C3, C2, C0 ← 000;
     NaN:         C3, C2, C0 ← 001;
     Normal:      C3, C2, C0 ← 010;
     Infinity:    C3, C2, C0 ← 011;
     Zero:        C3, C2, C0 ← 100;
     Empty:       C3, C2, C0 ← 101;
     Denormal:    C3, C2, C0 ← 110;

FPU Flags Affected

FPU FLAGS	EFLAGS
C0	CF
C1	(none)
C2	PF
C3	ZF

C0, C1, C2, C3 as shown above.

Numeric Exceptions

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

C1 bit represents the sign of ST(0) regardless of whether ST(0) is empty or full.

FXCH-Exchange Register Contents

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 C9	FXCH	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange the contents of ST and ST(1)
D9 C8+i	FXCH ST(i)	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange the contents of ST and ST(i)

Description

FXCH swaps the contents of the destination and stack-top registers. If the destination is not coded explicitly, ST(1) is used.

Operation

TEMP ← ST;
ST ← DEST;
DEST ← TEMP;

Numeric Exceptions

IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

Many numeric instructions operate only on the stack top; FXCH provides a simple means for using these instructions on lower stack elements. For example, the following sequence takes the square root of the third register from the top (assuming that ST is nonempty):

FXCH ST (3)
FSQRT
FXCH ST (3)

FXCH can be paired with some floating point instructions (i.e., FADD, FSUB, FMUL, FLD, FCOM, FUCOM, FCHS, FTST, FABS, FDIV. This set also includes the FADDP, FSUBRP, etc., instructions). When paired, the FXCH gets run in parallel, and does not take any additional clocks.

FXTRACT-Extract Exponent and Significand

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D9 F4	FXTRACT	X	X	X	X	X	X	Separate ST into its exponent and significand; replace ST with exponent then push significand onto FPU stack

Description

FXTRACT splits the value in ST into its exponent and significand. The exponent replaces the original operand on the stack and the significand is pushed onto the stack. Following execution of FXTRACT, ST (the new stack top) contains the value of the original significand expressed as a real number: its sign is the same as the operand's, its exponent is 0 true (16, 383 or 3FFFH biased), and its significand is identical to the original operand's. ST(1) contains the value of the original operand's true (unbiased) exponent expressed as a real number. To illustrate the operation of FXTRACT, assume that ST contains a number whose true exponent is +4 (i.e., its exponent field contains 4003H). After running FXTRACT, ST(1) will contain the real number +4.0; its sign will be positive, its exponent field will contain 4001H (+2 true) and its significand field will contain 1ë00...00B. In other words, the value in ST( 1) will be 1.0 * 2ý = 4. If ST contains an operand whose true exponent is - 7 (i.e., its exponent field contains 3FF8H), then FXTRACT will return an "exponent" of -7.0; after the instruction runs, ST(1)'s sign and exponent fields will contain C001H (negative sign, true exponent of 2), and its significand will be 1ë1100...00B. In other words, the value in ST(1) will be -1.75 * 2ý=-7.0. In both cases, following FXTRACT, ST's sign and significand fields will be the same as the original operand's, and its exponent field will contain 3FFFH (0 true).

Operation

TEMP ← significand of ST;
ST ← exponent of ST;
Decrement FPU stack-top pointer;
ST ← TEMP;

Numeric Exceptions

Z, D, I, IS.

Protected Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

FXTRACT (extract exponent and significand) performs a superset of the IEEE- recommended logb(x) function. If the original operand is zero, FXTRACT leaves -ì in ST(1) (the exponent) while ST is assigned the value zero with a sign equal to that of the original operand. The zero-divide exception is raised in this case, as well. ST(7) must be empty to avoid the invalid-operation exception. FXTRACT is useful for power and range scaling operations. Both FXTRACT and the base 2 exponential instruction F2XM1 are needed to perform a general power operation. Converting numbers in extended-real format to decimal representations (e.g., for printing or displaying) requires not only FBSTP but also FXTRACT to allow scaling that does not overflow the range of the extended format. FXTRACT can also be useful for debugging, because it allows the exponent and significand parts of a real number to be examined separately.

FYL2X-Compute y * log2x

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|D9 F1     |FYL2X               |X|X|X|X|X|X|Replace ST with ST(1) * log2ST and
|          |                    | | | | | | |pop ST

Description

FYL2X computes the base-2 logarithm of ST, multiplies the logarithm by ST(1 ), and returns the resulting value to ST(1). It then pops ST. The operand in ST must not be negative or zero.

Operation

ST(1) ← ST(1) * log2ST;
pop ST;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, O, Z, D, I, IS. Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set. Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If the operand in ST is negative, the invalid-operation exception is raised. The FYL2X instruction is designed with a built-in multiplication to optimize the calculation of logarithms with arbitrary positive base: logbx = (log2b) -1 * log2x The instructions FLDL2T and FLDL2E load the constants log210 and log2e, respectively.

FYL2XP1-Compute y * log2(x + 1)

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------------------
|D9 F9     |FYL2XP1             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Replace ST(1) with ST(1) * log2
|          |                    | | | | | | |(ST+1.0) and pop ST

Description

FYL2XP1 computes the base-2 logarithm of (ST+1.0), multiples the logarithm by ST(1), and returns the resulting value to ST(1). It then pops ST. The operand in ST must be in the range -(1-(û2 / 2)) ó ST ó û2 -1

Operation

ST(1) ← ST(1) * log2(ST+1.0);
pop ST;

Numeric Exceptions

P, U, D, I, IS. Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions Interrupt 7 if either EM or TS in CR0 is set. Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set.

Notes

If the operand in ST is outside the acceptable range, the result of FYL2XP1 is undefined. The FYL2XP1 instruction provides improved accuracy over FYL2X when computing the logarithms of numbers very close to 1. When î is small, more significant digits can be retained by providing î as an argument to FYL2XP1 than by providing 1+î as an argument to FYL2X.

HLT-Halt

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description 
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------
|F4        |HLT                 |X|X|X|X|X|X|Halt        

Description

The HLT instruction stops instruction processing and places the processor in a HALT state. An enabled interrupt, NMI, or a reset will resume execution. If an interrupt (including NMI) is used to resume execution after a HLT instruction, the saved CS:IP (or CS:EIP) value points to the instruction following the HLT instruction.

Operation

Enter Halt state;

Protected Mode Exceptions

The HLT instruction is a privileged instruction; #GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#GP(0); the HLT instruction is a privileged instruction.

IDIV-Signed Divide

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F6 /7	IDIV r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide AX (where AH must contain sign-extension of AL) by r/m byte (results: AL=Quotient, AH=Remainder)
F7 /7	IDIV r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide DX:AX (where DX must contain sign-extension of AX) by r/m word (results: AX=Quotient, DX=Remainder)
F7 /7	IDIV r/m32				X	X	X	Signed divide EDX:EAX (where EDX must contain sign-extension of EAX) by r/m dword (results: EAX=Quotient, EDX=Remainder)

Description

The IDIV instruction performs a signed division. The dividend, quotient, and remainder are implicitly allocated to fixed registers. Only the divisor is given as an explicit r/m operand. The type of the divisor determines which registers to use as follows:

SIZE	DIVIDEND	DIVISOR	QUOTIENT	REMAINDER
byte	AX	r/m8	AL	AH
word	DX:AX	r/m16	AX	DX
dword	EDX:EAX	r/m32	EAX	EDX

If the resulting quotient is too large to fit in the destination, or if the divisor is 0, an Interrupt 0 is generated. Nonintegral quotients are truncated toward 0. The remainder has the same sign as the dividend and the absolute value of the remainder is always less than the absolute value of the divisor.

Operation

temp ← dividend / divisor;
IF temp does not fit in quotient 
THEN Interrupt 0;
ELSE 
 quotient ← temp;
 remainder ← dividend MOD (r/m);
FI;

Note: Divisions are signed. The dividend must be sign-extended. The divisor is given by the r/m operand. The dividend, quotient, and remainder use implicit registers. Refer to the table under "Description."

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|? |  |  |? |? |? |? |? |

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 0 if the quotient is too large to fit in the designated register (AL or AX), or if the divisor is 0; #GP (0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 0 if the quotient is too large to fit in the designated register (AL or AX), or if the divisor is 0; Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

IMUL-Signed Multiply

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F6 /5	IMUL r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AX ← AL * r/m byte
F7 /5	IMUL r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	DX:AX ← AX * r/m word
F7 /5	IMUL r/m32				X	X	X	EDX:EAX ← EAX * r/m dword
0F AF /r	IMUL r16,r/m16				X	X	X	r16 ← r16 * r/m word
0F AF /r	IMUL r32,r/m32				X	X	X	r32 ← r32 * r/m dword
6B /r ib	IMUL r16,r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	r16 ← r/m word * sign-extended immediate byte
6B /r ib	IMUL r32,r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	r32 ← r/m dword * sign-extended immediate byte
6B /r ib	IMUL r16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	r16 ← r16 * sign-extended immediate byte
6B /r ib	IMUL r32,imm8				X	X	X	r32 ← r32 * sign-extended immediate byte
69 /r iw	IMUL r16,r/m16,imm16		X	X	X	X	X	r16 ← r/m word * immediate word
69 /r id	IMUL r32,r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	r32 ← r/m dword * immediate dword
69 /r iw	IMUL r16,imm16		X	X	X	X	X	r16 ← r16 * immediate word
69 /r id	IMUL r32,imm32				X	X	X	r32 ← r32 * immediate dword

Description

The IMUL instruction performs signed multiplication. Some forms of the instruction use implicit register operands. The operand combinations for all forms of the instruction are shown in the "Description" column above. The IMUL instruction clears the OF and CF flags under the following conditions (otherwise the CF and OF flags are set):

INSTRUCTION FORM	CONDITION FOR CLEARING CR AND OF
r/m8	AL = sign-extend of AL to 16-bits
r/m16	AX = sign-extend of AX to 32-bits
r/m32	EDX:EAX = sign-extend of EAX to 32-bits
r16,r/m16	Result exactly fits within r16
r32,r/m32	Result exactly fits within r32
r16,r/m16,imm16	Result exactly fits within r16
r32,r/m32,imm32	Result exactly fits within r32

Operation

result ← multiplicand * multiplier; 

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|* |  |  |? |? |? |? |* |

The OF and CF flags as described in the table in the "Description" section above; the SF, ZF, AF, and PF flags are undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

When using the accumulator forms (IMUL r/m8, IMUL rm16, or IMUL r/m32), the result of the multiplication is available even if the overflow flag is set because the result is twice the size of the multiplicand and multiplier. This is large enough to handle any possible result.

IN-Input from Port

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|E4 ib     |IN AL,imm8          |X|X|X|X|X|X|Input byte from port imm8 into AL
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|E5 ib     |IN AX,imm8          |X|X|X|X|X|X|Input word from port imm8 into AX
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|E5 ib     |IN EAX,imm8         | | | |X|X|X|Input dword from port imm8 into EAX
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|EC        |IN AL,DX            |X|X|X|X|X|X|Input byte from port DX into AL
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|ED        |IN AX,DX            |X|X|X|X|X|X|Input word from port DX into AX
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+---------------------------------
|ED        |IN EAX,DX           | | | |X|X|X|Input dword from port DX into EAX

Description

The IN instruction transfers a data byte or data word from the port numbered by the second operand into the register (AL, AX, or EAX) specified by the first operand. Access any port from 0 to 65535 by placing the port number in the DX register and using an IN instruction with the DX register as the second parameter. These I/O instructions can be shortened by using an 8-bit port I/O in the instruction. The upper eight bits of the port address will be 0 when 8-bit port I/O is used.

Operation

IF (PE = 1) AND ((VM = 1) OR (CPL>IOPL))
THEN (* Virtual 8086 mode, or protected mode with CPL>IOPL *)
 IF NOT I-O-Permission (SRC, width(SRC))
 THEN #GP(0);
 FI;
FI;
DEST ← [SRC]; (* Reads from I/O address space *)

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is larger (has less privilege) than the I/O privilege level and any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in TSS equals 1.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault if any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in TSS equals 1.

INC-Increment by 1

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------------
|FE /0     |INC r/m8            |X|X|X|X|X|X|Increment r/m byte by 1
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------------
|FF /0     |INC r/m16           |X|X|X|X|X|X|Increment r/m word by 1
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------------
|FF /0     |INC r/m32           | | | |X|X|X|Increment r/m dword by 1
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------------
|40+rw     |INC r16             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Increment word register by 1
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------
|40+rd     |INC r32             | | | |X|X|X|Increment dword register by 1

Description

The INC instruction adds 1 to the operand. It does not change the CF flag. To affect the CF flag, use the ADD instruction with a second operand of 1.

Operation

DEST ← DEST + 1;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|* |  |  |* |* |* |* |  |

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, and PF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the operand is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

INS/INSB/INSW/INSD-Input from Port to String

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------|
|6C        |INS r/m8,DX         | |X|X|X|X|X|Input byte from port DX into      |
|          |                    | | | | | | |ES:[(E)DI]                        |
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------|
|6D        |INS r/m16,DX        | |X|X|X|X|X|Input word from port DX into      |
|          |                    | | | | | | |ES:[(E)DI]                        |
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------|
|6D        |INS r/m32,DX        | | | |X|X|X|Input dword from port DX into     |
|          |                    | | | | | | |ES:[(E)DI]                        |
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------|
|6C        |INSB                | |X|X|X|X|X|Input byte from port DX into      |
|          |                    | | | | | | |ES:[(E)DI]                        |
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------|
|6D        |INSW                | |X|X|X|X|X|Input word from port DX into      |
|          |                    | | | | | | |ES:[(E)DI]                        |
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------|
|6D        |INSD                | | | |X|X|X|Input dword from port DX into     |
|          |                    | | | | | | |ES:[(E)DI]                        |

Description

The INS instruction transfers data from the input port numbered by the DX register to the memory byte or word at ES:dest-index. The memory operand must be addressable from the ES register; no segment override is possible. The destination register is the DI register if the address-size attribute of the instruction is 16-bits, or the EDI register if the address-size attribute is 32-bits. The INS instruction does not allow the specification of the port number as an immediate value. The port must be addressed through the DX register value. Load the correct value into the DX register before running the INS instruction. The destination address is determined by the contents of the destination index register. Load the correct index into the destination index register before running the INS instruction. After the transfer is made, the DI or EDI register advances automatically. If the DF flag is 0 (a CLD instruction was run), the DI or EDI register increments; if the DF flag is 1 (an STD instruction was run), the DI or EDI register decrements. The DI register increments or decrements by 1 if a byte is input, by 2 if a word is input, or by 4 if a doubleword is input. The INSB, INSW and INSD instructions are synonyms of the byte, word, and doubleword INS instructions. The INS instruction can be preceded by the REP prefix for block input of CX bytes or words. Refer to the REP instruction for details of this operation.

Operation

IF AddressSize = 16 
THEN use DI for dest-index;
ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *)
 use EDI for dest-index;
FI;
IF (PE = 1) AND ((VM = 1) OR (CPL>IOPL))
THEN (* Virtual 8086 mode, or protected mode with CPL>IOPL *)
 IF NOT I-O-Permission (SRC, width(SRC))
 THEN #GP(0);
 FI;
FI;
IF byte type of instruction 
THEN 
 ES:[dest-index] ← [DX]; (* Reads byte at DX from I/O address space *)
 IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 1 ELSE IncDec ← -1; FI;
FI;
IF OperandSize = 16 
THEN 
 ES:[dest-index] ← [DX]; (* Reads byte at DX from I/O address space *)
 IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 2 ELSE IncDec ← -2; FI;
FI;
IF OperandSize = 32 
THEN 
 ES:[dest-index] ← [DX]; (* Reads dword at DX from I/O address space *)
 IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 4 ELSE IncDec ← -4; FI; FI;
dest-index ← dest-index + IncDec;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is numerically greater than the I/O privilege level and any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in TSS equals 1; #GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the ES, segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault if any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in TSS equals 1; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

INT/INTO-Call to Interrupt Procedure

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
CC	INT 3	X	X	X	X	X	X	Interrupt 3; Trap to debugger
CC	INT 3			X	X	X	X	Interrupt 3; Protected Mode, same privilege
CC	INT 3			X	X	X	X	Interrupt 3; Protected Mode, more privilege
CC	INT 3				X	X	X	Interrupt 3; from V86 mode to PL 0
CC	INT 3			X	X	X	X	Interrupt 3; Protected Mode, via task gate
CC ib	INT imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Interrupt numbered by immediate byte
CD ib	INT imm8			X	X	X	X	Interrupt imm8; Protected Mode, same privilege
CD ib	INT imm8			X	X	X	X	Interrupt imm8; Protected Mode, more privilege
CD ib	INT imm8				X	X	X	Interrupt imm8; from V86 mode to PL 0
CD ib	INT imm8			X	X	X	X	Interrupt imm8; Protected Mode, via task gate
CE	INTO	X	X	X	X	X	X	Interrupt 4 if Overflow flag is 1
CE	INTO			X	X	X	X	Interrupt 4 if Overflow flag is 1; Protected Mode, same privilege
CE	INTO			X	X	X	X	Interrupt 4 if Overflow flag is 1; Protected Mode, more privilege
CE	INTO				X	X	X	Interrupt 4 if Overflow flag is 1; from V86 mode to PL 0
CE	INTO			X	X	X	X	Interrupt 4 if Overflow flag is 1; Protected Mode, via task gate

Description

The INT n instruction generates a call to an interrupt handler. The immediate operand, from 0 to 255, gives the index number into the Interrupt Descriptor Table (IDT) of the interrupt routine to be called. In protected mode, the IDT consists of an array of eight-byte descriptors; the descriptor for the interrupt invoked must indicate an interrupt, trap, or task gate. In real-address mode, the IDT is an array of four byte-long pointers. In protected and real-address modes, the base linear address of the IDT is defined by the contents of the IDTR. The initial value of IDTR is zero upon reset into real-address mode. When the processor is running in virtual-8086 mode (VM=1), the IOPL determines whether the INT n causes a general protection exception (IOPL<3) or runs a protected mode interrupt to privilege level 0. The interrupt gate's DPL must be set to three and the target CPL of the interrupt service routine must be zero to run the protected mode interrupt to privilege level 0. The INTO conditional software instruction is identical to the INT n interrupt instruction except that the interrupt number is implicitly 4, and the interrupt is made only if the overflow flag is set. The first 32 interrupts are reserved by Intel for system use. Some of these interrupts are used for internally generated exceptions. The INT n instruction generally behaves like a far call except that the flags register is pushed onto the stack before the return address. Interrupt procedures return via the IRET instruction, which pops the flags and return address from the stack. In Real Address Mode, the INT n instruction pushes the flags, the CS register, and the return IP onto the stack, in that order, then jumps to the long pointer indexed by the interrupt number.

Operation

Note: The following operational description applies not only to the above instructions but also to external interrupts and exceptions.

IF PE = 0 
THEN CALL REAL-ADDRESS-MODE;
ELSE 
 CALL PROTECTED-MODE;
 IF task gate 
 THEN CALL TASK-GATE;
 ELSE 
 CALL TRAP-OR-INT-GATE; (* PE=1, int/trap gate *)
 IF code segment is non-conforming AND DPL < CPL 
 THEN 
   IF VM=0
   THEN CALL INT-TO-INNER-PRIV; (*PE=1,int/trap gate,DPL<CPL,VM=0*)
   ELSE CALL INT-FROM-V86-MODE; (* PE=1, int/trap gate, DPL<CPL,
                 VM=1 *)
   FI;
   ELSE (* PE=1, int/trap gate, DPL ò CPL *)
     IF code segment is conforming OR code segment DPL = CPL 
   THEN CALL INT-TO-SAME-PRIV;
   ELSE #GP(CS selector + EXT); (* PE=1, int/trap gate, DPL>CPL *)
     FI;
     FI;
   FI;
FI;
END;

REAL-ADDRESS-MODE PROC 
 Push (FLAGS);
 IF ← 0; (* Clear interrupt flag *)
 TF ← 0; (* Clear trap flag *)
 Push(CS);
 Push(IP);
 (* No error codes are pushed *)
 CS ← IDT[Interrupt number * 4].selector;
 IP ← IDT[Interrupt number * 4].offset;
(* Start processing in real address mode *)
REAL-ADDRESS-MODE ENDPROC 

PROTECTED-MODE PROC 
 Interrupt vector must be within IDT table limits,
    else #GP(vector number * 8+2+EXT);
 Descriptor AR byte must indicate interrupt gate, trap gate, or task gate,
    else #GP(vector number * 8+2+EXT);
 IF software interrupt (* i.e. caused by INT n, INT 3, or INTO *)
 THEN 
   IF gate descriptor DPL<CPL
   THEN #GP(vector number * 8+2+EXT); (* PE=1, DPL<CPL, software interrupt *)
   FI;
 FI;
 Gate must be present, else #NP(vector number * 8+2+EXT);
PROTECTED-MODE ENDPROC 

TRAP-OR-INT-GATE PROC 
 Examine CS selector and descriptor given in the gate descriptor;
 Selector must be non-null, else #GP (EXT);
 Selector must be within its descriptor table limits 
   ELSE #GP(selector+EXT);
 Descriptor AR byte must indicate code segment 
   ELSE #GP(selector + EXT);
 Segment must be present, else #NP(selector+EXT);
TRAP-OR-INT-GATE ENDPROC 

INT-TO-INNER-PRIV PROC 
 (* PE=1, DPL<CPL and non-conforming, (* PE=1, int/trap gate, DPL<CPL, VM=0 *)
 Check selector and descriptor for new stack in current TSS;
   Selector must be non-null, else #TS(EXT);
   Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits 
     ELSE #TS(SS selector+EXT);
   Selector's RPL must equal DPL of code segment, else #TS(SS
     selector+EXT);
   Stack segment DPL must equal DPL of code segment, else #TS(SS
     selector+EXT);
   Descriptor must indicate writable data segment, else #TS(SS
     selector+EXT);
   Segment must be present, else #SS (SS selector+EXT);
 If 32-bit gate 
 THEN New stack must have room for 20 bytes else #SS(0)
 ELSE New stack must have room for 10 bytes else #SS(0)
 FI;
 Instruction pointer must be within CS segment boundaries else #GP(0);
 Load new SS and eSP value from TSS;
 If 32-bit gate 
   THEN CS:EIP ← selector:offset from gate;
 ELSE CS:IP ← selector:offset from gate;
 FI;
 Load CS descriptor into invisible portion of CS register;
 Load SS descriptor into invisible portion of SS register;
 IF 32-bit gate 
THEN 
   Push (long pointer to old stack) (* 3 words padded to 4 *);
   Push (EFLAGS);
   Push (long pointer to return location) (* 3 words padded to 4 *);
ELSE 
   Push (long pointer to old stack) (* 2 words *);
   Push (FLAGS);
   Push (long pointer to return location) (* 2 words *);
 FI;
 Set CPL to new code segment DPL;
 Set RPL of CS to CPL;
 IF interrupt gate THEN IF ← 0 (* interrupt flag to 0 (disable) *); FI;
 TF ← 0;
 NT ← 0;
INT-FROM-INNER-PRIV ENDPROC 

INT-FROM-V86-MODE PROC 
 Check selector and descriptor for new stack in current TSS;
 Selector must be non-null, else #TS(EXT);
 Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits 
   ELSE #TS(SS selector+EXT);
 Selector's RPL must equal DPL of code segment, else #TS(SS
   selector+EXT);
 Stack segment DPL must equal DPL of code segment, else #TS(SS
   selector+EXT);
 Descriptor must indicate writable data segment, else #TS(SS
   selector+EXT);
 Segment must be present, else #SS(SS selector+EXT);
 IF 32-bit gate 
   THEN New stack must have room for 20 bytes else #SS(0)
   ELSE New stack must have room for 10 bytes else #SS(0)
 FI;
 Instruction pointer must be within CS segment boundaries else #GP(0);
 IF IOPL < 3 
 THEN 
   #GP(0); (*V86 monitor trap: PE=1,int/trap gate, DPL<CPL, VM=1, IOPL<3*)
 ELSE (* IOPL=3 *)
   IF GATE'S_DPL = 3 
   THEN 
     IF TARGET'S_CPL <> 0 
     THEN #GP(0);
     ELSE 
       TempEFlags ← EFLAGS;
       VM ← 0;
       TF ← 0;
       IF service through Interrupt Gate 
           THEN IF ← 0;
       FI;
       TempSS ← SS;
       TempESP ← ESP;
       SS ← TSS.SS0; (* Change to level 0 stack segment *)
   ESP ← TSS.ESP0; (* Change to level 0 stack pointer *)
   Push(GS); (* padded to two words *)
       Push(FS); (* padded to two words *)
   Push(DS); (* padded to two words *)
   Push(ES); (* padded to two words *)
   GS ← 0; (* segment registers nullified - invalid in 
      protected mode *)
       FS ← 0;
   DS ← 0;
   ES ← 0;
   Push(TempSS); (* Padded to two words *)
   Push(TempESP);
   Push(TempEFlags);
   Push(CS); (* Padded to two words *)
   Push(EIP);
       CS:EIP ← selector:offset from interrupt gate;
       (* Starts processing of new routine in Protected Mode *)
     FI;
  ELSE (* GATE'S_DPL <> 3 *)
     #GP(0);
   FI;
 FI;
INT-FROM-V86-MODE ENDPROC

INT-TO-SAME-PRIV PROC
   (* PE=1, DPL=CPL or conforming segment *)
 IF 32-bit gate
 THEN Current stack limits must allow pushing 10 bytes, else #SS(0);
 ELSE Current stack limits must allow pushing 6 bytes, else #SS(0);
 FI;

IF interrupt was caused by exception with error code
THEN Stack limits must allow push to two more bytes;
ELSE #SS(0);
FI;
Instruction pointer must be in CS limit, else #GP(0);
IF 32-bit gate 
THEN 
 Push (EFLAGS);
 Push (long pointer to return location); (* 3 words padded to 4 *)
 CS:EIP ← selector:offset from gate;
ELSE (* 16-bit gate *)
 Push (FLAGS);
 Push (long pointer to return location); (* 2 words *)
 CS:IP ← selector:offset from gate;
FI;
Load CS descriptor into invisible portion of CS register;
 Set the RPL field of CS to CPL;
 Push (error code); (* if any *)
 IF interrupt gate THEN IF ← 0; FI;
 TF ← 0;
 NT ← 0;
INT-TO-SAME-PRIV ENDPROC 

TASK-GATE PROC (* PE=1, task gate *)
 Examine selector to TSS, given in task gate descriptor;
   Must specify global in the local/global bit, else #TS(TSS selector);
   Index must be within GDT limits, else #TS(TSS selector);
   AR byte must specify available TSS (bottom bits 00001);
     else #TS(TSS selector);
   TSS must be present, else #NP(TSS selector);
 SWITCH-TASKS with nesting to TSS;
 IF interrupt was caused by fault with error code 
 THEN 
   Stack limits must allow push of two more bytes, else #SS(0);
   Push error code onto stack;
 FI;
 Instruction pointer must be in CS limit, else #GP(0);
TASK-GATE ENDPROC 

Decision Table

The following decision table indicates which action in the lower portion of the table is taken given the conditions in the upper portion of the table. Each Y in the lower section of the decision table represents a procedure defined above in the Operation section for this instruction (except #GP(0)) and the number following the Y indicates the order in which the procedure is run.

PE	0	1	1	1	1	1	1	1
VM	-	-	-	-	-	0	1	1
IOPL	-	-	-	-	-	-	<3	=3
DPL/CPL RELATIONSHIP	-	DPL < CPL	-	DPL > CPL	DPL = CPL or C	DPL < CPL & NC	-	-
INTERRUPT TYPE	-	S/W	-	-	-	-	-	-
GATE TYPE	-	-	Task or Int	Trap or Int	Trap or Int	Trap or Int	Trap or Int	Trap or Int
REAL-ADDRESS-MODE	Y
PROTECTED-MODE		Y1	Y1	Y1	Y1	Y1	Y1	Y1
TRAP-OR-INT-GATE				Y2	Y2	Y2	Y2	Y2
INT-TO-INNER-PRIV						Y3
INT-TO-SAME-PRIV					Y3
INT-FROM-V86-MODE								Y3
TASK-GATE			Y2
#GP		Y2		Y3			Y3

Notes: - Don't Care Yx Yes, Action Taken, x = the order of processing Blank Action Not Taken

Flags Affected

OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
  |  |0 |  |  |  |  |  

None

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP, #NP, #SS, and #TS as indicated under "Operation" above.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

None; if the SP or ESP register is 1, 3, or 5 before running the INT or INTO instruction, the processor will shut down due to insufficient stack space.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault if IOPL is less than 3, for the INT n instruction only, to permit emulation; Interrupt 3 (0CCH) generates a breakpoint exception; the INTO instruction generates an overflow exception if the OF flag is set.

INVD-Invalidate Cache

Details Table

|Encoding |Instruction |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|---------+------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------
|0F 08    |INVD        | | | | |X|X|Invalidate entire cache

Description

The internal cache is invalidated, and a special-function bus cycle is issued which indicates that external caches should also be invalidated. Data held in write-back external caches is not instructed to be written back.

Operation

INVALIDATE INTERNAL CACHE
SIGNAL EXTERNAL CACHE TO INVALIDATE

Protected Mode Exceptions

The INVD instruction is a privileged instruction; #GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

#GP(0); the INVD instruction is a privileged instruction.

Notes

INVD should be used with care. It does not write back modified cache lines; therefore, it can cause the data cache to become inconsistent with other memories in the system. Unless there is a specific requirement or benefit to invalidate a cache without writing back the modified lines (i.e., testing or fault recovery where cache coherency with main memory is not a concern), software should use the WBINVD instruction. This instruction is implementation-dependent; its function may be implemented differently on future Intel processors. This instruction does not wait for the external cache to complete its invalidation before the processor proceeds. It is the responsibility of hardware to respond to the external cache invalidation indication. This instruction is not supported on Intel386 processors. See the Intel documentation for CPUID detection at runtime. See the WBINVD description to write back dirty data to memory. See the Intel documentation for information on disabling the cache.

INVLPG-Invalidate TLB Entry

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 01 /7	INVLPG m					X	X	Invalidate TLB entry

Description

The INVLPG instruction is used to ensure there are no invalid entries in the TLB, the cache used for page table entries. If the TLB contains a valid entry, which maps the address of the memory operand, all of the relevant TLB entries are marked invalid.

Operation

INVALIDATE RELEVANT TLB ENTRY(S)

Protected Mode Exceptions

The INVLPG instruction is a privileged instruction; #GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0. An invalid-opcode exception is generated when used with a register operand. Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions An invalid-opcode exception is generated when used with a register operand. #GP(0); the INVLPG instruction is a privileged instruction.

Notes

This instruction is not supported on Intel386 processors. See the Intel documentation for information on detecting the processor type at runtime. See the Intel documentation for information on disabling the cache.

IRET/IRETD-Interrupt Return

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
CF	IRET	X	X	X	X	X	X	Interrupt return (far return and pop flags)
CF	IRET			X	X	X	X	Interrupt return to lesser privilege
CF	IRET			X	X	X	X	Interrupt return, different task (NT=1)
CF	IRET				X	X	X	Interrupt return from Real or V86 mode
CF	IRETD				X	X	X	Interrupt return (far return and pop flags)
CF	IRETD				X	X	X	Interrupt return to lesser privilege
CF	IRETD				X	X	X	Interrupt return, different task (NT=1)

Description

In Real Address Mode, the IRET instruction pops the instruction pointer, the CS register, and the flags register from the stack and resumes the interrupted routine. In Protected Mode, the action of the IRET instruction depends on the setting of the nested task flag (NT) bit in the flag register. When the new flag image is popped from the stack, the IOPL bits in the flag register are changed only when CPL equals 0. If the NT flag is cleared, the IRET instruction returns from an interrupt procedure without a task switch. The code returned to must be equally or less privileged than the interrupt routine (as indicated by the RPL bits of the CS selector popped from the stack). If the destination code is less privileged, the IRET instruction also pops the stack pointer and SS from the stack. If the NT flag is set, the IRET instruction reverses the operation of a CALL or INT that caused a task switch. The updated state of the task running the IRET instruction is saved in its task state segment. If the task is reentered later, the code that follows the IRET instruction is run.

Operation

IF PE = 0 
 THEN GOTO REAL_ADDRESS_MODE:;
 ELSE GOTO PROTECTED_MODE;
FI;

REAL_ADDRESS_MODE;
 IF OperandSize = 32 (* Instruction = IRETD *)
 THEN EIP ← Pop ();
 ELSE (* Instruction = IRET *)
 IP ← Pop();
 FI;
 CS ← Pop ();
 IF OperandSize = 32 (* Instruction = IRETD *)
 THEN Pop(); EFLAGS ← Pop();
 ELSE (* Instruction = IRET *)
 FLAGS ← Pop();
 FI;
 END;

PROTECTED_MODE:
 IF VM = 1 (* Virtual mode:PE=1, VM=1 *)
 THEN GOTO STACK_RETURN_FROM_V86; (* PE=1, VM=1 *)
 ELSE 
 IF NT=1
 THEN GOTO TASK_RETURN; (* PE=1, VM=1, NT=1 *)
 ELSE 
   IF VM=1 in flags image on stack 
     THEN GOTO STACK_RETURN_TO_V86; (* PE=1, VM=1 in flags 
                    inage *)
     ELSE GOTO STACK_RETURN; (* PE=1, VM=0 in flags image *)
   FI;
 FI;
FI;

STACK_RETURN_FROM_V86:
 IF IOPL=3 (* Virtual mode: PE=1, VM=1, IOPL=3 *)
 THEN 
   IF OperandSize = 16 
      IP ← Pop();(* 16-bit pops *)
      CS ← Pop();
      FLAGS ←Pop();
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
      EIP ← Pop(); (* 32-bit pops *)
      CS ← Pop();
      EFLAGS ←Pop(); (*VM,IOPL,VIP,and VIF EFLAG bits are not modified by IRETD*)
   FI;
 ELSE #GP(0); (* trap to virtual-8086 monitor: PE=1, VM=1, IOPL<3 *)
 FI;
END;

STACK_RETURN_TO_V86: (* Interrupted procedure was in V86 mode:
PE=1, VM=1 in flags image *)
 IF top 36 bytes of stack not within limits 
 THEN #SS(0);
 FI;
 IF instruction pointer not within code segment limit  THEN #GP(0);
 FI;
 EFLAGS ← SS:[ESP + 8]; (* Sets VM in interrupted routine *)
 EIP ← Pop();
 CS ← Pop(); (* CS behaves as in 8086, due to VM=1 *)
 throwaway ← Pop(); (* pop away EFLAGS already read *)
 TempESP ← Pop();
 TempSS ← Pop();
 ES ← Pop(); (* pop 2 words; throw away high-order word *)
 DS ← Pop(); (* pop 2 words; throw away high-order word *)
 FS ← Pop(); (* pop 2 words; throw away high-order word *)
 GS ← Pop(); (* pop 2 words; throw away high-order word *)
  SS:ESP ← TempSS:TempESP;
 (* Resume processing in Virtual 8086 mode *)
 END;

TASK-RETURN: (* PE=1, VM=1, NT=1 *)
 Examine Back Link Selector in TSS addressed by the current task 
   register:
   Must specify global in the local/global bit, else #TS(new TSS selector);
   Index must be within GDT limits, else #TS(new TSS selector);
   AR byte must specify TSS, else #TS(new TSS selector);
   New TSS must be busy, else #TS(new TSS selector);
   TSS must be present, else #NP(new TSS selector);
 SWITCH-TASKS without nesting to TSS specified by back link selector;
 Mark the task just abandoned as NOT BUSY;
 Instruction pointer must be within code segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
 END;

STACK-RETURN: (* PE=1, VM=0 in flags image *)
 IF OperandSize=32
 THEN Third word on stack must be within stack limits, else #SS(0);
 ELSE Second word on stack must be within stack limits, else #SS(0);
 FI;
 Return CS selector RPL must be ò CPL, else #GP(Return selector);
 IF return selector RPL = CPL 
 THEN GOTO RETURN-SAME-LEVEL;
 ELSE GOTO RETURN-OTHER-LEVEL;
 FI;

RETURN-SAME-LEVEL: (* PE=1, VM=0 in flags image, RPL=CPL *)
 IF OperandSize=32
 THEN 
   Top 12 bytes on stack must be within limits, else #SS(0);
   Return CS selector (at eSP+4) must be non-null, else #GP(0);
 ELSE 
   Top 6 bytes on stack must be within limits, else #SS(0);
   Return CS selector (at eSP+2) must be non-null, else #GP(0);
 FI;
 Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits, else #GP
   (Return selector);
 AR byte must indicate code segment, else #GP(Return selector);
 IF non-conforming
 THEN code segment DPL must = CPL;
 ELSE #GP(Return selector); (* PE=1, VM=0 in flags image,
 RPL=CPL,non-conforming,DPL<> CPL *)
 FI;
 IF conforming 
   THEN IF DPL>CPL
     #GP(Return selector); (* PE=1, VM=0 in flags image,
     RPL=CPL,conforming,DPL>CPL *)
 Segment must be present, else #NP(Return selector);
 Instruction pointer must be within code segment boundaries, else #GP(0);
 FI;
 IF OperandSize=32 put comments here 
 THEN 
   Load CS:EIP from stack;
   Load CS-register with new code segment descriptor;
   Load EFLAGS with third doubleword from stack;
   Increment eSP by 12;
 ELSE 
   Load CS-register with new code segment descriptor;
   Load FLAGS with third word on stack;
   Increment eSP by 6;
 FI;
 END;

RETURN-OUTER-LEVEL:
IF OperandSize=32
 THEN Top 20 bytes on stack must be within limits, else #SS(0);
 ELSE Top 10 bytes on stack must be within limits, else #SS(0);
FI;
Examine return CS selector and associated descriptor:
 Selector must be non-null, ELSE #GP(0);
 Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits;
   ELSE #GP(Return selector);
 AR byte must indicate code segment, else #GP(Return selector);
IF non-conforming
 THEN code segment DPL must = CS selector RPL;
 ELSE #GP(Return selector);
 FI;
IF conforming 
 THEN code segment DPL must be > CPL;
 ELSE #GP(Return selector);
 FI;
 Segment must be present, else #NP(Return selector);
Examine return SS selector and associated descriptor:
 Selector must be non-null, else #GP(0);
 Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits 
   ELSE #GP(SS selector);
 Selector RPL must equal the RPL of the return CS selector 
   ELSE #GP(SS selector);
 AR byte must indicate a writable data segment, else #GP(SS selector);
 Stack segment DPL must equal the RPL of the return CS selector 
   ELSE #GP(SS selector);
 SS must be present, else #NP(SS selector);
Instruction pointer must be within code segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
 IF OperandSize=32
 THEN 
   Load CS:EIP from stack;
   Load EFLAGS with values at (eSP+8);
 ELSE 
   Load CS:IP from stack;
   Load FLAGS with values at (eSP+4);
 FI;
 Load SS:eSP from stack;
 Set CPL to the RPL of the return CS selector;
 Load the CS register with the CS descriptor;
 Load the SS register with the SS descriptor;
 FOR each of ES, FS, GS, and DS 
 DO;
   IF the current value of the register is not valid for the outer level;
   THEN zero the register and clear the valid flag;
   FI;
   To be valid, the register setting must satisfy the following properties:
     Selector index must be within descriptor table limits;
     AR byte must indicate data or readable code segment;
     IF segment is data or non-conforming code,
     THEN DPL must be > CPL, or DPL must be < RPL;
 OD;
 END:

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*	*	*	*	*	*	*	*

All flags are affected; the flags register is popped from stack.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP, #NP, or #SS, as indicated under "Operation" above; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand being popped lies beyond address 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault occurs if the I/O privilege level is less than 3, to permit emulation; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Jcc - Jump if Condition is Met

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
77 cb	JA rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if above (CF=0 and ZF=0)
73 cb	JAE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if above or equal (CF=0)
72 cb	JB rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if below (CF=1)
76 cb	JBE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if below or equal (CF=1 or ZF=1)
72 cb	JC rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if carry (CF=1)
E3 cb	JCXZ rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if CX register is 0
E3 cb	JECXZ rel8				X	X	X	Jump short if ECX register is 0
74 cb	JE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if equal (ZF=1)
74 cb	JG rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if zero (ZF=1)
7D cb	JGE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if greater or equal (SF=OF)
7C cb	JL rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if less (SF<>OF)
7E cb	JLE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if less or equal (ZF=1 and SF<>OF)
76 cb	JNA rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not above (CF=1 or ZF=1)
72 cb	JNAE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not above or equal (CF=1)
73 cb	JNB rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not below (CF=0)
77 cb	JNBE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not below or equal (CF=0 and ZF=0)
73 cb	JNC rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not carry (CF=0)
75 cb	JNE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not equal (ZF=0)
7E cb	JNG rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not greater (ZF=1 or SF<>OF)
7C cb	JNGE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not greater or equal (SF<>OF)
7D cb	JNL rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not less (SF=OF)
7F cb	JNLE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not less or equal (ZF=0 and SF=OF)
71 cb	JNO rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not overflow (OF=0)
7B cb	JNP rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not parity (PF=0)
79 cb	JNS rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not sign (SF=0)
75 cb	JNZ rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if not zero (ZF=0)
70 cb	JO rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if overflow (OF=1)
7A cb	JP rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if parity (PF=1)
7A cb	JPE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if parity even (PF=1)
7B cb	JPO rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if parity odd (PF=0)
78 cb	JS rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if sign (SF=1)
74 cb	JZ rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short if zero (ZF=1)
0F 87 cw/cd	JA rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if above (CF=0 and ZF=0)
0F 83 cw/cd	JAE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if above or equal (CF=0)
0F 82 cw/cd	JB rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if below (CF=1)
0F 86 cw/cd	JBE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if below or equal (CF=1 or ZF=1)
0F 82 cw/cd	JC rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if carry (CF=1)
0F 84 cw/cd	JE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if equal (ZF=1)
0F 8F cw/cd	JG rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if zero (ZF=1)
0F 8D cw/cd	JGE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if greater or equal (SF=OF)
0F 8C cw/cd	JL rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if less (SF<>OF)
0F 8E cw/cd	JLE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if less or equal (ZF=1 and SF<>OF)
0F 86 cw/cd	JNA rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not above (CF=1 or ZF=1)
0F 82 cw/cd	JNAE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not above or equal (CF=1)
0F 83 cw/cd	JNB rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not below (CF=0)
0F 87 cw/cd	JNBE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not below or equal (CF=0 and ZF=0)
0F 83 cw/cd	JNC rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not carry (CF=0)
0F 85 cw/cd	JNE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not equal (ZF=0)
0F 8E cw/cd	JNG rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not greater (ZF=1 or SF<>OF)
0F 8C cw/cd	JNGE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not greater or equal (SF<>OF)
0F 8D cw/cd	JNL rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not less (SF=OF)
0F 8F cw/cd	JNLE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not less or equal (ZF=0 and SF=OF)
0F 81 cw/cd	JNO rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not overflow (OF=0)
0F 8B cw/cd	JNP rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not parity (PF=0)
0F 89 cw/cd	JNS rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not sign (SF=0)
0F 85 cw/cd	JNZ rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if not zero (ZF=0)
0F 80 cw/cd	JO rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if overflow (OF=1)
0F 8A cw/cd	JP rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if parity (PF=1)
0F 8A cw/cd	JPE rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if parity even (PF=1)
0F 8B cw/cd	JPO rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if parity odd (PF=0)
0F 88 cw/cd	JS rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if sign (SF=1)
0F 84 cw/cd	JZ rel16/rel32				X	X	X	Jump near if zero (ZF=1)

Description

Conditional jumps (except the JCXZ instruction) test the flags that have been set by a previous instruction. The conditions for each mnemonic are given in parentheses after each description above. The terms "less" and "greater"; are used for comparisons of signed integers; "above" and "below" are used for unsigned integers. If the given condition is true, a jump is made to the location provided as the operand. Instruction coding is most efficient when the target for the conditional jump is in the current code segment and within -128 to +127 bytes of the next instruction's first byte. The jump can also target -32768 thru +32767 (segment size attribute 16) or -231 thru +231 - 1 (segment size attribute 32) relative to the next instruction's first byte. When the target for the conditional jump is in a different segment, use the opposite case of the jump instruction (i.e., the JE and JNE instructions), and then access the target with an unconditional far jump to the other segment. For example, you cannot code

   JZ FARLABEL 

You must instead code

   JNZ BEYOND 
   JMP FARLABEL 
BEYOND:

Because there can be several ways to interpret a particular state of the flags, ASM386 provides more than one mnemonic for most of the conditional jump opcodes. For example, if you compared two characters in AX and want to jump if they are equal, use the JE instructions; or, if you ANDed the AX register with a bit field mask and only want to jump if the result is 0, use the JZ instruction, a synonym for the JE instruction. The JCXZ instruction differs from other conditional jumps because it tests the contents of the CX or ECX register for 0, not the flags. The JCXZ instruction is useful at the beginning of a conditional loop that terminates with a conditional loop instruction (such as LOOPNE TARGET LABEL. The JCXZ instruction prevents entering the loop with the CX or ECX register equal to zero, which would cause the loop to run 64K or 23ý times instead of zero times.

Operation

IF condition 
THEN 
  EIP ← EIP + SignExtend(rel8/16/32);
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH;
  FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP(0) if the offset jumped to is beyond the limits of the code segment.

Notes

The JCXZ instruction takes longer to run than a two-instruction sequence, which compares the count register to zero and jumps if the count is zero. All branches are converted into 16-byte code fetches regardless of jump address or cacheability.

JMP - Jump

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
EB cb	JMP rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump short, displacement relative to next instruction
E9 cw	JMP rel16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump near, displacement relative to next instruction
FF /4	JMP r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump near indirect
EA cd	JMP ptr16:16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump intersegment, 4-byte immediate address
EA cd	JMP ptr16:16			X	X	X	X	Jump to call gate, same privilege
EA cd	JMP ptr16:16			X	X	X	X	Jump via task state segment
EA cd	JMP ptr16:16			X	X	X	X	Jump via task gate
FF /5	JMP m16:16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Jump intersegment, dword address at r/m word
FF /5	JMP m16:16			X	X	X	X	Jump to call gate, same privilege
FF /5	JMP m16:16			X	X	X	X	Jump via task state segment
FF /5	JMP m16:16			X	X	X	X	Jump via task gate
E9 cd	JMP rel32				X	X	X	Jump near, displacement relative to next instruction
FF /4	JMP r/m32				X	X	X	Jump near indirect
EA cp	JMP ptr16:32				X	X	X	Jump intersegment, 6-byte immediate address
EA cp	JMP ptr16:32				X	X	X	Jump to call gate, same privilege
EA cp	JMP ptr16:32				X	X	X	Jump via task state segment
EA cp	JMP ptr16:32				X	X	X	Jump via task gate
FF /5	JMP m16:32				X	X	X	Jump intersegment, fword address at r/m dword
FF /5	JMP m16:32				X	X	X	Jump to call gate, same privilege
FF /5	JMP m16:32				X	X	X	Jump via task state segment
FF /5	JMP m16:32				X	X	X	Jump via task gate

Description

The JMP instruction transfers control to a different point in the instruction stream without recording return information. The action of the various forms of the instruction are shown below. Jumps with destinations of type r/m16, r/m32, rel16,, and rel32 are near jumps and do not involve changing the segment register value. The JMP rel16 and JMP rel32 forms of the instruction add an offset to the address of the instruction following the JMP to determine the destination. The rel16 form is used when the instruction's operand-size attribute is 16- bits (segment size attribute 16 only); rel32 is used when the operand-size attribute is 32-bits (segment size attribute 32 only). The result is stored in the 32-bit EIP register. With rel16, the upper 16-bits of the EIP register are cleared, which results in an offset whose value does not exceed 16-bits. The JMP r/m16 and JMP r/m32 forms specify a register or memory location from which the absolute offset from the procedure is fetched. The offset fetched from r/m is 32-bits for an operand-size attribute of 32-bits (r/m32 ), or 16-bits for an operand-size attribute of 16-bits (r/m16). The JMP ptr16:16 and ptr16:32 forms of the instruction use a four-byte or six-byte operand as a long pointer to the destination. The JMP m16:16 and m16:32 forms fetch the long pointer from the memory location specified ( indirection). In Real Address Mode or Virtual 8086 Mode, the long pointer provides 16-bits for the CS register and 16 or 32-bits for the EIP register (depending on the operand-size attribute). In Protected Mode, both long pointer forms consult the Access Rights (AR) byte in the descriptor indexed by the selector part of the long pointer. Depending on the value of the AR byte, the jump will perform one of the following types of control transfers :

• A jump to a code segment at the same privilege level
• A task switch

For more information on protected mode control transfers, refer to the Intel documentation.

Operation

IF instruction = relative JMP  (* i.e. operand is rel8, rel16, or rel32 *)
THEN 
 EIP ← EIP + rel18/16/32;
 IF OperandSize = 16 
 THEN EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH;
 FI;
FI;

IF instruction = near indirect JMP 
 (* i.e. operand is r/m16 or r/m32 *)
THEN 
 IF OperandSize = 16 
 THEN 
   EIP ← [r/m16] AND 0000FFFFH;
 ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
   EIP ← [r/m32;
 FI;
FI;

IF (PE = 0 OR (PE = 1 AND VM = 1)) (* real mode or V86 mode *)
 AND instruction = far JMP 
 (* i.e., operand type is m16:16, m16:32, ptr16:16, ptr16:32 *)
THEN GOTO REAL-OR-V86-MODE;
 IF operand type = m16:16 or m16:32
 THEN (* indirect *)
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
    CS:IP ← [m16:16];
    EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH; (* clear upper 16 bits *)
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
    CS:EIP ← [m16:32];
  FI;
 FI;
 IF operand type = ptr16:16 or ptr16:32
 THEN 
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN 
     CS:IP ← ptr16:16;
     EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH; (* clear upper 16 bits *)
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     CS:EIP ← ptr16:32;
   FI;
 FI;
FI;

IF (PE = 1 AND VM = 0) (* Protected mode, not V86 mode *)
 AND instruction = far JMP 
THEN 
 IF operand type = m16:16 or m16:32
 THEN (* indirect *)
   check access of EA dword;
   #GP(0) or #SS(0) IF limit violation;
 FI;
 Destination selector is not null ELSE #GP(0)
 Destination selector index is within its descriptor table limits ELSE #GP(selector)
 Depending on AR byte of destination descriptor;
   GOTO CONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT;
   GOTO NONCONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT;
   GOTO CALL-GATE;
   GOTO TASK-GATE;
   GOTO TASK-STATE-SEGMENT;
 ELSE #GP(selector); (* illegal AR byte in descriptor *)
FI;

CONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT:
 Descriptor DPL must be ó CPL ELSE #GP(selector);
 Segment must be present ELSE #NP(selector);
 Instruction pointer must be within code-segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
 IF OperandSize = 32 
 THEN Load CS:EIP from destination pointer;
 ELSE Load CS:IP from destination pointer;
 FI;
 Load CS register with new segment descriptor;

NONCONFORMING-CODE-SEGMENT:
 RPL of destination selector must be ò CPL ELSE #GP(selector);
 Descriptor DPL must be = CPL ELSE #GP(selector);
 Segment must be present ELSE #NP(selector);
 Instruction pointer must be within code-segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
 IF OperandSize = 32 
 THEN Load CS:EIP from destination pointer;
 ELSE Load CS:IP from destination pointer;
 FI;
 Load CS register with new segment descriptor;
 Set RPL field of CS register to CPL;

CALL-GATE:
 Descriptor DPL must be ò CPL ELSE #GP(gate selector);
 Descriptor DPL must be ò gate selector RPL ELSE #GP(gate selector);
 Gate must be present ELSE #NP(gate selector);
 Examine selector to code segment given in call gate descriptor:
   Selector must not be null ELSE #GP(0);
   Selector must be within its descriptor table limits ELSE 
     #GP(CS selector);
   Descriptor AR byte must indicate code segment 
     ELSE #GP(CS selector);
   IF non-conforming
   THEN code-segment descriptor DPL must = CPL 
   ELSE #GP(CS selector);
   FI;
   IF conforming 
   THEN code-segment descriptor DPL must be ó CPL;
   ELSE #GP(CS selector);
   Code segment must be present ELSE #NP(CS selector);
   Instruction pointer must be within code-segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
   IF OperandSize = 32 
   THEN Load CS:EIP from call gate;
   ELSE Load CS:IP from call gate;
   FI;
 Load CS register with new code-segment descriptor;
 Set RPL of CS to CPL 

TASK-GATE:
 Gate descriptor DPL must be ò CPL ELSE #GP(gate selector);
 Gate descriptor DPL must be ò gate selector RPL ELSE #GP(gate selector);
 Task Gate must be present ELSE #NP(gate selector);
 Examine selector to TSS, given in Task Gate descriptor:
   Must specify global in the local/global bit ELSE #GP(TSS selector);
   Index must be within GDT limits ELSE #GP(TSS selector);
   Descriptor AR byte must specify available TSS (bottom bits 00001);
     ELSE #GP(TSS selector);
   Task State Segment must be present ELSE #NP(TSS selector);
 SWITCH-TASKS (without nesting) to TSS;
 Instruction pointer must be within code-segment limit ELSE #GP(0);

TASK-STATE-SEGMENT:
 TSS DPL must be ò CPL ELSE #GP(TSS selector);
 TSS DPL must be ò TSS selector RPL ELSE #GP(TSS selector);
 Descriptor AR byte must specify available TSS (bottom bits 00001)
   ELSE #GP(TSS selector);
 Task State Segment must be present ELSE #NP(TSS selector);
 SWITCH-TASKS (without nesting) to TSS;
 Instruction pointer must be within code-segment limit ELSE #GP(0);

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |

All if a task switch takes place; none if no task switch occurs.

Protected Mode Exceptions

Far jumps: #GP, #NP, #SS, and #TS, as indicated in the list above. Near direct jumps: #GP(0) if procedure location is beyond the code segment limits; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3. Near indirect jumps: #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments: #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #GP if the indirect offset obtained is beyond the code segment limits; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would be outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as under Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

All branches are converted into 16-byte code fetches regardless of jump address or cacheability.

LAHF - Load Flags into AH Register

Details Table

|Encoding |Instruction |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|---------+------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+------------------------------------
|9F       |LAHF        |X|X|X|X|X|X|AH ← flags (SF,ZF,xx,AF,xx,PF,xx,CF)

Description

The LAHF instruction transfers the low byte of the flags word to the AH register. The bits, from MSB to LSB, are sign, zero, indeterminate, auxiliary, carry, indeterminate, parity, indeterminate, and carry.

Operation

AH ← SF:ZF:xx:AF:xx:PF:xx:CF;

Related Information

LAR-Load Access Rights Byte

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 02 /r	LAR r16,r/m16			X	X	X	X	r16 ← r/m16 masked by FF00
0F 02 /r	LAR r32,r/m32				X	X	X	r32 ← r/m32 masked by 00F?FF00

Description

The LAR instruction stores a marked form of the second doubleword of the descriptor for the source selector if the selector is visible at the current privilege level (modified by the selector's RPL) and is a valid descriptor type within the descriptor limits. The destination register is loaded with the high-order doubleword of the descriptor masked by 00FxFF00, and the ZF flag is set. The x indicates that the four bits corresponding to the upper four bits of the limit are undefined in the value loaded by the LAR instruction. If the selector is invisible or of the wrong type, the ZF flag is cleared. If the 32-bit operand size is specified, the entire 32-bit value is loaded into the 32-bit destination register. If the 16-bit operand size is specified, the lower 16-bits of this value are stored in the 16-bit destination register. All code and data segment descriptors are valid for the LAR instruction. The valid special segment and gate descriptor types for the LAR instruction are given in the following table:

TYPE	NAME	VALID/INVALID
0	Invalid	Invalid
1	Available 16-bit TSS	Valid
2	LDT	Valid
3	Busy 16-bit TSS	Valid
4	16-bit call gate	Valid
5	16-bit/32-bit task gate	Valid
6	16-bit trap gate	Invalid
7	16-bit interrupt gate	Invalid
8	Invalid	Invalid
9	Available 32-bit TSS	Valid
A	Invalid	Invalid
B	Busy 32-bit TSS	Valid
C	32-bit call gate	Valid
D	Invalid	Invalid
E	32-bit trap gate	Invalid
F	32-bit interrupt gate	Invalid

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
				*

The ZF flag is set unless the selector is invisible or of the wrong type, in which case the ZF flag is cleared.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the LAR instruction is unrecognized in Real Address Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode.

LDS/LES/LFS/LGS/LSS-Load Full Pointer

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
C5 /r	LDS r16,m16:16	X	X	X	X	X	X	DS:r16 ← pointer from memory dword
C5 /r	LDS r32,m16:32				X	X	X	DS:r32 ← pointer from memory fword
C4 /r	LES r16,m16:16	X	X	X	X	X	X	ES:r16 ← pointer from memory dword
C4 /r	LES r32,m16:32				X	X	X	ES:r32 ← pointer from memory fword
0F B4 /r	LFS r16,m16:16				X	X	X	FS:r16 ← pointer from memory dword
0F B4 /r	LFS r32,m16:32				X	X	X	FS:r32 ← pointer from memory fword
0F B5 /r	LGS r16,m16:16				X	X	X	GS:r16 ← pointer from memory dword
0F B5 /r	LGS r32,m16:32				X	X	X	GS:r32 ← pointer from memory fword
0F B2 /r	LSS r16,m16:16				X	X	X	SS:r16 ← pointer from memory dword
0F B2 /r	LSS r32,m16:32				X	X	X	SS:r32 ← pointer from memory fword

Description

The LGS, LSS, LDS, LES, and LFS instructions read a full pointer from memory and store it in the selected segment register:register pair. The full pointer loads 16-bits into the segment register SS, DS, ES, FS, or GS. The other register loads 32-bits if the operand-size attribute is 32-bits, or loads 16-bits if the operand-size attribute is 16-bits. The other 16- or 32-bit register to be loaded is determined by the r16 or r32 register operand specified. When an assignment is made to one of the segment registers, the descriptor is also loaded into the segment register. The data for the register is obtained from the descriptor table entry for the selector given. A null selector (values 0000-0003) can be loaded into DS, ES, FS, or GS registers without causing a protection exception. (Any subsequent reference to a segment whose corresponding segment register is loaded with a null selector to address memory causes a #GP(0) exception. No memory reference to the segement occurs.) The following is a listing of the Protected Mode checks and actions taken in the loading of a segment register:

IF SS is loaded;
 IF selector is null THEN #GP(0); FI;
 Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits ELSE 
   #GP(selector);
 Selector's RPL must equal CPL ELSE #GP(selector);
 AR byte must indicate a writable data segment ELSE #GP(selector);
 DPL in the AR byte must equal CPL ELSE #GP(selector);
 Segment must be marked present ELSE #SS(selector);
 Load SS with selector;
 Load SS with descriptor;

IF DS, ES, FS, or GS is loaded with non-null selector:
 Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits ELSE 
   #GP(selector);
 AR byte must indicate data or readable code segment ELSE 
   #GP(selector);
 IF data or nonconforming code 
 THEN both the RPL and the CPL must be less than or equal to DPL in 
   AR byte;
 ELSE #GP(selector);
 Segment must be marked present ELSE #NP(selector);
Load segment register with selector and RPL bits;
Load segment register with descriptor;

IF DS, ES, FS or GS is loaded with a null selector:
 Load segment register with selector;
 Clear descriptor valid bit;

Operation

CASE instruction OF 
 LSS: Sreg is SS; (* Load SS register *)
 LDS: Sreg is DS; (* Load DS register *)
 LES: Sreg is ES; (* Load ES register *)
 LFS: Sreg is FS; (* Load FS register *)
 LGS: Sreg is DS; (* Load GS register *)
ESAC;
IF (OperandSize = 16)
THEN 
 r16 ← [Effective Address]; (* 16-bit transfer *)
 Sreg ← [Effective Address + 2]; (* 16-bit transfer *)
 (* In Protected Mode, load the descriptor into the segment register *)
ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
 r32 ← [Effective Address]; (* 32-bit transfer *)
 Sreg ← [Effective Address + 4]; (* 16-bit transfer *)
 (* In Protected Mode, load the descriptor into the segment register *)
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; the second operand must be a memory operand, not a register-if a register then #UD Fault; #GP(0) if a null selector is loaded into SS; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

The second operand must be a memory operand, not a register, Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

LEA-Load Effective Address

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|8D /r     |LEA r16,m           |X|X|X|X|X|X|r16 ← effective address for m
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|8D /r     |LEA r32,m           | | | |X|X|X|r32 ← effective address for m

Description

The LEA instruction calculates the effective address (offset part) and stores it in the specified register. The operand-size attribute of the instruction (represented by OperandSize in the algorithm under "Operation" above) is determined by the chosen register. The address-size attribute ( represented by AddressSize) is determined by the attribute of the code segment. (See Operand-Size and Address-Size Attributes.) The address-size and operand-size attributes affect the action performed by the LEA instruction, as follows:

|OPERAND |ADDRESS |ACTION PERFORMED
|SIZE    |SIZE    |                
|--------+--------+---------------------------------------
|  16    |  16    |16-bit effective address is calculated 
|        |        |and stored in requested 16-bit register
|        |        |destination.
|--------+--------+---------------------------------------
|  16    |  32    |32-bit effective address is calculated.
|        |        |The lower 16-bits of the address are   
|        |        |stored in the requested 16-bit register
|        |        |destination.
|--------+--------+---------------------------------------
|  32    |  16    |16-bit effective address is calculated.
|        |        |The 16-bit address is zero-extended and
|        |        |stored in the requested 32-bit register
|        |        |destination.
|--------+--------+---------------------------------------
|  32    |  32    |32-bit effective address is calculated 
|        |        |and stored in the requested 32-bit
|        |        |register destination.

Operation

IF OperandSize = 16 AND AddressSize = 16 
THEN r16 ← Addr(m);
ELSE 
  IF OperandSize = 16 AND AddressSize = 32 
  THEN 
    r16 ← Truncate_to_16bits(Addr(m));  (* 32-bit address *)
  ELSE 
    IF OperandSize = 32 AND AddressSize = 16 
    THEN 
      r32 ← Truncate_to_16bits(Addr(m)) and zero extend;
    ELSE 
      IF OperandSize = 32 AND AddressSize = 32 
      THEN  r32 ← Addr(m);
      FI;
    FI;
  FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

#UD if the second operand is a register.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6 if the second operand is a register.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode.

Notes

Different assemblers may use different algorithms based on the size attribute and symbolic reference of the second operand.

LEAVE-High Level Procedure Exit

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction  |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+-------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------
|C9        |LEAVE        | |X|X|X|X|X|Set SP to BP, then pop BP
|----------+-------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------
|C9        |LEAVE        | | | |X|X|X|Set ESP to EBP, then pop EBP

Description

The LEAVE instruction reverses the actions of the ENTER instruction. By copying the frame pointer to the stack pointer, the LEAVE instruction releases the stack space used by a procedure for its local variables. The old frame pointer is popped into the BP or EBP register, restoring the caller's frame. A subsequent RET nn instruction removes any arguments pushed onto the stack of the exiting procedure.

Operation

IF StackAddrSize = 16 
THEN 
  SP ← BP;
ELSE (* StackAddrSize = 32 *)
  ESP ← EBP;
FI;
IF OperandSize = 16 
THEN 
  BP ← Pop();
ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
  EBP ← Pop();
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

#SS(0) if the BP register does not point to a location within the limits of the current stack segment.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode.

LES-Load Full Pointer

See entry for LDS/LES/LFS/LGS/LSS.

LFS-Load Full Pointer

See entry for LDS/LES/LFS/LGS/LSS.

LGDT/LIDT-Load Global/Interrupt Descriptor Table Register

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|0F 01 /2  |LGDT m16&32         | | |X|X|X|X|GDTR ← memory fword (6 bytes)
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|0F 01 /3  |LIDT m16&32         | | |X|X|X|X|IDTR ← memory fword (6 bytes)

Description

The LGDT and LIDT instructions load a linear base address and limit value from a six-byte data operand in memory into the GDTR or IDTR, respectively. If a 16-bit operand is used with the LGDT or LIDT instruction, the register is loaded with a 16-bit limit and a 24-bit base, and the high-order eight bits of the six-byte data operand are not used. If a 32-bit operand is used , a 16-bit limit and a 32-bit base is loaded; the high-order eight bits of the six-byte operand are used as high-order base address bits. The SGDT and SIDT instructions always store into all 48 bits of the six- byte data operand. With the 16-bit processors, the upper eight bits are undefined after the SGDT or SIDT instruction is run. With the 32-bit processors, the upper right eight bits are written with the high-order eight address bits, for both a 16-bit operand and a 32-bit operand. If the LGDT or LIDT instruction is used with a 16-bit operand to load the register stored by the SGDT or SIDT instruction, the upper eight bits are stored as zeros. The LGDT and LIDT instructions appear in operating system software; they are not used in application programs. They are the only instructions that directly load a linear address (i.e., not a segment relative address) in Protected Mode.

Operation

IF instruction = LIDT 
THEN 
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN IDTR.Limit:Base ← m16:24 (* 24-bits of base loaded *)
  ELSE IDTR.Limit:Base ← m16:32
  FI;
ELSE (* instruction = LGDT *)
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN GDTR.Limit:Base ← m16:24 (* 24-bits of base loaded *)
  ELSE GDTR.Limit:Base ← m16:32;
  FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0; #UD if the source operand is a register; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH; Interrupt 6 if the source operand is a register.

Note: These instructions are valid in Real Address Mode to allow power-up initialization for Protected Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

LGS-Load Full Pointer

See entry for LDS/LES/LFS/LGS/LSS.

LLDT-Load Local Descriptor Table Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 00 /2	LLDT r/m16			X	X	X	X	LDTR ← r/m16 selector

Description

The LLDT instruction loads the Local Descriptor Table register (LDTR). The word operand (memory or register) to the LLDT instruction should contain a selector to the Global Descriptor Table (GDT). The GDT entry should be a Local Descriptor Table. If so, then the LDTR is loaded from the entry. The descriptor registers DS, ES, SS, FS, GS, and CS are not affected. The LDT field in the task state segment does not change. The selector operand can be 0; if so, the LDTR is marked invalid. All descriptor references (except by the LAR, VERR, VERW or LSL instructions) cause a #GP fault. The LLDT instruction is used in operating system software; it is not used in application programs.

Operation

LDTR ← SRC;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0; #GP(selector) if the selector operand does not point into the Global Descriptor Table, or if the entry in the GDT is not a Local Descriptor Table; #NP(selector) if the LDT descriptor is not present; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the LLDT instruction is not recognized in Real Address Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode (because the instruction is not recognized, it will not run or perform a memory reference).

Note

The operand-size attribute has no effect on this instruction.

LIDT - Load Interrupt Descriptor Table Register

See entry for LGDT/LIDT-Load Global Descriptor Table Register/Load Interrupt Descriptor Table Register.

LMSW - Load Machine Status Word

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 01 /6	LMSW r/m16			X	X	X	X	Load r/m16 into machine status word

Description

The LMSW instruction loads the machine status word (part of the CR0 register) from the source operand. This instruction can be used to switch to Protected Mode; if so, it must be followed by an intrasegment jump to flush the instruction queue. The LMSW instruction will not switch back to Real Address Mode. The LMSW instruction is used only in operating system software. It is not used in application programs.

Operation

MSW ← r/m16; 

(* 16 bits is stored in the machine status word *)

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Protected Mode.

Notes

The operand-size attribute has no effect on this instruction. This instruction is provided for compatibility with the Intel286 processor; programs for the Intel386, Intel486, and Pentium processors should use the MOV CR0, ... instruction instead. The LMSW instruction does not affect the PG, ET, or NE bits, and it cannot be used to clear the PE bit.

LOCK - Assert LOCK# Signal Prefix

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F0	LOCK	X	X	X	X	X	X	Assert LOCK# signal for next instruction

Description

The LOCK prefix causes the LOCK# signal of the processor to be asserted during processing of the instruction that follows it. In a multiprocessor environment, this signal can be used to ensure that the processor has exclusive use of any shared memory while LOCK# is asserted. The read-modify -write sequence typically used to implement test-and-set on the Pentium processor is the BTS instruction. The LOCK prefix functions only with the following instructions:

BTS, BTR, BTC	mem, reg/imm
XCHG	reg, mem
XCHG	mem, reg
ADD, OR, ADC, SBB, AND, SUB, XOR	mem, reg/imm
NOT, NEG, INC, DEC	mem
CMPXCHG, XADD

An undefined opcode trap will be generated if a LOCK prefix is used with any instruction not listed above. The XCHG instruction always asserts LOCK# regardless of the presence or absence of the LOCK prefix. The integrity of the LOCK prefix is not affected by the alignment of the memory field. Memory locking is observed for arbitrarily misaligned fields.

Protected Mode Exceptions

'#UD if the LOCK prefix is used with an instruction not listed in the "Description"; section above; other exceptions can be generated by the subsequent (locked) instruction.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6 if the LOCK prefix is used with an instruction not listed in the "Description" section above; exceptions can still be generated by the subsequent (locked) instruction.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

'#UD if the LOCK prefix is used with an instruction not listed in the "Description" section above; exceptions can still be generated by the subsequent (locked) instruction.

LODS/LODSB/LODSW/LODSD-Load String Operand

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
AC	LODS m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AL ← byte at [(E)SI]
AD	LODS m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AX ← word at [(E)SI]
AD	LODS m32				X	X	X	EAX ← dword at [(E)SI]
AC	LODSB	X	X	X	X	X	X	AL ← byte at DS:[(E)SI]
AD	LODSW	X	X	X	X	X	X	AX ← word at DS:[(E)SI]
AD	LODSD				X	X	X	EAX ← dword at DS:[(E)SI]

Description

The LODS instruction loads the AL, AX, or EAX register with the memory byte, word, or doubleword at the location pointed to by the source-index register. After the transfer is made, the source-index register is automatically advanced. If the DF flag is 0 (the CLD instruction was run), the source index increments; if the DF flag is 1 (the STD instruction was run), it decrements. The increment or decrement is 1 if a byte is loaded, 2 if a word is loaded, or 4 if a doubleword is loaded. If the address-size attribute for this instruction is 16-bits, the SI register is used for the source-index register; otherwise the address-size attribute is 32-bits, and the ESI register is used. The address of the source data is determined solely by the contents of the ESI or SI register. Load the correct index value into the SI register before running the LODS instruction. The LODSB, LODSW, and LODSD instructions are synonyms for the byte, word, and doubleword LODS instructions. The LODS instruction can be preceded by the REP prefix; however, the LODS instruction is used more typically within a LOOP construct, because further processing of the data moved into the EAX, AX, or AL register is usually necessary.

Operation

AddressSize = 16
THEN use SI for source-index
ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *)
 use ESI for source-index;
FI;
IF byte type of instruction
THEN
 AL ←[source-index]; (* byte load *)
 IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 1 ELSE IncDec ← -1; FI;
ELSE 
 IF OperandSize = 16 
 THEN
   AX ← [source-index]; (* word load *)
   IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 2 ELSE IncDec ← -2; FI;
 ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
   FAX ← [source-index]; (* dword load *)
   IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 4 ELSE IncDec ← -4; FI;
 FI;
FI;
source-index ← source-index + IncDec

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

LOOP/LOOPcond-Loop Control with CX Counter

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
E2 cb	LOOP rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	DEC (E)CX; jump if (E)CX <> 0
E2 cb	LOOPW rel8				X	X	X	DEC CX; jump if CX <> 0
E2 cb	LOOPD rel8				X	X	X	DEC ECX; jump if ECX <> 0
E1 cb	LOOPE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	DEC (E)CX, jump if (E)CX <> 0 and ZF=1
E1 cb	LOOPEW rel8				X	X	X	DEC CX, jump if CX <> 0 and ZF=1
E1 cb	LOOPED rel8				X	X	X	DEC ECX; jump if ECX <> 0 and ZF=1
E1 cb	LOOPZ rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	DEC (E)CX; jump if (E)CX <> 0 and ZF=1
E1 cb	LOOPZW rel8				X	X	X	DEC CX; jump if CX <> 0 and ZF=1
E1 cb	LOOPZD rel8				X	X	X	DEC ECX; jump if ECX <> 0 and ZF=1
E0 cb	LOOPNE rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	DEC (E)CX; jump if (E)CX <> 0 and ZF=0
E0 cb	LOOPNEW rel8				X	X	X	DEC CX; jump if CX <> 0 and ZF=0
E0 cb	LOOPNED rel8				X	X	X	DEC ECX; jump if ECX <> 0 and ZF=0
E0 cb	LOOPNZ rel8	X	X	X	X	X	X	DEC (E)CX; jump if (E)CX <> 0 and ZF=0
E0 cb	LOOPNZW rel8				X	X	X	DEC CX; jump if CX <> 0 and ZF=0
E0 cb	LOOPNZD rel8				X	X	X	DEC ECX; jump if ECX <> 0 and ZF=0

Description

The LOOP instruction decrements the count register without changing any of the flags. Conditions are then checked for the form of the LOOP instruction being used. If the conditions are met, a short jump is made to the label given by the operand to the LOOP instruction. If the address-size attribute is 16-bits, the CX register is used as the count register; otherwise the ECX register is used. The operand of the LOOP instruction must be in the range from 128 (decimal) bytes before the instruction to 127 bytes ahead of the instruction. The LOOP instructions provide iteration control and combine loop index management with conditional branching. Use the LOOP instruction by loading an unsigned iteration count into the count register, then code the LOOP instruction at the end of a series of instructions to be iterated. The destination of the LOOP instruction is a label that points to the beginning of the iteration.

Operation

IF AddressSize = 16 THEN CountReg is CX ELSE CountReg is ECX; FI;
CountReg ← CountReg - 1;

IF instruction<> LOOP 
THEN 
   IF (instruction = LOOPE) OR (instruction = LOOPZ)
   THEN BranchCond ← (ZF = 1) AND (CountReg <> 0);
   FI;
   IF (instruction = LOOPNE) OR (instruction = LOOPNZ)
   THEN BranchCond ← (ZF = 0) AND (CountReg <> 0);
   FI;
FI;

IF BranchCond 
THEN 
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN
     IP ← IP + SignExtend(rel8);
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     EIP ← EIP + SignExtend(rel8);
   FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the offset jumped to is beyond the limits of the current code segment.

Notes

The unconditional LOOP instruction takes longer to run than a two- instruction sequence, which decrements the counter register and jumps if the count does not equal zero. All branches are converted into 16-byte code fetches regardless of jump address or cacheability.

LSL - Load Segment Limit

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 03 /r	LSL r16,r/m16			X	X	X	X	r16 ← byte granular segment limit for selector r/m16
0F 03 /r	LSL r32,r/m32				X	X	X	r32 ← byte granular segment limit for selector r/m32
0F 03 /r	LSL r16,r/m16			X	X	X	X	r16 ← page granular segment limit for selector r/m16
0F 03 /r	LSL r32,r/m32				X	X	X	r32 ← page granular segment limit for selector r/m32

Description

The LSL instruction loads a register with an unscrambled segment limit, and sets the ZF flag, provided that the source selector is visible at the current privilege level and RPL, within the descriptor table, and that the descriptor is a type accepted by the LSL instruction. Otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared, and the destination register is unchanged. The segment limit is loaded as a byte granular value. If the descriptor has a page granular segment limit, the LSL instruction will translate it to a byte limit before loading it in the destination register (shift left 12 the 20- bit "raw" limit from descriptor, then OR with 00000FFFH). The 32-bit forms of the LSL instruction store the 32-bit byte granular limit in the 32-bit destination register. For 16-bit operand sizes, the limit is computed to form a valid 32-bit limit. However, the upper 16 bits are chopped and only the low-order 16 bits are loaded into the destination operand. Code and data segment descriptors are valid for the LSL instruction. The valid special segment and gate descriptor types for the LSL instruction are given in the following table:

TYPE	NAME	VALID/INVALID
0	Invalid	Invalid
1	Available 16-bit TSS	Valid
2	LDT	Valid
3	Busy 16-bit TSS	Valid
4	16-bit call gate	Invalid
5	16-bit/32-bit task gate	Invalid
6	16-bit trap gate	Invalid
7	16-bit interrupt gate	Invalid
8	Invalid	Invalid
9	Available 32-bit TSS	Valid
A	Invalid	Invalid
B	Busy 32-bit TSS	Valid
C	32-bit call gate	Invalid
D	Invalid	Invalid
E	32-bit trap gate	Invalid
F	32-bit interrupt gate	Invalid

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|  |  |  |  |* |  |  |

The ZF flag is set unless the selector is invisible or of the wrong type, in which case the ZF flag is cleared.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments: #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the LSL instruction is not recognized in Real Address Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode (because the instruction is not recognized, it will not run or perform a memory reference).

LSS-Load Full Pointer

See entry for LDS/LES/LFS/LGS/LSS.

LTR-Load Task Register

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------------------
|0F 00 /3  |LTR r/m16           | | |X|X|X|X|Load EA word into task register

Description

The LTR instruction loads the task register with a selector from the source register or memory location specified by the operand. The loaded TSS is marked busy. A task switch does not occur. The LTR instruction is used only in operating system software; it is not used in application programs.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0; #GP(selector) if the object named by the source selector is not a TSS or is already busy; #NP(selector) if the TSS is marked "not present;" #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the LTR instruction is not recognized in Real Address Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode.

Notes

The operand-size attribute has no effect on this instruction.

MOV - Move Data

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
88 /r	MOV r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move byte register to r/m byte
89 /r	MOV r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move word register to r/m word
89 /r	MOV r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Move dword register to r/m dword
8A /r	MOV r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move r/m byte to byte register
8B /r	MOV r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move r/m word to word register
8B /r	MOV r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Move r/m dword to dword register
8C /r	MOV r/m16,Sreg	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move segment register to r/m word
8E /r	MOV Sreg,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move r/m word to segment register
A0	MOV AL,moffs8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move byte at (seg:offset) to AL
A1	MOV AX,moffs16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move word at (seg:offset) to AX
A1	MOV EAX,moffs32				X	X	X	Move dword at (seg:offset) to EAX
A2	MOV moffs8,AL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move AL to (seg:offset)
A3	MOV moffs16,AX	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move AX to (seg:offset)
A3	MOV moffs32,EAX				X	X	X	Move EAX to (seg:offset)
B0+rb	MOV r8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move immediate byte to byte register
B8+rw	MOV r16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move immediate word to word register
B8+rd	MOV r32,imm32				X	X	X	Move immediate dword to dword register
C6 /0	MOV r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move immediate byte to r/m byte
C7 /0	MOV r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move immediate word to r/m word
C7 /0	MOV r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	Move immediate dword to r/m dword

Description

The MOV instruction copies the second operand to the first operand. If the destination operand is a segment register (DS, ES, SS, etc.), then data from a descriptor is also loaded into the shadow portion of the register. The data for the register is obtained from the descriptor table entry for the selector given. A null selector (values 0000-0003) can be loaded into the DS, ES, FS, and GS registers without causing an exception; however, use of these registers causes a #GP(0) exception, and no memory reference occurs. A MOV into SS instruction inhibits all interrupts until after the processing of the next instruction (which should be a MOV into ESP instruction). Loading a segment register under Protected Mode results in special checks and actions, as described in the following listing:

IF SS is loaded;
THEN 
   IF selector is null THEN #GP(0);
   Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits else #GP(selector);
   Selector's RPL must equal CPL else #GP(selector);
   AR byte must indicate a writable data segment else #GP(selector);
   DPL in the AR byte must equal CPL else #GP(selector);
   Segment must be marked present else #SS(selector);
   Load SS with selector;
   Load SS with descriptor.
FI;
IF DS, ES, FS or GS is loaded with non-null selector;
THEN 
   Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits 
      else #GP(selector);
   AR byte must indicate data or readable code segment else #GP(selector);
   IF data or nonconforming code segment 
   THEN both the RPL and the CPL must be less than or equal to DPL in AR byte;
   ELSE #GP(selector);
   FI;
   Segment must be marked present else #NP(selector);
   Load segment register with selector;
   Load segment register with descriptor;
FI;
IF DS, ES, FS or GS is loaded with a null selector;
THEN 
   Load segment register with selector;
   Clear descriptor valid bit;
FI;

Operation

DEST ← SRC;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP, #SS, and #NP if a segment register is being loaded; otherwise, #GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

MOV - Move to/from Control Registers

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 22 /r	MOV CR0,r32				X	X	X	Move r32 to control register 0
0F 22 /r	MOV CR2,r32				X	X	X	Move r32 to control register 2
0F 22 /r	MOV CR3,r32				X	X	X	Move r32 to control register 3
0F 22 /r	MOV CR4,r32						X	Move r32 to control register 4
0F 20 /r	MOV r32,CR0				X	X	X	Move control register 0 to r32
0F 20 /r	MOV r32,CR2				X	X	X	Move control register 2 to r32
0F 20 /r	MOV r32,CR3				X	X	X	Move control register 3 to r32
0F 20 /r	MOV r32,CR4						X	Move control register 4 to r32

Description

The above forms of the MOV instruction store or load CR0, CR2, CR3, and CR4 to or from a general purpose register. Thirty-two bit operands are always used with these instructions, regardless of the operand-size attribute. Operation

DEST ← SRC;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
?			?	?	?	?	?

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0. #GP(0) if an attempt is made to write a 1 to any reserved bits of CR4.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if an attempt is made to write a 1 to any reserved bits of CR4.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if instruction processing is attempted.

Notes

The reg field within the ModR/M byte specifies which of the special registers in each category is involved. The two bits in the mod field are always 11. The r/m field specifies the general register involved. Always set undefined or reserved bits to the value previously read.

MOV-Move to/from Debug Registers

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 21 /r	MOV r32,DR0-3				X	X	X	Move debug register (0,1,2, or 3) to r32
0F 21 /r	MOV r32,DR4/DR5						X	Move debug register (4 or 5) to r32
0F 21 /r	MOV r32,DR6/DR7				X	X	X	Move debug register (6 or 7) to r32
0F 23 /r	MOV DR0-DR3,r32				X	X	X	Move r32 to debug register (0,1,2, or 3)
0F 23 /r	MOV DR4/DR5,r32						X	Move r32 to debug register (4 or 5)
0F 23 /r	MOV DR6/DR7,r32				X	X	X	Move r32 to debug register (6 or 7)

Description

The above forms of the MOV instruction store or load the DR0, DR1, DR2, DR3 , DR6 and DR7 debug resisters to or from a general purpose register. Thirty-two bit operands are always used with these instructions, regardless of the operand-size attribute. When the DE (Debug Extension) bit in CR4 is clear, MOV instructions using debug registers operate in a manner that is compatible with Intel386 and Intel486 CPUs. References to DR4 and DR5 refer to DR6 and DR7, respectively. When the DE bit in CR4 is set, attempts to run MOV instructions using DR4 and DR5 result in an Undefined Opcode (#UD) exception.

Operation

IF ((DE = 1) and (SRC or DEST = DR4 or DR5))
THEN 
  #UD;
ELSE 
  DEST ← SRC;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
?			?	?	?	?	?

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0. #UD if the DE (Debug Extensions) bit of CR4 is set and a MOV instruction is run using DR4 or DR5.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if an attempt is made to write a 1 to any reserved bits of CR4. #UD if the DE (Debug Extensions) bit of CR4 is set and a MOV instruction is run using DR4 or DR5.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if instruction processing is attempted.

Notes

The instructions must be run at privilege level 0 or in real-address mode; otherwise, a protection exception will be raised. The reg field within the ModR/M byte specifies which of the special registers in each category is involved. The two bits in the mod field are always 11. The r/m field specifies the general register involved. Always set undefined or reserved bits to the value previously read.

MOV-Move to/from Test Registers

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 24 /r	MOV r32,TR3					X		Move test register (3) to r32
0F 24 /r	MOV r32,TR4/TR5				X			Move test register (4 or 5) to r32
0F 24 /r	MOV r32,TR6/TR7				X	X		Move test register (6 or 7) to r32
0F 26 /r	MOV TR3,r32					X		Move r32 to test register (3)
0F 26 /r	MOV TR4/TR5,r32					X		Move r32 to test register (4 or 5)
0F 26 /r	MOV TR6/TR7,r32				X	X		Move r32 to test register (6 or 7)

Description

The above forms of the MOV instruction store or load TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, and TR7 to or from a general purpose register. Thirty-two bit operands are always used with these instructions, regardless of the operand-size attribute.

Operation

DEST ← SRC;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|? |  |  |? |? |? |? |?

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0. #GP(0) if an attempt is made to write a 1 to any reserved bits of CR4.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if an attempt is made to write a 1 to any reserved bits of CR4.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if instruction processing is attempted.

Notes

The instructions must be run at privilege level 0 or in real-address mode; otherwise, a protection exception will be raised. The reg field within the ModR/M byte specifies which of the special registers in each category is involved. The two bits in the mod field are always 11. The r/m field specifies the general register involved. Always set undefined or reserved bits to the value previously read.

MOVS/MOVSB/MOVSW/MOVSD - Move Data from String to String

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
A4	MOVS m8,m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move byte [(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
A5	MOVS m16,m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move word [(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
A5	MOVS m32,m32				X	X	X	Move dword [(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
A4	MOVSB	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move byte DS:[(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
A5	MOVSW	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move word DS:[(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
A5	MOVSD				X	X	X	Move dword DS:[(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]

Description

The MOVS instruction copies the byte or word at [(E)SI] to the byte or word at ES:[(E)DI]. The destination operand must be addressable from the ES register; no segment override is possible for the destination. A segment override can be used for the source operand; the default is the DS register. The addresses of the source and destination are determined solely by the contents of the (E)SI and (E)DI registers. Load the correct index values into the (E)SI and (E)DI registers before running the MOVS instruction. The MOVSB, MOVSW, and MOVSD instructions are synonyms for the byte, word, and doubleword MOVS instructions. After the data is moved, both the (E)SI and (E)DI registers are advanced automatically. If the DF flag is 0 (the CLD instruction was run), the registers are incremented; if the DF flag is 1 (the STD instruction was run ), the registers are decremented. The registers are incremented or decremented by 1 if a byte was moved, 2 if a word was moved, or 4 if a doubleword was moved. The MOVS instruction can be preceded by the REP prefix for block movement of ECX bytes or words. Refer to the REP instruction for details of this operation.

Operation

IF (instruction = MOVSD) OR (instruction has doubleword operands)
THEN OperandSize ← 32;
ELSE OperandSize ← 16;
IF AddressSize = 16 
THEN use SI for source-index and DI for destination-index;
ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *)
  use ESI for source-index and EDI for destination-index;
FI;
IF byte type of instruction 
THEN 
  [destination-index] ← [source-index]; (* byte assignment *)
  IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 1 ELSE IncDec ← -1; FI;
ELSE 
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
     [destination-index] ← [source-index]; (* word assignment *)
     IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 2 ELSE IncDec ← -2; FI;
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     [destination-index] ← [source-index]; (* doubleword assignment *)
     IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 4 ELSE IncDec ← -4; FI;
  FI;
FI;
source-index ← source-index + IncDec;
destination-index ← destination-index + IncDec;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

MOVSX - Move with Sign-Extend

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F BE /r	MOVSX r16,r/m8				X	X	X	r16 ← sign-extended r/m byte
0F BE /r	MOVSX r32,r/m8				X	X	X	r32 ← sign-extended r/m byte
0F BF /r	MOVSX r32,r/m16				X	X	X	r32 ← sign-extended r/m word

Description

The MOVSX instruction reads the contents of the effective address or register as a byte or a word, sign-extends the value to the operand-size attribute of the instruction (16 or 32 bits), and stores the result in the destination register.

Operation

DEST ← SignExtend(SRC);

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

MOVZX - Move with Zero-Extend

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F B6 /r	MOVZX r16,r/m8				X	X	X	r16 ← zero-extended r/m byte
0F B6 /r	MOVZX r32,r/m8				X	X	X	r32 ← zero-extended r/m byte
0F B7 /r	MOVZX r32,r/m16				X	X	X	r32 ← zero-extended r/m word

Description

The MOVZX instruction reads the contents of the effective address or register as a byte or a word, zero extends the value to the operand-size attribute of the instruction (16 or 32 bits), and stores the result in the destination register.

Operation

DEST ←ZeroExtend(SRC);

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same Exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

MUL - Unsigned Multiplication of AL, AX, or EAX

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F6 /r	MUL r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Unsigned multiply (AX ← AL * r/m byte)
F7 /4	MUL r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Unsigned multiply (DX:AX ← AX * r/m word)
F7 /4	MUL r/m32				X	X	X	Unsigned multiply (EDX:EAX ← EAX * r/m dword)

Description

The MUL instruction performs unsigned multiplication. Its actions depend on the size of its operand, as follows:

• A byte operand is multiplied by the AL value; the result is left in the AX register. The CF and OF flags are cleared if the AH value is 0; otherwise, they are set.
• A word operand is multiplied by the AX value; the result is left in the DX :AX register pair. The DX register contains the high-order 16-bits of the product. The CF and OF flags are cleared if the DX value is 0; otherwise, they are set.
• A doubleword operand is multiplied by the EAX value and the result is left in the EDX:EAX register. The EDX register contains the high-order 32-bits of the product. The CF and OF flags are cleared if the EDX value is 0; otherwise, they are set.

Operation

IF byte-size operation 
THEN AX ← AL * r/m8
ELSE (* word or doubleword operation *)
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN DX:AX ← AX * r/m16
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
      EDX:EAX ← EAX * r/m32
   FI;
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|* |  |  |? |? |? |? |*

The OF and CF flags are cleared if the upper half of the result is 0; otherwise they are set; the SF, ZF, AF, and PF flags are undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

NEG-Two's Complement Negation

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F6 /3	NEG r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Two's complement negate r/m byte
F7 /3	NEG r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Two's complement negate r/m word
F7 /3	NEG r/m32				X	X	X	Two's complement negate r/m dword

Description

The NEG instruction replaces the value of a register or memory operand with its two's complement. The operand is subtracted from zero, and the result is placed in the operand. The CF flag is set, unless the operand is zero, in which case the CF flag is cleared.

Operation

IF r/m = 0 THEN CF ← 0 ELSE CF ← 1; FI;
r/m ← - r/m

Flags Affected

OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
* |  |  |* |* |* |* |*

The CF flag is set unless the operand is zero, in which case the CF flag is cleared; the OF, SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

NOP - No Operation

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
90	NOP	X	X	X	X	X	X	No operation

Description

The NOP instruction performs no operation. The NOP instruction is a one- byte instruction that takes up space but affects none of the machine context except the (E)IP register. The NOP instruction is an alias mnemonic for the XCHG (E)AX, (E)AX instruction.

NOT - One's Complement Negation

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F6 /2	NOT r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Reverse each bit of r/m byte
F7 /2	NOT r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Reverse each bit of r/m word
F7 /2	NOT r/m32				X	X	X	Reverse each bit of r/m dword

Description

The NOT instruction inverts the operand; every 1 becomes a 0, and vice versa.

Operation

r/m ← NOT r/m

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

OR-Logical Inclusive OR

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0C ib	OR AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR immediate byte to AL
0D iw	OR AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR immediate word to AX
0D id	OR EAX,imm32				X	X	X	OR immediate dword to EAX
80 /1 ib	OR r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR immediate byte to r/m byte
81 /1 iw	OR r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR immediate word to r/m word
81 /1 id	OR r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	OR immediate dword to r/m dword
83 /1 ib	OR r/m16,imm8				X	X	X	OR sign-extended immediate byte with r/m word
81 /1 ib	OR r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	OR sign-extended immediate byte with r/m dword
08 /r	OR r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR byte register to r/m byte
09 /r	OR r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR word register to r/m word
09 /r	OR r/m32,r32				X	X	X	OR dword register to r/m dword
0A /r	OR r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR byte register to r/m byte
0B /r	OR r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	OR word register to r/m word
0B /r	OR r32,r/m32				X	X	X	OR dword register to r/m dword

Description

The OR instruction computes the inclusive OR of its two operands and places the result in the first operand. Each bit of the result if 0 if both corresponding bits of the operands are 0; otherwise, each bit is 1.

Operation

DEST ← DEST OR SRC;
CF ← 0;
OF ← 0

Flags Affected

OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
0 |  |  |* |* |? |* |0

The OF and CF flags are cleared; the SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result; the AF flag is undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

OUT - Output to Port

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
E6 ib	OUT imm8,AL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Output byte from AL to port imm8
E7 ib	OUT imm8,AX	X	X	X	X	X	X	Output word from AX to port imm8
E7 ib	OUT imm8,EAX				X	X	X	Output dword from EAX to port imm8
EE	OUT DX,AL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Output byte from AL to port number in DX
EF	OUT DX,AX	X	X	X	X	X	X	Output word from AX to port number in DX
EF	OUT DX,EAX				X	X	X	Output dword from EAX to port number in DX

Description

The OUT instruction transfers a data byte or data word from the register (AL, AX, or EAX) given as the second operand to the output port numbered by the first operand. Output to any port from 0 to 65535 is performed by placing the port number in the DX register and then using an OUT instruction with the DX register as the first operand. If the instruction contains an eight-bit port ID, that value is zero-extended to 16-bits.

Operation

IF (PE = 1) AND ((VM = 1) OR (CPL > IOPL))
THEN (* Virtual 8086 mode, or protected mode with CPL > IOPL *)
  IF NOT I-O-Permission (DEST, width(DEST))
  THEN #GP(0);
  FI;
FI;
[DEST] ← SRC; (* I/O address space used *)

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is higher (has less privilege) than the I/O privilege level and any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in the TSS equals 1.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault if any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in the TSS equals 1.

Notes

After the OUT or OUTS instructions are run, the Pentium processor ensures that the EWBE# has been sampled active before beginning to run the next instruction. Note that the instruction may be prefetched if EWBE# is not active, but it will not run until EWBE# is sampled active.

OUTS/OUTSB/OUTSW/OUTSD-Output String to Port

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction      |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+-----------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|6E        |OUTS DX,r/m8     | |X|X|X|X|X|Output byte [(E)SI] to port in DX
|----------+-----------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|6F        |OUTS DX,r/m16    | |X|X|X|X|X|Output word [(E)SI] to port in DX
|----------+-----------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|6F        |OUTS DX,r/m32    | | | |X|X|X|Output dword [(E)SI] to port in DX
|----------+-----------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|6E        |OUTSB            | |X|X|X|X|X|Output byte [DS:(E)SI] to port in DX
|----------+-----------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|6F        |OUTSW            | |X|X|X|X|X|Output word [DS:(E)SI] to port in DX
|----------+-----------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|6F        |OUTSD            | | | |X|X|X|Output dword [DS:(E)SI] to port in DX

Description

The OUTS instruction transfers data from the memory byte, word, or doubleword at the source-index register to the output port addressed by the DX register. If the address-size attribute for this instruction is 16-bits, the SI register is used for the source-index register; otherwise, the address-size attribute is 32-bits, and the ESI register is used for the source-index register. The OUTS instruction does not allow specification of the port number as an immediate value. The port must be addressed through the DX register value. Load the correct value into the DX register before running the OUTS instruction. The address of the source data is determined by the contents of source- index register. Load the correct index value into the SI or ESI register before running the OUTS instruction. After the transfer, source-index register is advanced automatically. If the DF flag is 0 (the CLD instruction was run), the source-index register is incremented; if the DF flag is 1 (the STD instruction was run), it is decremented. The amount of the increment or decrement is 1 if a byte is output, 2 if a word is output, or 4 if a doubleword is output. The OUTSB, OUTSW, and OUTSD instructions are synonyms for the byte, word, and doubleword OUTS instructions. The OUTS instruction can be preceded by the REP prefix for block output of ECX bytes or words. Refer to the REP instruction for details on this operation.

Operation

IF AddressSize = 16 THEN use SI for source-index; ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *)

  use ESI for source-index;

FI;

IF (PE = 1) AND ((VM = 1) OR (CPL > IOPL)) THEN (* Virtual 8086 mode, or protected mode with CPL > IOPL *)

  IF NOT I-O-Permission (DEST, width(DEST))
  THEN #GP(0);
  FI;

FI; IF byte type of instruction THEN

  [DX] ← [source-index]; (* Write byte at DX I/O address *)
  IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 1 ELSE IncDec ← -1; FI;

FI; IF OperandSize = 16 THEN

  [DX] ← [source-index]; (* Write word at DX I/O address *)
  IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 2 ELSE IncDec ← -2; FI;

FI; IF OperandSize = 32 THEN

  [DX] ← [source-index]; (* Write dword at DX I/O address *)
  IF DF = THEN IncDec ← 4 ELSE IncDec ← -4; FI;
  FI;

FI; source-index ← source-index + IncDec;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is greater than the I/O privilege level and any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in TSS equals 1; #GP (0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault- code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault if any of the corresponding I/O permission bits in TSS equals 1; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

After the OUT or OUTS instructions are run, the Pentium processor ensures that the EWBE# has been sampled active before beginning to run the next instruction. Note that the instruction may be prefetched if EWBE# is not active, but it will not run until EWBE# is sampled active.

POP-Pop a Word from the Stack

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|58+rw     |POP r16             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Pop top of stack into word
|          |                    | | | | | | |register
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|58+rd     |POP r32             | | | |X|X|X|Pop top of stack into dword
|          |                    | | | | | | |register
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|8F /0     |POP m16             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Pop top of stack into memory word 
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|8F /0     |POP m32             | | | |X|X|X|Pop top of stack into memory dword
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|1F        |POP DS              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Pop top of stack into DS
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|07        |POP ES              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Pop top of stack into ES
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|0F A1     |POP FS              | | | |X|X|X|Pop top of stack into FS
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|0F A9     |POP GS              | | | |X|X|X|Pop top of stack into GS
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|17        |POP SS              |X|X|X|X|X|X|Pop top of stack into SS

Description

The POP instruction replaces the previous contents of the memory, the register, or the segment register operand with the word on the top of the processor stack, addressed by SS:SP (address-size attribute of 16 bits) or SS:ESP (address-size attribute of 32 bits). The stack pointer SP is incremented by 2 for an operand-size of 16 bits or by 4 for an operand-size of 32 bits. It then points to the new top of stack. The POP CS instruction is not a processor instruction. Popping from the stack into the CS register is accomplished with a RET instruction. If the destination operand is a segment register (DS, ES, FS, GS, or SS), the value popped must be a selector. In protected mode, loading the selector initiates automatic loading of the descriptor information associated with that selector into the hidden part of the segment register; loading also initiates validation of both the selector and the descriptor information. A null value (0000-0003) may be popped into the DS, ES, FS, or GS register without causing a protection exception. An attempt to reference a segment whose corresponding segment register is loaded with a null value causes a # GP(0) exception. No memory reference occurs. The saved value of the segment register is null. A POP SS instruction inhibits all interrupts, including NMI, until after processing of the next instruction. This allows sequential processing of POP SS and MOV eSP, eBP instructions without danger of having an invalid stack during an interrupt. However, use of the LSS instruction is the preferred method of loading the SS and eSP registers. A POP-to-memory instruction, which uses the stack pointer (ESP) as a base register, references memory after the POP. The base used is the value of the ESP after the instruction runs. Loading a segment register while in protected mode results in special checks and actions, as described in the following listing: IF SS is loaded:

  IF selector is null THEN #GP(0);
  Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits ELSE 
     #GP(selector);
  Selector's RPL must equal CPL ELSE #GP(selector);
  AR byte must indicate a writable data segment ELSE #GP(selector);
  DPL in the AR byte must equal CPL ELSE #GP(selector);
  Segment must be marked present ELSE #SS(selector);
  Load SS register with selector;
  Load SS register with descriptor;

IF DS, ES, FS or GS is loaded with non-null selector:

  AR byte must indicate data or readable code segment ELSE 
     #GP(selector);
  IF data or nonconforming code 
  THEN both the RPL and the CPL must be less than or equal to DPL in 
  AR byte 
  ELSE #GP(selector);
  FI;
  Segment must be marked present ELSE #NP(selector);
  Load segment register with selector;
  Load segment register with descriptor;

IF DS, ES, FS, or GS is loaded with a null selector:

  Load segment register with selector 
  Clear valid bit in invisible portion of register 

Operation

IF StackAddrSize = 16 
THEN 
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN
      DEST ← (SS:SP); (* copy a word *)
      SP ← SP + 2;
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
      DEST ← (SS:SP); (* copy a dword *)
      SP ← SP + 4;
   FI;
ELSE (* StackAddrSize = 32 *)
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN
      DEST ← (SS:ESP); (* copy a word *)
      ESP ← ESP + 2;
   ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
      DEST ← (SS:ESP); (* copy a dword *)
      ESP ← ESP + 4;
   FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP, #SS, and #NP if a segment register is being loaded, #SS(0) if the current top of stack is not within the stack segment; #GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

Back-to-back PUSH/POP instruction sequences are allowed without incurring an additional clock. The stack segment descriptor's B bit will determine the size of Stack Addr Size. Pop ESP instructions increments the stack pointer (ESP) before data at the old top of stack is written into the destination.

POPA/POPAD-Pop all General Registers

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction    |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+---------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|61        |POPA           | |X|X|X|X|X|Pop DI, SI, BP, BX, DX, CX, and AX
|----------+---------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|61        |POPAD          | | | |X|X|X|Pop EDI, ESI, EBP, EBX, EDX, ECX, and EAX

Description

The POPA instruction pops the eight 16-bit general registers. However, the SP value is discarded instead of loaded into the SP register. The POPA instruction reverses a previous PUSHA instruction, restoring the general registers to their values before the PUSHA instruction was run. The first register popped is the DI register. The POPAD instruction pops the eight 32-bit general registers. The ESP value is discarded instead of loaded into the ESP register. The POPAD instruction reverses the previous PUSHAD instruction, restoring the general registers to their values before the PUSHAD instruction was run. The first register popped is the EDI register.

Operation

IF OperandSize = 16 (* instruction = POPA *)
THEN 
  DI ← Pop();
  SI ← Pop();
  BP ← Pop();
  increment SP by 2 (* skip next 2 bytes of stack *)
  BX ← Pop();
  DX ← Pop();
  CX ← Pop();
  AX ← Pop();
ELSE (* OperandSize = 32, instruction = POPAD *)
  EDI ← Pop();
  ESI ← Pop();
  EBP ← Pop();
  increment SP by 4 (* skip next 4 bytes of stack *)
  EBX ← Pop();
  EDX ← Pop();
  ECX ← Pop();
  EAX ← Pop();
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. SS(0) if the starting or ending stack address is not within the stack segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

POPF/POPFD - Pop Stack into FLAGS or EFLAGS Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9D	POPF	X	X	X	X	X	X	Pop top of stack into FLAGS
9D	POPFD				X	X	X	Pop top of stack into EFLAGS

Description

The POPF and POPFD instructions pop the word or doubleword on the top of the stack and store the value in the FLAGS register. If the operand-size attribute of the instruction is 16 bits, then a word is popped and the value is stored in the FLAGS register. If the operand-size attribute is 32 bits, then a doubleword is popped and the value is stored in the EFLAGS register. When the IOPL is less than 3 in virtual-8086 mode, the POPF instruction causes a general protection exception. When the IOPL is equal to 3 while running in virtual-8086 mode, POPF pops a word into the FLAGS register. Refer to the Intel documentation for information about the FLAGS and EFLAGS registers. Note that bits 16 and 17 of the EFLAGS register, called the VM and RF flags, respectively, are not affected by the POPF or POPFD instruction. The I/O privilege level is altered only when running at privilege level 0. The interrupt flag is altered only when running at a level at least as privileged as the I/O privilege level. (Real-address mode is equivalent to privilege level 0.) If a POPF instruction is run with insufficient privilege, an exception does not occur, but the privileged bits do not change.

Operation

IF VM=0 (* Not in Virtual-8086 Mode *)
THEN 
   IF OperandSize=32;
   THEN EFLAGS ← Pop() AND 277FD7H;
   ELSE FLAGE ← Pop();
   FI;
ELSE (* In Virtual-8086 Mode *)
   IF IOPL=3
   THEN
      IF OperandSize=32
      THEN 
         TempEflags ← Pop();
         EFLAGS ← ((EFLAGS AND 1B3000H) OR (TempEflags AND ~ 1B3000H))
                            (* VM, RF, IOPL, VIP, and VIF of EGLAGS bits are 
                               not modified by POPFD *)
      ELSE 
        FLAGS ← Pop()
      FI;
   ELSE
      #GP(0); (* trap to virtual-8086 monitor *)
   FI;
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|* |* |* |* |* |* |* |*

All flags except the VM, RF, IOPL, VIF and VIP flags.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. SS(0) if the top of stack is not within the stack segment.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault if the I/O privilege level is less than 3 in order to permit emulation. #GP(0) if an attempt is made to run POPF with an operand-size override prefix.

PUSH - Push Operand onto the Stack

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|50+rw     |PUSH r16            |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push register word
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|50+rd     |PUSH r32            | | | |X|X|X|Push register dword
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|FF /6     |PUSH m16            |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push memory word
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|FF /6     |PUSH m32            | | | |X|X|X|Push memory dword
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|6A        |PUSH imm8           | |X|X|X|X|X|Push immediate byte
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|68        |PUSH imm16          | |X|X|X|X|X|Push immediate word
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|68        |PUSH imm32          | | | |X|X|X|Push immediate dword
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|0E        |PUSH CS             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push CS
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|1E        |PUSH DS             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push DS
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|06        |PUSH ES             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push ES
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|0F A0     |PUSH FS             | | | |X|X|X|Push FS
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|0F A8     |PUSH GS             | | | |X|X|X|Push GS
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-------------------
|16        |PUSH SS             |X|X|X|X|X|X|Push SS

Description

The PUSH instruction decrements the stack pointer by 2 if the operand-size attribute of the instruction is 16 bits; otherwise, it decrements the stack pointer by 4. The PUSH instruction then places the operand on the new top of stack, which is pointed to by the stack pointer. The PUSH ESP instruction pushes the value of the ESP register as it existed before the instruction. This differs from the 8086, where the PUSH SP instruction pushes the new value (decremented by 2). Likewise, a PUSH-from-memory instruction, which uses the stack pointer (ESP ) as a base register, references memory before the PUSH. The base used is the value of the ESP before the instruction runs.

Operation

IF StackAddrSize = 16 
THEN 
   IF OperandSize = 16 THEN 
      SP ← SP - 2;
      (SS:SP) ← (SOURCE); (* word assignment *)
   ELSE
      SP ← SP - 4;
      (SS:SP) ← (SOURCE); (* dword assignment *)
   FI;
ELSE (* StackAddrSize = 32 *)
   IF OperandSize = 16 
   THEN
      ESP ← ESP -2;
      (SS:ESP) ← (SOURCE); (* word assignment *)
   ELSE
      ESP ← ESP -4;
      (SS:ESP) ← (SOURCE); (* dword assignment *)
  FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. SS(0) if the new value of the SP or ESP register is outside the stack segment limit; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

None; if the SO or ESP register is 1, the processor shuts down due to a lack of stack space.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

When used with an operand in memory, the PUSH instruction takes longer to run than a two-instruction sequence, which moves the operand through a register. Back-to-back PUSH/POP instruction sequences are allowed without incurring an additional clock. Selective pushes write only the top of the stack.

PUSHA/PUSHAD - Push all General Registers

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
60	PUSHA			X	X	X	X	Push AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, and DI
60	PUSHAD				X	X	X	Push EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, and EDI

Description

The PUSHA and PUSHAD instructions save the 16-bit or 32-bit general registers, respectively, on the processor stack. The PUSHA instruction decrements the stack pointer (SP) by 16 to hold the eight word values. The PUSHAD instruction decrements the stack pointer (ESP) by 32 to hold the eight doubleword values. Because the registers are pushed onto the stack in the order in which they were given, they appear in the 16 or 32 new stack bytes in reverse order. The last register pushed is the DI or EDI register.

Operation

IF OperandSize = 16 (* PUSHA instruction *)
THEN   Temp ← (SP);
  Push(AX);
  Push(CX);
  Push(DX);
  Push(BX);
  Push(Temp);
  Push(BP);
  Push(SI);
  Push(DI);
ELSE (* OperandSize = 31, PUSHAD instruction *)
  Temp ← (ESP);
  Push(EAX);
  Push(ECX);
  Push(EDX);
  Push(EBX);
  Push(Temp);
  Push(EPS);
  Push(ESI);
  Push(EDI);
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. SS(0) if the starting or ending stack address is outside the stack segment limit; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Before running the PUSHA or PUSHAD instruction, the Pentium processor shuts down if the SP or ESP register equals 1, 3, or 5; if the SP or ESP register equals 7, 9, 11, 13, or 15, exception 13 occurs.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

PUSHF/PUSHFD-Push Flags Register onto the Stack

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9C	PUSHF	X	X	X	X	X	X	Push FLAGS
9C	PUSHFD				X	X	X	Push EFLAGS

Description

The PUSHF instruction decrements the stack pointer by 2 and copies the FLAGS register to the new top of stack; the PUSHFD instruction decrements the stack pointer by 4, and the EFLAGS register is copied to the new top of stack, which is pointed to by SS:ESP. Refer to the Intel documentation for information on the EFLAGS register.

Operation

IF VM=0 (* Not in Virtual-8086 Mode *)
THEN 
   IF OperandSize = 32 
   THEN push(EFLAGS AND 0FCFFFFH); (* VM and RF EFLAG bits are cleared *)
   ELSE push(FLAGS);
   FI;
ELSE (* In Virtual-8086 Mode *)
   IF IOPL=3
   THEN
      IF OperandSize = 32 
      THEN push(EFLAGS AND 0FCFFFFH); (* VM and RF EFLAGS bits are cleared *)
      ELSE push(FLAGS);
      FI;
   ELSE
      #GP(0); (* Trap to virtual-8086 monitor *)
   FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. SS(0) if the new value of the ESP register is outside the stack segment boundaries.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

None; the processor shuts down due to a lack of stack space.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) fault if the I/O privilege level is less than 3, to permit emulation.

RCL/RCR/ROL/ROR - Rotate

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D0 /2	RCL r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 9 bits (CF, r/m byte) left once
D2 /2	RCL r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 9 bits (CF, r/m byte) left CL times
C0 /2 ib	RCL r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 9 bits (CF, r/m byte) left imm8 times
D1 /2	RCL r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 17 bits (CF, r/m word) left once
D3 /2	RCL r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 17 bits (CF, r/m word) left CL times
C1 /2 ib	RCL r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 17 bits (CF, r/m word) left imm8 times
D1 /2	RCL r/m32,1				X	X	X	Rotate 33 bits (CF, r/m dword) left once
D3 /2	RCL r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Rotate 33 bits (CF, r/m dword) left CL times
C1 /2 ib	RCL r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Rotate 33 bits (CF, r/m dword) left imm8 times
D0 /3	RCR r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 9 bits (CF, r/m byte) right once
D2 /3	RCR r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 9 bits (CF, r/m byte) right CL times
C0 /3 ib	RCR r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 9 bits (CF, r/m byte) right imm8 times
D1 /3	RCR r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 17 bits (CF, r/m word) right once
D3 /3	RCR r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 17 bits (CF, r/m word) right CL times
C1 /3 ib	RCR r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 17 bits (CF, r/m word) right imm8 times
D1 /3	RCR r/m32,1				X	X	X	Rotate 33 bits (CF, r/m dword) right once
D3 /3	RCR r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Rotate 33 bits (CF, r/m dword) right CL times
C1 /3 ib	RCR r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Rotate 33 bits (CF, r/m dword) right imm8 times
D0 /0	ROL r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 8 bits (r/m byte) left once
D2 /0	ROL r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 8 bits (r/m byte) left CL times
C0 /0 ib	ROL r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 8 bits (r/m byte) left imm8 times
D1 /0	ROL r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 16 bits (r/m word) left once
D3 /0	ROL r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 16 bits (r/m word) left CL times
C1 /0 ib	ROL r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 16 bits (r/m word) left imm8 times
D1 /0	ROL r/m32,1				X	X	X	Rotate 32 bits (r/m dword) left once
D3 /0	ROL r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Rotate 32 bits (r/m dword) left CL times
C1 /0 ib	ROL r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Rotate 32 bits (r/m dword) left imm8 times
D0 /1	ROR r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 8 bits (r/m byte) right once
D2 /1	ROR r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 8 bits (r/m byte) right CL times
C0 /1 ib	ROR r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 8 bits (r/m byte) right imm8 times
D1 /1	ROR r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 16 bits (r/m word) right once
D3 /1	ROR r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 16 bits (r/m word) right CL times
C1 /1 ib	ROR r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Rotate 16 bits (r/m word) right imm8 times
D1 /1	ROR r/m32,1				X	X	X	Rotate 32 bits (r/m dword) right once
D3 /1	ROR r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Rotate 32 bits (r/m dword) right CL times
C1 /1 ib	ROR r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Rotate 32 bits (r/m dword) right imm8 times

Description

Each rotate instruction shifts the bits of the register or memory operand given. The left rotate instructions shift all the bits upward, except for the top bit, which is returned to the bottom. The right rotate instructions do the reverse: the bits shift downward until the bottom bit arrives at the top. For the RCL and RCR instructions, the CF flag is part of the rotated quantity. The RCL instruction shifts the CF flag into the bottom bit and shifts the top bit into the CF flag; the RCR instruction shifts the CF flag into the top bit and shifts the bottom bit into the CF flag. For the ROL and ROR instructions, the original value of the CF flag is not a part of the result, but the CF flag receives a copy of the bit that was shifted from one end to the other. The rotate is repeated the number of times indicated by the second operand, which is either an immediate number or the contents of the CL register. To reduce the maximum instruction processing time, the Pentium processor does not allow rotation counts greater than 31. If a rotation count greater than 31 is attempted, only the bottom five bits of the rotation are used. The 8086 does not mask rotation counts. The Pentium processor in Virtual 8086 Mode does mask rotation counts. The OF flags is defined only for the single-rotate forms of the instructions (second operand is a 1). It is undefined in all other cases. For left shifts/rotates, the CF bit after the shift is XORed with the high- order result bit. For right shifts/rotates, the high-order two bits of the result are XORed to get the OF flag.

Operation

(* ROL - Rotate Left *) temp ← COUNT; WHILE (temp <> 0) DO

  tmpcf ← high-order bit of (r/m);
  r/m ← r/m * 2 + (tmpcf);
  temp ← temp - 1;

OD; IF COUNT = 1 THEN

  IF high-order bit of r/m <> CF 
  THEN OF ← 1;
  ELSE OF ← 0;
  FI;

ELSE OF ← undefined; FI; (* ROR - Rotate Right *) temp ← COUNT; WHILE (temp <> 0) DO

  tmpcf ← low-order bit of (r/m);
  r/m ← r/m / 2 + (tmpcf * 2widty(r/m));
  temp ← temp - 1;

DO; IF COUNT = 1 THEN

  IF (high-order bit of r/m) <> (bit next to high-order bit of r/m)
  THEN OF ← 1;
  ELSE OF ← 0;
  FI;

ELSE OF ← undefined; FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|* |  |  |  |  |  |  |*

The OF flag is affected only for single-bit rotates; the OF flag is undefined for multi-bit rotates; the CF flag contains the value of the bit shifted into it; the SF, ZF, AF, and PF flags are not affected.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

RDMSR - Read from Model Specific Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 32	RDMSR						X	Read Model Specific Register indicated by ECX into EDX:EAX

Description

The value in ECX specifies one of the 64-bit Model Specific Registers of the Pentium processor. The content of that Model-Specific Register is copied into EDX:EAX. EDX is loaded with the high-order 32 bits, and EAX is loaded with the low-order 32 bits. The following values are used to select model specific registers on the Pentium processor.

VALUE	REGISTER NAME	DESCRIPTION
00H	Machine Check Address	Stores address of cycle causing the exception
01H	Machine Check Type	Stores type of cycle causing the exception

For other values used to perform cache, TLB, and BTB testing and performance monitoring, see the Intel documentation.

Operation

EDX:EAX ← MSR[ECX];

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if either the current privilege level is not 0 or the value in ECX does not specify a Model-Specific Register that is implemented in the Pentium processor.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

1. GP if the value in ECX does not specify a Model-Specific Register that is implemented in the Pentium processor.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if instruction processing is attempted.

Notes

This instruction must be run at privilege level 0 or in real-address mode; otherwise, a protection exception will be generated. If less than 64 bits are implemented in a model specific register, the value returned to EDX:EAX, in the locations corresponding to the unimplemented bits, is unpredictable. RDMSR is used to read the content of Model-Specific Registers that control functions for testability, execution tracing, performance monitoring and machine check errors. Refer to the Pentium(TM) Processor Data Book for more information. The values 3H, 0FH, and values above 13H are reserved. Do not run RDMSR with reserved values in ECX.

RDTSC - Read Time Stamp Counter

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+----------------------------------
|0F 31     |RDTSC       | | | | | |X|Read Time Stamp Counter int EDX:EAX

Description

Operation

Protected Mode Exceptions

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

REP/REPE/REPZ/REPNE/REPNZ - Repeat Following String Operation

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
F3 6C	REP INS r/m8,DX		X	X	X	X	X	Input (E)CX bytes from port DX into ES:[(E)DI]
F3 6D	REP INS r/m16,DX		X	X	X	X	X	Input (E)CX words from port DX into ES:[(E)DI]
F3 6D	REP INS r/m32,DX				X	X	X	Input (E)CX dwords from port DX into ES:[(E)DI]
F3 AC	REP LODS AL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Load (E)CX bytes from [(E)SI] to EDX
F3 AD	REP LODS AX	X	X	X	X	X	X	Load (E)CX words from [(E)SI] to EDX
F3 AD	REP LODS EAX				X	X	X	Load (E)CX dwords from [(E)SI] to EDX
F3 A4	REP MOVS m8,m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move (E)CX bytes from [(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
F3 A5	REP MOVS m16,m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Move (E)CX words from [(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
F3 A5	REP MOVS m32,m32				X	X	X	Move (E)CX dwords from [(E)SI] to ES:[(E)DI]
F3 6E	REP OUTS DX,r/m8		X	X	X	X	X	Output (E)CX bytes from [(E)SI] to port DX
F3 6F	REP OUTS DX,r/m16		X	X	X	X	X	Output (E)CX words from [(E)SI] to port DX
F3 6F	REP OUTS DX,r/m32				X	X	X	Output (E)CX dwords from [(E)SI] to port DX
F3 AA	REP STOS m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store (E)CX bytes at ES:[(E)DI] from AL
F3 AB	REP STOS m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store (E)CX words at ES:[(E)DI] from AX
F3 AB	REP STOS m32				X	X	X	Store (E)CX dwords at ES:[(E)DI] from EAX
F3 A6	REPE CMPS m8,m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find nonmatching bytes in ES:[(E)DI] and [(E)SI]
F3 A7	REPE CMPS m16,m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find nonmatching words in ES:[(E)DI] and [(E)SI]
F3 A7	REPE CMPS m32,m32				X	X	X	Find nonmatching dwords in ES:[(E)DI] and [(E)SI]
F3 AE	REPE SCAS m8,m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find non-AL byte starting at ES:[(E)DI]
F3 AF	REPE SCAS m16,m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find non-AX word starting at ES:[(E)DI]
F3 AF	REPE SCAS m32,m32				X	X	X	Find non-EAX dword starting at ES:[(E)DI]
F2 A6	REPNE CMPS m8,m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find matching bytes in ES:[(E)DI] and [(E)SI]
F2 A7	REPNE CMPS m16,m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find matching words in ES:[(E)DI] and [(E)SI]
F2 A7	REPNE CMPS m32,m32				X	X	X	Find matching dwords in ES:[(E)DI] and [(E)SI]
F2 AE	REPNE SCAS m8,m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find AL, starting at ES:[(E)DI]
F2 AF	REPNE SCAS m16,m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Find AX, starting at ES:[(E)DI]
F2 AF	REPNE SCAS m32,m32				X	X	X	Find EAX, starting at ES:[(E)DI]

Description

The REP, REPE (repeat while equal), and REPNE (repeat while not equal) prefixes are applied to string operation. Each prefix causes the string instruction that follows to be repeated the number of times indicated in the count register or (for the REPE and REPNE prefixes) until the indicated condition in the ZF flag is no longer met. Synonymous forms of the REPE and REPNE prefixes are the REPZ and REPNZ prefixes, respectively. The REP prefixes apply only to one string instruction at a time. To repeat a block of instructions, use the LOOP instruction or another looping construct. The precise action for each iteration is as follows:

1. If the address-size attribute is 16 bits, use the CX register for the count register; if the address-size attribute is 32 bits, use the ECX register for the count register.
2. Check the count register. If it is zero, exit the iteration, and move to the next instruction.
3. Acknowledge any pending interrupts.
4. Perform the string operation once.
5. Decrement the CX or count register by one; no flags are modified.
6. Check the ZF flag is the string operation is a SCAS or CMPS instruction. If the repeat condition does not hold, exit the iteration and move to the next instruction. Exit the iteration if the prefix if REPE and the ZF flag is 0 (the last comparison was not equal), or if the prefix is REPNE and the ZF flag is one (the last comparison was equal).
7. Return to step 2 for the next iteration.

Repeated CMPS and SCAS instructions can be exited if the count is exhausted or if the ZF flag fails the repeat condition. These two cases can be distinguished by using either the JCXZ instruction, or by using the conditional jumps that test the ZF flag (the JZ, JNZ, and JNE instructions).

Operation

IF AddressSize = 16 
THEN use CX for CountReg;
ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *) use ECX for CountReg;
FI;
WHILE CountReg <> 0 
DO 
  service pending interrupts (if any);
  perform primitive string instruction;
  CountReg ← CountReg -1;
  IF primitive operation is CMPSB, CMPSW, CMPSD, SCASB,
  SCASW, or SCASD 
  THEN
     IF (instruction is REP/REPE/REPZ) AND (ZF=0)
     THEN exit WHILE loop 
     ELSE 
        IF (instruction if REPNZ or REPNE) AND (ZF=1)
        THEN exit WHILE loop;
        FI;
     FI;
 FO;
OD;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |  |  |* |  |  |  |

The ZF flag is affected by the REP CMPS and REP SCAS as described above.

Notes

Not all I/O ports can handle the rate at which the REP INS and REP OUTS instructions run. Do not use the REP prefix with the LOOP instruction. Proper LOOP operation is not guaranteed when used with the REP prefix and the effect of this combination is unpredictable. The behavior of the REP prefix is undefined when used with non-string instructions. When a page fault occurs during CMPS or SCAS instructions that are prefixed with REPNE, the EFLAGS value is restored to the state prior to the processing of the instruction. Because SCAS and CMPS do not use EFLAGS as an input, the processor can resume the instruction after the page fault handler.

RET - Return from Procedure

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
C3	RET/RETN	X	X	X	X	X	X	Return (near) to caller
CB	RET/RETF	X	X	X	X	X	X	Return (far) to caller, same privilege
CB	RET/RETF			X	X	X	X	Return (far), lesser privilege, switch stacks
C2 iw	RET/RETN imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Return (near), pop imm16 bytes
CA iw	RET/RETF imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Return (far), same privilege, pop imm16 bytes
CA iw	RET/RETF imm16			X	X	X	X	Return (far), lesser privilege, pop imm16 bytes

Description

The RET instruction transfers control to a return address located on the stack. The address is usually placed on the stack by a CALL instruction, and the return is made to the instruction that follows the CALL instruction. The optional numeric parameter to the RET instruction gives the number of stack bytes (OperandMode=16) or words (OperandMode=32) to be released after the return address is popped. These items are typically used as input parameters to the procedure called. For the intrasegment (near) return, the address on the stack is a segment offset, which is popped into the instruction pointer. The CS register is unchanged. For the intersegment (far) return, the address on the stack is a long pointer. The offset is popped first, followed by the selector. In real mode, the CS and IP registers are loaded directly. In Protected Mode, an intersegment return causes the processor to check the descriptor addressed by the return selector. The AR byte of the descriptor must indicate a code segment of equal or lesser privilege (or greater or equal numeric value) than the current privilege level. Returns to a lesser privilege level cause the stack to be reloaded from the value saved beyond the parameter block. The DS, ES, FS, and GS segment registers can be cleared by the RET instruction during an interlevel transfer. If there registers refer to segments that cannot be used by the new privilege level, they are cleared to prevent unauthorized access from the new privilege level.

Operation

IF instruction = near RET 
THEN;
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
     IP ← Pop();
     EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH;
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     EIP ← Pop();
 FI;
 IF instruction has immediate operand THEN eSP ← eSP + imm16; FI;
 FI;

IF (PE = 0 OR (PE = 1 AND VM = 1))
  (* real mode or virtual 8086 mode *)
  AND instruction = far RET 
THEN;
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
     IP ← Pop();
     EIP ← EIP AND 0000FFFFH;
     CS ← Pop(); (* 16-bit pop *)
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     EIP ← Pop ();
     CS ← Pop(); (* 32-bit pop, high-order 16-bits discarded *)
  FI;
  IF instruction has immediate operand THEN eSP ← eSP + imm16; FI;
FI;

IF (PE = 1 AND VM = 0) (* Protected mode, not V86 mode *)
  AND instruction = far RET 
THEN 
  IF OperandSize=32
  THEN Third word on stack must be within stack limits else #SS(0);
  ELSE Second word on stack must be within stack limits else #SS(0);
  FI;
  Return selector RPL must be ó CPL ELSE #GP(return selector)
  IF return selector RPL = CPL 
  THEN GOTO SAME-LEVEL;
  ELSE GOTO OUTER-PRIVILEGE-LEVEL;
  FI;
FI;

SAME-LEVEL:
  Return selector must be non-null ELSE #GP(0)
  Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits ELSE 
     #GP(selector)
  Descriptor AR byte must indicate code segment ELSE #GP(selector)
  IF non-conforming
  THEN code segment DPL must equal CPL;
  ELSE #GP(selector);
  FI;
  IF conforming 
  THEN code segment DPL must be ó CPL;
  ELSE #GP(selector);
  FI;
  Code segment must be present ELSE #NP(selector);
  Top word on stack must be within stack limits ELSE #SS(0);
  IP must be in code segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
  IF OperandSize=32
  THEN
     Load CS:EIP from stack 
     Load CS register with descriptor 
     Increment eSP by 8 plus the immediate offset if it exists 
  ELSE (* OperandSize=16 *)
     Load CS:IP from stack 
     Load CS register with descriptor 
     Increment eSP by 4 plus the immediate offset if it exists 
  FI;

OUTER-PRIVILEGE-LEVEL:
  IF OperandSize=32
  THEN Top (16+immediate) bytes on stack must be within stack limits 
     ELSE #SS(0);
  ELSE Top (8+immmediate) bytes on stack must be within stack limits ELSE 
     #SS(0);
  FI;
  Examine return CS selector and associated descriptor:
     Selector must be non-null ELSE #GP(0);
     Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits ELSE 
        #GP(selector)
     Descriptor AR byte must indicate code segment ELSE #GP(selector);
     IF non-conforming
     THEN code segment DPL must equal return selector RPL 
     ELSE #GP(selector);
     FI;

     IF conforming 
     THEN code segment DPL must be ó return selector RPL;
     ELSE #GP(selector);
     FI;
     Segment must be present ELSE #NP(selector)
  Examine return SS selector and associated descriptor:
     Selector must be non-null ELSE #GP(0);
     Selector index must be within its descriptor table limits 
        ELSE #GP(selector);
     Selector RPL must equal the RPL of the return CS selector ELSE 
        #GP(selector);
     Descriptor AR byte must indicate a writable data segment ELSE 
        #GP(selector);
     Descriptor DPL must equal the RPL of the return CS selector ELSE 
        #GP(selector);
     Segment must be present ELSE #NP(selector);
  IP must be in code segment limit ELSE #GP(0);
  Set CPL to the RPL of the return CS selector;
  IF OperandSize=32
  THEN
     Load CS:EIP from stack;
     Set CS RPL to CPL;
     Increment eSP by 8 plus the immediate offset if it exists;
     Load SS:eSP from stack;
  ELSE (* OperandSize=16 *)
     Load CS:IP from stack;
     Set CS RPL to CPL;
     Increment eSP by 4 plus the immediate offset if it exists;
     Load SS:eSP from stack;
  FI;
  Load the CS register with the return CS descriptor;
  Load the SS register with the return SS descriptor;
  For each of ES, FS, GS, and DS 
  DO
     IF the current register setting is not valid for the outer level,
        set the register to null (selector ← AR ← 0);
     To be valid, the register setting must satisfy the following properties:
        Selector index must be within descriptor table limits;
        Descriptor AR byte must indicate data or readable code segment;
        IF segment is data or non-conforming code, THEN 
           DPL must be ò CPL, or DPL must be ò RPL;
        FI;
  OD;

Protected Mode Exceptions

#GP, #NP, or #SS, as described under "Operation" above; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would be outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

ROL/ROR - Rotate

See entry for RCL/RCR/ROL/ROR.

RSM - Resume from System Management Mode

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F AA	RSM						X	Resume operation of interrupted program

Description

The processor state is restored from the dump created upon entrance to SMM. Note, however, that the contents of the model-specific registers are not affected. The processor leaves SMM and returns control to the interrupted application or operating system. If the processor detects any invalid state information, it enters the shutdown state. This happens in any of the following situations:

• The value stored in the State Dump Base field is not a 32Kbyte aligned address.
• Any reserved bit of CR4 is set to 1.
• Any combination of bits in CR0 is illegal; namely, (PG=1 and PE=0) or (NW= 1 and CD=0).

Operation

Resume operation of a program interrupted by a System Management Mode interrupt.

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*	*	*	*	*	*	*	*

All

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. UD if an attempt is made to run this instruction when the processor is not in System Management Mode.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

1. UD if an attempt is made to run this instruction when the processor is not in System Management Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. UD if an attempt is made to run this instruction when the processor is not in System Management Mode.

Notes

Refer to the Intel documentation for more information about System Management Mode and the behavior of the RSM instruction.

SAHF - Store AH into Flags

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
9E	SAHF	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store AH into flags (SF, ZF, xx, AF, xx, PF, xx, CF)

Description The SAHF instruction loads the SF, ZF, AF, PF,A and CF flags with values from the AH register, from bits 7, 6, 4, 2, and 0, respectively.

Operation

SF:ZF:xx:AF:xx:PF:xx:CF← AH;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
			*	*	*	*	*

The SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are loaded with values from the AH register.

SAL/SAR/SHL/SHR - Shift Instructions

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D0 /4	SAL r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m byte by 2, once
D2 /4	SAL r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m byte by 2, CL times
C0 /5 ib	SAL r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m byte by 2, imm8 times
D1 /4	SAL r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m word by 2, once
D1 /4	SAL r/m32,1				X	X	X	Multiply r/m dword by 2, once
D3 /4	SAL r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m word by 2, CL times
D3 /4	SAL r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Multiply r/m dword by 2, CL times
C1 /4 ib	SAL r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m word by 2, imm8 times
C1 /4 ib	SAL r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Multiply r/m dword by 2, imm8 times
D0 /7	SAR r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m byte by 2, once
D2 /7	SAR r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m byte by 2, CL times
C0 /7 ib	SAR r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m byte by 2, imm8 times
D1 /7	SAR r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m word by 2, once
D1 /7	SAR r/m32,1				X	X	X	Signed divide r/m dword by 2, once
D3 /7	SAR r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m word by 2, CL times
D3 /7	SAR r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Signed divide r/m dword by 2, CL times
C1 /7 ib	SAR r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m word by 2, imm8 times
C1 /7 ib	SAR r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Signed divide r/m dword by 2, imm8 times
D0 /4	SHL r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m byte by 2, once
D0 /4	SHL r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m byte by 2, CL times
C0 /4 ib	SHL r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m byte by 2, imm8 times
D1 /4	SHL r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m word by 2, once
D1 /4	SHL r/m32,1				X	X	X	Multiply r/m dword by 2, once
D3 /4	SHL r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m word by 2, CL times
D3 /4	SHL r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Multiply r/m dword by 2, CL times
C1 /4 ib	SHL r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Multiply r/m word by 2, imm8 times
C1 /4 ib	SHL r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Multiply r/m dword by 2, imm8 times
D0 /5	SHR r/m8,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m byte by 2, once
D2 /5	SHR r/m8,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m byte by 2, CL times
C0 /5 ib	SHR r/m8,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m byte by 2, imm8 times
D1 /5	SHR r/m16,1	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m word by 2, once
D1 /5	SHR r/m32,1				X	X	X	Signed divide r/m dword by 2, once
D3 /5	SHR r/m16,CL	X	X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m word by 2, CL times
D3 /5	SHR r/m32,CL				X	X	X	Signed divide r/m dword by 2, CL times
C1 /5 ib	SHR r/m16,imm8		X	X	X	X	X	Signed divide r/m word by 2, imm8 times
C1 /5 ib	SHR r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Signed divide r/m dword by 2, imm8 times

Description The SAL instruction (or its synonym, SHL) shifts the bits of the operand upward. The high-order bit is shifted into the CF flag, and the low-order bit is cleared. The SAR and SHR instructions shift the bits of the operand downward. The low-order bit is shifted into the CF flag. The effect is to divide the operand by two. The SAR instruction performs a signed divide with rounding toward negative infinity (not the same as the IDIV instruction); the high-order bit remains the same. The SHR instruction performs an unsigned divide ; the high-order bit is cleared. The shift is repeated the number of times indicated by the second operand, which is either an immediate number or the contents of the CL register. To reduce the maximum processing time, the Pentium processor does not allow shift counts greater than 31. If a shift count greater than 31 is attempted , only the bottom five bits of the shift count are used. (The 8086 uses all eight bits of the shift count.) The OF flag is affected only if the single-shift forms of the instructions are used. For left shifts, the OF flag is cleared if the high bit of the answer is the same as the result of the CF flag (i.e., the top two bits of the original operand were the same); the OF flag is set if they are different. For the SAR instruction, the OF flag is cleared for all single shifts. For the SHR instruction, the OF flag is set for the high-order bit of the original operand.

Operation

(* COUNT is the second parameter *)

(temp) ← COUNT;
WHILE (temp<> 0)
DO 
  IF instruction is SAL or SHL 
  THEN CF ← high-order bit of r/m;
  FI;
  IF instruction is SAR or SHR 
  THEN CF ← low-order bit of r/m;
  FI;
  IF instruction = SAL or SHL 
  THEN r/m ← r/m * 2;
  FI;
  IF instruction = SAR 
  THEN r/m ← r/m ;2 (*Signed divide, rounding toward negative infinity*);
  FI;
  IF instruction = SHR 
  THEN r/m ← r/m / 2; (* Unsigned divide *);
  FI;
  temp ← temp - 1;
OD;

• Determine overflow for the various instructions *)

IF COUNT = 1 
THEN 
  IF instruction is SAL or SHL 
  THEN OF ← high-order bit of r/m <> (CF);
  FI;
  IF instruction is SAR 
  THEN OF ← 0;
  FI;
  IF instruction is SHR 
  THEN OF ← high-order bit of operand;
  FI;
ELSE OF ← undefined;
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|* |  |  |* |* |? |* |*

If count = 0, the flags are not affected. The CF flag contains the value of the last bit shifted out. The CF flag is undefined for SHL and SHR instructions in which the shift lengths are greater than or equal to the size of the operand to be shifted. The OF flag is affected for single shifts; the OF flag is undefined for multiple shifts; the CF, ZF, PF, and SF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

SBB - Integer Subtraction with Borrow

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
1C ib	SBB AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, immediate byte from AL
1D iw	SBB AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, immediate word AX
1D id	SBB EAX,imm32				X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, immediate dword from EAX
80 /3 ib	SBB r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, immediate byte from r/m byte
81 /3 iw	SBB r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, immediate word from r/m word
81 /3 id	SBB r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, immediate dword from r/m dword
83 /3 ib	SBB r/m16,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, sign-extended immediate byte from r/m word
83 /3 ib	SBB r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, sign-extended immediate byte from r/m dword
18 /r	SBB r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, byte register from r/m byte
19 /r	SBB r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, word register from r/m word
19 /r	SBB r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, dword register from r/m dword
1A /r	SBB r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, r/m byte from byte register
1B /r	SBB r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, r/m word from word register
1B /r	SBB r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Subtract with borrow, r/m dword from dword register

Description

The SBB instruction adds the second operand (SRC) to the CF flag and subtracts the result from the first operand (DEST). The result of the subtraction is assigned to the first operand (DEST), and the flags are set accordingly. When an immediate byte value is subtracted from a word operand, the immediate value is first sign-extended.

Operation

F SRC is a byte and DEST is a word or dword 
THEN DEST = DEST - (SignExtend(SRC) + CF)
ELSE DEST ← DEST - (SRC + CF);

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|* |  |  |* |* |* |* |* 

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

SCAS/SCASB/SCASW/SCASD - Compare String Data

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
AE	SCAS m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare AL with byte at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AF	SCAS m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare AX with word at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AF	SCAS m32				X	X	X	Compare EAX with dword at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AE	SCASB	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare AL with byte at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AF	SCASW	X	X	X	X	X	X	Compare AX with word at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AF	SCASD				X	X	X	Compare EAX with dword at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]

Description

The SCAS instruction subtracts the memory byte or word at the destination register from the AL, AX or EAX register. The result is discarded; only the flags are set. The operand must be addressable from the ES segment; no segment override is possible. If the address-size attribute for this instruction is 16 bits, the DI register is used as the destination register, otherwise, the address-size attribute is 32 bits and the EDI register is used. The address of the memory data being compared is determined solely by the contents of the destination register, not by the operand to the SCAS instruction. The operand validates ES segment addressability and determines the data type. Load the correct index value into the DI or EDI register before running the SCAS instruction. After the comparison is made, the destination register is automatically updated. If the direction flag is 0 (the CLD instruction was run), the destination register is incremented; if the direction flag is 1 (the STD instruction was run), it is decremented. The increments or decrements are by 1 if bytes are compared, by 2 if words are compared, or by 4 if doublewords are compared. The SCASB, SCASW, and SCASD instructions are synonyms for the byre, word and doubleword SCAS instructions that don't require operands. They are simpler to code, but provide no type or segment checking. The SCAS instruction can be preceded by the REPE or REPNE prefix for a block search of CX or ECX bytes or words. Refer to the REP instruction for further details.

Operation

IF AddressSize = 16THEN use DI for dest-index;ELS
E (* AddressSize = 32 *) use EDI for dest-index;
FI;
If byte type of instruction 
THEN 
  AL - [dest-index]; (* Compare byte in AL and dest *)
  IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 1 ELSE IncDec ← -1; FI;
ELSE 
  IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN
     AX - [dest-index]; (* compare word in AL and dest *)
     IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 2 ELSE IncDec ← -2; FI;
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
     EAX - [dest-index];(* compare dword in EAX and dest *)
     IF DF = 0 THEN IncDec ← 4 ELSE IncDec ← -4; FI;
  FI;
FI;
dest-index = dest-index + IncDec 

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--
|* |  |  |* |* |* |* |*

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the ES segment; # PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

SETcc-Byte Set on Condition

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 97	SETA r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if above (CF=0 and ZF=0)
0F 93	SETAE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if above or equal (CF=0)
0F 92	SETB r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if below (CF=1)
0F 96	SETBE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if below or equal (CF=1 or ZF=1)
0F 92	SETC r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if carry (CF=1)
0F 94	SETE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if equal (ZF=1)
0F 9F	SETG r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if greater (ZF=0 or SF=OF)
0F 9D	SETGE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if greater or equal (SF=OF)
0F 9C	SETL r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if less (SF<>OF)
0F 9E	SETLE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if less or equal (ZF=1 and SF<>OF)
0F 96	SETNA r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not above (CF=1)
0F 92	SETNAE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not above or equal (CF=1)
0F 93	SETNB r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not below (CF=0)
0F 97	SETNBE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not below or equal (CF=0 and ZF=0)
0F 93	SETNC r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not carry (CF=0)
0F 95	SETNE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not equal (ZF=0)
0F 9E	SETNG r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not greater (ZF=1 or SF<>OF)
0F 9C	SETNGE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not greater or equal (SF<>OF)
0F 9D	SETNL r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not less (SF=OF)
0F 9F	SETNLE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not less or equal (ZF=1 and SF<>OF)
0F 91	SETNO r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not overflow (OF=0)
0F 9B	SETNP r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not parity (PF=0)
0F 99	SETNS r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not sign (SF=0)
0F 95	SETNZ r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if not zero (ZF=0)
0F 90	SETO r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if overflow (OF=1)
0F 9A	SETP r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if parity (PF=1)
0F 9A	SETPE r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if parity even (PF=1)
0F 9B	SETPO r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if parity odd (PF=0)
0F 98	SETS r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if sign (SF=1)
0F 94	SETZ r/m8				X	X	X	Set byte if zero (ZF=1)

Description

The SETcc instruction stores a 1 byte at the destination specified by the effective address or register if the condition is met, or a 0 byte if the condition is not met.

Operation

IF condition THEN r/m8 ← 1 ELSE r/m8 ← 0; FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a non-writable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault.

SGDT/SIDT - Store Global/Interrupt Descriptor Table Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 01 /0	SGDT m			X	X	X	X	Store GDTR to m (6 bytes)
0F 01 /1	SIDT m			X	X	X	X	Store IDTR to m (6 bytes)

Description

The SGDT and SIDT instructions copy the contents of the descriptor table register to the six bytes of memory indicated by the operand. The LIMIT field of the register is assigned to the first word at the effective address. If the operand-size attribute is 16 bits, the next three bytes are assigned the BASE field of the register, and the fourth byte is undefined. Otherwise, if the operand-size attribute is 32 bits, the next four bytes are assigned the 32-bit BASE field of the register. The SGDT and SIDT instructions are used only in operating system software; they are not used in application programs.

Operation

DEST ← 48-bit BASE/LIMIT register contents;

Protected Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6 if the destination operand is a register; #GP(0) if the destination is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6 if the destination operand is a register; Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Compatibility Note

The 16-bit forms of the SGDT and SIDT instruction are compatible with the Intel 286 processor, if the value in the upper eight bits is not referenced. The Intel 286 processor stores 1's in these upper bits, whereas the 32- bit processors store 0's if the operand-size attribute is 16 bits. These bits were specified as undefined by the SGDT and SIDT instructions in the 80286 Programming Reference Manual (Intel Order No. 210498).

SHL/SHR - Shift Instruction

See entry for SAL/SAR/SHL/SHR.

SHLD - Double Precision Shift Left

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F A4	SHLD r/m16,r16,imm8				X	X	X	r/m16 ← SHL or r/m16 concatenated with r16
0F A4	SHLD r/m32,r32,imm8				X	X	X	r/m32 ← SHL of r/m32 concatenated with r32
0F A5	SHLD r/m16,r16,CL				X	X	X	r/m16 ← SHL of r/m16 concatenated with r16
0F A5	SHLD r/m32,r32,CL				X	X	X	r/m32 ← SHL of r/m32 concatenated with r32

Description

The SHLD instruction shifts the first operand provided by the r/m field to the left as many bits as specified by the count operand. The second operand (r16 or r32) provides the bits to shift in from the right (starting with bit 0). The result is stored back into the r/m operand. The register remains unaltered. The count operand is provided by either an immediate byte or the contents of the CL register. These operands are taken MODULO 32 to provide a number between 0 and 31 by which to shift. Because the bits to shift are provided by the specified registers, the operation is useful for multi-precision shifts (64 bits or more). The SF, ZF and PF flags are set according to the value of the result. The CF flag is set to the value of the last bit shifted out. The OF and AF flags are left undefined.

Operation

(* count is an unsigned integer corresponding to the last operand of the instruction, 
   either an immediate byte or the byte in register CL *)
ShiftAmt ← count MOD 32;
inBits ← register; (* Allow overlapped operands *)
IF ShiftAmt = 0 
THEN no operation
ELSE
 IF ShiftAmt ò OperandSize
 THEN (* Bad parameters *)
   r/m ← UNDEFINED;
   CF, OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF ← UNDEFINED;
 ELSE (* Perform the shift *)
   CF ← BIT[Base, OperandSize - ShiftAmt];
     (* Last bit shifted out on exit *)
   FOR i ← OperandSize - 1 DOWNTO ShiftAmt 
   DO 
     BIT[Base, i] ← BIT[Base, i - ShiftAmt];
   OF;
   FOR i ← ShiftAmt - 1 DOWNTO 0 
   DO 
     BIT[Base, i] ← BIT[inBits, i - ShiftAmt + OperandSize];
   OD;
   Set SF, ZF, PF (r/m);
     (* SF, ZF, PF are set according to the value of the result *)
   AF ← UNDEFINED;
 FI;
FI;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|? |  |  |* |* |? |* |* |

If count = 0, the flags are not affected. The SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result; the CF flag is set to the value of the last bit shifted out; after a shift of one bit position, the OF flag is set if a sign change occurred, otherwise it is cleared; after a shift of more than one bit position, the OF flag is undefined; the AF flag is undefined, except for a shift count of zero, which does not affect any flags.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

SHRD - Double Precision Shift Right

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F AC	SHRD r/m16,r16,imm8				X	X	X	r/m16 ← SHR of r/m16 concatenated with r16
0F AC	SHRD r/m32,r32,imm8				X	X	X	r/m32 ← SHR of r/m32 concatenated with r32
0F AD	SHRD r/m16,r16,CL				X	X	X	r/m16 ← SHR of r/m16 concatenated with r16
0F AD	SHRD r/m32,r32,CL				X	X	X	r/m32 ← SHR of r/m32 concatenated with r32

Description

The SHRD instruction shifts the first operand provided by the r/m field to the right as many bits as specified by the count operand. The second operand (r16 or r32) provides the bits to shift in from the left (starting with bit 31). The result is stored back into the r/m operand. The register remains unaltered. The count operand is provided by either an immediate byte or the contents of the CL register. These operands are taken MODULO 32 to provide a number between 0 and 31 by which to shift. Because the bits to shift are provided by the specified register, the operation is useful for multi-precision shifts (64 bits or more). The SF, ZF and PF flags are set according to the value of the result. The CF flag is set to the value of the last bit shifted out. The OF and AF flags are left undefined.

Operation

(* count is an unsigned integer corresponding to the last operand of the instruction, either an immediate byte or the byte in register CL *)

ShiftAmt ← count MOD 32;
inBits ← register; (* Allow overlapped operands *)
IF ShiftAmt = 0 
THEN no operation 
ELSE 
 IF ShiftAmt ò OperandSize 
 THEN (* Bad parameters *)
   r/m ← UNDEFINED;
   CF, OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF ← UNDEFINED;
 ELSE (* Perform the shift *)
   CF ← BIT[r/m, ShiftAmt - 1]; (* last bit shifted out on exit *)
   FOR i ← 0 TO OperandSize - 1 - ShiftAmt 
   DO 
     BIT[r/m, i] ← BIT[r/m, i - ShiftAmt];
   OD;
   FOR i ← OperandSize - ShiftAmt TO OperandSize-1
   DO 
     BIT[r/m,i] ← BIT[inBits,i+ShiftAmt - OperandSize];
   OD;
     (* SF, ZF, PF are set according to the value of the result *)
   Set SF, ZF, PF (r/m);
   AF ←UNDEFINED;
 FI;
FI;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
?			*	*	?	*	*

If count = 0, the flags are not affected. The SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result; the CF flag is set to the value of the last bit shifted out; after a shift of one bit position, the OF flag is set if a sign change occurred, otherwise it is cleared; after a shift of more than one bit position, the OF flag is undefined; the AF flag is undefined, except for a shift count of zero, which does not affect any flags. Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH. Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

SIDT - Store Interrupt Descriptor Table Register

See entry for SGDT/SIDT.

SLDT - Store Local Descriptor Table Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 00 /0	SLDT r/m16			X	X	X	X	Store LDTR to EA word

Description

The SLDT instruction stores the Local Descriptor Table Register (LDTR) in the two-byte register or memory location indicated by the effective address operand. This register is a selector that points into the Global Descriptor Table. The SLDT instruction is used only in operating system software. It is not used in application programs.

Operation

r/m16 ← LDTR;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the SLDT instruction is not recognized in Real Address Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode (because the instruction is not recognized, it will not run or perform a memory reference).

Notes

When the destination is a 32-bit register, the 16-bit source operand is copied into the lower 16 bits of the destination register, and the upper 16 bits of the register are undefined. With a 16-bit register operand, only the lower 16 bits of the destination are affected (the upper 16 bits remain unchanged). With a memory operand, the source is written to memory as a 16- bit quantity, regardless of operand size. As a result, 32-bit software should always treat the destination as 16-bits and mask bits 16-31, if necessary.

SMSW - Store Machine Status Word

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 01 /4	SMSW r/m16			X	X	X	X	Store machine status word to EA word

Description

The SMSW instruction stores the machine status word (part of the CR0 register) in the two-byte register or memory location indicated by the effective address operand.

Operation

r/m16 ← MSW;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode, #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

This instruction is provided for compatibility with the Intel 286 processor; programs for the Pentium processor should use the MOV ..., CR0 instruction. When the destination is a 32-bit register, the 16-bit source operand is copied into the lower 16 bits of the destination register, and the upper 16 bits of the register are undefined. With a 16-bit register operand, only the lower 16 bits of the destination are affected (the upper 16 bits remain unchanged). With a memory operand, the source is written to memory as a 16- bit quantity, regardless of operand size. As a result, 32-bit software should always treat the destination as 16-bits and mask bits 16-31, if necessary.

STC - Set Carry Flag

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------
|F9        |STC                 |X|X|X|X|X|X|Set carry flag

Description

The STC instruction sets the CF flag.

Operation

CF ← 1;

Flags Affected

|OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF|
|--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--|
|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |1 |

The CF flag is set.

STD - Set Direction Flag

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
FD	STD	X	X	X	X	X	X	Set direction flag so that [(E)SI] and/or [(E)DI] decrement

Description

The STD instruction sets the direction flag, causing all subsequent string operations to decrement the index registers, (E)SI and/or (E)DI, on which they operate.

Operation

DF ← 1;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
	1

The DF flag is set.

STI - Set Interrupt Flag

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
FB	STI	X	X	X	X	X	X	Set interrupt flag

Description

The STI instruction sets the IF. The processor then responds to external interrupts after running the next instruction if the next instruction allows the IF flag to remain enabled. If external interrupts are disabled and the STI instruction is followed by the RET instruction (such as at the end of a subroutine), the RET instruction is allowed to run before external interrupts are recognized. Also, if external interrupts are disabled and the STI instruction is followed by a CLI instruction, which clears the IF flag, then external interrupts are not recognized because the CLI instruction clears the IF flag during its processing.

Operation

IF PE=0 (* Running in real-address mode *)
THEN 
 IF ← 1; (* Set Interrupt Flag *)
ELSE (* Running in protected mode or virtual-8086 mode *)
 IF VM=0 (* Running in protected mode *)
 THEN 
   IF IOPL=3
   THEN IF ← 1; (* Set Interrupt Flag *)
   ELSE IF CPL òIOPL
     THEN IF ← 1;
     ELSE #GP(0);
     FI;
   FI;
 ELSE (* Running in Virtual-8086 mode *)
   #GP(0); (* Trap to virtual-8086 monitor *)
 FI;
FI;

Decision Table

The following decision table indicates which action in the lower portion of the table is taken given the conditions in the upper portion of the table.

PE =	0	1	1	1
VM =	-	0	0	1
CPL	-	ò IOPL	> IOPL	= 3
IOPL	-	-	-	= 3
IF ← 1	Y	Y		Y
#GP(0)			Y

Notes: - Don't care Blank Action not taken Y Action in Column 1 taken

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
		1

The IF flag is set.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the current privilege level is greater (has less privilege) than the I/O privilege level.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) as for protected mode.

Notes

In case of an NMI, trap, or fault following STI the interrupt will be taken before running the next sequential instruction in the code. For information on this instruction when using virtual mode extensions, see the Intel documentation.

STOS/STOSB/STOSW/STOSD - Store String Data

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
AA	STOS m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store AL in byte at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AB	STOS m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store AX in word at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AB	STOS m32				X	X	X	Store EAX in dword at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AA	STOSB	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store AL in byte at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AB	STOSW	X	X	X	X	X	X	Store AX in word at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]
AB	STOSD				X	X	X	Store EAX in dword at ES:[(E)DI], update [(E)DI]

Description

The STOS instruction transfers the contents of the AL, AX, or EAX register to the memory byte or word given by the destination register relative to the ES segment. The destination register is the DI register for an address- size attribute of 16 bits or the EDI register for an address-size attribute of 32 bits. The destination operand must be addressable from the ES register. A segment override is not possible. The address of the destination is determined by the contents of the destination register, not by the explicit operand of the STOS instruction. This operand is used only to validate ES segment addressability and to determine the data type. Load the correct index value into the destination register before running the STOS instruction. After the transfer is made, the (E)DI register is automatically updated. If the DF flag is 0 (the CLD instruction was run), the (E)DI register is incremented; if the DF flag is 1 (the STD instruction was executed), the (E )DI register is decremented. The (E)DI register is incremented or decremented by 1 if a byte is stored, by 2 if a word is stored, or by 4 if a doubleword is stored. The STOSB, STOSW, and STOSD instructions are synonyms for the byte, word, and doubleword STOS instructions, that do not require an operand. They are simpler to use, but provide no type or segment checking. The STOS instruction can be preceded by the REP prefix for a block fill of CX or ECX bytes, words, or doublewords. Refer to the REP instruction for further details.

Operation

IF AddressSize = 16 
THEN use ES:DI for DestReg 
ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *) use ES:EDI for DestReg;
FI;
IF byte type of instruction 
THEN 
  (ES:DestReg) ← AL;
  IF DF = 0 
  THEN DestReg ← DestReg + 1;
  ELSE DestReg ← DestReg - 1;
  FI;
ELSE IF OperandSize = 16 
  THEN 
    (ES:DestReg) ← AX;
    IF DF = 0 
    THEN DestReg ← DestReg + 2;
    ELSE DestReg ← DestReg - 2;
    FI;
  ELSE (* OperandSize = 32 *)
    (ES:DestReg) ← EAX;
    IF DF = 0 
    THEN DestReg ← DestReg + 4;
    ELSE DestReg ← DestReg - 4;
    FI;
  FI;
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the ES segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH. Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

STR - Store Task Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 00 /1	STR r/m16			X	X	X	X	Store task register to EA word

Description

The contents of the task register are copied to the two-byte register or memory location indicated by the effective address operand. The STR instruction is used only in operating system software. It is not used in application programs.

Operation

r/m ← task register;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions Interrupt 6; the STR instruction is not recognized in Real Address Mode. Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode.

Notes

When the destination is a 32-bit register, the 16-bit source operand is copied into the lower 16 bits of the destination register, and the upper 16 bits of the register are undefined. With a 16-bit register operand, only the lower 16 bits of the destination are affected (the upper 16 bits remain unchanged). With a memory operand, the source is written to memory as a 16- bit quantity, regardless of operand size. As a result, 32-bit software should always treat the destination as 16-bits and mask bits 16-31, if necessary.

SUB - Integer Subtraction

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
2C ib	SUB AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AL < AL - immediate byte
2D iw	SUB AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AX < AX - immediate word
2D id	SUB EAX,imm32				X	X	X	EAX < EAX - immediate dword
80 /5 ib	SUB r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	r/m8 < r/m8 - immediate byte
81 /5 iw	SUB r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	r/m16 < r/m16 - immediate word
81 /5 id	SUB r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	r/m32 < r/m32 - immediate dword
83 /5 ib	SUB r/m16,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	r/m16 < r/m16 - sign-extended immediate byte
83 /5 ib	SUB r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	r/m32 < r/m32 - sign-extended immediate byte
28 /r	SUB r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	r/m8 < r/m8 - byte register
29 /r	SUB r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	r/m16 < r/m16 - word register
29 /r	SUB r/m32,r32				X	X	X	r/m32 < r/m32 - dword register
2A /r	SUB r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	r8 < r8 - r/m byte
2B /r	SUB r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	r16 < r16 - r/m word
2B /r	SUB r32,r/m32				X	X	X	r32 < r32 - r/m dword

Description

The SUB instruction subtracts the second operand (SRC) from the first operand (DEST). The first operand is assigned the result of the subtraction, and the flags are set accordingly. When an immediate byte value is subtracted from a word operand, the immediate value is first sign-extended to the size of the destination operand.

Operation

IF SRC is a byte and DEST is a word or dword 
THEN DEST = DEST - SignExtend(SRC);
ELSE DEST ← DEST - SRC;
FI;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*			*	*	*	*	*

The OF, SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

TEST - Logical Compare

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
A8 ib	TEST AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate byte with AL
A9 iw	TEST AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate word with AX
A9 id	TEST EAX,imm32				X	X	X	AND immediate dword with EAX
F6 /0 ib	TEST r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate byte with r/m byte
F7 /0 iw	TEST r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND immediate word with r/m word
F7 /0 id	TEST r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	AND immediate dword with r/m dword
84 /r	TEST r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND byte register with r/m byte
85 /r	TEST r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	AND word register with r/m word
85 /r	TEST r/m32,r32				X	X	X	AND dword register with r/m dword

Description

The TEST instruction computes the bit-wise logical AND of its two operands. Each bit of the result is 1 if both of the corresponding bits of the operands are 1; otherwise, each bit is 0. The result of the operation is discarded and only the flags are modified.

Operation

DEST : = LeftSRC AND RightSRC;
CF ← 0;
OF ← 0;

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
0			*	*	?	*	0

The OF and CF flags are cleared; the SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

VERR, VERW - Verify a Segment for Reading or Writing

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 00 /4	VERR r/m16			X	X	X	X	Set ZF=1 if segment can be read, selector in r/m16
0F 00 /5	VERW r/m16			X	X	X	X	Set ZF=1 if segment can be written, selector in r/m16

Description

The two-byte register or memory operand of the VERR and VERW instructions contains the value of a selector. The VERR and VERW instructions determine whether the segment denoted by the selector is reachable from the current privilege level and whether the segment is readable (VERR) or writeable (VERW). If the segment is accessible, the ZF flag is set; if the segment is not accessible, the ZF flag is cleared. To set the ZF flag, the following conditions must be met:

• The selector must denote a descriptor within the bounds of the table (GDT or LDT); the selector must be "defined."
• The selector must denote the descriptor of a code or data segment (not that of a task state segment, LDT, or a gate).
• For the VERR instruction, the segment must be readable. For the VERW instruction, the segment must be a writeable data segment.
• If the code segment is readable and conforming, the descriptor privilege level (DPL) can be any value for the VERR instruction. Otherwise, the DPL must be greater than or equal to (have less or the same privilege as) both the current privilege level and the selector's RPL.

The validation performed is the same as if the segment were loaded into the DS, ES, FS, or GS register, and the indicated access (read or write) were performed. The ZF flag receives the result of the validation. The selector' s value cannot result in a protection exception, enabling the software to anticipate possible segment access problems.

Operation

IF segment with selector at (r/m) is accessible 
 with current protection level 
 AND ((segment is readable for VERR) OR 
   (segment is writable for VERW))
THEN ZF ← 1;
ELSE ZF ← 0;
FI;

Flags Affected

OF|DF|IF|SF|ZF|AF|PF|CF 
  |  |  |  |* |  |  |

The ZF flag is set if the segment is accessible, cleared if it is not.

Protected Mode Exceptions

Faults generated by illegal addressing of the memory operand that contains the selector; the selector is not loaded into any segment register, and no faults attributable to the selector operand are generated.

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments;
2. SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF( fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 6; the VERR and VERW instructions are not recognized in Real Address Mode.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

WAIT - Wait

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction         |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+-----------------------------
|9B        |WAIT                |X|X|X|X|X|X|Causes processor to check for
|          |                    | | | | | | |numeric exceptions

Description

WAIT causes the processor to check for pending unmasked numeric exceptions before proceeding. Protected Mode Exceptions

1. NM if both MP and TS in CR0 are set.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 7 if both MP and TS is CR0 are set.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. NM if both MP and TS in CR0 are set.

Notes

Coding WAIT after an ESC instruction ensures that any unmasked floating- point exceptions the instruction may cause are handled before the processor has a chance to modify the instruction's results. FWAIT is an alternate mnemonic for WAIT. Refer to the Intel documentation for more information about when to use WAIT (FWAIT).

WBINVD - Write-Back and Invalidate Cache

Details Table

|Encoding  |Instruction   |0|1|2|3|4|5|Description
|----------+--------------+-+-+-+-+-+-+--------------------------------------
|0F 09     |WBINVD        | | | | |X|X|Write-back and invalidate entire cache

Description

The internal cache is flushed, and a special-function bus cycle is issued, which indicates that external cache should write-back its contents to main memory. Another special-function bus cycle follows, directing the external cache to flush itself.

Operation

FLUSH INTERNAL CACHE 
SIGNAL EXTERNAL CACHE TO WRITE-BACK
SIGNAL EXTERNAL CACHE TO FLUSH 

Protected Mode Exceptions

The WBINVD instruction is a privileged instruction; #GP(0) if the current privilege level is not 0.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0); the WBINVD instruction is a privileged instruction.

Notes

INVD should be used with care. It does not write back modified cache lines; therefore, it can cause the data cache to become inconsistent with other memories in the system. Unless there is a specific requirement or benefit to invalidate a cache without writing back the modified lines (i.e., testing or fault recovery where cache coherency with main memory is not a concern), software should use the WBINVD instruction. This instruction is implementation-dependent; its function may be implemented differently on future Intel processors. It is the responsibility of hardware to respond to the external cache write -back and flush indications. This instruction is not supported on Intel386 processors. See the Intel documentation for information on detecting the processor type at runtime. See the Intel documentation for information on disabling the cache.

WRMSR - Write to Model Specific Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F 30	WRMSR						X	Write the value in EDX:EAX to Model Specific Register indicated by ECX

Description

The value in ECX specifies one of the 64-bit Model Specific Registers of the Pentium processor. The contents of EDX:EAX is copied into that Model-Specific Register. The high-order 32 bits are copied from EDX and the low-order 32 bits are copied from EAX. The following values are used to select model specific registers on the Pentium processor:

VALUE	REGISTER NAME	DESCRIPTION
00H	Machine Check Address	Stores address of cycle causing the exception
01H	Machine Check Type	Stores cycle type of cycle causing the exception

For other values used to perform cache, TLB, and BTB testing and performance monitoring, see the Intel documentation.

Operation

MSR[ECX] ← EDX:EAX;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if either the current privilege level is not 0 or the value in ECX does not specify a Model-Specific Register that is implemented in the Pentium processor.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the value in ECX does not specify a Model-Specific Register that is implemented in the Pentium processor. No error code is pushed.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if instruction execution is attempted.

Notes

Always set undefined or reserved bits to the value previously read. WRMSR is used to write the content of Model-Specific Registers that control functions for testability, execution tracing, performance monitoring, and machine check errors. Refer to the Pentium(TM) Processor Data Book for more information. The values 3H, 0FH, and values above 13H are reserved. Do not execute WRMSR with reserved values in ECX.

XADD - Exchange and Add

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
0F C0 /r	XADD r/m8,r8					X	X	Exchange byte register and r/m byte; load sum into r/m byte
0F C1 /r	XADD r/m16,r16					X	X	Exchange word register and r/m word; load sum into r/m word
0F C1 /r	XADD r/m32,r32					X	X	Exchange dword register and r/m dword; load sum into r/m dword

Description

The XADD instruction loads DEST into SRC, and then loads the sum of DEST and the original value of SRC into DEST.

Operation

TEMP ← SRC + DEST 
SRC ← DEST 
DEST ← TEMP 

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
*			*	*	*	*	*

The CF, PF, AF, SF, ZF, and OF flags are affected as if an ADD instruction had been executed.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #NM if either EM or TS in CR0 is set, #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in real-address mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Notes

This instruction can be used with a LOCK prefix. The Intel386 DX microprocessor does not implement this instruction. If this instruction is used, you should provide an equivalent code sequence that runs on an Intel386 DX processor as well. See the Intel documentation for details on how to detect a particular processor at runtime.

XCHG - Exchange Register/Memory with Register

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
90+rw	XCHG AX,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange word register with AX
90+rd	XCHG EAX,r32				X	X	X	Exchange dword register with EAX
90+rw	XCHG r16,AX	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange word register with AX
90+rd	XCHG r32,EAX				X	X	X	Exchange dword register with EAX
86 /r	XCHG r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange byte register with EA byte
86 /r	XCHG r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange byte register with EA byte
87 /r	XCHG r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange word register with EA word
87 /r	XCHG r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Exchange dword register with EA dword
87 /r	XCHG r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exchange word register with EA word
87 /r	XCHG r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Exchange dword register with EA dword

Description

The XCHG instruction exchanges two operands. The operands can be in either order. If a memory operand is involved, the LOCK# signal is asserted for the duration of the exchange, regardless of the presence or absence of the LOCK prefix or of the value of the IOPL.

Operation

temp ← DEST 
DEST ← SRC 
SRC ← temp 

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if either operand is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Note

XCHG can be used for BSWAP for 16-bit data.

XLAT/XLATB - Table Look-up Translation

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
D7	XLAT m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Set AL to memory byte DS:[(E)BX + unsigned AL]
D7	XLATB	X	X	X	X	X	X	Set AL to memory byte DS:[(E)BX + unsigned AL]

Description

The XLAT instruction changes the AL register from the table index to the table entry. The AL register should be the unsigned index into a table addressed by the DS:BX register pair (for an address-size attribute of 16 bits) or the DS:EBX register pair (for an address-size attribute of 32 bits ). The operand to the XLAT instruction allows for the possibility of a segment override. The XLAT instruction uses the contents of the BX register even if they differ from the offset of the operand. The offset of the operand should have been moved into the BX or EBX register with a previous instruction. The no-operand form, the XLATB instruction, can be used if the BX or EBX table will always reside in the DS segment.

Operation

IF AddressSize = 16 
THEN 
 AL ← (BX + ZeroExtend(AL))
ELSE (* AddressSize = 32 *)
 AL ← (EBX + ZeroExtend(AL));
FI;

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS(0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

XOR - Logical Exclusive OR

Details Table

Encoding	Instruction	0	1	2	3	4	5	Description
34 ib	XOR AL,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR immediate byte to AL
35 iw	XOR AX,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR immediate word to AX
35 id	XOR EAX,imm32				X	X	X	Exclusive-OR immediate dword to EAX
80 /6 ib	XOR r/m8,imm8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR immediate byte to r/m byte
81 /6 iw	XOR r/m16,imm16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR immediate word to r/mword
81 /6 id	XOR r/m32,imm32				X	X	X	Exclusive-OR immediate dword to r/m dword
83 /6 ib	XOR r/m16,imm8				X	X	X	XOR sign-extended immediate byte to r/m word
83 /6 ib	XOR r/m32,imm8				X	X	X	XOR sign-extended immediate byte with r/m dword
30 /r	XOR r/m8,r8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR byte register to r/m byte
31 /r	XOR r/m16,r16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR word register to r/m word
31 /r	XOR r/m32,r32				X	X	X	Exclusive-OR dword register to r/m dword
32 /r	XOR r8,r/m8	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR r/m byte to byte register
33 /r	XOR r16,r/m16	X	X	X	X	X	X	Exclusive-OR r/m word to word register
33 /r	XOR r32,r/m32				X	X	X	Exclusive-OR r/m dword to dword register

Description

The XOR instruction computes the exclusive OR of the two operands. Each bit of the result is 1 if the corresponding bits of the operands are different; each bit is 0 if the corresponding bits are the same. The answer replaces the first operand.

Operation

DEST ← LeftSRC XOR RightSRC 
CF ← 0 
OF ← 0 

Flags Affected

OF	DF	IF	SF	ZF	AF	PF	CF
0			*	*	?	*	0

The CF and OF flags are cleared; the SF, ZF, and PF flags are set according to the result; the AF flag is undefined.

Protected Mode Exceptions

1. GP(0) if the result is in a nonwritable segment; #GP(0) for an illegal memory operand effective address in the CS, DS, ES, FS, or GS segments; #SS (0) for an illegal address in the SS segment; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Real Address Mode Exceptions

Interrupt 13 if any part of the operand would lie outside of the effective address space from 0 to 0FFFFH.

Virtual 8086 Mode Exceptions

Same exceptions as in Real Address Mode; #PF(fault-code) for a page fault; #AC for unaligned memory reference if the current privilege level is 3.

Assembler Messages

This section describes all the messages produced by ALP at run time. Messages issued by the assembler have the following format:

[Coordinates] [Severity Type] [Message Number] [Message Content]

The following sections describe the various fields common to all assembler messages, and a complete description of each individual message is included.

Message Coordinates

Message coordinates (if present) appear as the first field within a message, and have one of two forms:

[Path]Filename(LLLL:CCCC):

[Path]Filename(LLLL,Macroname(LLLL,CCCC)):

Coordinates are displayed as part of a message if ALP is parsing an input stream and the event which caused the message to be diplayed is directly related to a specific location in the input. The coordinates show the user exactly where to look if action is required. The fact the ALP is parsing an input stream does not mean that coordinates will appear in a message; some messages may occur during parsing that are not a reference to the input stream.

• Filename

This is the name of the file containing the input token which caused the message to be generated. If this is the root source file whose name was passed on the assembler command line, the file name will be displayed exactly as specified by the user. If this is an INCLUDE file, it will be displayed exactly as specified in the INCLUDE directive, and the path name where the file was searched for and found (if any) will be prepended to the beginning. ALP does not query the operating system in an attempt to derive the full path name of a partially qualified file.

• Macroname

If the assembler is currently parsing tokens within a macro expansion, the name of the macro currently being expanded will appear in the coordinates.

• Line Number (LLLL)

The first number in parentheses is the line number within the source file where the referenced token is located; this refers to the outer-most point of invocation if a macro name is also given in the message coordinates. A line number value appearing within parentheses following a macro name refers to the innermost point of expansion (since macro expansions may be nested) and references the original definition of the macro.

• Column Number (CCCC)

The second number in parentheses is the column number of the first character of the referenced token within the source file or macro definition.

Message Severity Types

Every message displayed by ALP is assigned a specific type, and the type of message dictates the severity level. The following is a list of message types produced by ALP showing the type name (as it appears in the actual message), followed by a description of what caused the message, how severe it is, and the action taken by ALP after the message is generated.

Info: Informational message only; processing continues normally.

Warning: Questionable syntax or semantics; input file may be incorrect, but processing continues.

Error: Syntax or semantic error in input; continue processing, object output file is discarded.

Fatal: Unrecoverable user or environment error; terminate assembly prematurely after releasing resources and closing files.

Internal: Internal program logic error, abort immediately.

Usage: Incorrect command line syntax, abort.

When the assembler begins processing, the display of all warning messages is enabled; informational messages do not display unless they are requested . The display of both warning and informational messages may be controlled with the command line option M - Control Individual Messages or Groups See Message Control Options for more information on the behavior of assembler messages.

Message Numbers and Message Content

Messages numbers displayed by ALP have the following format:

ALPnnnn:

Message numbers always have a three-letter prefix that designates the component issuing the message (ALP), followed by a four digit decimal number given by nnnn. All messages issued by the assembler are uniquely numbered; however, not all messages displayed by the assembler will be accompanied by a formatted message number (for instance, the assembler banner).

Messages issued during assembler initialization, command line processing, or exception handling are numbered from 0 to 999. Other messages occur during input stream processing and are grouped according to their severity type: 1000 through 1999 for fatal errors, 3000 through 3999 for regular errors, 4000 through 4999 for warnings, and 5000 through 5999 for informational messages.

It should be noted that messages are numbered for reference only; it is not guaranteed that messages will be numbered identically for each subsequent assembler release, or that individual messages will be retained or remain unmodified in future releases.

Message Numbers 0-999: Internal, Usage, and Special Case Messages

Messages in this section normally occur during assembler initialization, when errors are encountered during command line processing, or when exceptional conditions occur that prevent the assembler from completing initialization or execution.

ALP0004: <signal> received, <assembler-name> is shutting down

ALP has handled a request from the operating system to abort execution. The type of abort request is noted in the text of the message. All open files will be closed and any incomplete output files will be deleted.

Recovery: If termination was requested by the user, no further action is necessary. Otherwise, the operating system may have sent an abort signal because of insufficient system resources.

ALP0005: Assertion failure, <reason>

This message is displayed when an internal self-check condition has been violated, and indicates an error in the internal programming logic of the assembler. This message should never occur.

Recovery: Note the conditions under which the error occurred, and if possible isolate a minimal test case that will reproduce the problem. Contact IBM.

ALP0942: -Lo:xxxxxxxxxxxx must be one each of "XYZLMICFOGDS"

This option specifies the sort order for the individual vertical listing file columns. Not all single character tags that uniquely identify each individual column were specified.

Recovery: All column tags must be specified in the argument field of this option, even when the display of one or more columns has been disabled.

ALP0981: Invalid or missing include path

The list of INCLUDE file directories was incorrectly specified.

ALP0991: Invalid option "<option>"

The command line parser encountered a character sequence on the command line that was interpreted as an option, but the option identifier itself was not recognized.

ALP0992: Option "<option>" not valid in global scope

An attempt was made to use an option in a situation that would cause ambiguities. As coded by the user, the option is only legal when applied to an individual filename.

Recovery: If the option syntax is correct, insure that it follows the filename to which it applies.

ALP0993: Option "<option>" not valid in local scope

An attempt was made to apply a global assembler option to an individual file.

Recovery: Global options must appear before any filenames; in most cases the usage of global options and filenames is a mutually exclusive operation.

ALP0994: Invalid argument in option "<option>"

In the argument field of a parameterized command line option, an argument of a specific type was expected, but an invalid token was encountered instead.

ALP0995: Expecting ":" or "=" in option "<option>"

A parameterized option was encountered, but no colon (:) or equal sign (=) followed the option identifier.

Recovery: Parameterized options must be immediately followed by a colon or equal sign with no intervening white space characters, followed by the option argument(s).

ALP0996: Invalid message number

An explicit message number specified with the -M option did not identify a message for which switching is enabled.

Recovery: Only warning and informational messages may switched on or off.

ALP0997: Invalid keyword "<keyword>" in option "<option>"

The referenced identifier was not a valid keyword; a keyword was expected in the context of the referenced option.

Message Numbers 1000-1999: Fatal Error Messages

Fatal errors typically occur when the assembler requests a resource from the operating system, but the request fails. This may or may not be due to user error, but the assembler was unable to correct the problem and execution is terminated after an orderly shutdown is performed.

ALP1101: Memory allocation error

The assembler attempted to dynamically allocate a block of storage, but the request was denied.

Recovery:

• Close any large or memory intensive processes
• Verify that sufficient paging space exists
• The host computer may have insufficient hardware resources

ALP1102: Too many error messages

This message is displayed when the assembler has reached the error limit threshold. Related Information:

• Me - Set Number of Errors Before Assembler Aborts

ALP1103: Error opening message output file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to open the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that the file exists and that read permission is allowed. Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1104: Input and message output filenames are identical

The assembler has detected an attempt to create an output file with a name identical to that of an input file; the operation was not allowed.

The assembler only detects this condition when the names are an identical match , using a case-sensitive comparison algorithm.

Recovery: Ensure that the correct command line options have been used. Internal variables may have been incorrectly initialized using options that affect automatic file name generation, thus causing a filename collision.

Related Information:

• Internal Variables
• File Control Options

ALP1401: Error opening listing output file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to open the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that the file exists and that read permission is allowed. Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1402: Error writing listing output file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to write to the referenced file. Recovery: Ensure that there is sufficient space on the target file system, and no other processes are accessing or modifying the file. Verify that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1403: Input and listing output filenames are identical

The assembler has detected an attempt to create an output file with a name identical to that of an input file; the operation was not allowed. The assembler only detects this condition when the names are an identical match , using a case-sensitive comparison algorithm. Recovery: Ensure that the correct command line options have been used. Internal variables may have been incorrectly initialized using options that affect automatic file name generation, thus causing a filename collision. Related Information:

• Internal Variables
• File Control Options

ALP1601: Error creating object output file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to create the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that the target drive and directory exist and that create and write permission have been granted. Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1602: Error writing object output file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to write to the referenced file. Recovery: Ensure that there is sufficient space on the target file system, and no other processes are accessing or modifying the file. Verify that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1603: Input and object output filenames are identical

The assembler has detected an attempt to create an output file with a name identical to that of an input file; the operation was not allowed. The assembler only detects this condition when the names are an identical match , using a case-sensitive comparison algorithm. Recovery: Ensure that the correct command line options have been used. Internal variables may have been incorrectly initialized using options that affect automatic file name generation, thus causing a filename collision. Related Information:

• Internal Variables
• File Control Options

ALP1801: Error opening source file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to open the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that the file exists and that read permission is allowed. Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1802: Error reading source file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to read from the referenced file. Recovery: Ensure that the file exists, that the filelength is non-zero, and that read permission is allowed. Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1803: Circular text substitution

The preprocessor has detected an attempt to perform a recursive text substitution operation, such as an INCLUDE file "including" itself, or a macro expanding itself.

ALP1804: Internal buffer overflow

The preprocessor has overflowed an internal memory buffer while trying to process the referenced token. Recovery: Reduce the number of whitespace characters preceding the token or the number of characters in the token itself.

ALP1901: Unexpected character <character-value> in identifier

The command line parser was expecting an identifier but immediately encountered a non-identifier character. Command line parsing was prematurely terminated.

ALP1902: Unexpected character <character-value> in keyword

The command line parser was expecting an keyword but immediately encountered a non-identifier character. Command line parsing was prematurely terminated.

ALP1903: Error opening response file "<file>"; <reason>

An error occurred while attempting to open the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that the file exists and that read permission is allowed. Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP1904: Invalid filename in "@" directive

The command line parser was processing an @Filename (command line response file) directive, but the token following the "@" character did not constitute a valid filename. Recovery: Ensure that only valid filename characters are used.

ALP1905: Unexpected character or terminator <character-value>

The command line parser encountered either an illegal control character or the end of the command line input stream before the current command parameter was completely parsed.

ALP1906: Numeric constant is invalid; <reason>

An error occurred while converting the referenced numeric constant to an internal representation.

Message Numbers 3000-3999: Error Messages

Error messages are typically issued during processing of the input stream and indicate a syntax or semantic error in the user program. The assembler will continue processing after an error has occurred, but since the input stream was incorrect an output object file will not be created.

ALP3201: Can't <verb> <expr_type> <from/to/by/with> <expr_type>

This message appears during expression processing when a binary operation was performed on two primary expressions of incompatible type. The message replacement parameters indicate the attempted operation.

ALP3202: Overflow or division by zero

Either the expression evaluated to a quantity that is not representable in the current expression word size, or an expression contained a binary division (/) or modulus (MOD) operation where the denominator expression was evaluated to be zero.

ALP3203: Can't take offset of expression

The expression to which the OFFSET operator was applied did not contain a constant or relocatable address. Recovery: The offset operator may not be applied to register values. If the offset expression is applied to a quoted string, ensure that the string length does not exceed the length of what is representable as a constant value, given the word size of the enclosing segment (2 for USE16 segments, 4 for USE32 segments).

ALP3204: Expecting relocatable expression

An expression was used in a context that required a segment or group relative address, but one was not supplied.

ALP3205: Expecting primary expression

The assembler was expecting a terminal operand (an identifier, register, or constant) or an expression enclosed in parentheses () or square brackets [ ]; instead, an unexpected token was encountered at the referenced location.

ALP3206: Expecting "]"

An opening bracket "[" was encountered and the subsequent expression was fully parsed, but a closing bracket "]" was not encountered.

ALP3207: Expecting ")"

An opening parenthesis "(" was encountered and the subsequent expression was fully parsed, but a closing parenthesis ")" was not encountered.

ALP3208: Forward reference needs segment override or FAR PTR

An expression contained a forward reference to a location that was later determined to be of FAR distance. When forward references are used, the assembler makes default assumptions about the eventual definition of undefined labels used in the expression; such definitions are never assumed to be in a different segment. Use of such an expression can cause differences between the code generated on the first and second passes of the assembler. Recovery: Qualify the expression with a distance override (FAR, FAR16, or FAR32) or segment override (:) operator.

ALP3210: Illegal operation on relocatable value

A unary operator was applied to an expression containing a relocatable address or indirect memory expression, but the operator may only be used with constant values.

ALP3211: Illegal type expression

A "<type> PTR" type conversion expression was encountered, but the expression given by <type> was not a valid qualified type.

ALP3212: Operands must be relative to same segment or group

A binary operation was performed on two relocatable expressions, but the expressions were not declared relative to the same segment.

ALP3213: Illegal digit(s) for current .RADIX

A literal integer constant was not qualified with a prefix or suffix (radix override), but was specified using digits that are not valid for the current radix. For instance, use of the literal 1234 is illegal when the current radix value is 2.

ALP3214: Value cannot be negative

A negative-value expression was encountered where only positive numbers are allowed, such as the count-value for the DUP operator, the field-width entry in a RECORD definition, or the shift-value in the SHL or SHR operators.

ALP3215: Expression cannot be forward-referenced

The referenced expression is used in a context where an undefined or forward-referenced value prevents the assembler from completing the operation or generating a reliable construct. This is the case during the declaration of user-defined types or where the value of the location counter will depend on the results of the expression.

ALP3216: Expression does not have an operand size

The SIZE operator was used on an expression for which no operand size exists (a simple number value, for example). The SIZE operator may only be used on expressions that have an operand size attribute, such as a variable name or type name expression.

ALP3217: Record tag expected

A left-hand identifier operand was followed by a right-hand expression list operand enclosed in angle brackets or braces. The construct was parsed as a record constant, but could not be evaluated because the left-hand operand was not a record tag name previously defined with the RECORD directive.

ALP3218: Numeric constant is invalid; <reason>

An error occurred while converting the referenced numeric constant to an internal representation.

ALP3219: Expression must be a constant value

The assembler issues this message whenever a constant expression is required, but the expression supplied contained relocation information or machine register references.

ALP3220: Undefined symbol "<identifier>"

This message appears when an identifier was referenced in an expression or type declaration, and the identifier has no external declaration or definition or is forward-referenced.

ALP3221: Expecting "," or ")"

This message appears when processing a DUP expression list and an unexpected token was encountered. The parser was expecting the list to be continued with a comma or terminated with a closing parentheses. Recovery: Check for possible unbalanced parentheses ().

ALP3222: Expecting "("

The DUP operator was encountered but was not followed by an opening parentheses to begin the duplicated expression list. Recovery: The duplicated expression list following the DUP operator must be enclosed in parentheses (), even if the expression list only contains a single item.

ALP3223: Expecting variable name

The LENGTH operator may only be applied to data labels (variable names). LENGTH returns the number of items allocated to the data label when the label was defined in a data allocation statement.

ALP3224: Expecting "," or "<closing brace/bracket>"

This message appears within a bracketed expression list where the assembler was expecting a comma to introduce the next initializer expression, or a closing brace or angle bracket to terminate the initializer expression list.

ALP3225: Register-indirect expression illegal in this context

A constant or relocatable address expression was expected but the expression also contained at least one machine register. Such an address may be calculated only at run time, and is illegal in this context.

ALP3226: Expression must have structure or union type

The expression to the left of a structure member selection operator (.) did not have a structure or union type. The assembler cannot evaluate the member expression to the right of the selection operator unless the left hand operand has an associated structure or union type. Recovery: If the left hand operand must be something other than an explicit structure or union variable (such as a register-indirect expression like [EBX]), then use the PTR operator to convert the left hand operand to the appropriate type.

ALP3227: Right operand is not a member of structure or union

The expression to the right of a structure member selection operator (.) was not a member of the left-hand structure or union expression. Recovery: The right-hand operand must be an identifier named in the type definition for the structure or union.

ALP3228: Invalid identifier type for this operation

The symbol type of the referenced identifier was not valid in this context. Recovery: This could happen if a text macro name was used in a context where macro expansions are not performed.

ALP3229: Expression type not valid in this context

The referenced expression evaluated to a type that is not valid for the context in which it was used. An example of this would be the use of a segment name or group name where a data label was expected.

Recovery: Review the expression-types allowed by the statement or clause where the referenced expression was used, and modify the construct accordingly.

ALP3301: Label must be followed by a directive

A user identifier appeared in the label field, but the end of line was encountered before an assembler directive was specified to give the label a definition.

Recovery: Code labels must be followed by a single colon (:) or double colon (::) on the same line as the label itself. Named assembler directives must appear on the same line as the associated label, or the line continuation (\) character must follow the label to create a single logical line. Check for a possible misspelled identifier or keyword. Verify that the identifier was specified using the correct uppercase and lowercase letters if case sensitive assembly is in effect.

ALP3302: Expecting label, directive, or mnemonic

The token referenced in the error message was unexpected. This error occurs when the first token on the line is not a valid label, directive, or mnemonic, or when a valid label has been encountered but was not followed by a valid directive or mnemonic.

Recovery: If this message references an identifier, check that it was spelled correctly, or that the identifier was specified using the correct uppercase and lowercase letters if case sensitive assembly is in effect.

ALP3303: Can't be preceded by data label

The referenced token is either an instruction mnemonic or a user identifier that appears after a label. If the referenced token is an instruction mnemonic, then the preceding label must be followed by a single colon (:) or double colon (::). Data labels may not be used to refer to instructions. Otherwise, it is invalid to have two labels appearing in succession. Recovery: Check for misspellings in either identifier, and that the identifiers were specified using the correct uppercase and lowercase letters if case sensitive assembly is in effect.

ALP3501: Address size mismatch

This message indicates one of the following:

• An indirect memory expression contained a mixtre of 16-bit or 32-bit base or index registers. This prevents the assembler from determining the address size of the expresson, and is illegal.
• The instruction performs an unalterable implicit operation which conflicts with the operands supplied.

ALP3502: Invalid register expression

A processor register was specified using indexed notation (i.e., "REG(X)"), but the expression in parentheses was out of range and did not refer to a valid register.

ALP3503: Can't use this register with scale factor

In an indirect memory expression, the scaling operator (*) was applied to a register for which the processor does not support a scaling operation. A scaling factor may only be used on 80386 or later processors, and only in 32-bit address expressions. Within this context, only the EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, EDI, ESI, and EBP registers are valid. A scaling factor may not be applied to the ESP register.

ALP3504: Illegal target of self relative pointer

The SHORT operator was used, but the expression to which it was applied was not a simple self relative displacement. This can occur if the expression is a constant, data label, or indirect memory operand.

ALP3505: Invalid mnemonic/operand combination

This message appears when a valid mnemonic has been recognized and all operand expressions have been correctly parsed, but the assembler was unable to combine the results into a form that it could associate with a valid instruction encoding. Recovery: This usually indicates that one or more operand expressions were not correctly specified. Verify such factors as:

• Correctly specified operand sizes
• Register combinations allowable for this instruction
• Labels or identifiers are of the correct type
• Correct number of operands

ALP3506: Register combination invalid with <number>-bit expression

For 80386 processors or greater, both 16-bit and 32-bit effective addresses are supported, but the two modes differ in the register combinations that are allowed for indirect addressing. The expression used a combination that was invalid for the referenced address size. For expressions that refer to 16-bit (USE16) memory locations, only a single base register (BX or BP) and/or a single index register (DI or SI) may be used. For expressions that refer to 32-bit (USE32) memory locations, only a single base register (EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, ESP, EBP, EDI, ESI) and/or a single index register (EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, EBP, EDI, ESI) may be used; no single register may appear more than once in a given expression.

ALP3507: Scaling factor must be 1, 2, 4, or 8

The processor only supports the scaling factors referenced in the message.

ALP3508: Invalid use of register

One of the following illegal conditions occurred:

• An attempt was made to use an unsupported register in an indirect memory expression (for example, [AH]).
• An attempt was made to combine a register with other terms to form an indirect memory expression, and the register was not enclosed in square brackets [ ].
• A register argument was expected and correctly parsed in an assembler directive, but the referenced register cannot be legally used in this particular context.

ALP3509: Multiple base registers

An indirect memory expression contained a combination of registers that was invalid for the selected addressing mode. More than one register was evaluated as a base register by the assembler; the processor only supports a single base register within register indirect addressing mode. For expressions that refer to 16-bit (USE16) memory locations, only BX and BP are valid base registers. For expressions that refer to 32-bit (USE32) memory locations, only EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, ESP, EBP, EDI, and ESI are valid base registers.

ALP3510: Multiple index registers

An indirect memory expression contained a combination of registers that was invalid for the selected addressing mode. More than one register was evaluated as an index register by the assembler; the processor only supports a single index register within register indirect addressing mode. For expressions that refer to 16-bit (USE16) memory locations, only DI and SI are valid index registers. For expressions that refer to 32-bit (USE32) memory locations, only EAX, EBX, ECX, EDX, EBP, EDI, and ESI are valid index registers.

ALP3511: Multiple scaling factors

In an indirect memory expression, the scaling operator (*) was applied to more than one register term. The processor does not support more that one scaling factor within a single effective address.

ALP3512: Near target cannot be in different code segment

A JMP or CALL instruction specified a near target that was defined in a different segment, but the segments containing the instruction and the target were not named together in a GROUP directive. An instruction and its near target cannot be in different segments (addressed by the CS register) at run time.

Recovery: If the instruction was otherwise properly coded, use the GROUP directive to collect the segments together so that they will be accessible at run time with the same CS register value.

ALP3513: Need size for operand

The instruction operand list did not specify a size for the operation, and the assembler is unable to select a default instruction encoding because multiple variations exist.

Recovery: As size may be assigned to one or more of the operands by using the <type> PTR override operator.

ALP3514: Cannot establish near target without ASSUME CS:

When running the under MASM 5.10 emulation, the assembler requires the code segment register (CS) to have an ASSUME setting for the currently opened segment before it will allow the creation of explicit near code labels.

Recovery: Insert an "ASSUME CS:SegName" statement at the beginning of the segment before the appearance of any near code labels.

ALP3515: Code generation outside of segment boundaries

A processor instruction was encountered, but no program segment has been opened.

Recovery: Place all processor instructions within a named program segment.

ALP3516: Target is out of range by <displacement> bytes(s)

The instruction references a code label or address using a self-relative displacement (a signed value relative to the address of the next instruction), but the target address requires a displacement value that is too large to be encoded into the instruction.

Recovery: If the SHORT operator was used in the operand field, remove it. If the instruction is of the "conditional jump" variety, it may be necessary to transform it into a "jump around a jump" by inverting the condition under which the jump is performed, then changing the target so that it references an address immediately following a "direct jump" instruction, which must be inserted and coded so that it references the original target location.

ALP3517: Selected processor does not support this operand

An attempt was made to use an operand (such as a machine register) that does not exist on the processor for which code is being generated.

Recovery: Either use a processor selection directive to select the correct target processor, or modify the referenced operand to one that is supported on the target machine.

ALP3518: Can't access data, no ASSUME or segment override

One of the following conditions occurred:

• An attempt was made to reference a named memory location that exists in a segment for which no ASSUME statement is in effect
• An attempt was made to combine two terms in a binary expression that are relative to different segments.

ALP3519: Too many operands

This message appears during processing of an instruction operand list. More operand expressions were encountered than is valid for the instruction set of the target architecture.

Recovery: Remove the offending token(s) beginning at the referenced location.

ALP3520: Segment address size not supported on this processor

A 16-bit processor selection directive was encountered within a 32-bit segment, or an attempt was made to reopen a 32-bit segment after switching to a 16-bit processor type. The selected processor cannot support 32-bit segments.

ALP3521: Register expected

While processing an assembler directive an unexpected token was encountered at the referenced location. A processor register was expected instead.

ALP3522: Selected processor does not support this instruction

A mnemonic or mnemonic/operand combination has been used that is not supported by the processor for which the assembler is currently generating object code.

Recovery: Verify that the correct target processor has been selected with one of the processor selection directives, or that the correct instruction form has been coded. Since ALP does not perform some of the same implicit conversions that MASM 5.10 does, use of the <type> PTR conversion operator may be required to avoid certain type-mismatch problems.

ALP3523: Cannot change expression word size

After the expression word size was explicitly set with an OPTION EXPRxx directive, an attempt was made to alter the setting with another OPTION directive, or by switching to a 32-bit processor after an explicit OPTION EXPR16 was issued. Once set, the expression word size cannot be altered.

ALP3601: Filename expected

The INCLUDELIB directive was used, but an error occurred while attempting to parse the filename parameter.

Recovery: Verify that only legal filename characters are used. If the filename appears as a quoted string literal, verify that the literal uses legal syntax according to the rules for quoted strings.

ALP3602: Floating-point initializer illegal with integer variable

A floating point initializer was used on a variable that was not of type DD , DQ, DT, REAL4, REAL8, or REAL10.

ALP3603: Integer initializer illegal with floating-point variable

An integer initializer was used on a variable that was of type REAL4, REAL8 , or REAL10. Only floating-point initializers can be used with variables having these types.

ALP3604: Expression has no effect

During a data allocation directive, an attempt was made to initialize an item using an expression that was not correctly evaluated.

Recovery: This may indicate an error in the internal assembler logic. Note the conditions of the error, and contact IBM.

ALP3605: String is empty

During a data allocation directive, an attempt was made to initialize an item using a quoted string expression that contained no data.

Recovery: Quoted strings must contain at least one character value, otherwise the expression is illegal.

ALP3606: Symbol "<identifier> was never defined

An identifier was declared with a GROUP or PUBLIC directive, but was never given a full definition. This condition prevents the assembler from writing the appropriate records to the output object file. Recovery: Segments declared in a GROUP directive must defined in a SEGMENT directive. Identifiers declared with the PUBLIC directive must be defined as a code label, data label, or absolute symbolic constant.

ALP3607: Value not addressable

The expression following the END directive did not evaluate to segment relative address. The expression must refer to a memory location to which the operating system loader can pass control when the program is executed.

Recovery: Ensure that the expression contains no machine registers, and that it references a value relative to a segment defined within the module.

ALP3608: Segment size exceeds 64K limit

The amount of data emitted into the current (16-bit) segment has exceeded 65536. No object file can be produced under this condition, and the current location counter has been wrapped back to zero.

Recovery: Reduce the amount of code or data contained in this segment, or move some of the information to another segment.

ALP3701: Argument expected

While processing a directive that accepts a list of comma separated arguments, at least one argument followed by a comma was parsed, but no additional argument was encountered before the end of the line.

ALP3702: Can't override array with single item

Within a structure variable instantiation, an incorrect attempt was made to override the default initializer of a structure member. The structure member was defined to be of type array (having been initialized with a character string or list of expressions enclosed in brackets), and the overriding expression in the structure instantiation was a single numeric expression.

Recovery: Array members can only be overridden using a quoted character string or a bracketed list of numeric expressions.

ALP3703: .RADIX value must be one of: 2, 8, 10, or 16

Self-explanatory.

ALP3704: Can't nest initializers

This message appears when a structure instantiation contained a nested override initializer within brackets, and OPTION OLDSTRUCTS was in effect. Nested structures are not allowed when the assembler is operating in this mode.

ALP3705: Colon expected

Self-explanatory.

ALP3706: Expecting "<" or "{"

When a structure or record variable is allocated, the assembler expects one or more initializer expressions to follow the structure or record type name. Initializer expressions must be enclosed in angle brackets or braces, but an unexpected token was encountered at the referenced location.

ALP3707: Initializer too long or incorrect type

Within the initializer list of a structure instantiation, one of the following conditions occurred:

• An attempt was made to initialize a structure member with a character string override that exceeded the length of the member definition.
• The initializer expression type did not match that of the structure member item being initialized.

ALP3708: Invalid ALIGN setting

A zero or incorrect value was specified as the argument to the ALIGN directive.

ALP3709: Previous definition prevents external attribute

An attempt was made to declare an identifier as being external to this module, but a previous conflicting definition already exists. The operation is disallowed.

ALP3710: Syntax error; unexpected token

The referenced token is not valid for the construct being parsed. The assembler could not attempt further processing or diagnosis of the construct.

ALP3711: Previous definition prevents change in global visibility

One of the following conditions has occurred:

• The PUBLIC directive or keyword was used to export an identifier, but the identifier has already been declared with attributes that prevent it from being exported.
• A PUBLIC directive was used on a procedure name, but the PRIVATE keyword was used in the PROC directive that defined the procedure.

Recovery: Verify that the identifier does not appear in a COMM or EXTERN declaration, and that the identifier is a valid code or data label. Insure that the PUBLIC declaration appears before the identifier it references, and that the declaration is processed by the assembler on the first pass.

ALP3712: "<token>" must be a segment name

This message appears during processing of the GROUP directive when one of the arguments was not a valid segment name.

Recovery: Only identifiers defined using the SEGMENT directive are valid arguments to the GROUP directive. If the message is referencing an identifier, verify that it is indeed the name of a valid segment. Verify that the identifier was specified using the correct uppercase and lowercase letters if case sensitive assembly is in effect.

ALP3713: Label outside of segment boundaries

This message appears when a label definition appears outside of any enclosing segment. The label is an assembler alias for a segment relative machine address; such an address cannot be assigned to the label unless it appears inside of a program segment. This condition is an error, and must be corrected.

Recovery: Place the definition within a valid segment.

ALP3714: Directive must be named

This message appears when a directive was encountered but was not preceded by a label. A label is required for this directive.

Recovery: Precede the directive with a valid identifier.

ALP3715: Must specify all columns in .LIST ORDER

The .LIST ORDER directive did not specify a position for every possible column. All column names must appear in the list.

ALP3716: Listing control stack is empty

This message appears when the user issues a .LIST POP directive and there are no listing environment entries on the stack.

Recovery: A matching .LIST PUSH directive must be issued before .LIST POP may be used.

ALP3717: Processor mnemonic used as a label

This message is issued when a processor instruction mnemonic is used as an identifier. The severity of this message may be relaxed from Error to Warning in certain circumstances by using the +Sk command line switch.

Related Information:

• #Sk - Control Use of Reserved Words as Labels

ALP3718: Misplaced ENDP; no open PROC

This error occurs when the ENDP (end procedure) directive was encountered, but there is no procedure currently open.

Recovery: The PROC directive must be used to open a procedure before the ENDP directive can be used.

ALP3719: No closing bracket

An opening bracket "[" was encountered within a directive or expression, but a matching close bracket "]" was never supplied, or was misplaced.

ALP3720: Data allocation outside of segment boundaries

A data definition directive was encountered, but no program segment has been opened.

Recovery: Place all data allocation directives within a named program segment.

ALP3721: Operation illegal within structure or union

An attempt was made to use a directive or construct that is illegal within the context of a structure definition.

Recovery: Processor instructions are not allowed in structure definitions, and only a subset of assembler directives are legal in this context.

ALP3722: Expression is not a segment or group

One of the following illegal conditions occurred:

• A segment override expression (using the colon (:) operator) did not contain a valid segment register, segment name or group name expression on the left side of the colon operator.
• An ASSUME directive contained an expression that did not evaluate to a valid segment or group name. The argument to the ASSUME directive specified a machine segment register, which may only be associated with a segment or group name.

Recovery: Verify the correct spelling of either the register argument or the segment name or group name expression.

ALP3723: ON or OFF expected

A listing control directive was encountered where the value of a flag is being manipulated; the ON or OFF keywords are the only values acceptable in this context.

ALP3724: ON, OFF, or BLANK expected

A listing control directive was encountered where the display or non-display of an individual column is being determined; the ON, OFF, or BLANK keywords are the only values acceptable in this context.

ALP3725: Phase error between passes

The address assigned to a label on pass one of the assembler had a different value on the second pass. This usually indicates that a forward reference to a label was not fully qualified, and the eventual definition of the label was different than what was assumed by the assembler on the first pass. On the second pass, the assembler did not need to make any assumptions about the attributes of the symbol, but the resulting generation of object code caused a discrepancy in the value of the location counter.

Recovery: Use the listing control command line options to request a listing for both pass one and pass two of the assembler; use this listing to compare location counter values prior to the point where the phase error occurred. This will reveal the instruction that caused the location counter to become unsynchronized.

Related Information:

• #Lp - Generate Listing on Specific Pass

ALP3726: Symbol already defined as different type

An identifier has been redeclared to have attributes that conflict with a previous declaration or definition.

Recovery: If this is an external declaration (using an EXTRN or COMM directive) referencing a data variable, ensure that the type specifier has been correctly respecified. Verify that the variable has not already been defined within this module. External declarations for data labels or near code labels appearing within segment boundaries must not reappear within the boundaries of a different segment. Labels appearing outside of segment boundaries inherit the default address size (USE16 or USE32), and must not reappear within a segment having a conflicting address size. Far code labels may not be redeclared with conflicting address sizes.

ALP3727: PROC name mismatch

The ENDP directive was used to close the current procedure, but the name used in the ENDP directive did not match the name specified in the matching PROC directive.

ALP3728: Symbol redeclared relative to different segment

A data label or near code label appearing in an external declaration was redeclared in a different segment (or outside of segment boundaries) and conflicts with a previous declaration or definition.

Recovery: Data labels or near code labels appearing within segment boundaries must not reappear within the boundaries of a different segment. Labels appearing outside of segment boundaries inherit the default address size (USE16 or USE32), and must not reappear within a segment having a conflicting address size.

ALP3729: Attribute mismatch during reopen of segment

An existing segment was reopened using different or conflicting attributes.

Recovery: All identically named SEGMENT directives must be declared with the same attribute list. If an address size attribute (USE16 or USE32) was not explicitly specified in the SEGMENT directive, verify that the default segment word size was not altered between segment declarations with a processor selection directive.

ALP3730: No segment, structure, or union opened as "<identifier>"

The ENDS directive was used, but no segment, structure, or union was open ( or did not match the referenced name) and thus could not be terminated.

Recovery: If a name was given in the message, verify that it matches the name used in the associated SEGMENT, STRUC, or UNION directive. Verify that nested occurrences of SEGMENT, STRUC, or UNION are paired with a matching ENDS directive.

ALP3731: Identifier expected

A directive or expression operator was used such that an identifier was expected, but none was supplied.

Recovery: Check for a possible misspelled identifier; Verify that the identifier was specified using the correct uppercase and lowercase letters if case sensitive assembly is in effect. Verify that the identifier is not a reserved keyword.

ALP3732: Reserved symbol "<identifier>" cannot be created or modified

An invalid operation was performed on a reserved identifier. One of the following conditions occurred:

• An attempt was made through an EQU (or =) directive to alter the value of a predefined identifier. Unless documented otherwise, this is an illegal operation.
• The assembler attempted the deferred creation of a reserved symbol, but a user-defined identifier already exists with the same name and has conflicting attributes.

ALP3733: Symbol redefinition error

An attempt was made to redefine an identifier in a context where redefinitions are not allowed. Redefinitions are allowed only for text macros and assembler variables assigned using the equal (=) directive.

ALP3734: Too many initializers

A bracketed expression list within a structure instantiation or record constant contained too many comma-separated expressions. The number of initializer expressions exceeded the number of elements in the structure or record definition.

ALP3735: Qualified type or type keyword expected

This message appears when a type expression or a COMM, EXTRN, or LABEL directive was expecting a type keyword, but none was supplied.

ALP3736: Unexpected text in statement

An assembler directive was fully parsed and recognized, but invalid information was encountered at the referenced location.

ALP3737: <text>

This assembler issues this message to display user defined text when the ECHO or %OUT directives are encountered.

ALP3738: Symbol redefinition has different value

An attempt was made to redefine an EQU symbol to value which differs from a previous definition. EQU symbols may have multiple definitions only if they have identical constant values.

ALP3739: Directive illegal outside of segment boundaries

The referenced directive performs a segment-relative operation and may only be used inside of segment boundaries.

ALP3740: Alignment value must be a power of 2

The expression argument given in the ALIGN directive did not evaluate to a power of 2 (2, 4, 8, etc.).

ALP3741: Alignment value not valid with current segment alignment

The referenced alignment factor was less than the alignment factor specified in the SEGMENT declaration containing the ALIGN or EVEN statement . This condition is illegal because the assembler cannot guarantee that the linker will not invalidate the requested alignment when it exercises its right to position the entire segment according to the alignment factor given in the enclosing SEGMENT declaration.

Recovery: Respecify either the aligment factor or the SEGMENT delaration so that the segment alignment is greater than or equal to any alignment factor requested therein.

ALP3742: Redefinition has different number of fields

A RECORD type redefinition did not contain the same number of fields as a previous definition.

ALP3743: Redefinition has different value

A redefinition construct was encountered (such as a type definition directive) where the redefined value did not match that of a previous definition. Redefinitions are allowed for this particular construct, but they must restate the same value given in the original definition.

ALP3744: Too many bits in record definition

The referenced record definition exceeded the maximum allowable value of 32 bits.

ALP3745: Record tag or fieldname expected

The operand of the MASK or WIDTH operators must be an identifier defined with the RECORD directive. This identifier must be either the tag name of the record itself, or one of the field name entries defined within the body of the RECORD directive.

ALP3746: Value is out of range

The value of the referenced expression is not representable, requires too many significant bits to be stored, or lies outside the range of legal values for this context.

ALP3747: Mismatch of segment address sizes in group

A group was declared to contain segments of differing address sizes. A group may contain either USE16 or USE32 segments, but not a combination of both.

ALP3748: Segment already a member of group "<group-name>"

An attempt was made to assign a segment to more than one parent group.

ALP3749: Directive requires use of .MODEL

A simplified segmentation operation was encountered but a .MODEL directive was never processed.

ALP3750: PROC must immediately precede LOCAL

A LOCAL assembler directive was encountered, and one of the following occurred:

• The LOCAL directive was not enclosed within a PROC/ENDP procedure block.
• The LOCAL directive was positioned within a procedure block, but other assembler directives or instructions were encountered between the PROC directive and the LOCAL directive.

ALP3751: Operand has incorrect size

The size given for an operand was incorrect, or did not match that of a destination or target operand where it is to be used.

ALP3752: Mismatch in <attribute> attribute

The value of an attribute specified in a redeclaration or redefinition did not match the value given in the original declaration or definition. The body of the message indicates the type of attribute that is mismatched, and the assembler follows this message with two 5704 informational messages showing the coordinates and values of the mismatched constructs.

ALP3753: Name collision caused by promotion from inner scope

During a definition of a structure (or union) type, a field identifier defined at the outer (current) scope had the same name as a field defined in a promoted inner scope (one created through the use of an unnamed imbedded structure). When a structure type is used to create an unnamed field within another structure type, all of the field names from the inner structure are "promoted", or made visible to the outer defining scope.

Recovery: One of the field identifier names must be altered to avoid the name collision. Alternatively, the unnamed imbedded structure may be given an explicit field name, in which case its own fields are no longer promoted, and fully-qualified references must be used to reach them from within expressions.

ALP3754: Cannot determine calling convention

A procedure was defined to accept arguments passed on the stack by a calling routine, but no language attribute was specified or assumed for the procedure. The language attribute determines the calling convention, which in turn defines the order that arguments are pushed onto the stack.

Recovery: Use one of the following constructs:

• Specify an explicit language keyword in the body of the PROC directive.
• Specify a .MODEL directive with a language keyword argument.
• Specify an OPTION LANGUAGE directive.

ALP3801: Argument expected

When processing one of the EQU, IRP, IRPC, FOR, or FORC macro directives, the required argument immediately following the directive was missing or incorrectly specified.

Recovery: Modify the referenced token so that it is a valid argument for the directive. If this directive appears within a nested macro expansion, check to see that correct arguments were passed to outer level macros, or that outer level macro definitions are correct.

ALP3802: EXITM outside of macro

The EXITM keyword was encountered outside the context of a macro body.

Recovery: Verify that unexpected conditional assembly results are not affecting the block structure of the program. The EXITM keyword may not be used outside the scope of a macro body.

ALP3803: Comma expected

Self-explanatory. This message is displayed for any preprocessor directive that requires a comma where one was not supplied.

ALP3804: Extra data on line

This message appears any time the preprocessor has parsed a correctly formed preprocessor directive, but additional token(s) (other than comments were encountered before the end of line was reached.

Recovery: Remove the offending token(s) beginning at the referenced location.

ALP3805: Filename expected

This message appears when an INCLUDE preprocessor directive did not contain a properly formed filename. The INCLUDE directive is ignored.

ALP3806: <text>

This is the message printed as part of a conditional error directive; if one of these directives is processed and the user has included text information to be printed, it will appear in the <text> field of the message. If no user text was specified, this parameter will be empty and the message will contain no additional text.

Recovery: This was a forced error.

ALP3807: Identifier expected

This message appears when a conditional preprocessor directive was expecting an identifier and one was not supplied.

ALP3808: Reserved macro "<macro-name>" cannot be redefined

The assembler defines the referenced identifier for its own purposes; it may not be redefined by the user.

ALP3809: Missing ENDM

The preprocessor was reading the body of a macro definition when the end of the current input stream was reached; the macro definition was never closed with an ENDM keyword.

Recovery: Verify that unexpected conditional assembly results are not affecting the block structure of the program. A macro definition may not be closed in an input stream different from the one where it was started.

ALP3810: <ELSExx/ENDIF> without matching IFxxx

This message indicates that an ELSE or ENDIF construct was encountered prior to encountering an IF construct.

ALP3811: Reserved symbol "<identifier>" cannot be modified

An attempt was made through the -D command line option to alter the value of a predefined identifier. Unless documented otherwise, this is an illegal operation.

ALP3812: Symbol "<identifier>" already defined

An attempt was made to define a preprocessor macro name that conflicts with an existing identifier of an incompatible type.

ALP3813: <Text-Item> expected

This message is displayed when a preprocessor directive expected a text argument enclosed in angle brackets < >, but a valid argument was not supplied.

ALP3814: Invalid character in numeric constant

The assembler was parsing a numeric constant and an alphabetic character was encountered that was not a valid radix specifier or hexadecimal digit.

ALP3815: Illegal digit(s) for specified radix

A literal integer constant was qualified with radix override, but was specified using digits that are not valid for the given radix qualifier. For instance, use of the literal 1234Y is not legal because the Y suffix specifies a binary number and only the digits 0 and 1 are valid binary digits.

ALP3816: Expecting ">"

This message appears when the preprocessor is parsing a <text-item> and the end of line or end of file was encountered. A closing angle bracket (>) was expected.

ALP3817: Unterminated COMMENT

The preprocessor was scanning the body of a COMMENT directive when the end of the current input stream was encountered; the closing delimiter character originally specified in the COMMENT directive was never encountered.

Recovery: Block comments may not span across input files. Provide a closing delimiter as specified in the opening COMMENT directive.

ALP3896: Control character illegal in this context

A COMMENT preprocessor directive was encountered, and an attempt was made to scan for the next character which signifies the beginning and end of the comment text, but an unexpected non-printable control character was encountered instead.

Recovery: Only characters that are representable as printable text may be used to open and close a COMMENT sequence.

ALP3897: No closing quote

The preprocessor was parsing a quoted string literal, and the end of line or other terminator was encountered before the literal was ended with a closing quote character.

Recovery: Verify that only single quotes (´´) or double quotes ("") are used to open and close a string literal; they must be used in pairs. Verify that the ending quote character was not immediately preceded by another identical quote character; the assembler interprets this sequence as a request to insert a quote character into the string literal.

ALP3898: Unexpected end of file

The lexical analyzer portion of the assembler preprocessor was scanning within the body of a token (for example, a block comment), when the end of the input stream was encountered.

ALP3899: Unexpected terminator

The lexical analyzer portion of the assembler preprocessor was performing a text substitution operation as directed by one of the "!" or "&" operators, when the end of file or internal macro buffer was encountered.

Message Numbers 4000-4999: Warning Messages

Warning messages are issued when the assembler detects a questionable construct in the input stream. The condition is not severe enough to prevent generation of an object file, but the situation should be investigated and corrected since the output program may be incorrect.

ALP4201: Offset operator applied to register-indirect expression

An OFFSET operator was applied to a register-indirect expression. In MASM 5.10 emulation mode this does not cause conversion to an immediate expression; instead the register-indirect addressing mode attributes are retained, and the assembler applies the OFFSET operator to the displacement field, forcing it to have the size of the address offset. Applying the OFFSET operator to a register-indirect expression is illegal if the assembler is not operating under MASM 5.10 emulation.

ALP4202: Invalid type expression; cannot convert

Under MASM 5.10 emulation, a constant numeric expression may be used as the left-hand operand of the PTR operator. In the referenced expression, the left-hand operand of the PTR operator did not evaluate to a value suitable for use as the operand size of the right-hand operand. The operand size of the right-hand operator was not converted.

ALP4203: Type conversion operation has no effect

A type conversion operation involving the PTR operator was performed on an expression whose type cannot be modified. For example, the right operand of the PTR operator cannot be a register value.

ALP4401: Error closing listing file

An error occurred while attempting to close the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP4402: Error deleting listing file

An error occurred while attempting to delete the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP4501: Assuming NEAR distance for operand size

A CALL or JMP instruction was coded to pass control indirectly through a memory operand of indeterminate size. When operating in MASM 5.10 emulation mode, the memory operand is assumed to have the same size as address size of the segment containing the CALL or JMP instruction, and implies a target having NEAR distance. Recovery: The memory operand should be given an explicit size, regardless of whether or not the default address size and NEAR distance is the desired operation. This code will cause assembly errors if not assembled under MASM 5.10 emulation mode.

ALP4502: Can't ASSUME CS to a grouped segment

An attempt was made to ASSUME the CS register to a segment that was previously named in a GROUP directive. This implies that the CS register might have different values to access the same body of code at runtime. This is illegal, and the assembler altered the ASSUME operation to refer to the group containing the segment instead. Recovery: If running the assembler under MASM 5.10 emulation, change the ASSUME directive to refer to the group name containing the segment; otherwise, remove the ASSUME statement.

ALP4503: Operand size does not match instruction

This is a warning message that appears when an operand specifies a size that differs from the operand size of the instruction. In this case, the operand size is implied by the instruction itself, and an explicit operand size is not required. However, if an operand size is supplied, it must match the implied size or this warning will be issued.

ALP4504: [Constant] is immediate in MASM mode

This message indicates that a single expression coded as a constant value in square brackets [ ] is treated as though the brackets were not specified (when the assembler is operating in MASM emulation mode, which is the default). This warning is issued because brackets are required for an indirect memory expression when registers are involved, and the connotation is that the presence of brackets is required to force a memory reference, when in fact they are ignored. Recovery: Use a segment override (for example, DS:[1234h]) when an indirect memory reference to an absolute address is desired. As explained above, the presence of brackets shown in the example is not required, but they are preferred for readability. Note: A future release may provide an alternate mode of operation such that bracketed constant values will be treated as memory references; this warning message thus points out constructs that are incompatible with any future releases operating in this mode. Since the presence of brackets are currently redundant in this context (and indicate a possible programming error), it is recommended that they be removed.

ALP4505: Access to data through a code label

This warning occurs when an instruction attempts a memory access through a code label (a procedure name or a label followed by a colon). This is an invalid operation unless a type conversion is first performed on the expression containing the label.

ALP4506: Selected processor does not support this instruction

This message is issued under the same circumstances as message ALP3522, but has reduced severity when the assembler is operating under MASM emulation.

ALP4507: Only storing NEAR portion of FAR pointer

Within a data allocation directive, a variable was initialized to contain the address of a FAR code label or variable defined in another segment. However, the size of the variable being initialized is not large enough to hold the fully qualified address (both segment and offset) of the item, and only the offset portion was stored. Recovery: If the full address of the pointer is desired, then the size of the data item being initialized must be increased. Otherwise, the OFFSET operator should be used in the address expression to truncate the segment information and suppress this warning.

ALP4508: Operand size inferred from immediate value

When operating under MASM 5.10 emulation mode, the assembler allows an immediate value to determine the size of the memory operand to which it is applied if its magnitude exceeds that which will fit into a byte. In this case, it is assumed that the operation refers to a word-sized memory operand (2 bytes in USE16 segment, 4 bytes in a USE32 segment). If the magnitude of the immediate value is sufficiently small (less than 128), then the operation is ambiguous, and an error is generated because the assembler does not know whether to treat the memory operand as a byte or a word value. Recovery: An explicit size should be given to the memory operand. Code relying on this behavior will not assemble correctly if the assembler is not operating in MASM 5.10 emulation mode.

ALP4509: Operand size mismatch

One of the following conditions occurred:

• An attempt was made within a data allocation directive to initialize an item with an expression having an explicit and different size.
• A memory operand with an explicit size was used in conjunction with a register operand, but two operand sizes did not match. The register operand size overrides the size of the memory operand.
• A memory operand with an explicit size was used in conjunction with an address offset. The size of the memory operand and the size implied by the address size of the offset value did not match.

ALP4510: Truncation of significant bits in immediate value

One of the following conditions occurred:

• An operand expression was encoded into the instruction as an immediate value, but the magnitude of the numeric expression exceeded the number of bits required to store it in instruction encoding; the value was truncated to fit in the allotted space.

Since the assembler uses 32-bit arithmetic during expression processing, operations such as negation or logical inversion of small numeric quantities can result in values that require all 32 bits of precision.

• A relocatable immediate expression was converted to a smaller type, thus affecting the type of the relocation record generated for resolution by the linker. This could happen if an offset expression was forced into a byte sized storage space.

Recovery: Use the <type> PTR override to explicitly convert the expression to a value of the proper size.

ALP4512: Can't ASSUME CS to different segment or group; ignored

Within an open segment, an attempt was made to ASSUME the CS register to a different segment, or to a group not containing the currently opened segment. The operation was not allowed. Recovery: Remove the ASSUME statement, or adjust it so that it specifies the currently opened code segment or a group containing the segment.

ALP4513: Invalid mnemonic/operand combination

This message is issued under circumstances similar to that of message ALP3505. In this case an instruction encoding was found for the given mnemonic/operand combination, but the encoding is considered invalid when the assembler is not operating under this level of MASM emulation; thus this warning is issued.

ALP4514: No size for operand, assuming default

This message indicates that no operand size was given for the instruction, but the assembler was able to infer an operand size from the instruction itself. This message is only issued when the assembler is operating under MASM 5.10 emulation. In this mode, a default operand size is associated with certain processor mnemonics; this default value is used when no explicit operand size is given. Recovery: An explicit operand size should be given for the referenced expression because the assembler is automatically resolving a potentially dangerous ambiguity in its selection of a default operand size.

ALP4601: Error closing object file

An error occurred while attempting to close the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP4602: Error deleting object file

An error occurred while attempting to delete the referenced file. Recovery: Verify that no other processes are accessing the file, and that the file system is functioning correctly.

ALP4603: Missing END

The end of file was encountered but an END directive was never processed. All top-level assembler modules invoked from the command line must have an END directive as the last statement in the file. Files processed with the INCLUDE preprocessor directive should not contain an END statement.

ALP4701: Unterminated PROC

When the end of the source input stream was encountered, it was determined that a procedure was opened with a PROC directive, but never closed. Recovery: Any procedures opened with PROC must be closed within the same input stream using the ENDP directive.

ALP4702: Unterminated segment ""

When the end of the source input stream was encountered, it was determined that a segment was opened with a SEGMENT directive, but never closed. Recovery: Any segments opened with SEGMENT must be closed within the same input stream using the ENDS directive.

ALP4703: Unterminated structure or union

When the end of the source input stream was encountered, it was determined that a structure or union was opened with a STRUC/STRUCT or UNION directive , but never closed. Recovery: Any structure or union must be terminated using the ENDS directive.

ALP4704: Address size mismatch

The referenced address expression was used as a source operand, but the address size of the expression did not match the size of the target operand . An implicit conversion was applied to the address size of the referenced expression.

ALP4706: Processor mnemonic used as a label

This message is issued when a processor instruction mnemonic is used as an identifier. This condition is normally an error if the +Sk command line switch is turned off. Related Information:

• Sk - Control Use of Reserved Words as Labels

ALP4707: Alignment value not valid with current segment alignment

The referenced alignment factor was less than the alignment factor specified in the SEGMENT declaration containing the ALIGN statement. This condition is illegal because the assembler cannot guarantee that the linker will not invalidate the requested alignment when it exercises its right to position the entire segment according to the alignment factor given in the enclosing SEGMENT declaration. Note: This condition is allowed to exist as a warning under MASM 5.10 emulation for backward compatibility with existing source files. Recovery: Respecify either the aligment factor or the SEGMENT delaration so that the segment alignment is greater than or equal to any alignment factor requested therein.

ALP4708: Symbol redeclared relative to different segment

This message is issued under the same circumstances as message ALP3728, but has reduced severity when the assembler is operating under MASM emulation.

ALP4709: Label outside segment boundaries

This message is issued under the same circumstances as message ALP3713, but has reduced severity when the assembler is operating under MASM 5.10 emulation.

ALP4710: Identifier expected

This message is issued under the same circumstances as message ALP3731, but has reduced severity when the assembler is operating under MASM 5.10 emulation.

ALP4711: Attribute respecification ignored

An attempt was made in a directive to change an attribute that has already been specified. Once set, the attribute cannot be changed. If the attribute is respecified, it must match the existing setting or this warning will be issued.

ALP4712: Mismatch of segment address sizes in group

This message is issued under the same circumstances as message ALP3747, but has reduced severity when the assembler is operating under MASM 5.10 emulation.

ALP4713: Attribute mismatch during reopen of segment

This message is issued under the same circumstances as message ALP3729, but has reduced severity when the assembler is operating under MASM 5.10 emulation.

ALP4801: Identifier expected, condition is false

For compatibility with MASM, the IFDEF and IFNDEF preprocessor directives will accept a non-identifier token as an argument, but this warning is issued to indicate that the condition cannot be properly tested, and the result is always false. Recovery: Modify the argument so that it is a correctly formed identifier.

ALP4802: Extra data on line

This message appears under the same conditions as that of ALP3804, but for better compatibility with MASM the severity has been reduced from an error to a warning. This message will be issued if an IFDEF, IFNDEF, ELSEIFDEF, or ELSEIFNDEF directive contains extra data at the end of the line. Recovery: Remove the offending token(s) beginning at the referenced location.

ALP4803: Expecting ">"

This message appears when the preprocessor is parsing a <text-item> and the end of line or end of file was encountered. A closing angle bracket (>) was expected.

ALP4804: Expression expected, zero assumed

For compatibility with MASM, certain preprocessor directives that expect an expression operand will not issue an error if the operand is absent. This warning is issued instead to indicate that an implicit expression value of zero is assumed.

ALP4899: Illegal character

This message is issued by the text preprocessor when a character was encountered in the source stream that is not part of the valid execution character set. Recovery: This may cause undefined behaviors, and a text editor should be used to remove the offending character.

Message Numbers 5000-5999: Informational Messages

Informational messages may be requested with a command line option (see #M - Control Individual Messages or Groups) and provide the user with a variety of useful information. All informational messages are disabled by default.

ALP5001: Number of Errors :<number>

Informs the user of the number of error messages issued during the assembly.

ALP5002: Number of Warnings :<number>

Informs the user of the number of warning messages issued during the assembly.

ALP5003: Number of Symbols :<number>

This message indicates how many user identifiers were defined during the assembly.

ALP5101: Opened message output file "<file>"

This message indicates that the message output processor has opened and is prepared to write to the referenced file.

ALP5201: Operand is declared relative to "<identifier>"

This message indicates that the referenced relocatable expression is declared relative to the given segment or group name.

ALP5301: Assembler is on source pass <number>

This messages indicates that the assembler has begun processing the referenced pass through the input stream.

ALP5401: Closed listing output file "<file>"

This message indicates that the listing file processor has closed the referenced file.

ALP5402: Deleted listing output file "<file>"

This message indicates that the listing file processor has deleted the referenced file.

ALP5403: Opened listing output file "<file>"

This message indicates that the listing file processor has opened and is prepared to write to the referenced file.

ALP5501: Address size is <USE16/USE32>

This message provides information to supplement the occurrence of other related warning or error messages. The expression referenced by the message coordinates has inherited or has been assigned the address size given in the message text.

ALP5502: No size for operand, assuming default

This message indicates that no operand size was given for the instruction, but the assembler was able to infer an operand size from the instruction itself.

ALP5503: Instruction padded with NOP(s)

This message indicates that the assembler generated one or more NOP instructions to follow the object code generated for the referenced instruction. The instruction operand list contains a forward-referenced expression which forced the assembler to allow space for the longest possible instruction encoding on the first pass. The generation of NOP instructions may be avoided by qualifying the forward reference with a <type> PTR override.

ALP5504: Operand size is <number>

This is an informational message that typically accompanies other errors or warnings dealing with operand size problems. This message is issued for every operand expression involved in the condition that caused the associated error or warning message, and indicates the operand size of the referenced expression.

ALP5505: Segment override has no effect

This message is issued when a segment override operator was used in an expression, but the override was discarded because the offset operator was applied.

ALP5506: Generated ASSUME CS:<signal>

This message is issued when an attempt is made to generate code in an open segment for which there is no valid ASSUME CS in effect. The assembler automatically generates an ASSUME statement such that the CS register is associated with the currently opened segment or with the group containing that segment if one exists.

ALP5601: Closed object output file "<file>"

This message indicates that the object file processor has closed the referenced file.

ALP5602: Deleted object output file "<file>"

This message indicates that the object file processor has deleted the referenced file.

ALP5603: Opened object output file "<file>"

This message indicates that the object file processor has opened and is prepared to write to the referenced file.

ALP5701: Assembly terminated by .ABORT

The .ABORT directive was used to terminate the assembler at the referenced location.

ALP5702: Address size assumed to be <USE16/USE32>

This messages indicates that the referenced identifier was an external code label declared outside of segment boundaries, and was assumed to be defined in an external segment having the referenced address size.

ALP5703: Structure redefinition: "<identifier>"

This message indicates that the current structure definition is replacing a previous definition of the same name.

ALP5704: Declaration sets <attribute> = <keyword>

This message describes the attribute that is mismatched in a segment redeclaration.

ALP5705: <directive> outside of segment boundaries

This message appears when an external declaration (COMM or EXTRN) appears outside of any enclosing segment.

If an external declaration is not enclosed in a segment definition that describes how the external symbol is ultimately defined, the assembler is deprived of segment attribute information; in particular, USE16 versus USE32. This could cause the assembler to generate incorrect object code, and may also cause linker errors. Recovery: Place the external declaration within a segment definition that correctly reflects the segment definition in the external module where the symbol is defined.

ALP5801: Begin skipping tokens

This message indicates that the results of a conditional assembly directive were evaluated to be false, and that the preprocessor has begun discarding tokens at the referenced location. No tokens will be returned to the parser until an appropriate ELSE or ENDIF condition is encountered.

ALP5802: Finished skipping tokens

This message indicates that a false conditional block was ended with an appropriate ELSE or ENDIF construct. The preprocessor will begin returning tokens to the parser after the referenced location.

ALP5803: Closed source file "<file>"

This message indicates that the preprocessor has closed the referenced file.

ALP5804: Opened source file "<file>"

This message indicates that the preprocessor has opened and is prepared to read from the referenced file.

ALP5805: Macro redefinition: "<macro-name>"

This message indicates that the current macro definition is replacing a previous definition of the same name.

ALP5806: Opened INCLUDE file "<file>"

This message indicates that the preprocessor has opened and is prepared to read from the referenced include file.

ALP5807: Closed INCLUDE file "<file>"

This message indicates that the preprocessor has closed the referenced include file.

ALP5901: Closed response file "<file>"

This message indicates that the command line processor has closed the referenced file.

ALP5902: Opened response file "<file>"

This message indicates that the command line processor has opened and is prepared to read from the referenced file.

Return Codes

When ALP completes, it passes a return code back to the program that invoked it. This return code shows whether ALP completed successfully or with an error. The return codes are:

• 0 Normal program completion.
• 1 User-specified file not found.
• 2 Unexpected system error.
• 3 Terminated by user or operating system.
• 4 Syntax errors in input file.
• 5 Command line usage error.
• 6 Internal sanity check failure.
• 7 Error accessing ALP messages file.

Notices

October 1997

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS". WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in your country.

Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative. (C) Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1995-1997. All rights reserved. Note to U.S. Government Users -- Documentation related to restricted rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

The #Processor Reference portion of this manual contains information reprinted with permission from Intel Corporation.

Disclaimers

References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.

Trademarks

The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:

IBM

Operating System/2

OS/2

Presentation Manager

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

Microsoft - Microsoft Corporation

Pentium - Intel Corporation Pentium Pro - Intel Corporation

UNIX - UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.